Manual Well Plan

Using WELLPLAN
R2003.11.0.1
copyright 2004 by Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 162163, Rev. A, V2003.11 August 2004
2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation
Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone:713-839-2000
Help desk: 713-839-2200
FAX: 713-839-2401
Internet: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
3DFS, 3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3DView, 3D Surveillance, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir
Surveillance, ADC, Advanced Data Transfer, ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Asset
Performance, AssetView, Atomic Meshing, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat, COMPASS, Corporate Data Archiver,
Corporate Data Store, Data Manager, DataStar, DBPlot, Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionSpace,
DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace AssetView, DecisionSpace Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace Decision
Management Systems(DMS), DecisionSpace PowerGrid, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace
PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace Reservoir, DecisionSpace TracPlanner, DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion,
DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Express3, DepthTeam Extreme, DepthTeam
Interpreter, Desktop Navigator, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Discovery Asset,
Drill-to-the-Earth Model, Drillability Suite, Drilling Desktop, DrillModel, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management,
Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube, EDM, eLandmark, Engineers Data Model, Engineer's Desktop,
Engineers Link, EOS-PAK, Executive Assistant, ezFault, ezSurface, ezTracker, FastTrack, FieldWorks, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GeoProbe, GeoProbe GF
DataServer, GeoProbe Integrated, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus, GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I
2

Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design, Landmark logo and Design, Landmark Decision
Center, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, Magic Earth, MagicDesk,
MagicStation, MagicVision, Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MyLandmark, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks, OpenWorks Well File,
PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus, Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack
ESP, PowerCalculator, PowerExplorer, PowerHub, Power Interpretation, PowerJournal, PowerModel, PowerSection,
PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX
MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF, QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE,
RAYMAP, RTOC, Real Freedom, Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real
Time Knowledge Company, Real-Time Operations Center, Real Time Production Surveillance, Real Time
Surveillance, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace, SeisVision,
SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisXchange, Sierra, Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, Spatializer, SpecDecomp,
StrataAmp, StrataMap, Stratamodel, StrataSim, StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace,
TERAS, Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, TracPlanner, Trend Form Gridding,
Turbo Synthetics, VIP, VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid
Refinement, VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Well Seismic Fusion, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner,
Wellbore Planner Connect, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN, WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, You're in Control. Experience
the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics
Corporation or Magic Earth, Inc.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Contacting Support
Landmark operates Technical Assistance Centers (TACs) in Houston, Texas, Leatherhead, UK
and Perth, Australia. Additional support is provided through district support offices around the
world. If problems cannot be resolved at the district level, our escalation team is called to resolve
your incidents quickly.
Support information is always available on the Landmark Graphics Support internet page located
at:- http:\\www.lgc.com\customersupport.
Technical Assistance Centers
North America
7:30 am - 5:30 pm Central Standard Time
Monday - Friday, excluding holidays
713-839-2200 (Houston, TX, USA)
Toll Free 1-877-435-7542
(1-877-HELP-LGC)
Fax: 713-839-2168 (Houston, TX)
Fax: 512-292-2200, 2220 (Austin, TX)
Fax: 907-275-2655 (Anchorage, AK)
Fax: 303-796-0807 (Denver, CO)
Fax: 403-262-1929 (Calgary, Canada)
Email: support@lgc.com
Latin America
(Spanish, Portuguese, English)
Local normal business hours
1-713-839-3405 (Houston,TX,USA)
Fax: 713-839-3646
Email: soporte@lgc.com
Toll Free from:
Argentina: 0800-800-5263
Brazil: 0800-891-0837
Chile: 800-201-898
Colombia: 01800-915-4743
Mexico: 001-888-438-1296
Peru: 0800-51634
Trinidad: 1-888-438-1296
Venezuela: 0-800-526-3627
Toll Free from local area:
Ecuador (Quito) (02)226-1908
Europe, Africa, Middle East
8:00 am - 5:30 pm Local Time
44-1372-868686 (Leatherhead, UK)
Fax: 44-1372-868601 (Leatherhead, UK)
Fax: 44-1224-723260 (Aberdeen, UK)
Email: eame_helpdesk@lgc.com
Asia, Pacific
Monday-Friday, excluding holidays
61-8-9481-4488 (Perth, Australia)
Toll-free 1-800-448-488
Fax: 61-8-9481-1580
Email: apsupport@lgc.com
Toll-Free from:
China: 10-800-6100-253
Indonesia: 001-803-61284
Japan: 00531-61-0021
Malaysia 1800-803-687
New Zealand 0800-400-555
Philippines 1800-1611-0207
South Korea 00308-61-0046
Taiwan 00801-61-1350
Thailand 001-800-611-2784
Toll Free from local area:
Vietnam: 84-8-9191901
District Support Offices
Republic de Angola (Luanda)
1-817-493-5900
Fax: 1-817-493-560
Argentina (Buenos Aires)
9:00 am - 6:00 pm
54-11-4312-8411
Toll Free 0800-800-5263
Fax: 54-11-4311-9566
Australia (Perth)
61-8-9481-4488
Toll Free 1800-448-488
Fax: 61-8-9481-1580
Brazil (Rio de Janeiro)
8:00 am - 5:30 pm
55-21-3974-4000 or
Toll Free 0800-891-0837
Fax: 55-21-3974-4002
Brunei (Bandar Seri Bagawan)
67-3-233-5319
Canada (Calgary)
7:30 am - 5:30 pm Mountain Time
Toll Free 1-877-435-7542
(1-877-HELP-LGC)
Fax: 403-262-1929 (Calgary, Canada)
Fax: 713-830-2168 (Houston, TX)
Email: support@lgc.com
Chile (TAO TAC, Houston, Texas)
Toll Free 800-201-898
Fax: 1-713-839-3646
Colombia (Bogota)
8:00 am - 5:00 pm
57-1-326-4000-57-1-326-6710
Toll Free 01800-915-4743
Fax: 57-1-326-6717
Ecuador (Quito)
8:00 am - 5:00 pm
59-32-226-1844 (ext 146)
Toll Free from Quito (02)226-1908
Fax: 59-32-226-2590
Egypt (Cairo)
Local Business Days, excluding holidays
20-2-517-3095
(ask for Landmark Technical Support)
Fax: 20-2-353-2608
India (New Delhi)
91-11-622-1885
(c/o Samit Enterprises)
Fax: 91-11-647-9246
Email:
Indonesia (Jakarta)
62-21-3003-9039 or
Toll Free 011-803-61284
Fax: 62-21-3003-9088
Malaysia (Kuala Lumpur)
603-2164-1121 or
Toll Free 1800-803-687
Fax: 603-2164-1135
Mexico (Reynosa)
8:00 am - 6:00 pm

52-555-208-3533
52-555-208-3868
Toll Free 001-888-438-1296
Local Office Fax: 52-555-514-7646
Support Fax: 1-713-839-3646
New Zealand (New Plymouth)
61-6-755-2318
Toll Free 0800-400-555
Fax: 64-6-755-2407
Nigeria (Lagos)
234-1-262-0765
Fax: 234-1-262-0769
People's Republic of China (Beijing)
86-10-8486-4501
Toll Free 10-800-6100-253
Other Phone: 10-800-810-0209
Fac: 86-10-8486-4819
Email bjsupport@lgc.com
or apsupport@lgc.com
Peru (Lima)
Toll Free 0800-51634
Fax: 1-713-830-3646
Russia (Moscow)
7-095-755-8300
Fax: 7-095-755-8301
Taiwan
Toll Free 00801-61-1350
Fax:
Thailand (Bangkok)
8:00 am - 5:00pm Local Time
66-2-278-8100
Toll Free 001-800-611-2784
Fax: 66-2-278-8199
Trinidad & Tobago (TAO TAC, Houston, TX)
(Houston, TX)
Toll Free: 1-888-438-1296
Fax: 1-713-839-3646
United Arab Emirates (Dubai)
+971-4-3313142
Fax: +971-4-3315837
Email: gulf_support@lgc.com
Helpful internet links are shown below.
Venezuela (Caracas)
8:00 am - 5:00 pm
58-212-953-0774
Toll Free 0-800-526-3627
Fax: 58-212-952-3845
Vietnam (Ho Chi Minh City)
84-8-910-1901
Toll Free 84-8-9191901
Fax: 84-8-910-1902
Name Website Address
Landmark Graphics home page http://www.lgc.com
Landmark Graphics FTP Site ftp://ftp.lgc.com
Oracle home page http://www.oracle.com
FLEXlm license management software
home page
http://www.macrovision.com/products/
legacy_products/flexlm/index.html
Microsoft SQL Server home page http://www.microsoft.com/sql/default.asp
Adobe Acrobat Reader http://www.adobe.com
Microsoft MSDE http://www.microsoft.com/sql/default.asp
Landmark WELLPLAN Training Manual
August 2004 Contents ix
Contents
Contacting Support ............................................................................................................. 3
Introduction....................................................................................................................... 25
What is WELLPLAN? ................................................................................................. 25
Training Course and Manual Overview ....................................................................... 25
Licensing ................................................................................................................ 26
The Engineers Data Model (EDM) Database.................................................. 27
Overview............................................................................................................................. 27
Logging In To the Database................................................................................................ 28
Starting WELLPLAN .................................................................................................. 28
Describing the Data Structure............................................................................................. 29
Associated Components ............................................................................................... 32
Associated with Designs: ....................................................................................... 32
Associated with Cases: .......................................................................................... 33
Copying and Pasting Associated Items .................................................................. 33
Rules for Associating Components ........................................................................ 34
Common Data ..................................................................................................................... 35
Data Locking....................................................................................................................... 36
How Locking Works .............................................................................................. 36
Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM) .............................................................................. 38
Concurrent Use of Same Data By Multiple Users.............................................................. 39
How the Well Explorer Handles Concurrent Users ..................................................... 39
Same User on Same Computer .............................................................................. 40
Multiple Users, Different Computers .................................................................... 40
Reload Notification ...................................................................................................... 40
Importing and Exporting Data ............................................................................................ 42
Importing Data into the EDM Database ...................................................................... 42
Importing EDM Well Data from Another Database .............................................. 42
Importing a DEX File Into the Database ............................................................... 43
Exporting Data From the EDM Database .................................................................... 45
Exporting Data in XML Format ............................................................................ 45
Exporting Well Data in DEX Format .................................................................... 46
Using Datums in EDM....................................................................................................... 48
Definition of Terms Associated With Datums ............................................................ 48
Project Properties ................................................................................................... 48
Well Properties ...................................................................................................... 48
Design Properties ................................................................................................... 50
Setting Up Datums for Your Design ............................................................................ 50
WELLPLAN Training Manual Landmark
x Contents August 2004
Changing the Datum .................................................................................................... 51
Using the Well Explorer .............................................................................................. 55
Overview............................................................................................................................. 55
Describing the Well Explorer ............................................................................................. 56
Components of the Well Explorer ............................................................................... 57
The Tree ................................................................................................................. 57
Associated Data Components ................................................................................ 57
The Recent Bar ............................................................................................................ 60
Displaying/Hiding the Well Explorer and Recent Bar ................................................ 60
Refreshing the Well Explorer ...................................................................................... 60
Positioning the Well Explorer ...................................................................................... 61
Tracking Data Modifications ....................................................................................... 61
Drag and Drop Rules ................................................................................................... 62
Well Explorer Right-Click Menus ............................................................................... 63
Working at the Database Level .................................................................................... 64
New Company (Database Level) ........................................................................... 64
Instant Case (Database Level) ............................................................................... 65
Export (Database Level) ........................................................................................ 66
Import (Database Level) ........................................................................................ 66
Properties (Database Level) ................................................................................... 66
Well Name (Database Level) ................................................................................. 67
Wellbore Name (Database Level) .......................................................................... 68
Refresh (Database Level) ....................................................................................... 68
Expand All (Database Level) ................................................................................. 68
Collapse All (Database Level) ............................................................................... 68
Working at the Company Level ................................................................................... 68
New Project (Company Level) .............................................................................. 69
New Attachment (Company Level) ....................................................................... 70
Paste (Company Level) .......................................................................................... 70
Rename (Company Level) ..................................................................................... 70
Delete (Company Level) ........................................................................................ 70
Export (Company Level) ....................................................................................... 71
Properties (Company Level) .................................................................................. 71
Expand All (Company Level) ................................................................................ 74
Collapse All (Company Level) .............................................................................. 74
Working at the Project Level ....................................................................................... 75
New Site (Project Level) ........................................................................................ 76
New Attachment (Project Level) ........................................................................... 76
Copy (Project Level) .............................................................................................. 76
Paste (Project Level) .............................................................................................. 76
Rename (Project Level) ......................................................................................... 77
Delete (Project Level) ............................................................................................ 77
Export (Project Level) ........................................................................................... 77
Properties (Project Level) ...................................................................................... 77
August 2004 Contents xi
Expand All (Project Level) .................................................................................... 79
Collapse All (Project Level) .................................................................................. 79
Working at the Site Level ............................................................................................ 79
New Well (Site Level) ........................................................................................... 80
New Attachment (Site Level) ................................................................................ 81
Copy (Site Level) ................................................................................................... 81
Paste (Site Level) ................................................................................................... 81
Rename (Site Level) .............................................................................................. 81
Delete (Site Level) ................................................................................................. 81
Export (Site Level) ................................................................................................. 81
Properties (Site Level) ........................................................................................... 81
Expand All (Site Level) ......................................................................................... 84
Collapse All (Site Level) ....................................................................................... 84
Working at the Well Level ........................................................................................... 85
New Wellbore (Well Level) .................................................................................. 85
New Attachment (Well Level) ............................................................................... 86
Copy (Well Level) ................................................................................................. 86
Paste (Well Level) ................................................................................................. 86
Rename (Well Level) ............................................................................................. 86
Delete (Well Level) ............................................................................................... 87
Export (Well Level) ............................................................................................... 87
Properties (Well Level) .......................................................................................... 87
Expand All (Well Level) ........................................................................................ 92
Collapse All (Well Level) ...................................................................................... 92
Working at the Wellbore Level ................................................................................... 92
New Design (Wellbore Level) ............................................................................... 93
New Design/Case from OpenWells ....................................................................... 94
New Attachment (Wellbore Level) ........................................................................ 94
Cut (Wellbore Level) ............................................................................................. 94
Copy (Wellbore Level) .......................................................................................... 94
Paste (Wellbore Level) .......................................................................................... 94
Rename (Wellbore Level) ...................................................................................... 94
Delete (Wellbore Level) ........................................................................................ 95
Export (Wellbore Level) ........................................................................................ 95
Properties (Wellbore Level) ................................................................................... 95
Expand All (Wellbore Level) ................................................................................ 97
Collapse All (Wellbore Level) ............................................................................... 97
Working at the Design Level ....................................................................................... 98
New Case (Design Level) ...................................................................................... 98
New Attachment (Design Level) ........................................................................... 99
Copy (Design Level) .............................................................................................. 99
Paste (Design Level) .............................................................................................. 99
Rename (Design Level) ......................................................................................... 99
Delete (Design Level) ............................................................................................ 99
Export (Design Level) ........................................................................................... 99
Properties (Design Level) ...................................................................................... 100
xii Contents August 2004
Expand All (Design Level) .................................................................................... 102
Collapse All (Design Level) .................................................................................. 102
Working at the Case Level (WELLPLAN Only) ........................................................ 102
Open (Case Level) ................................................................................................. 103
Close (Case Level) ................................................................................................. 103
Clear Active Workspace (Case Level) ................................................................... 103
New Attachment (Case Level) ............................................................................... 103
Copy (Case Level) ................................................................................................. 103
Paste (Case Level) ................................................................................................. 104
Rename (Case Level) ............................................................................................. 104
Delete (Case Level) ............................................................................................... 104
Export (Case Level) ............................................................................................... 104
Properties (Case Level) .......................................................................................... 104
Working With Design- and Case-Associated Components ......................................... 108
About Associated Items and Well Explorer .......................................................... 108
Working With Catalogs ............................................................................................... 110
Creating a New Catalog ......................................................................................... 111
Copying a Catalog ................................................................................................. 112
Deleting a Catalog ................................................................................................. 112
Exporting a Catalog ............................................................................................... 112
Importing a Catalog ............................................................................................... 113
Opening a Catalog ................................................................................................. 113
Saving a Catalog .................................................................................................... 113
Closing a Catalog ................................................................................................... 114
Catalog Properties Dialog ...................................................................................... 114
Concepts and Tools ...................................................................................................... 117
Overview............................................................................................................................. 117
Accessing Online Documentation and Tools...................................................................... 118
Using the Main Window..................................................................................................... 119
Using the Well Explorer .............................................................................................. 119
Using the Menu Bar ............................................................................................................ 120
Working With Units............................................................................................................ 122
Configuring Unit Systems ........................................................................................... 122
Converting MD to TVD, or TVD to MD ..................................................................... 123
Converting Field or Cell Units ..................................................................................... 123
Defining Tubular Temperature Deration, Grade, Material and Class ................................ 125
Temperature Deration .................................................................................................. 125
Material ........................................................................................................................ 125
Tubular Grades ............................................................................................................ 126
Class ............................................................................................................................. 127
Using Halliburton Cementing Tables ................................................................................. 129
Configuring Sound Effects ................................................................................................. 130
Using the Online Help ........................................................................................................ 131
Using Tool Bars .................................................................................................................. 132
August 2004 Contents xiii
Enabling Toolbars ........................................................................................................ 132
Using the Standard Toolbar ......................................................................................... 133
Using the Module Toolbar ........................................................................................... 133
Using the Graphics Toolbar ......................................................................................... 134
Using the Wizard Toolbar ............................................................................................ 134
Using Wellpath Plots and Schematics ................................................................................ 135
Using Well Schematics ................................................................................................ 135
Viewing Wellpath Plots ............................................................................................... 136
Accessing Wellpath Plots ............................................................................................ 136
Printing and Print Preview.................................................................................................. 137
Configuring Plot Properties ................................................................................................ 138
Changing Curve Line Properties .................................................................................. 138
Using Freeze Line .................................................................................................. 139
Using the Plot Properties Tabs ..................................................................................... 140
Accessing the Plot Properties Tabs ........................................................................ 140
Changing the Scale ................................................................................................ 141
Configuring the Axis ............................................................................................. 141
Changing the Grid .................................................................................................. 142
Changing the Axis Labels ...................................................................................... 143
Changing the Font .................................................................................................. 143
Changing the Line Styles ....................................................................................... 144
Using Data Markers ............................................................................................... 145
Configuring the Legend ......................................................................................... 146
Changing the Plot Background Color .................................................................... 147
Using Libraries ................................................................................................................... 148
What is a Library? ........................................................................................................ 148
Using String Libraries .................................................................................................. 148
Creating or Deleting a String Library Entry .......................................................... 148
Retrieving a String From the String Library .......................................................... 149
Using Fluid Libraries ................................................................................................... 150
Importing, Exporting, Deleting, and Renaming a Fluid Library Entry ................. 150
Exporting a Library ...................................................................................................... 151
Using Workspaces .............................................................................................................. 152
What is a Workspace ................................................................................................... 152
Applying a Workspace ................................................................................................. 152
Configuring a User Workspace .................................................................................... 153
Using a Window .................................................................................................... 153
Using Window Panes ............................................................................................. 154
Using Tabs ............................................................................................................. 155
Saving the User Workspace Configuration ........................................................... 157
Using Data Status Tooltips and Status Messages ............................................................... 158
Configuring Tool Tips and Field Descriptions ................................................................... 159
Describing the Case Using the Case Menu..................................................... 161
Overview............................................................................................................................. 161
xiv Contents August 2004
Entering Case Data ............................................................................................................. 162
Defining the Hole Section Geometry ........................................................................... 162
Hole Section Editor Menu ..................................................................................... 163
Defining a Work String ................................................................................................ 163
Managing Wellpath Data ............................................................................................. 166
Importing Wellpath Files ....................................................................................... 166
Entering Wellpath Data ......................................................................................... 167
Setting Wellpath Options ....................................................................................... 168
Viewing Wellpaths w/Tortuosity ........................................................................... 168
Viewing Wellpath w/Interpolation ........................................................................ 169
Defining the Active Fluid and Fluid Properties ........................................................... 169
Defining Drilling Fluids ......................................................................................... 169
Specify Circulating System Equipment ....................................................................... 171
Specifying Circulating System for Cementing Analysis ....................................... 172
Specifying Pore Pressure Data ..................................................................................... 173
Specifying Fracture Gradient Data .............................................................................. 173
Specifying Geothermal Gradient Data ......................................................................... 174
Defining String Eccentricity ........................................................................................ 175
Torque Drag Analysis................................................................................................... 177
Overview............................................................................................................................. 177
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 178
Introducing Torque Drag Analysis ..................................................................................... 181
Starting Torque Drag Analysis .................................................................................... 181
Available Analysis Modes ........................................................................................... 182
Defining the Case Data ....................................................................................................... 184
Defining Operating Parameters .......................................................................................... 185
Specifying Weight Indicator Corrections, Analytical Models and Reporting of Mechanical
Limitations ................................................................................................................... 185
Enabling Sheave Friction Corrections ................................................................... 185
Why Use Bending Stress Magnification Factor? ................................................... 186
Why Use the Stiff String Model? .......................................................................... 186
Including Viscous Drag Calculations .................................................................... 187
Specifying Multiple Fluids or Surface Pressure .......................................................... 187
How does Fluid Flow Change the Forces and Stresses on the Workstring? ......... 188
How Does Surface Pressure Change the Forces And Stresses On the Workstring? 189
Using Standoff Devices ............................................................................................... 189
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction Using Field Data........................................................ 191
Starting the Calibrate Friction Analysis Mode ............................................................ 191
Recording Actual Load Data ....................................................................................... 192
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction ............................................................................. 192
Predicting Maximum Measured Weight and Torque ......................................................... 194
Starting Drag Chart Analysis ....................................................................................... 194
Defining Operating Conditions and the Analysis Depth Interval ................................ 194
Advanced Options .................................................................................................. 195
August 2004 Contents xv
Analyzing Drag Chart Results ..................................................................................... 196
Tension Point Chart ............................................................................................... 196
Torque Point Chart ................................................................................................. 197
Using the Sensitivity Plot ...................................................................................... 198
Analyzing Critical Measured Depths.................................................................................. 200
Start Normal Analysis .................................................................................................. 200
Defining Operating Conditions .................................................................................... 201
Analyzing Normal Analysis Results ............................................................................ 201
Analyzing Normal Analysis Results Using Plots .................................................. 202
Using Tables to Analyze Results ........................................................................... 206
Analyzing Results Using Reports .......................................................................... 208
Analysis Mode Methodology.............................................................................................. 209
Normal Analysis .......................................................................................................... 209
Calibrate Friction Analysis .......................................................................................... 211
Drag Chart Analysis ..................................................................................................... 212
Top Down Analysis ..................................................................................................... 214
Supporting Information and Calculations........................................................................... 217
Additional Side Force Due to Buckling ....................................................................... 217
Sinusoidal Buckling Mode ..................................................................................... 217
Helical Buckling Mode .......................................................................................... 217
Axial Force .................................................................................................................. 218
Buoyancy Method .................................................................................................. 219
Pressure Area Method ............................................................................................ 219
Bending Stress Magnification (BSM) .......................................................................... 220
Buoyed Weight ............................................................................................................ 221
Critical Buckling Forces .............................................................................................. 222
Straight Model Calculations .................................................................................. 223
Curvilinear Model .................................................................................................. 223
Loading and Unloading Models ............................................................................ 224
Drag Force Calculations .............................................................................................. 226
Fatigue Calculations .................................................................................................... 228
Establish A Fatigue Endurance Limit For The Pipe .............................................. 229
Derate The Fatigue Endurance Limit For Tension ................................................ 229
Friction Factors ............................................................................................................ 232
Models ......................................................................................................................... 233
Pipe Wall Thickness Modification Due to Pipe Class ................................................. 233
Sheave Friction ............................................................................................................ 234
Side Force for Soft String Model ................................................................................. 235
Soft String Model ......................................................................................................... 237
Stiff String Model ........................................................................................................ 237
Stress ............................................................................................................................ 239
Von Mises Stress ................................................................................................... 239
Radial Stress .......................................................................................................... 240
Transverse Shear Stress ......................................................................................... 240
Hoop Stress ............................................................................................................ 240
Torsional Stress ...................................................................................................... 240
xvi Contents August 2004
Bending Stress ....................................................................................................... 240
Buckling Stress ...................................................................................................... 240
Axial Stress ............................................................................................................ 241
Stretch .......................................................................................................................... 242
Stretch due to axial load ......................................................................................... 242
Stretch due to buckling .......................................................................................... 242
Stretch due to ballooning ....................................................................................... 243
Tortuosity ..................................................................................................................... 244
Torque .......................................................................................................................... 244
Twist ............................................................................................................................ 246
Viscous Drag ................................................................................................................ 247
References........................................................................................................................... 250
General ......................................................................................................................... 250
Bending Stress Magnification Factor .......................................................................... 250
Buckling ....................................................................................................................... 250
Fatigue ......................................................................................................................... 251
Sheave Friction ............................................................................................................ 251
Side Force Calculations ............................................................................................... 251
Stiff String Model ........................................................................................................ 252
Hydraulics Analysis...................................................................................................... 253
Overview............................................................................................................................. 253
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 254
Introducing Hydraulic Analysis.......................................................................................... 257
Starting Hydraulics Analysis ....................................................................................... 257
Optimizing Bit Hydraulics.................................................................................................. 261
Using Graphical Analysis Mode .................................................................................. 261
Entering Pump Specifications ................................................................................ 261
Analyzing Results .................................................................................................. 262
Numerical Optimization .............................................................................................. 269
Determining the Minimum Flow Rate................................................................................ 272
Starting the Hole Cleaning Operational Analysis ........................................................ 272
Entering Analysis Data ................................................................................................ 273
Analyzing Results ........................................................................................................ 273
Analyzing Results Using Plots .............................................................................. 273
Analyzing Results Using the Operational Report .................................................. 276
Determining the Maximum Flow Rate ............................................................................... 277
Starting Annular Velocity Analysis Mode ................................................................... 277
Defining Pump Rates ................................................................................................... 278
Analyzing Results Using Tables ............................................................................ 280
Determining the Bit Nozzle Sizes....................................................................................... 282
August 2004 Contents xvii
Starting the Pressure: Pump Rate Range Analysis Mode ............................................ 282
Defining the Pump Rate Range ................................................................................... 282
Specifying the Nozzle Configuration .......................................................................... 284
Specifying Depths to Calculated ECD ......................................................................... 285
Using the Pressure Loss Plot ................................................................................. 286
Using the Pressure Loss Report ............................................................................. 287
Fine Tuning Hydraulics ...................................................................................................... 288
Starting Pressure Pump Rate Fixed Analysis Mode .................................................... 288
Defining the Pump Rate to Analyze ............................................................................ 288
Calculating a Tripping Schedule......................................................................................... 293
Starting Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule Analysis ....................................................... 293
Defining Analysis Constraints ..................................................................................... 293
Using Reports to Analyze Results ......................................................................... 294
Analyzing Pressures and ECDs While Tripping................................................................. 296
Starting Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD Analysis Mode ............................................. 296
Defining Operations Constraints ................................................................................. 296
Using Plots to Analyze Results .............................................................................. 297
Using Reports to Analyze Results ......................................................................... 298
Backreaming Rate (Maximum) Calculation ................................................................ 300
Bingham Plastic Rheology Model ............................................................................... 300
Bit Hydraulic Power .................................................................................................... 304
Bit Pressure Loss Calculations .................................................................................... 305
Derivations for PV, YP, 0-Sec Gel and Fann Data ...................................................... 305
ECD Calculations ........................................................................................................ 306
Graphical Analysis Calculations .................................................................................. 307
Hole Cleaning Methodology and Calculations ............................................................ 307
Bit Impact Force .......................................................................................................... 314
Nozzle Velocity ........................................................................................................... 315
Optimization Planning Calculations ............................................................................ 315
Optimization Well Site Calculations ........................................................................... 316
Power Law Rheology Model ....................................................................................... 319
Pressure Loss Analysis Calculations ........................................................................... 324
Pump Power Calculations ............................................................................................ 325
Pump Pressure Calculations ......................................................................................... 326
Shear Rate and Shear Stress Calculations .................................................................... 326
Swab/Surge Calculations ............................................................................................. 327
Tool Joint Pressure Loss Calculations ......................................................................... 329
Weight Up Calculations ............................................................................................... 330
References........................................................................................................................... 331
General ......................................................................................................................... 331
xviii Contents August 2004
Bingham Plastic Model ................................................................................................ 331
Coiled Tubing .............................................................................................................. 331
Hole Cleaning .............................................................................................................. 331
Herschel Bulkley Model .............................................................................................. 332
Optimization Well Site ................................................................................................ 332
Power Law Model ........................................................................................................ 332
Rheology Thermal Effects ........................................................................................... 332
Surge Swab .................................................................................................................. 333
Tool Joint Pressure Loss .............................................................................................. 333
Well Control Analysis................................................................................................... 335
Overview............................................................................................................................. 335
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 336
Introducing Well Control Analysis..................................................................................... 338
Starting Well Control Analysis .................................................................................... 338
Calculating the Expected Influx Volume............................................................................ 341
Starting Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode ....................................................... 341
Specify Choke and Kill Line Use ................................................................................ 341
Defining the Circulating Temperature Profile ............................................................. 342
Determining the Type of Kick ..................................................................................... 343
Estimating Influx Volume ........................................................................................... 344
Influx Volume Estimation Results Tab ................................................................. 347
Using Plots ............................................................................................................. 348
Circulating the Kick............................................................................................................ 349
Specifying Kill Method, and Choke/Kill Line Data .................................................... 349
Specify Choke and Kill Line Data ......................................................................... 349
Select Kill Method and Enter Operational Data .................................................... 350
Specify Kill Rate and Kick Data .................................................................................. 350
Using Plots ............................................................................................................. 351
Animation .............................................................................................................. 357
Generating a Kill Sheet....................................................................................................... 359
Specify Kill Method, Operational Data, Slow Pumps and Choke/Kill Line Use ........ 359
Specify Choke and Kill Line Data ......................................................................... 359
Selecting Kill Method and Entering Operational Data .......................................... 359
Specifying Slow Pump Data .................................................................................. 360
Entering Kill Sheet Data .............................................................................................. 360
Specifying Kick Analysis Parameters .................................................................... 360
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 362
Reports ................................................................................................................... 362
Analysis Mode Methodology.............................................................................................. 364
August 2004 Contents xix
General Assumptions and Terminology ...................................................................... 364
Initial Influx Volume ............................................................................................. 364
Influx Properties Assumptions ............................................................................... 364
Influx Annular Volume and Height ....................................................................... 365
Choke Pressure and Influx Position ....................................................................... 365
Kill Methods .......................................................................................................... 365
Expected Influx Volume .............................................................................................. 366
Kick Tolerance ............................................................................................................. 367
Kill Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 371
Allowable Kick Volume Calculations ......................................................................... 372
Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate Calculations ............................................... 372
Gas Compressibility ..................................................................................................... 373
Influx Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or After Pump Shutdown ............. 376
Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks ................................................................... 380
Kick Classification ....................................................................................................... 385
Kick While Drilling ............................................................................................... 385
Kick After Pump Shutdown ................................................................................... 386
Swab Kick .............................................................................................................. 386
Kick After Pump Shut Down Influx Estimation .......................................................... 386
Kick While Drilling Influx Estimation ........................................................................ 389
Kill Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 392
Pressure at Depth of Interest ........................................................................................ 396
Pressure Loss Analysis ................................................................................................ 396
Steady State Circulation Temperature Model .............................................................. 397
Viscosity and Compressibility of Methane .................................................................. 400
References........................................................................................................................... 403
General ......................................................................................................................... 403
Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate .................................................................... 403
Gas Compressibility (Z Factor) Model Calculations ................................................... 403
Steady State Temperature ............................................................................................ 403
Surge Analysis................................................................................................................. 405
Overview............................................................................................................................. 405
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 407
Introducing Surge Analysis ................................................................................................ 410
What is the Surge Module? .......................................................................................... 410
What is the Difference Between a Transient and Steady-State Model? ...................... 410
When Should I use the Transient Surge Model? ......................................................... 411
Starting Surge Analysis ............................................................................................... 412
Defining Formation Properties .................................................................................... 414
Defining the Properties of the Set Cement .................................................................. 414
Specifying Analysis Parameters Common to Surge, Swab, and Reciprocation Analysis.. 415
Defining the Wellbore Fluids and Specifying Pump Rates ......................................... 415
xx Contents August 2004
Using Standoff Devices ............................................................................................... 415
Analyzing Surge and Swab Operations .............................................................................. 416
Selecting the Surge/Swab Analysis Mode ................................................................... 416
Defining Analysis Parameters ..................................................................................... 417
Analyzing Surge and Swab Analysis Results ..................................................................... 418
Analyzing Results Using Plots .................................................................................... 418
Using Operation Plots ............................................................................................ 418
Using the Miscellaneous Plots ............................................................................... 424
Analyzing Results Using the Report ...................................................................... 426
Analyzing Reciprocating Operations.................................................................................. 427
Selecting the Reciprocation Analysis Mode ................................................................ 427
Using Operation Plots ............................................................................................ 429
Using the Miscellaneous Plots ............................................................................... 436
Analyzing Results Using the Report ...................................................................... 438
Methodology ................................................................................................................ 439
Pressure and Temperature Behavior of Water Based Muds ........................................ 439
Viscosity Correlations of Oil Based Muds .................................................................. 440
Surge Analysis ............................................................................................................. 440
Two Analysis Regions ........................................................................................... 440
Connecting the Coupled-Pipe/Annulus and the Pipe-to-Bottomhole Regions ...... 443
Open Annulus Calculations ......................................................................................... 444
Mass Balance ......................................................................................................... 444
Momentum Balance ............................................................................................... 444
Coupled Pipe Annulus Calculations ............................................................................ 445
Pipe Flow ............................................................................................................... 445
Annulus Flow ......................................................................................................... 446
Pipe Motion ............................................................................................................ 446
Closed Tolerance ......................................................................................................... 447
References........................................................................................................................... 453
Transient Pressure Surge ............................................................................................. 453
Validation ..................................................................................................................... 453
Pipe and Borehole Expansion ...................................................................................... 453
Frictional Pressure Drop .............................................................................................. 453
Pressure and Temperature Fluid Property Dependence ............................................... 454
Cementing-OptiCem Analysis................................................................................. 455
Overview............................................................................................................................. 455
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 456
Introducing Cementing Analysis ........................................................................................ 457
What is Cementing? ..................................................................................................... 457
Starting Cementing Analysis ....................................................................................... 457
August 2004 Contents xxi
Specify the Volume Excess % ..................................................................................... 459
Defining the Cement Job .................................................................................................... 460
Defining the Cement Job Fluids .................................................................................. 460
Defining Spacers .................................................................................................... 460
Defining Cement Slurries ...................................................................................... 461
Specify the Standoff or Calculate the Centralizer Placement ...................................... 461
Defining the Cement Job ............................................................................................. 462
Defining Temperatures, Depths of Interest and Offshore Returns Information .......... 463
Specifying Additional Analysis Parameters ................................................................ 464
What is the Circulating Pressure Throughout the Cement Job? ............................ 465
Is There Free Fall? ................................................................................................. 467
What is the Surface Pressure? ................................................................................ 467
Automatically Adjusting the Flowrate ................................................................... 468
Using Foamed Cement ........................................................................................... 471
References........................................................................................................................... 476
Critical Speed ................................................................................................................... 477
Critical Speed Course Overview......................................................................................... 477
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 478
Introducing Critical Speed Analysis ................................................................................... 479
What is the Critical Speed Module? ............................................................................ 479
Why Use the Critical Speed Module? .......................................................................... 479
Critical Speed Limitations ........................................................................................... 480
Using Critical Speed ........................................................................................................... 481
Starting the Critical Speed Module .............................................................................. 481
Determining Critical Rotational Speeds ............................................................................. 483
Specifying the Boundary Conditions ........................................................................... 484
Specifying the Mesh Zone ........................................................................................... 484
Analyzing the Results .................................................................................................. 485
What are the Critical Rotational Speeds? .............................................................. 485
Non-Converged Solutions ...................................................................................... 486
Where in the BHA are the Large Relative Stresses Occurring? ............................ 487
What Kind of Stress is Causing the Large Relative Stress? .................................. 488
How Do I View the Large Relative Stress at Any Position on One Plot? ............. 489
Structural Solution ....................................................................................................... 491
Vibrational Analysis .................................................................................................... 491
Mass Matrix ................................................................................................................. 494
Damping Matrix ........................................................................................................... 494
Excitation Factors ........................................................................................................ 495
References........................................................................................................................... 498
xxii Contents August 2004
Bottom Hole Assembly ............................................................................................... 499
Overview............................................................................................................................. 499
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 500
Introducing Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis .................................................................... 501
What is the Bottom Hole Assembly Module? ............................................................. 501
Why Should I Use the Bottom Hole Assembly Module? ............................................ 501
Bottom Hole Assembly Module Limitations ............................................................... 502
Starting Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis ................................................................... 502
Analyzing a Static Bottom Hole Assembly ........................................................................ 505
Defining Analysis Parameters for Static Analysis ....................................................... 505
Drillahead Solution ................................................................................................ 505
Specifying the Mesh Zone ........................................................................................... 506
Analyzing Results for the Static (in-place) Position .................................................... 506
Using the Quick Look Section of the BHA Analysis Data Dialog ........................ 506
Using Plots ............................................................................................................. 508
Using Predicted Plots ............................................................................................. 510
Using the BHA Report ........................................................................................... 515
Predicting How a Bottom Hole Assembly Will Drill Ahead.............................................. 521
Defining Analysis Parameters for Drillahead Analysis ............................................... 521
Analyzing Drillahead Results ...................................................................................... 522
Using the BHA Analysis Data Quick Look Results .............................................. 522
Analysis Methodology ................................................................................................. 525
Three Fundamental Requirements of Structural Analysis ..................................... 525
Defining the Finite Element Mesh ......................................................................... 525
Compute the Local Stiffness Matrix and the Global Stiffness Matrix .................. 526
Degrees of Freedom ............................................................................................... 531
Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................. 531
Constructing the Wellbore and Bottom Hole Assembly Reference Axis .............. 534
Calculating the Solution ......................................................................................... 535
Bit Tilt and Resultant Side Force ........................................................................... 535
Drillahead Solutions .............................................................................................. 538
Bit Coefficient ........................................................................................................ 539
Formation Hardness ............................................................................................... 540
References........................................................................................................................... 541
Stuck Pipe Analysis...................................................................................................... 543
Overview............................................................................................................................. 543
Workflow............................................................................................................................ 544
Introducing Stuck Pipe Analysis......................................................................................... 546
What is the Stuck Pipe Module? .................................................................................. 546
Why Should I Use the Stuck Pipe Module? ................................................................ 546
Starting Stuck Pipe ....................................................................................................... 547
August 2004 Contents xxiii
Adding a Jar to the Workstring .................................................................................... 548
Determining the Location of the Stuck Point ..................................................................... 549
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Stuck Point Analysis ............ 549
Determining the Surface Measured Weight Required to Activate the Jar.......................... 550
Describing the Jar Analysis Mode ............................................................................... 550
Selecting the Jar Analysis Mode .................................................................................. 551
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Jar Analysis .......................... 551
Analyzing the Output Section ................................................................................ 552
Determining if the Required Measured Weight Yields the String...................................... 554
Describing the Yield Analysis Mode ........................................................................... 554
Selecting the Yield Analysis Mode ............................................................................. 554
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Yield Analysis ...................... 554
Analyzing the Output ............................................................................................. 555
Determining if the Required Force at Backoff Connection Can be Achieved ................... 558
Describing the Backoff Analysis Mode ....................................................................... 558
Selecting the Backoff Analysis Mode ......................................................................... 558
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Backoff Analysis .................. 559
Analyzing the Output ............................................................................................. 559
Stuck Point Algorithm ................................................................................................. 562
Stuck Pipe Yield Analysis Algorithm .......................................................................... 562
Stuck Pipe Jar Analysis Calculations ........................................................................... 564
Stuck Pipe Backoff Analysis Calculations .................................................................. 566
References........................................................................................................................... 567
Notebook............................................................................................................................. 569
Overview............................................................................................................................. 569
Starting Notebook ........................................................................................................ 569
Notebook Analysis Modes ........................................................................................... 570
Miscellaneous Mode ........................................................................................................... 572
Linear Weight .............................................................................................................. 572
Blockline Cut Off Length ............................................................................................ 573
Leak Off Test ............................................................................................................... 573
Fluids Mode ........................................................................................................................ 574
Mix Fluids .................................................................................................................... 574
Dilute /Weight Up ........................................................................................................ 574
Fluid Compressibility .................................................................................................. 575
Hydraulics Mode................................................................................................................. 576
Pump Output ................................................................................................................ 576
Annular ........................................................................................................................ 576
Pipe .............................................................................................................................. 577
Nozzles ......................................................................................................................... 578
Buoyancy ..................................................................................................................... 578
Analysis Mode .................................................................................................................... 579
WorkString ................................................................................................................... 579
xxiv Contents August 2004
Maximum String Length ........................................................................................ 579
String Weight ......................................................................................................... 580
Elongation .............................................................................................................. 580
Volumes and Heights ................................................................................................... 581
Lag Times .................................................................................................................... 582
Spot a Pill ..................................................................................................................... 583
Block Line Work ......................................................................................................... 584
Rig Capacity ................................................................................................................ 584
Calculations ........................................................................................................................ 586
Block Line Cut Off Length .......................................................................................... 586
Dilute/Wt Up Fluid ...................................................................................................... 586
Fluid Buoyancy ............................................................................................................ 586
Fluid Compressibility .................................................................................................. 587
Leak Off Test ............................................................................................................... 587
Mix Fluids .................................................................................................................... 587
Pump Output ................................................................................................................ 588
Nozzle Area ................................................................................................................. 588
Landmark WELLPLAN 25
Chapter
Introduction
What is WELLPLAN?
WELLPLAN is a drilling engineering software system to assist with
solving engineering problems during the design and operational phases
of drilling and completing wells. WELLPLAN is comprised of several
modules including Torque Drag Analysis, Hydraulics, Well Control,
Surge, OptiCem-Cementing, Bottom Hole Assembly, Critical Speed,
Stuck Pipe, and Notebook.
WELLPLAN can be used in the office or at the well site. WELLPLAN
can be installed on a network for use by several individuals, or on an
individual stand alone computer. Regardless of the installation
location or type, data can be transferred between installations. In
addition, WELLPLAN is integrated with other LANDMARK software
and data can be shared between a variety of LANDMARK software
packages. Refer to Chapter 2, The Engineers Data Model (EDM)
Database on page 27 for more information.
Training Course and Manual Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide you a reference for entering
data and performing an analysis during the class. Perhaps more
importantly, you can refer to it after the class is over to refresh your
memory concerning analysis steps. This manual contains technical
information concerning the methodology and calculations used to
develop this software. If you require more technical information than
what is presented in this manual, please ask you instructor. The on-line
help is very useful, and may assist you while using the software.
This training class is designed to be flexible to meet the needs of the
attendees. In this manual, there may be information regarding a module
that you do not have.
The training course begins with a quick introduction. Following the
introduction, time will be spent covering the concepts and features
common to all WELLPLAN modules. In this section you will learn how
to navigate the system, enter data, and produce output. After these
concepts and features have been reviewed, you will begin to look at the
individual modules (Torque Drag Analysis, Hydraulics, Well Control,
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
26 WELLPLAN Landmark
Surge, OptiCem-Cementing, Bottom Hole Assembly, Critical Speed,
Stuck Pipe, and Notebook.)
Licensing
FLEXlm is a licensing method common to all Landmark products. It
provides a single licensing system that integrates across PC and network
environments. FLEXlm Licensing files and FLEXlm Bitlocks are
supported for Landmark Drilling and Well Services applications. Please
refer to the EDT Summary Level Release Notes for more information.
Chapter
The Engineers Data Model (EDM)
Database
Overview
Many of Landmarks drilling applications use a common database and
data structurethe Engineers Data Model (EDM) databaseto
support the different levels of data that are required to use Landmarks
drilling and production software.
The Engineers Desktop is Landmarks Drilling, Well Services,
Production, and Economics integration platform. The Engineers
Desktop applications access the EDM database. EDM provides a
common database schema that allows for common data access, enables
naturally integrated engineering workflows, and reduces data entry
duplication across applications.
A significant advantage of the EDM database is improved integration
between Landmark's Drilling and Well Services products, and the
Production and Economics products. Integrated Engineering
applications on EDM allow for improved Plan vs. Actual comparisons
and complete store of design iterations from Prototype to Plan to
Actual.
In this chapter, you will be introduced to:
Logging in to the database
Data structure
Common data
Data locking
Importing and exporting data
2
Chapter 2: The Engineers Data Model (EDM) Database
Logging In To the Database
Any Landmark drilling software using the Engineers Data Model
(EDM) will require you to login. This dialog is used to select the
database and to provide a user id and password.
Starting WELLPLAN
You can start WELLPLAN in two ways:
z Use the Start Menu. Select WELLPLAN using Landmark
Engineers Desktop 2003.11 > WELLPLAN.
z Double-click any desktop shortcut you have configured.
The following login screen appears when you launch WELLPLAN:
Select the database you want
to use from the drop-down
list. User will default to the
last user name entered.
Describing the Data Structure
The EDM database has a hierarchical data structure to support the
different levels of data that are required by different drilling suite
applications. EDM uses the following hierarchical levels.
Hierarchical Level Description
Database The Database is the highest level in the Well
Explorer hierarchy. You can only work in one
database at a time. Refer to Working at the
Database Level on page 64 for more
information.
Company Company is the second highest data level in
the hierarchy. You can define several
companies within the database you are using.
Each company must have a unique name. If
you work for an operator, most likely you
may have only one company. If you work for
a service company, you may have several
companies. Refer to Working at the
Company Level on page 68 for more
information.
Company
Project
Site
Well
Design
Case
Wellbore
Company
Database
Hierarchical database structure of the
EDM database.
Project Project is the data level directly beneath
company and each project within a company
must have a unique name. A project can be
thought of as a field or as a group of sites. A
project has one system datum (mean sea level,
lowest astronomical tide, etc.) that is used to
define 0 TVD for the project. Within the
project, wellbores can be referenced to the
project level system datum or to additional
datums specified at the well level. Refer
toUsing Datums in EDM on page 48 or
Working at the Project Level on page 75 for
more information.
Site Site is the data level directly beneath the
Project level and each site within a project
must have a unique name. A site is a
collection of one or more wells that are all
referenced from a local coordinated system
centered on the site location. A site can be a
single land well, an offshore sub-sea well, a
group of well drilled from an onshore pad, or
a group of wells drilled from an offshore
platform. Refer to Working at the Site Level
on page 79 for more information.
Well Well is the data level directly beneath the Site
level and each well within a site must have a
unique name. A well is simply a surface
location. A well can have more than one
wellbore associated with it. For example,
there may be the original wellbore with one or
more sidetracks tied on to it at different kick-
off depths. Refer to Working at the Well
Level on page 85 for more information.
Wellbore Wellbore is the data level directly beneath the
Well level and each wellbore within a well
must have a unique name. A wellbore is a
compilation of one or more sections
originating at the surface and continuing to a
depth. A wellbore can be the original well
drilled from the surface or a sidetrack drilled
from a parent wellbore. If a well has an
original hole and two sidetracks, the well has
three wellbores. Refer to Working at the
Wellbore Level on page 92 for more
information.
Design Design is the data level directly beneath the
Wellbore level and each design within a
wellbore must have a unique name. A design
can be thought of as a design phase.
Associated with each design are a pore
pressure group, a fracture pressure group, a
temperature gradient and a wellpath. A design
may have several cases associated with it, but
each case will use the same pore pressure
group, fracture pressure group, temperature
gradient and wellpath. A design can be
categorized as prototype, planned or actual.
You may have several different versions of
prototype designs. For example, assume the
geologist wants to analyze two different
formation fracture gradients. This could
easily be accomplished by having two
prototype designs that are identical except for
the fracture gradient group. Landmarks
StressCheck, Casing Seat and COMPASS
applications routinely use designs. Refer to
Working at the Design Level on page 98 for
more information.
Case (WELLPLAN only) Case is the data level directly beneath the
Design level and each case within a design
must have a unique name. A case can be
thought of as a snapshot of the state of the
well. For example, you may use two cases to
analyze the affects of varying the mud weight
or changing the BHA. Associated with each
case are an assembly, a hole section and one
or more fluids. Cases are commonly used in
Landmarks WELLPLAN application.
StressCheck and COMPASS do not use cases.
Note: The Event hierarchy...
In the OpenWells, PROFILE, and Data Analyzer well explorer, you will find the
Event level directly beneath the Wellbore level. For more information about
Events, refer to the OpenWells online help.
Associated Components
Additional data components that can be associated ("linked") with
Designs and Cases include Wellpaths, Pore Pressure Groups, Fracture
Gradient Groups, Geothermal Gradient Groups, Hole Section Groups,
Assemblies, Fluids, and Catalogs. These components are used to define
the drilling problem that you want to analyze.
All associated items, with the exception of fluids, are automatically
created and associated by Well Explorer (you cannot manually create or
associate these items) with the design or case. Fluids can be
created/associated in WELLPLAN only, using the Fluid Editor.
Catalogs function differently than the other components, primarily
because Catalogs are not associated with a Design or Case. Catalogs are
used as a selection list to design a casing, tubing, liner, or drillstring.
Refer to Working With Catalogs on page 110 for more information.
There are several additional data components that are associated with
Designs or Cases. These are:
Associated with Designs:
Wellpaths
A wellpath is a series of survey tool readings that have been observed in
the same wellbore and increase with measured depth. All Cases within
the same design use the same wellpath.
Pore Pressure Groups
A Pore Pressure group is a set of pore pressures that define the pore
pressure regime over a depth range from surface to some vertical depth.
All Cases within the same design use the same pore pressure.
Fracture Gradient Groups
A Fracture Gradient is a set of fracture pressures that define the fracture
gradient regime over a depth range from surface to some vertical depth.
All Cases within the same design use the same fracture gradient.
Geothermal Gradient Groups
A Geothermal Gradient is a set of undisturbed earth temperatures that
define the temperatures over a depth range from the surface to some
vertical depth. All Cases within the same design use the same
geothermal gradient.
Associated with Cases:
Hole Section Groups
A Hole Section defines the wellbore as the workstring would see it. For
example, a hole section may contain a riser, a casing section, and an
open hole section. A hole section can also have a tubing section or a drill
pipe section depending on the situation. Multiple cases may use the
same hole section.
Assemblies
An Assembly defines the workstring. There are several types of
workstrings, including coiled tubing, casing, drillstrings, liners, and
tubing strings. Multiple cases may use the same assembly.
Fluids
A Fluid defines a drilling, cementing, or spacer fluid. A Fluid is linked
to a Case and a Case can have more than one fluid linked to it. One fluid
can be linked to multiple cases.
Copying and Pasting Associated Items
All of these associated items, with the exception of fluids, are
automatically created and associated ("linked") by the Well Explorer to
the design or case. (You cannot manually create or link these items.)
Fluids can be created/linked in WELLPLAN only, using the Fluid
Editor.
All these items are visible in Well Explorer so that you can copy and
paste them using the right-click menu. For example, when you copy a
wellpath and paste it into a different design, the wellpath that currently
exists for the target design is deleted. Well Explorer replaces the old
wellpath with the copy of the new one.
Again, fluids are the exception. Only the WELLPLAN Fluid Editor can
delete fluids, so after pasting a fluid, the original fluid still exists. The
original fluid is no longer linked to anything. This cant be seen in Well
Explorer, but WELLPLAN can access this. Note that if the destination
case, or the fluid you are trying to replace is locked, a message appears
and the paste is not completed.
Rules for Associating Components
The rules for associating components are listed below.
For Definitive Surveys, Pore Pressure Groups, Fracture Gradient
Groups, Geothermal Gradient Groups, Assemblies, and Hole Sections:
Each component can only be associated with one Design or
Case.
When one component is copied and pasted, an actual copy is
made.
When one component is pasted, the component it replaces will
be deleted (unless it is locked).
If the destination for the paste is locked (Design or Case) or the
item to be replaced is locked, a message appears and the paste is
not completed.
If the design is locked, all its associated items are also locked.
For Fluids:
When a fluid is copied and pasted, an actual copy is made.
When a fluid is pasted, the one is replaces will NOT be deleted.
Fluids can only be deleted using the Fluid Editor in
WELLPLAN.
If the destination case is locked or the fluid to be replaced is
locked, a message appears and the paste is not completed.
Common Data
Common data stored in the EDM database and available for use by
StressCheck, CasingSeat, WELLPLAN, OpenWells, and COMPASS in
database mode include:
Unit system
Pipe catalog
Connections catalog
Pore pressure
Fracture Gradient
Temperature Gradient
Surveys
All fields in Well Explorer Properties dialogs
General data, such as Well Name, Well Depth, Vertical Section
information
Note: Several additional fields are common to two or more
applications, but not all.
Drilling applications may share other data not listed.
Data Locking
You can prevent other people from making changes to data by locking
data at various levels and setting passwords. Users can only open the
data item in read-only mode; to keep changes, they will have to use
Save As or Export.
How Locking Works
You can lock Company properties only, or you can lock properties for
all levels below Company (Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design, and
Case). Passwords can be set to prevent unlocking.
By default, no passwords are set, and the "locked" check box on all
Properties dialogs can be toggled on and off at will with no security to
prevent users from doing something they shouldnt.
In the Well Explorer, if a data item is locked a small blue "key" appears
in the corner of its icon. When you open a locked data item, you will see
the message "This Design is locked and therefore Read-Only. Changes
to this Design will not be saved to the database. To keep your changes,
use the Save As or Export options."
Locking Company Properties
In the Properties dialog for the company whose data you want to protect,
there are two buttons, Company Level and Locked Data, and a
checkbox, Company is locked.
When you click the Company Level button, you are prompted to set a
password to protect Company properties (and only the Company
properties). This password will then be required if a user wants to
"unlock" company properties and make changes.
Once the password is set, toggle the Company is locked checkbox on to
lock the company properties and prevent unauthorized changes to the
data.
Locking Levels Below Company
When you click the Locked Data button on the Company Properties
dialog, you are prompted to set a password. This password will then be
required if a user wants to "unlock" any level below the company
(projects, sites, wells, wellbores, designs, and cases).
All levels are locked individuallythat is, you can lock a Well, but this
doesnt mean that anything below it is locked.
Once the Locked Data password is set, you can lock properties for any
data level below Company and prevent unauthorized changes to the
data. Open the Properties dialog for the data level you want to lock and
toggle the "locked" checkbox on. (For example, to lock a Wellbore,
open the Wellbore Properties dialog and toggle Wellbore is locked on.)
Note: Locked Designs...
When a design is locked, all associated items (Pore Pressure, Fracture Gradient,
Geothermal Gradient, and Wellpath) are locked with it.
Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM)
The 2003.11 release of EDM (the Engineer's Data Model) supports full
concurrency for multiple applications using the same data set through
the Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM). For in-depth information on
SAM, refer to the EDM Administration Utility help.
If the Simultaneous Activity Monitor has not been configured, the
following message will appear: "WELLPLAN could not connect to the
SAM server. Please verify that the settings are configured correctly in
the administration utility, and that the SAM server is running."
The Simultaneous Activity Monitor consists of a Messaging Server that
notifies the user with an open application of all data currently open in
other applications. The SAM icon appears in the application Status Bar
as follows:
If a data item is open, an icon will appear as follows:
z A red SAM icon indicates that one or more users on other PCs
have this item open and the current user is restricted to read-only
access.
A blue SAM icon indicates that one or more users on the current PC
have this item open but the current user still has full read-write access.
A user must be careful when making changes to the date though this
method enables data to automatically flow between applications.
Icon Message Description
A green SAM icon in the status bar indicates that the
Messenger service is active.
A blue SAM icon with a red X on it indicates that the
Messenger Service is not currently active.
No Icon When no icon appears in the application status bar this
indicates that the Simultaneous Activity Monitor has not
been configured for the application.
Concurrent Use of Same Data By Multiple Users
The 2003.11 release supports concurrency for multiple users on the
same data set. The Simultaneous Activity Monitor (SAM) is the service
used to regulate concurrent access to the EDM database.
z By default, the SAM server is enabled and connected and you will
see a green "SAM" icon in the status bar of your application.
z If the SAM service is configured but not connected, the "SAM"
icon will appear with a red "X" drawn through it. Consult your
System Administrator.
z If the SAM service is not configured, there will be no SAM icon in
the status bar.
For in-depth information on SAM, refer to the EDM Administration
Utility help.
A good practice for any multi-user environment is to frequently use the
F5 refresh key to refresh the Well Explorer contents. Data updates (e.g.,
inserts, updates, deletions) are not always automatically recognized in
other EDT sessions and simultaneously run EDT applications.
How the Well Explorer Handles Concurrent Users
Basically, the Well Explorer and the Simultaneous Activity Monitor
handle concurrency like this: If a user on a different machine has a
Design open (first one to open the Design gets it in Read/Write mode),
then all other users can only open that Design in Read-Only mode. If no
one on any other machine has Read/Write access to the Design, then you
get Read/Write access.
This is the SAM icon:
The red "SAM" icon indicates that one or more users on other PCs have
this item open and you are restricted to opening it in Read-Only mode.
You cannot save any changes to the database, but you can use Save As
and rename the item.
The blue "SAM" icon indicates that one or more users on the current PC
have this item open, but you can still open it in Read/Write mode. You
can save changes to the database.
These SAM icons will appear on a Design (COMPASS, WELLPLAN,
StressCheck, CasingSeat) or a Well (OpenWells) in the Well Explorer.
Same User on Same Computer
If the same user has a Design open in one EDT application and then
opens the same Design in another EDT application on the same
machine, the blue "SAM" icon will appear in the Well Explorer of the
second application. This indicates that this user has the Design "locked
for use in Read-Write mode", and has it open in more than one
application. However, because it IS the same user, he/she can Save
changes to the database made from either application.
Multiple Users, Different Computers
The first user to open a Design or Case in that well gets control, and the
Design or Case is then "locked for use in Read/Write mode." A red
"SAM" icon indicates that more than one user is working with the
Design or Case at the same time. However, only the first user can make
changes; all other users open the Design or Case in Read-Only mode.
They can Save As, but not Save.
After the user who had access to the Design or Case in Read/Write mode
closes the Design or Case, the red "SAM" icon goes away, and the
Design or Case is available again. Read-only users will have to close the
Design or Case and re-open to gain control.
(WELLPLAN only) A user can save Cases under a Design that is
currently "locked for Read/Write use" by someone else.
Reload Notification
If you are working with any of the data in the following list, and a user
with read/write privileges saves changes to the database, you will
receive a notification indicating that another user has changed the data
you are working with.
You will have the opportunity to use the changes saved to the database
by the other user. You will also have the opportunity to save the data you
are working with using the Save As option. If you do not save your data
using Save As, your changes will be overwritten by those made by the
other user. (Your changes will only be overwritten if the other user saves
his changes, and you indicate you want to use those changes when you
receive notification.) Keep in mind that if you have read privileges, any
changes you make are only stored in memory and are not written to the
database unless you save your data using Save As.
Items that are refreshed in this manner are: Design, Definitive Survey
(Wellpath), Pore Pressure, Fracture Gradient, Geothermal Gradient,
Assemblies (Casing Scheme)
Importing and Exporting Data
WELLPLAN provides you with EDM database import and export
functionality, as well as flat file import and export functionality.
Importing Data into the EDM Database
You can import data from one EDM database into another EDM
database, or you can import a DEX file.
Importing EDM Well Data from Another Database
To import well data from one EDM database to another, follow these
steps:
1. In the Well Explorer, select the EDM database canister.
2. From the Well Explorer right-click menu, select Import. The
following dialog box opens:
Note: Importing WELLPLAN and COMPASS legacy data...
WELLPLAN and COMPASS legacy data must be imported into the EDM
database using the Data Migration Toolkit. See the PDF file "Using the Data
Migration Toolkit" in the Landmark Engineers Desktop 2003.11\Documentation
folder for details.
3. Select the .XML file containing the well data you want to import,
and click Open. (Well data can be saved in .XML format using the
Export command in the Well Explorer; see page 45 for details.)
4. The well data will be imported into the database.
Importing a DEX File Into the Database
To import a DEX file into the EDM database, follow these steps:
1. Select File > Data Exchange > Import. The following dialog box
opens:
Note: XML file naming...
EDM Data Transfer File imports are not supported from paths containing
apostrophes or filenames containing apostrophes. Make sure that you do not use
apostrophes in filenames or directory names.
2. Specify the filename for the well information in DEX format you
want to import, and click Open. The following dialog appears.
3. Use the arrow buttons to move the desired data items into the lower
list box. Single arrow buttons move the highlighted file(s). Double
arrow buttons move all files. (Use the upward facing arrows to
remove items from the desired selection.)
4. Click OK to start the import.
5. When you are ready to save the changes to the database, select
File > Save. The Save As dialog opens, allowing you to specify
where in the hierarchy to place the newly imported design, and to
name the design. Click Save. The newly created design will appear
in the Well Explorer tree.
Note: Data imported to memory...
The data will be imported into memory and displayed in the main window. The
data has not yet been saved to the database. You may make changes now, if you
wish.
Exporting Data From the EDM Database
You can export well data from the EDM database in .XML format; this
data can then be imported directly into another EDM database. You can
also export data in DEX format.
Exporting Data in XML Format
To export well data for import into another database, follow these
steps:
1. In the Well Explorer, select the company, project, site, well,
wellbore, design, or case whose data you want to export and right-
click to open the pop-up menu. Select Export. The following
dialog box opens:
2. Specify a filename for the information you want to export, and click
Save. The parent and child data, and any linked pore pressures,
fracture gradients, etc. will be saved to the .XML file you
specified.
Exporting Well Data in DEX Format
1. Select File > Data Exchange > Export from the main menu. The
following dialog box opens:
2. Specify a filename for the well information you want to export in
DEX format, and click Save. If this is the first time you have saved
DEX data using the specified filename, the export is complete at
this point. If the specified file already existed, the following dialog
opens to allow you to specify which objects you want to export.
3. Use the arrow buttons to move the desired data items into the lower
list box. Single arrow buttons move the highlighted file(s). Double
arrow buttons move all files. (Use the upward facing arrows to
remove items from the desired selection.)
4. Click OK to start the export. The data will be saved to the .dxd file
you specified.
Using Datums in EDM
Definition of Terms Associated With Datums
Datum terms are defined below, and are grouped by the Properties
dialog in which they are found.
Project Properties
System Datum:
The System Datum is set in the Project Properties > General dialog, and
represents absolute zero. It is the surface depth datum from which all
well depths are measured, and all well depths are stored in the database
relative to this datum. Usually the System Datum is Mean Sea Level,
Mean Ground Level, or Lowest Astronomical Tide, but it can also be the
wellhead, rigfloor, RKB, etc.
Elevation:
The Elevation is set in the Project Properties/General dialog, and
represents the elevation above Mean Sea Level. (If Mean Sea Level is
selected as the System datum, Elevation is grayed out.)
Well Properties
Depth Reference Datum(s):
The Depth Reference Datum represents zero MD. It is sometimes
known as the local datum, and is measured as an elevation from the
System Datum. You can define one or more Depth Reference Datums
for a well in the Depth Reference Tab (Well Properties Dialog). For each
Depth Reference Datum, you must specify the elevation above or below
the System Datum.
The selected default Depth Reference datum in the list box will be the
viewing datum in all applications (the viewing datum can be changed
on the fly only in OpenWells and COMPASS.)
You cant delete or change the elevation of a Depth Reference datum
once it is referenced by a Design.
Offshore check box:
Check to indicate that this is an offshore well; leave unchecked to
indicate a land well.
Subsea check box: (offshore well)
Check to indicate that this offshore well is subsea.
Ground Elevation: (land well)
This is the elevation of the ground above the System Datum; it is set in
the Depth Reference Tab (Well Properties Dialog).
Water Depth: (offshore well)
This is the total depth of the column of water (MSL to mudline); it is
referenced to Mean Sea Level.
Mudline Depth: (only for offshore subsea well)
This is the depth below system datum (MSL/LAT etc.) of the wellhead
flange.
Wellhead Depth: (subsea well)
This is the distance from the wellhead to the system datum, and is used
in some calculations where this is the hanging depth for casing leads
when set. To determine wellhead depth:
Wellhead Depth (to rig floor) = Depth Reference Datum + Wellhead
Depth
Wellhead Depth (set in the Well Properties > Depth Reference tab) is
positive for offshore subsea and negative for wellheads above MSL (i.e.,
onshore or offshore platform). So, it does not matter in the above
calculation whether it is offshore or subsea. Depth Reference Datum is
always positive. Both wellhead depth and wellhead elevation are
distances from the system datum to the flange.
Wellhead Elevation: (platform and land wells)
This is the height above system datum (MSL/LAT) of the wellhead
flange (surface casing). It may happen that for some land wells using
ground level as the system datum that the user may have to enter a
negative value because the wellhead 'cellar' is often below the ground.
Air Gap (calculated)
This is the distance from the system datum to the rig floor, and is used
in some calculations for hydrostatic head. Air Gap is always positive. To
calculate air gap, the application uses:
z Air Gap (offshore wells) = Depth Reference Datum Elevation
z Air Gap (land wells) = Depth Reference Datum Ground Level
Elevation is set on the Project Properties > General tab and ground level
is set in the Well Properties > Depth Reference dialog.
Design Properties
Depth Reference Information:
From the drop-down list of defined Depth Reference datums, select the
datum you want to reference for this Design. Once you select a datum,
the Datum Elevation, Air Gap, current System Datum, Mudline Depth,
and Mudline TVD are all updated/calculated and displayed adjacent to
the rig elevation drawing on the Well Properties > Design Properties tab.
Setting Up Datums for Your Design
1. Using the Project Properties > General dialog, select the System
Datum you want to use.
2. Using the Project Properties > General dialog, in the Elevation
field, enter the value the System Datum is above Mean Sea Level.
If your System Datum is below Mean Sea Level, this number will
be negative. If your System Datum is Mean Sea Level, Elevation is
grayed out.
3. If the well is offshore, use the Well Properties > Depth Reference
dialog to:
a) Check Offshore, and enter the Water Depth below the System
Datum.
b) If the well is subsea, check Subsea and enter the Wellhead Depth
below the System Datum.
4. If the well is a land well, use the Well Properties > Depth Reference
tab, make sure Offshore is unchecked, and enter the Ground Level
elevation above the System Datum.
5. Using the Well Properties > Depth Reference tab, define the Depth
Reference Datum (s) you want to use, such as RKB or Rigfloor.
Type the elevation above the System Datum in the Elevation field,
and specify the effective Date for the datum.
6. Import or create a design for this well.
7. In the Design Properties dialog, General tab, select the Depth
Reference Datum you want to use for this design from the drop-
down list of datums you defined in Step 5.
Changing the Datum
(WELLPLAN Only) If a Design was created using one Depth Reference
datum, and the Depth Reference datum is changed, then when the
Design is opened any depths that become negative will be changed to
zero, and all depth-related properties will be adjusted accordingly.
(StressCheck and CasingSeat Only) When you create a design and save
it for the first time, the EDM database keeps track of the Depth
Reference Datum that was set at the time. This "original" Depth
Reference Datum is not displayed; however, if you or someone else
changes the Depth Reference Datum in the Well Properties dialog, and
you then attempt to open that design, a warning message will appear.
You are warned that you are trying to change to a datum that is different
from the datum in which you originally saved the data, and any
calculations will be invalid unless you change your inputs (see details
here). You are given the choice to open the design/case in the original
datum, or to convert to the new datum. If you choose to convert your
data, the data will be adjusted. However, the change is NOT saved to
the database until you save the design, at which time the new datum
becomes the "original" datum.
How this works:
If datum is same as original datum:
If you open a design or case where the Depth Reference Datum (set at
the Design level) is the same as the datum the data was originally saved
in, the design/case will open normally.
If datum is different than the original datum:
If you open a design or case where the Depth Reference Datum (set at
the Design level) is different from the original datum, the following
occurs:
1. The application checks to see if the well is a slant hole. If positive
inclination exists in wellpaths whose depths would become negative
after the datum shift, the program cannot make the adjustments; a
message pops up to inform you of this. Click Open to open the
design in the original datum; if you click Cancel, the design will not
open at all.
2. For wells other than slant holes, the program will issue this
message: "The currently selected design datum is different to the
datum with which the design was created. The application will then
attempt to adjust the data, but some data might be shifted or
removed. If you open the design, we strongly suggest that you
review your input data; any changes will not be saved to the
database until you explicitly save your data. Please select "Open" to
review the design using the datum with which it was created."
If you want to open the Design with the original elevation, select
Open. If you want to convert the data to the new elevation, select
Adjust. Open is the default.
If you enter "Open": Data is loaded to the original design datum,
but the Depth Reference Datum set in the Design will NOT
change to match the original datum.
If you enter "Adjust": Well Explorer loads the data to the new
Wellbore datum and attempts to adjust the data; however, some
data may be shifted or removed. The program will resolve the
deltas in the first depths of column data (strings, wellpaths,
columns, etc.) to adjust for the new gap and read zero depth on
the first line.
Note: After Opening a Design...
Once you open the design you should review your input data; remember that the
changes will not be saved to the database until you explicitly save your data.
Chapter
Using the Well Explorer
Overview
In this chapter, you will become familiar with using the Well Explorer.
You will expand your knowledge of the hierarchical levels of the EDM
database you discussed in the last chapter.
In this section of the course, you will become familiar with:
Components of the Well Explorer
Data levels accessible using the Well Explorer
Items associated with each data level
Creating a new company
Creating a new project
Creating a new site
Creating a new well
Creating a new wellbore
Creating a new design
Creating a new case
Catalogs
3
Chapter 3: Using the Well Explorer
Describing the Well Explorer
The Well Explorer allows you to browse the Engineers Data Model
(EDM) database at seven hierarchical levels: companies, projects, sites,
wells, wellbores, designs, and cases. Using the tree-like interface, you
can perform basic file management tasks within the Well Explorer.
The Well Explorer display will vary slightly from one application to
another. For example, Drilling applications that do not use Cases (such
as StressCheck, CasingSeat, and COMPASS) will not display Cases in
their Well Explorer. Production products (TOW, DSS, and ARIES) use
the Desktop Navigator to navigate through production hierarchical
entities.
The Well Explorer is shown in the following figure.
The Recent Bar displays the last selected
data items; use it to quickly open recently
used items.
Well Explorer
Click to display or hide the Well
Explorer (located on the main toolbar)
The Associated Data Viewer
displays items associated with
the selected data item. (A case in
this example.) You can open the
associated items editor by
double-clicking on the item in the
viewer.
Word document is linked to the selected
Design as an attached document.
The currently selected data item is
a Case in this example.
Components of the Well Explorer
The Tree
The hierarchical tree functions much like the Microsoft Windows
Explorer. You can view and manipulate different levels within the
EDM data model hierarchy, in a fashion similar to a directory tree.
Operations are:
Left mouse button is used to expand or contract branches of the
data tree and to select. Click the + sign to expand the hierarchy and
click the - sign to contract it. Refresh the display with the F5 key.
The right mouse button has a context-sensitive menu. Depending
on the hierarchical level you have highlighted (Company, Project,
Site, Well, Wellbore, Design, Case, Wellpaths, Pore Pressure
Groups, Fracture Gradient Groups, Geothermal Gradient Groups,
Hole Section Groups, Assemblies, Fluids, and Catalogs) the menu
will populate with all of the relevant options. (New data item, New
Attachment, Copy, Paste, Delete, Properties, etc.)
On-Demand Editing: By double-clicking on the Wellpath, Pore
Pressure, Fracture Gradient. or Geothermal Gradient, you can
open their respective spreadsheets directly from the Well Explorer
for editing. Alternatively, you can right-click on these items and
select Open.
Associated Data Components
Data components that are associated with a design or case are displayed
in the Associated Data Viewer at the base of the Well Explorer.
Data Components Associated With a Design
Data components that can be associated with a design are: Attached
documents, Fracture Gradient Groups, Pore Pressure Groups,
Geothermal Gradient Groups, and the Wellpath associated with the
design. The data items associated to the design are used in all the cases
below the design in the hierarchy.
By double-clicking on the Geothermal Gradient, Wellpath, Pore
Pressure, or Fracture Gradient, you can open their respective
spreadsheets directly from the Well Explorer for editing. Alternatively,
you can right-click on these items and select Open.
Data Components Associated With a Case
Data components that can be associated with a Case are: Attached
Documents, Assemblies, Hole Sections, and Fluids. The associated
items can be used in more than one case. WELLPLAN is the only
Landmark Drilling software application that uses Cases, so associating
data to a Case pertains only to WELLPLAN.
Attached Documents
You can "attach" any kind of file or shortcut created in Windows to the
selected data item (Design Case, etc.) in the Well Explorer tree.
Attached documents are associated with the selected data item, will be
displayed in the Associated Data Viewer at the base of the Well
Explorer, and can be launched in their native applications by double-
clicking. You can attach Word documents, Excel spreadsheets, pictures
(GIF, TIFF, JPG, PowerPoint, etc.), or other file types with a recognized
extension. For example, if you have a Design selected in the Well
Explorer, you can attach a map of the rigsite in JPG format.
Attachments can be stored in the database as a copy, or as a link to a disk
file.
z Link: Only the link to the disk file is stored in the database. Any
edits you make are saved to the original disk file. You can edit the
document directly from the Well Explorer, or you can edit the disk
file from its disk location; the changes are reflected in both places.
When stored as a link the attachment can only be accessed by users
whose contact to the attachment is not limited by their access to the
machine or network access. Attachments stored as a link can be
edited by any user with access to the original document through the
link. When an attachment is added as a link, it can only be viewed
on the machine in which the attachment was initially added. For all
other users the shortcut is visible and acts as a placeholder to
inform users that it exists. Any information on the shortcut should
be placed in the properties page description field, since the
properties of the shortcut are visible in the preview pane for all
users. Landmark recommends use of UNC file paths to avoid
problems with inconsistently mapped network drives. In the
Associated Data Viewer, the icon representing a Linked document
Note: If you change a fluid, assembly, or hole section that is used in
more than one case...
the change affects all cases associated to that fluid, assembly, or hole section.
is shown as a paperclip with a small arrow in the lower left corner.
This is the default behavior.
z Copy: The document is copied to the database. Once copied, the
document has no relationship with the original disk file; if you
make changes to the Well Explorer copy, those changes are not
reflected in the disk file, and vice-versa. Attachments stored in the
database cannot be directly edited. When a change is made to the
attachment it is stored locally and must be re-added to the database
and either renamed or the existing attachment replaced. In the
Associated Data Viewer, the icon representing a Copied document
is shown as a paperclip.
Attached documents can be copied from one data item to another using
the right-click Copy option, saved to another name using Save As, and
deleted (if copied) or detached (if linked) using Delete. To view the
current properties of the attachment, select Properties from the right-
click menu.
To Attach a Document
1. With the selected data item (Design, for example) selected in the
tree, right-click and select New Attachment.
2. A dialog box will open, allowing you type a Description of the
document, and Browse for the Attachment path to the documents
location. Click the Save attachment as a link/shortcut only
checkbox if you want to save the attachment as a link. If you leave
this box unchecked the document will be copied.
3. Click OK. The attached document will appear in the Associated
Data Viewer at the base of the Well Explorer.
To Delete an Attached Document
1. In the Associated Data Viewer, select the attachment you want to
delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete. If it is a Copied attachment, the
document will be deleted. If it is a Linked attachment, only the link
will be deleted from the database; the disk file will still exist.
To Copy an Attached Document to Another Data Item
1. In the Associated Data Viewer, select the attachment you want to
copy.
2. Right-click and select Copy. In the Well Explorer, navigate to the
desired data item (a Case, for example). Right-click and select
Paste. (Or, drag and drop the attachment from one data item to
another.) The Associated Data Viewer for that data item will
display the copied attachment.
The Recent Bar
To save time, you can use the Recent bar to select a recently used
Design, Case, or Catalog, instead of browsing for the desired item in
the Well Explorer.
The Recent bar is usually displayed near the top of the application
window along with the rest of the toolbars.
To display the list of recently used designs, cases, or catalogs, click on
the drop-down list. Select the item you want to use from the list, and it
will be displayed in the main window.
Displaying/Hiding the Well Explorer and Recent Bar
By default, the Well Explorer and Recent Bar are displayed. To toggle
between displaying and hiding the Well Explorer and Recent Bar, select
View > Well Explorer, or click the icon on the Database toolbar.
Refreshing the Well Explorer
Press the F5 key to refresh the Well Explorer.
Positioning the Well Explorer
By default, the Well Explorer is normally found just below the menu
bar, on the left side on the main window. However, the Well Explorer is
undockable, which means it can be moved around the application
frame and adjusted to fit your needs.
To undock the Well Explorer, click anywhere on the Well Explorers
light gray border and drag it away from its present position. When the
toolbar is attached to any edge of the application frame (such as the
menu bar) and then moved away from it, its border changes. At this
point you can release the mouse button. The Well Explorer resides in a
palette window that floats above the application frame. You can
move the Well Explorer to another portion of the screen by clicking
anywhere in its light gray border or title bar and then dragging it.
To re-dock the Well Explorer, drag it to any edge of the application
frame. When the Well Explorer approaches a valid docking position, its
border suddenly changes, at which point you can release the mouse
button.
Tracking Data Modifications
You can track modification of data using the Audit tab on the Properties
dialog for each data type (using the Well Explorer, right click on
Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design, Case, Catalog,
Wellpath, Pore Pressure, Fracture Pressure, Geothermal Gradient, Hole
Section, Assemblies, or Fluids, then click the Audit tab).
Drag and Drop Rules
"Drag and drop" in the Well Explorer functions somewhat like the
Microsoft Windows Explorer. You can use drag and drop to copy
Companies, Projects, Sites, Wells, Wellbores, Designs, Cases, as well as
associated data items and attached documents.
All drag and drop operations copy the data; data is never cut or moved.
z To copy - Drag and drop the item to copy it from one location and
paste it into another. The item and all associated data will be copied
and pasted.
This information indicates who created the
company, project, site, well, wellbore,
design, etc. Also displayed is the date the
item was created as well as the application
that was used to create the item.
This information indicates
who modified the company,
project, site, well, wellbore,
design, etc. Also displayed
is the date the item was
modified as well as the
application that was used to
modify the item.
Type comments as
desired to assist with
tracking the use of the
software. New
comments are
appended to existing
comments.
You can drag and drop associated items (Wellpaths, Pore Pressures,
Fracture Gradients, Geothermal Gradients, Hole Sections, Assemblies,
etc.) into open Designs or Cases from the Associated Data Viewer at the
base of the Well Explorer. The application will automatically update
itself with the copied data.
Some rules:
z You cannot drag and drop an Actual Design. However, if you copy
a Wellbore, any Actual Designs under that Wellbore are copied.
This is also true for copying done at the Well, Site, Project, and
Company level.
z You cannot drag a Wellpath from the Associated Data Viewer into
an Actual Design.
z If you drag a Planned or Prototype Design to a different Project,
targets will not be copied with the Design. As a result, the plan will
no longer have any targets associated with it.
z Depending where a Design sidetrack Wellbore is dropped, Plan and
Survey tie-on information may be lost, and as a result, survey
program may be missing information.
z (COMPASS only) If a Survey is dropped onto a Wellbore or Actual
Design in another Company, the Survey will lose its tool
information.
z You cannot drag and drop Catalogs. Instead, you must use the right-
click menu Copy and Paste functions
Well Explorer Right-Click Menus
When you click on something in the Well Explorer (a Well, Design,
etc.), right-clicking brings up a menu of options pertinent to that
hierarchical level. The options on each hierarchical level are discussed
below.
Working at the Database Level
When a Database is selected on the Well Explorer, the following right-
click menu items are available:
New Company (Database Level)
To create a new company, select the database canister and right-click;
select New Company. The Company Properties dialog opens. The
fields and controls on the Company Properties dialog are explained in
detail on page 71.
Command Description
New Company Choosing this option displays the Company Properties dialog.
(page 64)
Instant Case Use Instant Case to quickly create a new case. Choosing this
command displays the Instant Case dialog box, which allows
you to quickly select the hierarchy you want -
Company, Project, Site, Well, Wellbore, Design, and Case- from
drop-down lists of existing database entries. After making your
selections, click OK to create the Case. (page 65)
Export Use Export to make a copy of all libraries and write them to an
XML file. This XML file can be sent to another user so that they
can use any libraries you may have created. (page 66)
Import The Import command allows you to import .xml files, libraries,
and workspace files into the database that was exported using the
Export command. See Import (Database Level) on page 66 for
more information. (page 66)
Properties The Properties command allows you to specify the real-time
configuration information for the database.
Well Name Choosing this option displays a sub menu from which you can
select how to name the wells in your project. (page 67)
Wellbore Name Choosing this option displays a sub menu from which you can
select how to name the wellbores in your project. (page 68)
Refresh Use this command to refresh (update) the Well Explorer tree
with any changed information. Pressing the F5 key is another
way to refresh. (page 68)
Expand All To expand all levels below the Database level. (page 68)
Collapse All Use this command to collapse all levels below the Database
level. (page 68)
Instant Case (Database Level)
Use this dialog to quickly and easily create the hierarchy required to
start a case, from the company all the way down to the design. This
allows you to enter minimal information and the effort of going through
the individual property dialogs at each level of the hierarchy.
If you want to lock the data and
prevent changes to the company-only
data, set the Company Level
password; to prevent changes to the
company data and all levels below it,
set the Locked Data password.
Toggle Company is locked: on after
setting passwords.
Select the Company, Project, and Site from
the drop-down list of existing companies,
projects, or sites. You can also enter a new
name for the data level.
Enter the name of the Well,
Wellbore, and Plan.
Specify datum information.
Export (Database Level)
The Export command allows you to export all libraries (fluid and string)
that you have created to an xml file. You can provide the xml file to
another user. That user can import the file containing the libraries and
can then use the libraries you created. Refer to Using Libraries on
page 148 for more information.
Import (Database Level)
The Import command allows you to import a .xml file containing data,
libraries, or workspaces into the database that was exported using the
Export command. If the import file contains analysis data, the entire
hierarchy of the Well (Company, Project, and Site, and well as any
child data, such as Wellbore, Design, etc.) are included in the file.
When you select Import, the Import well dialog opens, prompting for
the XML filename to import. Type the filename, or browse for the file.
Click Open. The Well hierarchical data will be imported into the EDM
database.
Properties (Database Level)
Use the Properties command to access the Real-Time Configuration tab.
This tab is used to specify real-time mnemonics for log curves that are
going into the EDM database via OpenWire for use in real-time Torque
and Drag/Hydraulics analyses in WELLPLAN. When you set the real-
time configuration properties at the database level, every company
within the database will inherit those real-time properties. However, you
can change the real-time properties for an individual company within
the database by right-clicking on the company and selecting Properties
> Real Time Configurations tab.
Real-Time Configuration Properties...
You must have correctly specified log mnemonics prior to initiating data transfer
using OpenWire. If the mnemonics are not correctly specified, the data transfer
will not occur.
Well Name (Database Level)
Choosing this option displays a sub menu from which you can select
how to name the wells in your project. The options are:
z Common Name - Short/abbreviated well name given to well for
day-to-day reference.
z Legal Name - Formal well name assigned for documentation
purposes.
z Universal Identifier - A coded well name that varies from region to
region.
Note: You can choose only one of the naming options Common Name,
Legal Name, or Universal Identifier. You can use Slot Name in
conjunction with the other naming conventions.
Real-Time Mnemonics are Case Sensitive...
Real-time mnemonics are case sensitive. Be sure to type them into the Real-Time
Configuration tab just as they will appear in the WITSML 1.2 data from your
service provider.
Mnemonics are case
sensitive! Be sure to type
them just as they will
appear in the WITSML 1.2
data.
Wellbore Name (Database Level)
Choosing this option displays a sub menu from which you can select
how to name the wellbores in your project. The options are:
z Common Name - Short/abbreviated well name given to well for
day-to-day reference.
z Legal Name - Formal well name assigned for documentation
purposes.
z Universal Identifier - A coded well name that varies from region to
region.
Note: You can choose only one of the naming options Common Name,
Legal Name, or Universal Identifier.
Refresh (Database Level)
Use this command to update the Well Explorer tree to show any
additions, changes, and deletions.
Expand All (Database Level)
This command expands all nodes below the selected level in the Well
Explorer tree.
Collapse All (Database Level)
This command collapses all nodes below the selected level in the Well
Explorer tree.
Working at the Company Level
In the Well Explorer, when you right click on a company, the right click
menu displays the following choices:
Command Description
New Project Create a new project for the selected company (page 69).
New
Attachment
Displays the Attachment Properties dialog. (page 70)
New Project (Company Level)
To create a new project, select a Company and right-click; select New
Project. The Project Properties dialog opens.
The fields and controls on the Project Properties dialog are explained in
detail on page 77.
Paste Paste copied company information from the Clipboard
(page 70).
Rename Activates the selected data item in the Tree, enabling you to edit
the name. (page 70)
Delete Delete the selected company and all associated child information
(page 70).
Export Export the selected companys hierarchical information to an
XML file (page 71).
Properties View or edit the selected companys properties (page 71).
Expand All To expand all levels below the company level in the Well
Explorer (page 74).
Collapse All Collapses all levels below the company level in the Well
Explorer. (page 74)
New Attachment (Company Level)
Use this dialog to associate a document or picture (Word, Excel, text
file, JPG, etc.). Document can be of any type with a recognized
extension.
Paste (Company Level)
Use this command to paste (insert) the contents of the Clipboard at the
location currently selected in the Well Explorer.
In order for this function to be effective you must have Copied (saved)
company data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Company Level)
Use this command to rename the item. You can also rename the data
hierarchy item by highlighting it and the clicking once on it. Type the
new name in the box that appears around the current name.
Delete (Company Level)
Use this command to remove the selected Company from the database.
A confirmation box will open, asking if you are sure you want to delete
the company and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as
appropriate.
Check the Save attachment as a link/shortcut only box if you want to save the attachment
as a link only. If you check this box, only the link to the disk file is stored in the database. Any
edits you make are saved to the original disk file. You can edit the document directly from the
Well Explorer, or you can edit the disk file from its disk location; the changes are reflected in
both places. In the Associated Data Viewer, the icon representing a Linked document is shown
as a paperclip with a small arrow in the lower left corner.
Use the Browse
button to navigate
to the location of
the file. If you
know the path,
you can enter it
without using the
Browse button.
Enter text that
provides detailed
descriptive
information about
this attachment.
Export (Company Level)
Use this command to export the selected Companys data in XML
format. Includes any child information associated with the Company. A
dialog will open, allowing you to supply a directory and filename for
the XML file.
Properties (Company Level)
Selecting this command allows you to view or edit Company
properties. The Company Properties dialog opens.
Company Properties Dialog
The Company Properties dialog is used to create a new company and to
provide information regarding creation and modification of the
company. This dialog contains three tabs: General, Real Time
Configuration, and Audit.
General Tab (Company Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique company name that identifies the company, and
to provide additional information related to the company. This tab is
also used to lock the company and/or associated data to protect against
undesired changes to the data associated with the company. A company
name is required. Additional information on this dialog is used for
informational and reporting purposes and is not required.
The following fields are present:
Details
CompanyType the name of the company. The company name
uniquely identifies the company, and no two companies can have
the same name.
DivisionType the division of the company.
GroupType the company group.
Contact
RepresentativeType the name of the company representative.
AddressType the companys address.
TelephoneType the telephone number of the company or the
company representative.
Company is Locked Checkbox
Check this box to prevent editing of the company data. If this box is
checked and either a Company Level or Locked Data password has
been specified, you will be prompted for the password before you can
uncheck this box.
Passwords
Locked DataClick to specify a password to lock all data
associated with the company, including all projects, sites, wells,
wellbores, scenarios, and cases.
To change the locked data password: go to the Well Explorer and
right click on the Company, select Properties, select General tab,
and then click the Locked Data password button. Enter the old
password and the new password (twice), then click OK.
If the Company is locked box is checked...
you will not be able to edit any of the fields.
Company LevelClick to specify a password to lock only the
company data. The company level password is only active if the
Company is locked box is checked on the Company Properties >
General tab.
Real Time Configurations Tab
Use the Real-Time Configuration tab to specify real-time mnemonics
for log curves that are going into the EDM database via OpenWire for
use in real-time Torque and Drag/Hydraulics analyses in WELLPLAN.
When you set the real-time configuration properties at the company
level, only this company within the database will inherit those real-time
properties. You can specify real time configurations for all companies
within the database at the database level. Refer to Properties (Database
Level) on page 66.
Real-Time Configuration Properties...
You must have correctly specified log mnemonics prior to initiating data transfer
using OpenWire. If the mnemonics are not correctly specified, the data transfer
will not occur.
Real-Time Mnemonics are Case Sensitive...
Real-time mnemonics are case sensitive. Be sure to type them into the Real-Time
Configuration tab just as they will appear in the WITSML 1.2 data from your
service provider.
Audit Tab (Company Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the company was created and to identify
the last modification date as well as the person that modified the data.
The Audit tab fields are detailed in Tracking Data Modifications on
page 61.
You can re-open the Company Properties dialog at any time to view or
edit the data by right-clicking on the company name in the Well
Explorer and selecting Properties from the right-click menu.
Expand All (Company Level)
Select this command to expand all nodes in the Well Explorer below
the selected Company.
Collapse All (Company Level)
Select this command to collapse all nodes in the Well Explorer below
the selected Company.
Working at the Project Level
In the Well Explorer, when you right click on a project, the right click
Command Description
New Site Create a new site for the selected project (page 76).
New
Attachment
Displays the Attachment Properties dialog. Refer to New
Attachment (Company Level) on page 70 for more information.
Copy Copy the selected project data to the Clipboard (page 76).
Paste Paste copied project information (page 76).
the name. (page 77)
Delete Delete the selected project and all associated child information
(page 77).
Export Export the selected projects hierarchical information to an XML
file (page 77).
Properties View or edit the project properties (page 77).
Expand All To expand all levels below the project level in the Well Explorer
(page 79).
Collapse All To collapse all levels below the project level in the Well
Explorer. (page 79)
New Site (Project Level)
To create a new site, select a project and right-click; select New Site.
The Site Properties dialog opens.
The fields and controls on the Site Properties dialog are explained in
detail on page 81.
New Attachment (Project Level)
file, JPG, etc.). The document can be of any type with a recognized
extension. Refer to New Attachment (Company Level) on page 70
for more information.
Copy (Project Level)
Use this command to copy the selected project from the Well Explorer
and save it to the Clipboard.
This command is disabled if nothing has been selected.
Paste (Project Level)
project data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Project Level)
Delete (Project Level)
Use this command to remove the selected project from the database. A
confirmation box will open, asking if you are sure you want to delete
the project and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Project Level)
Use this command to export the selected Projects data in XML format.
Includes the hierarchical information above and any child information
associated with the Project. A dialog will open, allowing you to supply
a directory and filename for the XML file.
Properties (Project Level)
Selecting this command allows you to view or edit Project properties.
The Project Properties dialog opens.
Project Properties Dialog
The Project Properties dialog is used to create a new project and to
provide information regarding creation and modification of the project.
This dialog contains two tabs: General and Audit.
General Tab (Project Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique project name that identifies the project, and to
provide additional information related to the project. This tab is also
used to lock the project and/or associated data to protect against
undesired changes to the data associated with the project. A project
Details
ProjectType the name of the project. Project names must be
unique within a company.
DescriptionType a description of the project.
System Datum Description drop-down listSelect a system
datum from the drop-down list or type a new datum. The system
datum describes absolute zero height or depth for the project, and
is the depth from which all wellbore depths are measured.
Elevation This value indicates where the System Datum is
relative to Mean Sea Level. For example, if you selected Lowest
Astronomical Tide, the value would be negative because LAT
would be below MSL. If you select Mean Sea Level, the Elevation
field below is grayed out.
Project is Locked Checkbox
Check this box to prevent editing of the project data. If this box is
checked and a Locked Data password has been specified, you will be
prompted for the password before you can uncheck this box. (See
Data Locking on page 36 for details on data locking.)
Audit Tab (Project Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the project was created and to identify
If the Project is locked box is checked...
page 61.
You can re-open the Project Properties dialog at any time to view or
edit the data by right-clicking on the Project name in the Well Explorer
and selecting Properties from the right-click menu.
Expand All (Project Level)
the selected Project.
Collapse All (Project Level)
the selected Project.
Working at the Site Level
In the Well Explorer, when you right click on a site, the right click
Command Description
New Well Create a new well for the selected site (page 80).
New
Attachment
Copy Copy the selected site data to the Clipboard (page 81).
Paste Paste copied site information (page 81).
the name. (page 81)
Delete Delete the selected site and all associated child information
(page 81).
Export Export the selected sites hierarchical information to an XML
file (page 81).
Properties View or edit the site properties (page 81).
Expand All To expand all levels below the site level in the Well Explorer
(page 84).
Explorer. (page 84)
New Well (Site Level)
To create a new well, select a site and right-click; select New Well. The
Well Properties dialog opens.
The fields and controls on the Well Properties dialog are explained in
detail on page 87.
New Attachment (Site Level)
Copy (Site Level)
Use this command to copy the selected site from the Well Explorer and
save it to the Clipboard.
Paste (Site Level)
site data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Site Level)
Delete (Site Level)
Use this command to remove the selected site from the database. A
the site and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Site Level)
Use this command to export the selected Sites data in XML format.
associated with the Site. A dialog will open, allowing you to supply a
directory and filename for the XML file.
Properties (Site Level)
Selecting this command allows you to view or edit Site properties. The
Site Properties dialog opens.
Site Properties Dialog
The Site Properties dialog is used to create a new site and to provide
information regarding creation and modification of the site.
General Tab (Site Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique site name that identifies the site, and to provide
additional information related to the site. This tab is also used to lock
the site and/or associated data to protect against undesired changes to
the data associated with the site. A site name is required. Additional
information on this dialog is used for informational and reporting
purposes and is not required.
Details
SiteType the name of the site. Site names must be unique within
a project. The site name should not be the rig name because rigs
are mobile. The site is not mobile.
DistrictType the district information for the site.
BlockType the block for the site.
If the Site is locked box is checked...
Security
Tight Group Name - This is the security designation for this Site,
based on the current users access rights. UNRESTRICTED is the
default. Be careful - if you restrict this field, certain users will not
be able to view this Site. Tight groups are created in the EDM
Administration Utility through the EDM Security plug-in. They
are assigned in the Well Explorer at the site or well level.
Azimuth Reference
North Reference - Indicate whether azimuth is specified from True
North or Grid North.
Site is Locked Checkbox
Check this box to prevent editing of the site data. If this box is checked
and a Locked Data password has been specified, you will be prompted
for the password before you can uncheck this box. (See Data Locking
on page 36 for details on data locking.)
Location Tab (Site Properties Dialog)
Use this Tab to specify site location information. All information on
this tab is optional, and is used for general information and reporting
purposes.
Location
Lease Name.Type the name of the lease where the well is
located.
CountyType the county where the well is located.
State/ProvinceType the state or province where the well is
located.
CountryType the country where the well is located.
Audit Tab (Project Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the site was created and to identify the
last modification date as well as the person that modified the data. The
Audit tab fields are detailed in Tracking Data Modifications on
page 61.
You can re-open the Site Properties dialog at any time to view or edit
the data by right-clicking on the Site name in the Well Explorer and
selecting Properties from the right-click menu.
Expand All (Site Level)
the selected Site.
Collapse All (Site Level)
the selected Site.
Working at the Well Level
In the Well Explorer, when you right click on a well, the right click
New Wellbore (Well Level)
To create a new wellbore, select a well and click New Wellbore. The
Command Description
New Wellbore Create a new wellbore for the selected well (page 85).
New
Attachment
Copy Copy the selected well data, and all associated data, to the
Clipboard (page 86).
Paste Paste copied well information, including all associated data
(page 86).
the name. (page 86)
Delete Delete the selected well and all associated child information
(page 87).
Export Export the selected well hierarchical information to an XML file
(page 87).
Properties View or edit the well properties (page 87).
Expand All To expand all levels below the well level in the Well Explorer
(page 92).
Explorer. (page 92)
Wellbore Properties dialog opens.
The fields and controls on the Wellbore Properties dialog are explained
in detail on page 95.
New Attachment (Well Level)
Copy (Well Level)
Use this command to copy the selected well from the Well Explorer and
Paste (Well Level)
well data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Well Level)
Delete (Well Level)
Use this command to remove the selected well from the database. A
the well and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Well Level)
Use this command to export the selected Wells data in XML format.
associated with the Well. A dialog will open, allowing you to supply a
Properties (Well Level)
Selecting this command allows you to view or edit Well properties. The
Well Properties dialog opens.
Well Properties Dialog
The Well Properties dialog is used to create a new well and to provide
information regarding creation and modification of the well. This
dialog contains the tabs: General, Depth Reference, and Audit.
General Tab (Well Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique well name that identifies the well, and to
provide additional information related to the well. This tab is also used
to select the unit system, lock the well and/or associated data to protect
against undesired changes to the data associated with the well. A well
Details
Well (Common)Type the name the well is commonly known by.
This name will be used to identify the well using this software.
Well (Legal)Type the legal name of the well.
DescriptionType a short description of the well.
Location String Type, edit or view a short description of the
geographic description.
Unique Well Identifier
U.W.I.Type the Universal Well identifier for the well.
Typefrom the drop-down list, select the type of U.W.I: API,
HES/TKT, IODAS, etc.
Well No.Type the well number.
If the Well is locked box is checked...
Security
z Tight Group Name - This is the security designation for this Site,
based on the current users access rights. UNRESTRICTED is the
default. Be careful - if you restrict this field, certain users will not
be able to view this Site. Tight groups are created in the EDM
Administration Utility through the EDM Security plug-in. They are
assigned in the Well Explorer at the site or well level.
Active Unit System
z Well Units - Select the preferred well units for this well. When a
Design or Case is opened below this Well level, those units will be
used. You may choose from API or SI, plus any custom-defined
unit systems. Note that once you hit Apply, the well units you
selected will be applied to all designs and cases under that well,
whether they are open or not.
Well is Locked Checkbox
Check this box to prevent editing of the well data. If this box is checked
Depth Reference Tab (Well Properties Dialog)
Use this Tab to specify datums for use in defining wellbore datums.
Elevations above, Depths below: [System Datum]
This read-only label indicates what the current System Datum is, and
states that all elevations are measured ABOVE the System datum, and
all depths are measured BELOW the System datum. (The System datum
is specified on the General Tab (Project Properties).)
A drop-down list box below the label contains all defined Depth
Reference datums. Select the Depth Reference datum you want to use to
view and calculate data. If you do not specify a Depth Reference datum
here, a "Default Datum" with zero elevation above System datum will
be used.
Information about each datum includes:
z Datum - Type, edit or view the name of the datum.
z Default - When checked on, indicates that this is the default datum.
All Designs created below this Well will inherit the default datum.
z Elevation - Type, edit or view the elevation above the System
Datum (this must be a positive number). Note that if you have a
design associated with this datum, you cannot edit this field. If no
design is associated with this datum, you can edit the elevation.
z Rig Name - Type, edit, or view the name of the rig.
z Date - Type the date the datum was created. The program uses the
date field to determine which is the newest datum, and then uses
that datum as the default for new wellbores.
Configuration
z For a Land well - If the well is a land well, type the value for the
Ground Elevation above the System Datum (must be a positive
number). Leave Offshore unchecked.
z For an Offshore well - If the well is an offshore well:
Check the Offshore checkbox to indicate it is an offshore well.
Type the Water Depth (MSL to mudline). This is the column of
water.
Type the Wellhead Elevation (positive above the System
Datum).
z For an Offshore well that is Subsea - If the well is an offshore
well subsea:
Check the Offshore checkbox.
Check the Subsea checkbox (Offshore must be checked before
this option becomes available).
Type the Water Depth (MSL to mudline). This is the column of
water.
Type the Wellhead Depth. (positive below the System Datum
specified on the General Tab (Project Properties)).
Summary
In the Summary area, a graphic depicts the selected configuration
(onshore, offshore, or offshore subsea), and displays current values. The
following values are calculated and/or displayed:
z Datum - This is the default datum selected in the Well
Properties/Depth Reference dialog.
z Datum Elevation - This is the elevation of the default datum above
the System Datum.
z Air Gap - Air Gap measured to MSL is calculated and displayed.
Air Gap is the distance from ground level/sea level to the rig floor,
and is used in some calculations for hydrostatic head. Air Gap is
always positive. The application calculates Air Gap as follows:
(Air Gap, offshore wells) = Datum Elevation Elevation (of the
System Datum relative to Mean Sea Level).
(Air Gap, land wells) = Datum Elevation Ground Level
(relative to the System Datum).
Elevation is set in the Project Properties > General dialog. Ground Level
is set in the Well Properties > Depth Reference dialog. Datum Elevation
is the elevation for the Depth Reference Datum. Datum Elevation is
always positive. If you change the datum selection, the Air Gap updates
automatically.
Note that if you change the datum and it causes a negative air gap to be
calculated, a warning message will appear, informing you that you
cannot select this datum.
[System Datum] - Display the current System Datum.
Mudline Depth (MSL) - (Offshore only) Display the distance from
MSL to the sea bed, which is
Water Depth Elevation (System Datum offset from MSL, which is set
in the Project Properties dialog).
Mudline TVD - (Offshore only) Display the distance from the Depth
Reference Datum to the sea bed (datum Elevation + Water Depth).
Audit Tab (Well Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the well was created and to identify the
page 61.
You can re-open the Well Properties dialog at any time to view or edit
the data by right-clicking on the Well name in the Well Explorer and
Expand All (Well Level)
the selected Well.
Collapse All (Well Level)
the selected Well.
Working at the Wellbore Level
In the Well Explorer, when you right click on a wellbore, the right click
Command Description
New Design Create a new design for the selected wellbore (page 93).
New Design (Wellbore Level)
To create a new design, select a wellbore and right-click; select New
Design. The Design Properties dialog opens.
New
Design/Case
from
OpenWells
Create a design or case based on an OpenWells report.
New
Attachment
Copy Copy the selected wellbore data to the Clipboard (page 94).
Paste Paste copied wellbore information (page 94).
the name. (page 94)
Delete Delete the selected wellbore and all associated child information
(page 95).
Export Export the selected wellbores hierarchical information to an
XML file (page 95).
Properties View or edit the wellbore properties (page 95).
Expand All To expand all levels below the wellbore level in the Well
Explorer (page 97).
Explorer. (page 97)
The fields and controls on the Design Properties dialog are explained in
detail on page 99.
New Design/Case from OpenWells
Use this dialog to bring a selected Casing Report, Fluids Report, or
Daily Operations Report over from OpenWells to WELLPLAN and
save the data as a case.
New Attachment (Wellbore Level)
Cut (Wellbore Level)
Use this command to cut the selected wellbore from the Well Explorer
and save it to the clipboard.
Copy (Wellbore Level)
Use this command to copy the selected wellbore from the Well
Explorer and save it to the Clipboard.
Paste (Wellbore Level)
wellbore data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Wellbore Level)
Delete (Wellbore Level)
Use this command to remove the selected wellbore from the database.
A confirmation box will open, asking if you are sure you want to delete
the wellbore and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Wellbore Level)
Use this command to export the selected Wellbores data in XML
format. Includes the hierarchical information above and any child
information associated with the Wellbore. A dialog will open, allowing
you to supply a directory and filename for the XML file.
Properties (Wellbore Level)
Selecting this command allows you to view or edit Wellbore properties.
The Wellbore Properties dialog opens.
Wellbore Properties Dialog
The Wellbore Properties dialog is used to create a new wellbore and to
provide information regarding creation and modification of the
wellbore. This dialog contains two tabs: General and Audit.
General Tab (Wellbore Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique wellbore name that identifies the wellbore, and
to provide additional information related to the wellbore. This tab is
also used to lock the wellbore and/or associated data to protect against
undesired changes to the data associated with the wellbore. A wellbore
Details
WellboreType the name that will be used to identify the
wellbore. The name must be unique.
Sidetrack from an Existing Wellbore
Parent WellboreIf the wellbore is a sidetrack, select the
wellbore that contains the starting point.
Wellbore is locked checkbox
Check this box to prevent editing of the wellbore data. If this box is
Audit Tab (Wellbore Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the wellbore was created and to identify
page 61.
If the Wellbore is locked box is checked...
You can re-open the Wellbore Properties dialog at any time to view or
edit the data by right-clicking on the Wellbore name in the Well
Expand All (Wellbore Level)
the selected wellbore.
Collapse All (Wellbore Level)
the selected Wellbore.
Working at the Design Level
In the Well Explorer, when you right click on a design, the right click
New Case (Design Level)
To create a new case, select a design and right-click; select New Case.
The Case Properties dialog opens.
Command Description
New Case (WELLPLAN only) Create a new case for the selected design
(page 98).
New
Attachment
Copy Copy the selected design data to the Clipboard (page 99).
Paste Paste copied design information (page 99).
the name. (page 99)
Delete Delete the selected design and all associated child information
(page 99).
Export Export the selected designs hierarchical information to an XML
file (page 99).
Properties View or edit the design properties (page 100).
Expand All To expand all levels below the design level in the Well Explorer
(page 102).
Explorer. (page 102)
The fields and controls on the Case Properties dialog are explained in
detail on page 104.
New Attachment (Design Level)
Copy (Design Level)
Use this command to copy the selected design from the Well Explorer
and save it to the Clipboard.
Paste (Design Level)
design data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Design Level)
Delete (Design Level)
Use this command to remove the selected design from the database. A
the design and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Design Level)
Use this command to export the selected Designs data in XML format.
associated with the Design. A dialog will open, allowing you to supply
a directory and filename for the XML file.
Properties (Design Level)
Selecting this command allows you to view or edit Design properties.
The Design Properties dialog opens.
Design Properties Dialog
The Design Properties dialog is used to create a new design and to
provide information regarding creation and modification of the design.
This dialog contains two tabs: General and Audit.
General Tab (Design Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique design name that identifies the design, and to
provide additional information related to the design. This tab is also
used to lock the design and/or associated data to protect against
undesired changes to the data associated with the design. A design
Details
DesignType the name that will be used to identify the design.
The name must be unique.
VersionType the version of the design.
PhaseSelect the phase of the design from the drop-down list box
(Prototype, Planned or Actual). The list of phases that appear in
the combo box is filtered; you can only have one design marked as
"Planned" and one marked as "Actual." The Planned or Actual
option is removed from the drop-down list box if another design
for the same Wellbore already has it set. You can have as many
Prototype (the default) designs as desired.
Effective DateSelect the date from the drop-down list box. A
calendar dialog will open. Use the arrow buttons on the calendar
dialog to move to the desired month, then click on the day. The
date you selected will populate the field.
Depth Reference Information
Select the Depth Reference datum you want to use for this Design from
the drop-down list of Depth Reference datums that were defined at the
Well level. All other fields are display-only or calculated:
If the Design is locked box is checked...
Click arrows to
change to desired
month.
Click on the desired
day
Design is locked checkbox
Check this box to prevent editing of the design data. If this box is
Audit Tab (Design Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the design was created and to identify
page 61.
You can re-open the Design Properties dialog at any time to view or
edit the data by right-clicking on the Design name in the Well Explorer
and selecting Properties from the right-click menu.
Expand All (Design Level)
the selected design.
Collapse All (Design Level)
the selected Well.
Working at the Case Level (WELLPLAN Only)
In the Well Explorer, when you right click on a case, the right click
Command Description
Open Open the selected case (page 103).
Close Close the currently open case (page 103).
Clear Active
Workspace
Clear the active workspace (page 103).
New
Attachment
Copy Copy the selected case data to the Clipboard (page 103).
Open (Case Level)
Use this command to open the selected Case.
Close (Case Level)
Use this command to close the currently open Case. When prompted,
click Yes or No to indicate whether or not to save changes made to the
case.
Clear Active Workspace (Case Level)
Use this command to clear the active workspace. The active workspace
is stored in the database and contains the configuration and layout of
the tabs. If you are using a Module Workspace, this option will not
remove the workspace. If you no longer want to use the Module
Workspace, you must right-click on it in the Well Explorer, and select
Delete from the right-click menu.
New Attachment (Case Level)
Copy (Case Level)
Use this command to copy the selected case from the Well Explorer and
Paste Paste copied case information (page 99).
the name. (page 99)
Delete Delete the selected case and all associated child information
(page 104).
Export Export the selected cases hierarchical information to an XML
file (page 104).
Properties View or edit the case properties (page 104).
Paste (Case Level)
design data to the Clipboard.
Rename (Case Level)
Delete (Case Level)
Use this command to remove the selected case from the database. A
the case and all its associated data. Click Yes or No, as appropriate.
Export (Case Level)
Use this command to export the selected Cases data in XML format.
associated with the Case. A dialog will open, allowing you to supply a
Properties (Case Level)
Selecting this command allows you to view or edit Case properties. The
Case Properties dialog opens.
Case Properties Dialog
The Case Properties dialog is used to create a new case and to provide
information regarding creation and modification of the case. This
dialog contains four tabs: General, Job, Contact, and Audit.
General Tab (Case Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique case name that identifies the case, and to
provide additional information related to the case. This tab is also used
to lock the case and/or associated data to protect against undesired
changes to the data associated with the case. A case name is required.
Additional information on this dialog is used for informational and
reporting purposes and is not required.
Details
CaseType the name that will be used to identify the case. The
name must be unique.
DescriptionType a description of the case.
Case is locked checkbox
Check this box to prevent editing of the case data. If this box is checked
Job Tab (Case Properties Dialog)
Use to specify information about the case, particularly for cementing
jobs. Additional information on this dialog is used for informational
and reporting purposes and is not required.
If the Case is locked box is checked...
Job Details
DateYou must select the date from the calendar. To enable the
calendar, click the downward arrow or press F4. A calendar dialog
will open. Use the arrow buttons on the calendar dialog to move to
the desired month, then click on the day. The date you selected will
populate the field. If this case is a cement job, this will be the date
the cement job was run.
DescriptionType a short description of the job.
Pipe SizeType the pipe size. Although the pipe size can be
specified independent of the String Editor, the pipe size will
default from the outside diameter of the first casing listed in the
String Editor.
Click arrows to
change to desired
month.
Click on the desired
day
Contact Tab (Case Properties Dialog)
Use to specify contact information about the case. Additional
information on this dialog is used for informational and reporting
purposes and is not required.
Contact Details
CompanyType the name of the company associated with this
case.
RepresentativeType the name of the person to contact about this
case within the company.
AddressType the address of the representative or the address of
the company for this case.
TelephoneType the telephone number for the representative or
the company.
Audit Tab (Case Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the case was created and to identify the
page 61.
You can re-open the Case Properties dialog at any time to view or edit
the data by right-clicking on the Case name in the Well Explorer and
Working With Design- and Case-Associated Components
There are several data components that are associated at either the
Design or Case level; they are used to define the drilling problem that
you want to analyze. Associated components include:
Wellpaths
Hole Section Groups
Assemblies
Fluids
The components listed above are associated to a Design or a Case. One
component can be associated to multiple designs or cases. You can
copy and paste components from one case to another using the item's
right-click menu.
For conceptual information and associated rules, see Associated
Components on page 32 and Rules for Associating Components on
page 34.
About Associated Items and Well Explorer
All of these associated items, with the exception of fluids, are
automatically created and associated ("linked") by Well Explorer to the
design or case. (You cannot manually create or link these items.) Fluids
can be created/linked in WELLPLAN only, using the Fluid Editor.
However, all these items are visible in Well Explorer so that you can
copy and paste them using the right-click menu. For example, when you
copy a wellpath and paste it into a different design, the wellpath that
currently exists for the target design is deleted. Well Explorer replaces
the old wellpath with the copy of the new one.
Again, fluids are the exception. Only the WELLPLAN Fluid Editor can
delete fluids, so after pasting a fluid, the original fluid still exists. The
original fluid is no longer linked to anything. This cant be seen in Well
Explorer, but WELLPLAN can access this. Note that if the destination
case, or the fluid you are trying to replace, is locked, a message appears
and the paste is not completed.
Wellpaths
A wellpath is a series of survey tool readings that have been observed
in the same wellbore and increase with measured depth. All Cases
within the same design use the same wellpath.
A Pore Pressure group is a set of pore pressures that define the pore
pressure regime over a depth range from surface to some vertical depth.
All Cases within the same design use the same pore pressure.
A Fracture Gradient is a set of fracture pressures that define the fracture
gradient regime over a depth range from surface to some vertical depth.
All Cases within the same design use the same fracture gradient.
A Geothermal Gradient is a set of undisturbed earth temperatures that
define the temperatures over a depth range from the surface to some
vertical depth. All Cases within the same design use the same
geothermal gradient.
Hole Section Groups
A Hole Section defines the wellbore as the workstring would see it. For
example, a hole section may contain a riser, a casing section, and an
open hole section. A hole section can also have a tubing section or a
drill pipe section depending on the situation. Multiple cases may use
the same hole section or every case can have a different hole section.
Assemblies
An Assembly defines the workstring. There are several types of
workstrings, including coiled tubing, casing, drillstrings, liners, and
tubing strings. Multiple cases may use the same assembly or every case
can have a different assembly.
Fluids
A Fluid defines a drilling, cementing, or spacer fluid. A Fluid is linked
to a Case and a Case can have more than one fluid linked to it. One
fluid can be linked to multiple cases.
You can also create a fluid directly in WELLPLAN, using the Fluid
Editor.
Creating a New Fluid
1. From the WELLPLAN main menu, select Case > Fluid Editor. The
Fluid Editor dialog displays.
2. Click New. A dialog prompts you to provide the fluid name.
3. Specify the name of the fluid and click OK. The Fluid Editor,
populated with default data, displays.
4. Enter fluid data as needed.
5. Activate the fluid by selecting it and clicking Activate.
6. Save the Case.
7. Go to the Well Explorer and press F5 go refresh. You should see the
fluid is now listed in the Associated Data Viewer for that Case.
Associating a Fluid to a Case
You can associate an existing fluid to a case by highlighting the fluid
and using the right-click menu. On the right-click menu, select Copy.
Next, click on the case you want and use the right-click menu to Paste
(link) the fluid to the case.
Working With Catalogs
Catalogs are used as a selection list to design a casing, tubing, liner or
drillstring. Catalogs are not linked to a Design or Case. Read-only
catalogs are distributed with the software. Additional catalogs can be
created and these catalogs will allow changes. You can copy and paste a
catalog (including read-only catalogs) using the right-click menu;
copied catalogs are editable and can be customized. Custom catalogs
are useful because the catalog content can be customized to the
available pipes or other drilling products. You can also lock a catalog to
prevent changes.
You can create, copy, delete, export, and import catalogs, as well as
view their properties. Additionally, in WELLPLAN only, you can open,
save, or close a catalog.
The following catalogs are available:
Accelerator
Bits
Casing Shoes
Casing/Tubing
Casing/Tubing Connectors
Coiled Tubing
Centralizer
Coiled Tubing
Drill Collar
Drill Pipe
Eccentric Stabilizer
Heavy Weight
Hole Openers
Jar
Mud Motor
Mud Pumps
MWD
Packers
Port Collars/Diverter Subs/Circulating Subs
Stabilizer
Subs
Underreamers
For details about the fields in the various catalogs, see the online Help.
Creating a New Catalog
To create a new catalog:
1. In the Well Explorer, right click on the catalog category
(Accelerators, Centralizers, etc.) and select New. The Catalog
Properties dialog displays.
2. Specify the name of the catalog on the Catalog Properties dialog.
You may enter data into the new catalog using the drilling software,
or the Catalog Editor (to access Catalog Editor, select Start >
Programs > Landmark Engineers Desktop > Tools > Catalog
Editor.)
Copying a Catalog
To copy an existing catalog (read-only or otherwise) and paste it as a
new, customizable catalog:
1. Right click on the catalog you want to copy and select Copy.
2. Navigate back to the root of the catalog type, and right click; select
Paste.
3. The catalog will be copied to this location, and the contents will be
editable. By default, the name will be the same as the original,
except for the number one appended to the end of the name. This
number increments with subsequent copies. To change the default
name, right-click on the catalog and select Properties from the
right-click menu. In the Properties dialog, type the desired catalog
name in the Name field.
Deleting a Catalog
You cannot delete catalogs that are locked, and you can never delete
API catalogs. Be careful not to delete a catalog other database users
may need. To delete a catalog:
1. In the Well Explorer, right-click on the catalog you want to delete
and select Delete.
2. You will be asked to confirm the delete; click Yes to proceed. The
catalog will be deleted.
Exporting a Catalog
A catalog can be exported in XML format. You can then import it into a
different database EDM database.
1. In the Well Explorer, right-click on the catalog you want to export
and select Export.
2. A dialog appears, allowing you to provide a directory and filename
for the catalog, which will be saved as an XML file.
3. Click Save to proceed with the export.
Importing a Catalog
You can import a catalog that has been exported in XML format from a
EDM database.
1. In the Well Explorer, navigate to the root of the catalog tree and
right click; select Import.
2. A dialog appears, allowing you to provide a directory and filename
for the catalog, which will be saved as an XML file.
3. Click Save to proceed. The catalog will be imported.
Opening a Catalog
To open a catalog (WELLPLAN only):
1. In the Well Explorer, select the catalog you want to open and right-
click; select Open.
2. The catalog will open in the main window.
You can open a catalog in the Catalog Editor. To do so, select Start >
Programs > Landmark Engineers Desktop > Tools > Catalog
Editor.
Saving a Catalog
To save a catalog (WELLPLAN only):
1. With the catalog you want to save open in the main window, go to
the Well Explorer and right-click; select Save.
2. The catalog will be saved to the database.
File naming...
EDM Data Transfer File imports are not supported from paths containing
apostrophes or filenames containing apostrophes. Make sure that you do not use
apostrophes in filenames or folder names.
Closing a Catalog
To close a catalog (WELLPLAN only):
1. With the catalog open in the main window, go to the Well Explorer
and right-click; select Close.
2. If you have not yet saved the changes, you will be prompted to save
before closing.
3. The catalog will be closed.
Catalog Properties Dialog
The Properties dialog for ALL catalogs contains the two tabs: General
and Audit. These tabs are the same for all catalogs. The example below
shows the Properties dialog for an API Drill Collar catalog.
General Tab (Catalog Properties Dialog)
Use to specify a unique name that identifies the catalog, and to provide
additional information related to the catalog. This tab is also used to
lock the catalog to protect against undesired changes to the data
associated with the catalog. A catalog name is required.
The following fields are present on the General tab for all Catalog
Properties dialogs:
Details
NameType the name of the catalog. This must be unique.
DescriptionType a short description of the catalog.
Catalog is locked checkbox
The default catalogs distributed with the software are read-only and
locked. (A blue key beside the name of the catalog indicates that it is
locked.) The contents of the default catalogs cannot be changed.
Catalogs are exempt from the locked data password.
Audit Tab (Catalog Properties Dialog)
Use Audit Tab to display when the catalog was created and to identify
page 61.
You can re-open the Properties dialog for the catalog at any time to
view or edit the data by right-clicking on the catalog name in the Well
Chapter
Concepts and Tools
Overview
In this chapter, you will become familiar with using basic WELLPLAN
features.
In this section of the course, you will become familiar with:
Accessing the online documentation and tools
Menus and menu bars
Toolbars
Configuring units
Converting MD to TVD, or TVD to MD using the Convert Depth
dialog
Converting Field or Cell Units using the Convert Unit dialog
Defining tubular properties
Workspaces
Libraries
Using the Data Dictionary to change field names and descriptions
Viewing and configuring plots
Accessing the online help
4
Chapter 4: Concepts and Tools
Accessing Online Documentation and Tools
WELLPLAN is installed with online documentation to assist you with
using the product. This documentation can be found by using the Start
Menu. The default installation will create a program group titled
Landmark Engineers Desktop 2003.11. From there, you can select the
software you want to use, the Documentation sub-group, or the Tools
sub-group.
Using the Documentation sub-group, you may select:
z Help - This selection provides access to the online help for all the
EDT software applications. The online help is also accessible from
all windows, and dialogs in the software.
z Release Notes - This selection provides access to the release notes
for all the EDT software applications. Release notes provide useful
information about the current release, including: new features, bug
fixes, known problems, and how to get support when you need it.
z User Guides - This selection provides access to the EDT
Installation Guide.
z Integrated EDM Workflows - There are several documented
workflows involving WELLPLAN. Refer to this document for
suggested workflow steps.
Using the Main Window
The WELLPLAN Main Window is shown below. In this example, the
Well Explorer is displayed on the left. The Well Schematic on the right
is not displayed because the Case data has yet to be specified. In many
cases, data entry and reviewing analysis are performed in separate
windows that you can view simultaneously within the Main Window.
There are several distinct areas within the Main Window as shown in the
following figure.
Using the Well Explorer
For information on the Well Explorer, refer to Using the Well
Explorer on page 55.
Window Title Bar
Tabs
Status Bar
Title
Bar
Menu Bar
Module Toolbar
Wizard Toolbar
Standard
Toolbar
Graphic Toolbar
Associated Data
Viewer
Using the Menu Bar
After a case has been created or opened, the menu bar has more
selections. We will begin to look at these options more closely
The menu bar provides access to all tools available within the software.
It is organized as follows:
Select... To...
File Use the File Menu to create new companies, projects,
wells, wellbores, designs, cases and catalogs, delete
projects, wells, cases and catalogs, access import/export
functions, access print functions, and exit WELLPLAN.
Edit Use the Edit Menu to undo changes; cut, copy, and
paste information, and also specify or view information
related to the active windows contents. Use the Report
Header Setup option to specify the title to use on the
output, and to specify the logo (bitmap) to place on the
output.
Modules Use the Modules Menu to access the various
WELLPLAN modules, including: Torque Drag,
Hydraulics, Well Control, Surge, Cementing-OptiCem,
Critical Speed, Bottom Hole Assembly, Stuck Pipe and
Notebook.
Case Use the Case Menu to enter data that will be used for all
analysis modes associated with the selected analysis
module. Therefore, the contents of the Case Menu will
vary depending on the module chosen (i.e. Torque
Drag, Hydraulics, Surge, Well Control, etc.).
The Case Menu has dialogs and spreadsheets for
gathering information pertaining to the case you are
defining. Most of the information entered in this menus
options will be used for many or possibly all modules
and module analysis modes. Some Case menu options
are only available for gathering information pertaining
to specific WELLPLAN modules. Also, the menu
options available may vary by analysis mode. You must
enter information on all dialogs visible in the Case
menu for the selected analysis mode before you can
proceed with the analysis.
Parameter Use the Parameter Menu to enter analysis parameters
for the chosen analysis mode. The contents of the
Parameter Menu vary depending on the analysis mode
chosen.The Parameter Menu will be discussed in detail
later in the course.
Hole Section The Hole Section Menu is only available when the
Case > Hole Section Editor is active. Use this menu to
access catalog details for a hole section.
String The String Menu is only available when the Case >
String Editor is active. Use this menu to display the
catalog or specific information about a workstring
component.
View The View menu is used to calculate results or toggle
auto-calculation; toggle on and off several window
components; display plots, tables, and reports for
analysis; and display schematics, fluid plots, and survey
plots.
Tools The Tools Menu is used to add, remove, edit, and select
unit systems. You can also use this menu to specify
grade, material, and class tubular properties.
Help Access the online Help, current version info.
Select... To...
Working With Units
Configuring Unit Systems
Use the Tools > Unit System dialog to add, remove, edit, and switch
unit systems. The unit system for the design is stored at the Well level.
All unit systems are stored in the database.
The Unit System dialog always contains two or more tabs arranged
along its upper left corner, one for each available unit system stored in
the database. The two left-most tabs are always API and SI. When this
dialog is opened, the tab containing the unit system associated with the
active well highlights.
Most numerical dialog fields and spreadsheet cells are associated with a
physical parameter such as depth, stress, or temperature, and each
physical parameter is expressed in a unit. To switch to a different unit
system, simply select another tab and then click OK.
The status bar at the bottom of the screen displays the name of the unit
system currently in use. Unit system is set at the Well level, and affects
all wellbores, designs, and cases below it.
Active unit set is
selected using the
drop-down list.
Click New to create a
unit system.
Click Delete to delete a unit set that you
have created.
Click Edit to edit a unit
set you have created.
You can not edit the
API or SI unit sets.
Converting MD to TVD, or TVD to MD
Use the Convert Depth dialog to convert between measured depth (MD)
(TVD). All conversions are based on the deviation specified in the Case
> Wellpath > Wellpath Editor.
To access the Convert Depth dialog, press the F9 key while using any
spreadsheet or dialog within WELLPLAN, except for the dialogs
associated with the Well Explorer (Company properties, well properties,
etc.)
Using the Convert Depth Dialog:
1. Access a spreadsheet of dialog within WELLPLAN. For this
example, access Case > Hole Section Editor.
2. Click in the Hole Section Depth (MD) field, or any other field.
3. Press F9. The Convert Depth dialog is displayed.
4. Type a depth into the MD field to convert MD to TVD, or type the
depth into the TVD field to convert a TVD to MD.
5. Click the MD to TVD if you are converting MD to TVD button, or
click the TVD to MD button if you are converting TVD to MD.
6. If you were converting MD to TVD, the TVD associated with the
specified MD is displayed. Otherwise, the MD associated with the
specified TVD is displayed.
7. Click the X in the upper-right corner of the dialog to close the
Convert Depth dialog.
Converting Field or Cell Units
Use this dialog to view data entered into a field or cell in another unit.
This process does not change the unit system. To change the unit
system, use Tools > Unit Systems.
Using the Convert Depth Dialog will not change your data...
The converted value is view-only, and therefore will not be written to the cell/field
after the dialog is closed.
Access the Convert Unit dialog by pressing F4 when an editable
spreadsheet cell or dialog field is selected.
Using the Units Dialog:
1. Access a spreadsheet of dialog within WELLPLAN. For this
example, access Case > String Editor.
2. Click in an OD field, or any other field.
3. Press F4. The Convert Units dialog is displayed.
4.
For this example, click in the OD field.
Note that the default value
and unit is based on the
entry in the String Editor.
Select another unit and the
converted value will be
displayed. Click OK to
close the dialog. The value
in the String Editor will not
be changed.
Defining Tubular Temperature Deration, Grade,
Material and Class
Tubular properties can be changed using the Tools menu. Tubular
properties include temperature deration, material, grade and class.
These properties are used to describe the well tubulars and other
components used in the wellbore and workstring editors. You can add
additional properties, edit existing properties, or delete entire rows as
you can with any spreadsheet in the system.
Temperature Deration
Use the Tools > Tubular Properties > Temperature Deration
spreadsheet to specify the temperature deration schedules for materials
by specifying temperatures and their associated yield correction factors.
Material
Use the Tools > Tubular Properties > Material dialog to compile a list
of material types and associated properties. Material is used to define the
density of the material, Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio for tubular
and other components. This list is used as a selection list while defining
a grade on the Tools > Tubular Properties > Grade spreadsheet.
You must enter a unique name to identify the material. To define this
material, enter a description of the material, and the Youngs Modulus,
Poissons Ratio, and density of the material.
Tubular Grades
The Tools > Tubular Properties > Grade spreadsheet consists of two
spreadsheets. Use the grades section of the spreadsheet to compile a list
of grades and associated properties. This list is used as a selection list
while defining a component using catalogs. Use the Section Types drop-
down list to select the section types that have this material grade.
You must enter a unique name to identify the grade. To define the grade,
specify the material, minimum yield strength, fatigue endurance limit,
and ultimate tensile strength.
Rows cannot be inserted into or deleted from the Grades section of the
spreadsheet.
To Insert a Row into the Section Types List:
Enter data in the last blank row of the list, or highlight a row in the list
and use Edit > Insert Row(s).
To Delete a Row in the Section Types List:
Highlight the row in the list you want to delete and use Edit > Delete
Row(s).
To insert a row add to the bottom of the existing list. You must
enter data in each column.
Class
Use Tools > Tubular Properties > Class dialog to compile a list of
tubular classes and associated properties. This list is used as a selection
list while defining a component using catalogs.
You must enter a unique name to identify the class. To define the class,
you must specify the wall thickness, and enter a short description. The
wall thickness percentage is used to calculate the existing outside
diameter of the tubular using the Pipe Wall Thickness Modification Due
to Pipe Class Calculations.
Select section type from
this drop-down list.
The section types listed can use the selected
grade.
To insert a row add to the bottom of the
existing list. You must enter data in each
column
Using Halliburton Cementing Tables
Click Tools > Halliburton Cementing Tables to access an online
version of the traditional Redbook. You can use the Cementing Tables
to determine hole capacities, tubular/casing displacements,
tubing/casing strength and dimensions, volumes between tubing and
casing, etc.
Configuring Sound Effects
Use Tools > Sound Effects to toggle (on or off) any sound effects
related to WELLPLAN program operation. When the menu option is
checked, sound effects are on. When the menu option is unchecked,
sound effects are off.
Using the Online Help
The Help Menu has several available options. Help can be accessed by
pressing the F1 key, selecting Help from the Menu bar, or by clicking
the Help button available on many dialogs.
Contents displays the online help topics grouped together in a logical
format.
Use About WELLPLAN to determine what version and build number
you are using. This is very helpful information if you are contacting
WELLPLAN support.
Using Tool Bars
After a case has been created or opened, you can see that the toolbar
choices on the Main Window have been expanded. Toolbars have
buttons you can use to quickly perform common operations, such as file
management commands and engineering functions.
There are several toolbars. Each toolbar is outlined by a single line, so
you can tell what is included in each toolbar. Toolbars are normally
found just below the menu bar, but they can be undocked and moved
to other areas within the application window. They can also be removed
from view using View > Toolbars. Toolbar buttons are grayed out when
they are not applicable to what you are currently doing.
Enabling Toolbars
Use View > Toolbars command to enable or disable the Standard,
Module, Wizard and Graphics toolbars. To enable or disable a toolbar,
simply click the appropriate check box, which will either add it or
remove it from the screen.
By default, all toolbars are normally displayed directly below the menu
bar. Although the print preview toolbar will not be displayed until you
select File > Print Preview. However, all toolbars are dockable, which
means they can be moved around the screen and adjusted to fit your
needs.
To move a toolbar, click anywhere on the toolbars light grey border and
drag it away from its original position. After you release the mouse
button, the toolbar resides in a palette window which floats above the
application frame. After a toolbar has been undecked, it can be moved
to another portion of the screen by clicking anywhere in its light gray
border, or title bar and then dragging it. To re-dock an undocked toolbar,
simply drag it to any edge of the application frame. When the toolbar
approaches a valid docking position, its border will suddenly change. At
this point, you can release the mouse button. After you release the
Click to turn on the toolbar.
mouse button, the positions of any overlapping toolbars will be adjusted
to accommodate the new toolbar.
Using the Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar provides easy access to common file management
and printing commands.
Using the Module Toolbar
The Module toolbar provides access to the engineering modules. You
can also access the engineering modules by using the Modules Menu.
Open Case
Calculate
Auto Calculate
Help
Copy
Cut
Undo
Print Preview
Print
New
Save Active Case or Catalog
Paste
Maximize/Restore
Toggle Status Message Window
Well Explorer
Recent Bar
Hydraulics
Notebook Surge
Well Control
Torque Drag
Critical Speed
Bottom Hole Assembly
OptiCem - Cementing
Stuck Pipe
Using the Graphics Toolbar
The Graphics toolbar provides access to graphical functions and is only
available when a plot is active in the current window. If the Graphics
Toolbar is grey, click once on the plot and the toolbar selections will
become available. Refer to Configuring Plot Properties on page 138
Using the Wizard Toolbar
The Wizard toolbar provides access to analysis modes, and data entry
forms.
Data Reader
Legend
Swap Axis
Line
Properties
Turns off the functions enabled by some Graphics toolbar buttons
Grid View
Rescale
Mode drop-down list
to select desired
analysis mode.
Wizard drop-down
list to guide you
through data entry.
Next
Previous
Using Wellpath Plots and Schematics
Using Well Schematics
The Well Schematics are accessed using View > Schematics. There are
three schematics to choose from including full-scale and not-to-scale.
The Schematic is a tool to display a graphical image of the active
wellbore and workstring defined using the case menu. On the
Schematic, the workstring components will be defined, and casing shoes
will be indicated. By default the well schematic is displayed when you
open a case.
Open hole
section
Riser
Casing
Right-click anywhere on the schematic and select
Header On/Off to turn display or remove the
heading information.
Viewing Wellpath Plots
Several different wellpath plots are available, regardless of the
engineering analysis you are performing. These plots include:
Vertical section
Plan view
Dogleg severity
Inclination
Azimuth
Absolute tortuosity
Relative tortuosity
Build-plane curvature
Walk-plane curvature
Accessing Wellpath Plots
Wellpath plots can be accessed by:
Right-click on the Case > Wellpath > Editor and select a survey
plot.
Similarly, you can right-click on the Case > Wellpath > View
w/Interpolation or Case > Wellpath > View w/Tortuosity editors
to view the survey plots.
Use View > Wellpath Plots and select the desired plot.
Printing and Print Preview
Printing or preview printing of output is very similar to other software
you are probably familiar with.
Use File > Print to print the current plot or view.
Use File > Print Preview to preview the item prior to printing it.
Use File > Page Setup to set the margins of the page prior to printing.
Use File > Print Setup to select and configure the printer, sand to select
the page size and orientation.
Configuring Plot Properties
Changing Curve Line Properties
To alter the appearance of a curve on the plot, click the right mouse
button when the cursor is on the curve line. Using the menu that opens,
you can hide the line, freeze the line, or change the appearance of the
line. When you hide a line, it disappears from the plot. Freeze line is a
useful feature for sensitivity analysis. When you freeze the line, and then
alter some of the analysis data that the plot is based on, the frozen line
will be displayed along with the analysis data.
Properties button
Plot toolbar
Using Freeze Line
Freeze Line is a very useful feature for sensitivity analysis. When a line
is frozen, you can specify a unique name for the line that will be
displayed in the legend. When the analysis data is changed, the frozen
line will remain on the plot along with the new curve data. This enables
easy comparison of results for sensitivity analysis.
Use line properties to change line
color, width, and style.
Using the Plot Properties Tabs
This Plot Properties dialog has tabs for customizing the currently active
pane or the currently active view within the pane, such as plots or tables.
You must have a view currently active before you can select this option.
Accessing the Plot Properties Tabs
This section describes how to configure, and customize plots. There are
seven property tabs containing many different configuration options.
You may also customize a line or curve on the plot by moving the cursor
over the line, and clicking the right mouse button.
You can access the Plot Properties tabs four ways:
z Click the right mouse button on the plot (but not over a line) a list
of the associated plots, maximize/minimize options, graph/grid and
an option to access plot properties will appear for your selection.
z Double-click on any plot.
z Use Edit > Properties when a plot is active.
z Click on the plot and then selecting the Properties button on the
Plot toolbar.
Use the Plot Properties
tabs to change many
aspects of an active plot or
table.
Changing the Scale
Use the Plot Properties > Scale tab to define axis limits.
Configuring the Axis
Use the Plot Properties > Axis tab to define how and where the axis
will be displayed.
Click Use the same scale for
both axes to choose the largest
of the two specified (X and Y)
scales, and use this scale for both
axis.
Click Auto to allow the axis range to be calculated based on the
limits of the data being displayed. This is the default.
Click Fixed Range to specify
range limits.
Click Fixed Scale to specify a
fixed number of units per inch (or
cm) on the printed page for the X
and Y axis.
Click Draw axis
at the edges of
the graph
to keep the axis
lines at the edges
of the graph.
Changing the Grid
Use the Plot Properties > General/Grid tab to define the grid, tick
marks, and graph border.
Mark Show Grid to display a grid on the plot.
Mark Border around the graph to include a thin black line
around the outside of the plot area.
Specify the spacing of the major tick
marks when printing the plot.
Specify the number of minor tick marks.
Changing the Axis Labels
Use the Plot Properties > Labels tab to specify axis labels (text).
Changing the Font
Use the Font tab to specify fonts for axis labels, and tick labels.
Type labels for the X
and Y axes in their
respective fields.
Click Axis Label to specify axis label font.
Click Tick Label to specify tick font.
Click Data Labels to specify data label font.
Changing the Line Styles
Use the Plot Properties > Line Styles tab to specify color, style and
width of lines used for the axis and the grid.
You can specify one set
of lines for displaying on
the screen and another
set for printing.
Click... to
display
available
colors.
Using Data Markers
Use the Plot Properties > Markers tab to specify the use, size and
frequency of data point markers.
Click Every
to specify the
frequency of the
data markers. You
must specify a
numeric value to
indicate the
frequency to place
data markers.
Mark Show Data Markers to turn on data markers or
symbols. The default setting is unchecked (no data
symbols).
Mark Always one at the end to assure the last
point on the curve always has a marker even if the
frequency specified means the point would not have
a marker.
Configuring the Legend
Use the Legend tab to specify whether a legend should be displayed, and
to customize legends, including title, font, and location.
Specify the number of columns the legend box
should use. This is only relevant if several
curves are represented in the legend.
Mark Show all lines to specify that all lines should
be shown.
Mark Show Legend to display a legend.
Click Font to customize the font
used for the legend.
Specify the title displayed in the legend.
Changing the Plot Background Color
Use the Plot Properties > Background tab to specify the background
color or a bitmap for plots. This tab is only available when a plot is the
currently active view.
Check this box if you
want the background
color or bitmap
applied only to the
grid area of the plot.
Click Color to select a
color for the background.
Click Bitmap to use a
bitmap as the
background. You must
specify the location of the
bitmap.
Mark Center to
display the bitmap in
the center of the plot.
Mark Stretch to Fit to
stretch the bitmap to
fill the plot.
Mark Maintain Aspect
Ratio if you want to
stretch the bitmap to fit
the grid or graph but
maintain the same
dimension ratio.
Using Libraries
What is a Library?
A Library (Libraries) is a WELLPLAN tool. You can use this tool to
store work strings or fluids for future use. Once a work string or fluid is
stored in a library, you can retrieve (import) it quickly and easily to
create a new fluid or work string based on the retrieved string or fluid.
For example, you can use a workstring library to store commonly used
assemblies. Once a workstring is imported from a library, you can edit
it to meet your current objectives.
A library should not be confused with a catalog. A catalog contains a
collection of similar workstring components that can be used to build a
workstring. For example, there are jar catalogs, or drill pipe catalogs. A
library is used to store the complete workstring, not a certain type of
workstring component.
You can use the fluid library to store commonly used fluids. Each fluid
entry in the library includes all the data required to define that fluid, such
as rheological model, weight, gel strength, etc. As with workstring
library entries, once you have imported a fluid from a library into the
case you are working with, you can edit the data as desired.
Using String Libraries
Creating or Deleting a String Library Entry
1. Using the Case > String Editor, input the string.
2. Click the Export button to export the string to the library. This will
not remove the string from the String Editor. A copy of the string
is added to the string library.
3. Specify the Assembly Name in the dialog that appears and click
Export.
Retrieving a String From the String Library
1. Using the Case > String Editor, click the Import button to export
the string to the library.
2. A message will appear indicating that any current string data will
be overwritten. Click Yes to continue.
Click the Delete button
to delete the highlighted
string library entry.
3. Highlight the string that you want to use from the list of string
library entries.
4. Click Import and the String Editor will be filled with data from
the library entry you selected.
Using Fluid Libraries
Importing, Exporting, Deleting, and Renaming a Fluid Library Entry
1. Using the Case > Fluid Editor, input the fluid.
2. Click the Library button.
3. Using the Import/Export Fluids dialog, select the wellbore fluids
you want to move to the library, or select the library fluid(s) you
want to move to the wellbore fluids. Use the arrows to move the
fluids after you have selected them.
Exporting a Library
Libraries can be shared with other users by exporting them at the
database level.
1. Right-click on the database icon in the Well Explorer.
2. Select Export from the menu.
3. Specify the file name of the library export file.
4. Click Save. The file will be saved with the extension .lib.xml.
Click the Delete key to
delete the highlighted
fluids from either the library
or the wellbore fluid list.
Click the Rename key to
rename the highlighted
fluids from either the library
or the wellbore fluid list.
Using Workspaces
What is a Workspace
A workspace is a template for how you want tabs, panes, arrangement
of plots within panes, etc. to appear in WELLPLAN. No default data is
stored in workspace.
There are three types of workspaces:
z System Workspace - System Workspaces are read-only, and are
shipped with the EDM database. You may apply them, but not alter
them. There is a separate System Workspace for each module.
z Module Workspace - Module Workspaces will apply
automatically when you activate a given module (Hydraulics,
Surge, etc.). To save a workspace as a Module Workspace, select
File > Workspace > Save As Default. It will automatically apply
the module tool tip name as the default module workspace name.
You may import new module workspaces or delete them, but you
cannot edit the name of any module workspace. Module
workspaces are stored on a per-user basis. There is one module
workspace per module. To delete a module workspace, right-click
on it in the Well Explorer and select Delete from the right-click
menu.
z User Workspace - You can save any workspace as a User
Workspace, so long as it has a unique name. Workspaces always
have a .ws.xml extension. To save a workspace as a user workspace,
select File > Workspace > Save, or right-click on the workspace in
the tree and select New. Provide a name and click OK. You can
import and export user workspaces. Importing user workspaces is
an add/replace function; that is, if the name already exists on the
target, the imported workspace will overwrite it. When exporting,
you must give the workspace a .ws.xml extension.
Applying a Workspace
Any of the three workspaces can be applied to the currently opened case.
Workspaces can only be applied to open cases. To apply a workspace,
select File > Workspace > Apply. You can also apply a workspace by
double-clicking on the workspace in the Well Explorer.
Configuring a User Workspace
A user workspace is configured by creating and populating tabs using
windows and window panes. This section discusses this process.
Using a Window
Each open case occupies one window, and each window belongs to one
case. A window can contain one or more screen layers, which are
selected using the tabs along the bottom edge of the window. Each layer
contains one or more window panes, and each pane can contain different
contents. In addition, each pane may contain scroll bars, which become
active when the contents are too large to fit inside the frame. The frame
governs the amount and location of the screen space taken up by each
window. It is the thin gray border around each pane and around the
window.
Windows exist in one of three states:
Maximized - the window takes up all of the available space within
the application frame
Minimized - an icon within the application frame
Restored - original size and position
If a window is in its restored state, it will have a Title Bar. The Title Bar
is the thick colored band along the top of the window. The center of the
title bar contains the name of the active spreadsheet, table, plot, or
schematic, and the name of the case to which the window belongs. The
left edge of the title bar contains the Window Control Menu, and the
right edge contains three buttons. The first is the Minimize button, the
second is the Maximize button, and the third is the close button. At any
given time there is one and only one active window, and it belongs to the
active case. A colored title bar denotes the active window; all others are
gray.
Using Window Panes
Each window contains one or more layers, and each layer can contain
different information. A pane frames information, such as a well
schematic, spreadsheet, table or plot. Light gray dividers denote panes.
By default, each layer contains only one pane, but you can split this into
up to four panes using the window splitters located at the ends of the
scroll bars.
To vertically split the screen, the splitter is in the lower left corner of the
windowpane. To horizontally split the screen, the splitter is in the upper
right corner of the windowpane
Window Title Bar
Window panes (2)
Scroll bar
Scroll bar
Window splitter
Tabs
Using Tabs
Each window contains one or more layers (tabs), and each layer can
contain different information. Only one layer is visible at any given
time. To switch between layers, use the mouse to select the associated
tab. Tabs are arranged along the lower left edge of the window, a region
that they share with the window's horizontal scroll bars. You can control
the amount of space allocated to each using a splitter. As you drag this
splitter left and right, the amount of room available in which to display
tabs grows and shrinks. If there is not enough room to display all of the
tabs, you can scroll through them using the tab scroll buttons.
Note that you can add, delete, rename and re-order tabs using the View
> Tabs dialog. You can also double-click the tab, and the Rename Tab
dialog opens.
Adding and Naming Tabs
Use View > Tabs to add, delete, rename, and rearrange window tabs.
.
To Add a Tab
1. Use View > Tabs to access the Tab Manager dialog.
2. Click New. The new tab appears at the bottom of the list and is
highlighted. It also appears as the right-most tab at the bottom of
the well file window.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each tab you want created.
4. When finished, click OK.
Use the arrow buttons to
move the highlighted tab to
another position in the tab
list.
Renaming a Tab
2. Double-click the tab you want renamed. The Rename Tab dialog
appears.
3. Type the new name in the Tab Name field.
4. Click OK. The Rename Tab dialog closes.
Repositioning a Tab
2. Highlight the tab name in the list to be repositioned.
3. Do one of the following:
Click to move the tab to the top of the list. The tab will be placed
in the left-most position of the active window.
Click to move the tab up one level in the list. Each level up
places the tab one position to the left in the active window.
Click to move the tab down one level in the list. Each level down
places the tab one position to the right in the active window.
Click to move the tab to the bottom of the list. The tab will be
placed in the right-most position of the active window.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each tab you want repositioned.
5. When finished, click OK.
Saving the User Workspace Configuration
After you have configured the workspace, you can save the
configuration for future use with the File > Workspace > Save option.
Using Data Status Tooltips and Status Messages
Click View > Status Messages to toggle the functionality between
active and inactive. If the option is active, a check mark will be visible
beside the option. If this option is active, the last engineering analysis
error (if any) will be displayed as a tooltip when the mouse is placed
over a calculated field in a Quick Look section of a dialog. If the dialog
doesnt have a Quick Look section, this option does not apply.
When View > Status Messages is active, a message window at the
bottom of the active window indicating any error messages generated
from analysis results.
Status messages and
Tool Tips indicate that
Pump Pressure can not
be zero.
Status Message
Tool Tip
Configuring Tool Tips and Field Descriptions
You can configure the tool tip and descriptions for many fields in
WELLPLAN. This is a convenient feature that can be used to re-label
fields in another language, or to change the description for other reasons.
For example:
1. Access the Case > Geothermal Gradient dialog.
2. Place the cursor in the Surface Ambient field.
3. Press F7.
4. Using the Data Dictionary dialog that appears, change the Custom
Description and Custom Label for this field.
Notice the field name.
Change the field description
and label.
5.
6.
Notice the field label as
changed on the Case >
Geothermal Gradient dialog.
Notice the tool tip for this field has
also changed.
Chapter
Describing the Case Using the Case
Menu
Overview
In this section of the course, you will become familiar with entering data
that describes the general characteristics of the Case. Data input using
the Case menu will be used in all analysis modes of a particular analysis
module. Therefore, the contents of the Case menu vary depending on the
analysis module you are using. In this chapter, only the Case menu items
that are used in more than one analysis module will be discussed. The
Case menu options that are available in only one analysis module will
be covered during the discussion of that particular module.
The Case is defined or created using the Well Explorer. Please refer to
Working at the Case Level (WELLPLAN Only) on page 102 for more
information on creating a Case. After a Case is created, use the Case
menu to describing the Case. This chapter discusses the use of the Case
menu to define some of the properties of the Case. In this section of the
course, you will become familiar with:
Defining the hole section
Defining the workstring
Managing wellpath data
Defining and activating drilling fluids
Specifying circulating system equipment
Specifying pore pressure data
Specifying fracture pressure data
Specifying geothermal temperature data
Defining string eccentricity
5
Chapter 5: Describing the Case Using the Case Menu
Entering Case Data
The Case menu (a selection on the menu bar) is used to enter data
including hole sections, workstring, fluid, etc. The contents of the Case
menu will change depending on the module you have selected because
modules require different information about the well. Later, we will use
the Parameter menu to enter additional data specific to the analysis type
you are performing.
It is recommended that you begin entering data in the first menu item
available on the case menu and work your way down the menu
selections. You can use the Wizard Toolbar to enter data in the proper
order.
Defining the Hole Section Geometry
The Case > Hole Section Editor is used to define the inner
configuration of the well including the components of the hole section
and the material properties of the components. Open hole sections are
also defined using the Hole Section Editor. The well configuration can
be entered entirely using the Hole Section Editor or can be copied from
another Case using the Well Explorer. Refer to Working With Design-
and Case-Associated Components on page 108 for more information
about copying associated items.
The Hole Section is associated to a particular Case. Refer to Associated
Data Components on page 57 for more information concerning the
Well Explorer and linked data items.
Since a Design (as defined in the Well Explorer, Working at the Design
Level on page 98) can have multiple Cases, you need to enter data into
the Hole Section Editor to define the well profile and well depth of a
particular Case for analysis. The hole section configuration is common
for all WELLPLAN modules while analyzing the Case the hole section
is associated to.
You must enter the hole section information from the surface down to
the bottom of the well. When you make a selection from a Section Type
cell (other then Open Hole), a dialog specific to that section type
appears. You must fill in the data in the dialog in order for that section
type to be recorded in that cell. You also must fill in all editable cells in
the spreadsheet row.
Hole Section Editor Menu
When the Hole Section Editor is visible, the menu bar has an additional
menu option available. This menu option titled Hole Section is used to
access the catalog.
Defining a Work String
The Case > String Editor is used to define all types of tubular work
strings and their components. Casing, liner, tubing, coiled tubing, and
Note: Using the effective hole diameter...
For cased sections, specify the effective hole diameter of the hole into which the
casing is inserted. (Do NOT enter the casing OD.) This diameter is used for surge
calculations to compute the elastic properties. For open hole sections, the effective
hole diameter is used to represent the actual size of the hole. Volume Excess % is
calculated based on effective hole diameter.
If you import a caliper log into WELLPLAN, you should double-check the values
for any rows labeled Open Hole. The Import Caliper Log function takes the number
of blocks specified by the user and creates the same number of rows in the
spreadsheet, averaging the individual measured hole diameters into each section
described in the spreadsheet. Logs that start at the bottom of the casing may not
continue all the way to the top of the well, in which case the first geometry may
need to be added to the top of the outer geometry table after performing the import.
Washed out portions of a well may cause the caliper to record values such as
-999.0, which represents an unknown value. If any value is blank, you must enter
an appropriate diameter by typing it into the spreadsheet.
Each row
defines a
section of the
hole.
For cased sections, specify the effective hole diameter of the hole
into which the casing is inserted. (Do NOT enter the casing OD.)
This diameter is used for surge calculations to compute elastic
properties. For open hole sections, the effective hole diameter is
used to represent the actual size of the hole.
Volume Excess % is
calculated based on
effective hole
diameter.
drill strings are all defined using this spreadsheet. Strings can be entered
from the top down or from the bottom up. You must specify the length
of the section and several other defining properties of the section that
will be used in further analysis. String depth is an important item on this
form, and indicates the bit depth used in many of the analysis modes.
When you make a selection from a Section Type cell, a dialog specific
to that section type appears. You must fill in the data in the dialog in
order for that section type to be recorded in that cell. You also must fill
in all editable cells in the spreadsheet row.
Workstrings can be entered entirely, or can be copied from another Case
using the Well Explorer. Refer to Associated Data Components on
Since a Design (as defined in the Well Explorer, Working at the Design
Level on page 98) can have multiple Cases, you need to enter data in
this editor to define the workstring of a particular Case. The workstring
configuration is used for all WELLPLAN modules while analyzing the
Case the workstring is associated to.
To edit or view information concerning a particular component, click
any data cell pertaining to the component and then use String > Data.
Enter string depth. It will
be used in many analysis
modes.
Select string entry order. Select from
Top-to-Bottom, or Bottom-To-Top.
Click on a component, then use String >
Catalog to access the catalog for a
component or use String > Data to edit
the data for a component.
Click the Export button to export a string
to the library. Click the Import button to
import the string from the library. The
String Name field on this spreadsheet is
the unique identifier for the string when
importing or exporting from/to a library.
Refer to Using Libraries on page 148.
You can change much of the information describing the component on
the Data dialog, however these changes are not made to the catalog entry
corresponding to the component. You must use the Well Explorer to
change the catalog entry. Refer to Working With Catalogs on
page 110 for more information. On the component data dialog there are
some material property cells that can not be edited. This information is
related to the grade, class and material selected for the component from
the drop-down lists. Use Tools > Tubular Properties to add or edit
component material types, grades, or class.
Managing Wellpath Data
The Case > Wellpath menu item has a submenu. Use these menu
choices to enter wellpath data, apply tortuosity to the wellpaths, and
define survey calculation methods.
Importing Wellpath Files
You can import survey data points using File > Import > Wellpath
File. This is useful if you have wellpath data from a source other than
another Landmark software product.
A wellpath file must meet the following requirements to be imported
using this option.
The data must be in ASCII format or reside in the Windows
Clipboard.
Use Tools > Tubular
Properties to edit the tubular
material types, material
properties, grades, or classes
available for selection on the
drop-down list.
The data must be in columns, each separated by a comma, tab,
or blank space. If you are using the Clipboard to import from
Excel, use Tab as the column delimiter.
Each row must have the same format.
The measured depth, inclination and azimuth must be in a
supported unit.
Entering Wellpath Data
Use Case > Wellpath > Editor to enter wellpath data points. You must
specify measured depth, inclination, and azimuth. The rest of the
information displayed in the non-editable cells will be calculated for
you. Wellpath data is calculated using the minimum curvature method.
Specify data order.
Specify data units.
Import from a file or
from the Clipboard.
Enter MD, INC, and AZ. The
remaining fields are calculated
The checkbox is disabled for
non-actual designs. For actual
designs, you can click on the box
and WELLPLAN generates a
definitive survey path from actual
surveys (i.e. enter surveys in
OpenWells and use this to
generate from this entered data).
After selecting the box, the
definitive survey becomes locked
(since it is calculated). If the box
is not checked, the definitive
survey editor returns to its
previous state.
Setting Wellpath Options
Use Case > Wellpath > Options to add tortuosity to a wellpath, or to
interpolate between data points. You can add tortuosity to wellpath data
points. Tortuosity is designed to apply a rippling to a planned wellpath
to simulate the variations found in actual surveys. Tortuosity should
never be applied to actual survey data.
The three tortuosity methods available are sine wave, random
inclination dependent azimuth, and random inclination and azimuth.
The sine wave modifies the inclination and azimuth of the survey based
on the concept of a sine wave shaped ripple running along the wellbore.
The random methods apply random variation to the inclination and
azimuth. This method is based on SPE 19550. Refer to the online help
or to Tortuosity on page 244 for more information.
Viewing Wellpaths w/Tortuosity
Case > Wellpath > View w/Tortuosity data is only available if
tortuosity has been applied using the Case > Wellpath > Options
dialog. This spreadsheet displays a read-only view of the wellpath that
had tortuosity applied.
Magnitude is the maximum variation of angle
that will be applied to the inclination and
azimuth of the native (untortured) wellpath.
For the Sine Wave method this is the
wavelength of the ripple. For the Random
methods, the Angle Change Period is used to
normalize the measured depth distance
between wellpath points.
Wellpath data is calculated at the
interval specified.
Select one
tortuosity method.
Viewing Wellpath w/Interpolation
The survey data displayed using Case > Wellpath > View
w/Interpolation is a read-only view of the interpolated survey data set.
If interpolation is not applied in the Case > Wellpath > Options dialog,
a default interval of 30 ft will be used. Interpolated survey data is added
to the surveys specified in the Case > Wellpath > Editor.
Defining the Active Fluid and Fluid Properties
Defining Drilling Fluids
Use Case > Fluid Editor to define drilling fluids, including muds,
cements, spacers, etc. All fluids analyzed using WELLPLAN must be
defined using this editor. Most analysis modules will use the fluid
marked as active on this editor. Surge and Cementing have the option of
Most cells in this
spreadsheet are
read-only.
Most cells in this
spreadsheet are
read-only.
using more than one fluid in the analysis by specifying the fluids used
on the Parameter > Job Data dialog. However, the fluids must be
defined using Case > Fluid Editor before the fluid can be selected using
the Parameter > Job Data dialog. Refer to Defining the Wellbore
Fluids and Specifying Pump Rates on page 415 for the use of the
Parameter > Job Data dialog in Surge. Refer to Defining the Cement
Job Fluids on page 460 for the use of the Parameter > Job Data dialog
in Cementing.
Four rheology models are available, including: Power Law, Bingham
Plastic, Newtonian, and Herschel Bulkley. For each model you can
choose to enter PV/YP data or Fann data. For more information on
rheology models, refer to Power Law Model on page 332, Bingham
Plastic Model on page 331, or Herschel Bulkley Model on page 332.
Refer to the online help
for detailed field
descriptions.
Click Activate to activate the
selected fluid. Data for the
selected fluid is displayed in
the dialog.
Check the Cement box
to define a cement.
Click Library to access the
fluid library. Refer to Using
Libraries on page 148 for
more information.
Specify Circulating System Equipment
Use the two tabs on the Case > Circulating System dialog to specify
surface equipment and mud pumps data. On the Surface Equipment tab,
you may choose one of four pre-defined surface equipment
configurations.
To enter the expected
pressure loss through
the surface
equipment, click
Specify Pressure
Loss.
To calculate it, click
Calculate Pressure
Loss.
Select the
category of
surface
equipment that
you want to use
from the drop-
down list. You
dont need to
select or specify a
surface
equipment
configuration if
you specify the
pressure loss.
Enter the rated
maximum working
pressure.
To calculate the pressure loss, you must select/specify the
surface equipment configuration.
Use the Case > Circulating System > Mud Pumps tab to enter
information pertaining to all pumps available. You may indicate which
pump(s) are currently active by clicking the Active check box.
Specifying Circulating System for Cementing Analysis
When using the OptiCem Analysis module, the circulating system
dialog is different than the dialog used for the other analysis modules.
When using OptiCem, use the Case > Circulating System dialog to
specify whether you want to include surface iron in the analysis, and if
Insert a new row by entering data in the
next empty row, or by highlighting a
row and pressing the Insert key on
your keyboard.
Delete a row by highlighting it and
pressing the Delete key on your
keyboard.
Check this box to specify active pump.
Rather than input all the data for the mud pump, you can
select a pump from the catalog. Click Add from Catalog
to select a pump from the catalog.
so, to specify information about the surface iron. This dialog is also used
to specify the pump volume per stroke.
Specifying Pore Pressure Data
Use the Case > Pore Pressure spreadsheet to define the pore pressure
profile as a function of vertical depth. You may enter either pressure or
EMW (ppg) for a vertical depth and the other value will be calculated
based on vertical depth. You may enter several rows of data to define
many pore pressure gradients. The depths specified on this spreadsheet
are automatically used as depths of interest on the plots.
Specifying Fracture Gradient Data
Use the Case > Frac Gradient spreadsheet to define the fracture
pressure profile as a function of vertical depth. You may enter either
Note: Defining Pore Pressure...
Although pore pressure are defined using the Case menu, pore pressures are linked
to the Design level. Therefore, any changes to the pore pressure for one Case will
affect all Cases linked to the same Design. Refer to Working With Design- and
Case-Associated Components on page 108 for more information.
Enter Pore Pressure and EMW is calculated.
Enter EMW and Pore Pressure is calculated.
or
You can copy/paste pore
pressure data from an Excel
spreadsheet or from another
case within WELLPLAN.
pressure or EMW (ppg) for a vertical depth and the other value will be
calculated based on vertical depth. You may enter several rows of data
to define many fracture gradients.The depths specified on this
spreadsheet are automatically used as depths of interest on the plots.
Specifying Geothermal Gradient Data
Use the Case > Geothermal Gradient tabs to define the geothermal
temperature profile as a function of depth. The Standard tab is used to
specify basic formation temperature data. The well temperature at total
depth can be specified, or it can be calculated from a gradient.
Note: Defining Fracture Gradients...
Although fracture gradients are defined using the Case menu, fracture gradients are
linked to the Design level. Therefore, any changes to the fracture gradient for one
Case will affect all Cases linked to the same Design. Refer to Working With
Design- and Case-Associated Components on page 108 for more information.
Enter Frac Pressure and EMW is calculated.
Enter EMW and Frac Pressure is calculated.
or
You can copy/paste pore
fracture gradient data from
an Excel spreadsheet or
from another case within
WELLPLAN.
Click here to specify temperature at TD.
Click here to specify a
gradient to use to calculate
temperature.
The Additional tab can be used to add temperatures to characterize a
non-linear formation or seawater profile. These temperatures must be
entered on a true vertical depth basis. Intermediate temperatures are
linearly interpolated between specified points.
Defining String Eccentricity
Use the Case > Eccentricity spreadsheet to specify the eccentricity ratio
of the annuli at different depths. Eccentricity reduces the pressure drop
for annular flow.
The Hydraulics module will automatically calculate eccentricity using
the tool joint diameter regardless of what is entered in the eccentricity
spreadsheet. If you specify eccentricity in the spreadsheet, and the
calculated tool joint eccentricity is less than the specified eccentricity,
the calculated tool joint eccentricity will be used for the engineering
calculations. If you check the Concentric Annulus box, the string will
be centered in the wellbore regardless of the wellbore deviation or the
calculated tool joint eccentricity.
An eccentric annulus ratio is defined by specifying the displacement
from the centerline divided by the radial clearance outside the moving
pipe. First define the eccentricity for each annular section and then its
eccentric value. Define the annular section by specifying a depth in the
Depth cell for the row, and then specify an eccentric value for the
section. A value of zero is concentric and a value of 1 is fully eccentric.
You can use the WELLPLAN Torque Drag module Position Plot to
determine the position of the string in the wellbore. The position in the
wellbore can be used to determine the eccentricity. Remember, you
must use a stiff string analysis to generate a Position plot.
Enter temperatures based on TVD.
Note: Defining Eccentricity...
The Eccentricity spreadsheet is only available when you are using the Herschel
Bulkley rheology model. Select the rheology model on the Case > Fluid Editor >
Standard Muds tab. If you are using the Herschel Bulkley rheology model, and
the Eccentricity spreadsheet is still not available, try opening the Hole Section
Editor and then reopening the Eccentricity spreadsheet.
Enter eccentricity =
1 to indicate string
positioned against
the wellbore
Check the Concentric Annulus box to indicate the entire
string is concentric in the annulus. If this box is checked,
data in the spreadsheet will not be used.
Chapter
Torque Drag Analysis
Overview
Torque Drag Analysis predicts and analyzes the torque and axial forces
generated by drill strings, casing strings, or liners while running in,
pulling out, sliding, backreaming and/or rotating in a three-dimensional
wellbore. The effects of mud properties, wellbore deviation, WOB and
other operational parameters can be studied.
At the end of this chapter you will find the methodology used for each
analysis mode. The methodology is useful for understanding data
requirements, analysis results, as well as the theory used as the basis for
the analysis. Supporting calculations and references for additional
reading are also included in this chapter.
In this section of the course, you will become familiar with all aspects
of using the Torque Drag Analysis module, including:
Available analysis modes
Defining operating parameters
Calibrating coefficients of friction using field data
Using drag charts to predict the maximum measured weight and
torque expected for a depth range
Analyzing critical measured depths where torque and drag may be a
problem
6
Chapter 6: Torque Drag Analysis
Workflow
The following is a suggested workflow. Many other workflows can be
used.
Open a Case using the Well Explorer. Refer to Using the Well
Explorer on page 55 for instructions on using the Well Explorer.
Define the hole section geometry and friction factors. (Case > Hole
Section Editor) Use advanced friction factors (click Advanced
button on Parameters > Run Parameters dialog) to specify
different friction factors for different operations in cased and open
hole.
Define the workstring. Use the same dialog to define all
workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth)
(Case > String Editor)
Enter deviation (wellpath) data. (Case > Wellpath > Editor)
Define the fluid used. (Case > Fluid Editor)
Specify calculation methods, weight indicator corrections, and
mechanical limitations to analyze. (Case > Torque Drag Setup
Data)
Optional: Specify fluid columns if more than one fluid is present in
the string, the fluid system is circulating, there is surface pressure
applied to the string, or different fluid densities exist in the annulus
and string. (Parameter > Fluid Columns)
Optional: Record actual load data recorded while drilling. This
information is useful for calibrating coefficients of friction or for
comparing to predicted data. (Parameter > Actual Loads)
Optional: Specify standoff device parameters. (Parameter >
Standoff Devices)
Optional: Calibrate coefficients of friction if actual load data is
available. Calibrating coefficients of friction is recommended if
actual load data is available.
1.) Access the Calibrate Friction analysis mode. (Select Calibrate
Friction from the Mode drop-down list.)
2.) Specify actual load information and view calculated coefficients
of friction. (Parameter > Calibration Data)
Determine the maximum measured weight and torque expected
over a depth range.
1.) Access the Drag Chart analysis mode. (Select Drag Chart from
the Mode drop-down list.)
2.) Specify the analysis parameters. (Parameter > Run
Parameters)
3.) Evaluate measured weights to determine if string tensile limit is
exceeded. (View > Plot > Tension Point Chart)
4.) Evaluate string torque to determine if make-up torque is
exceeded. (View > Plot > Torque Point Chart)
5.) Use the View > Plot > Sensitivity Plot Tension plot to quickly
view the measured weights using various friction factors. If you
have actual data, you can use this plot to determine which friction
factor best matches the actual data. Use advanced friction factors
(click Advanced button on Parameters > Run Parameters
dialog) to specify different friction factors for different
operations in cased and open hole.
Analyze in detail the depths that encounter high measured weights
or torques.
1.) Access the Normal Analysis or Top Down Analysis mode.
(Select Normal Analysis from the Mode drop-down list. If this
is a coiled tubing operation, select Top Down Analysis from the
drop-down list instead.)
2.) Specify the operating modes and parameters to analyze.
(Parameter > Mode Data)
3.) Determine if buckling, fatigue, exceeding of torque limit,
exceeding 100% of yield, or exceeding the yield strength safety
factor occurs. (View > Table > Summary Loads)
4.) Investigate the loads occurring at specific depths during an
operation. (View > Table > Load Data > Tripping In, Tripping
Out, Rotating On Bottom, Rotating Off Bottom, Sliding or
Backreaming)
5.) Investigate the stresses occurring at specific depths during an
operation. (View > Table > Stress Data > Tripping In, Tripping
Out, Rotating On Bottom, Rotating Off Bottom, Sliding or
Backreaming)
6.) Determine if the forces in the string are near the tensile limit or
if the string is buckling. (View > Plot > Effective Tension)
7.) Determine if the string torque is near the make-up torque limit.
(View > Plot > Torque Graph)
Introducing Torque Drag Analysis
The Torque Drag Analysis module predicts the measured weights and
torques while tripping in, tripping out, rotating on bottom, rotating off
bottom, slide drilling, and backreaming. This information can be used to
determine if the well can be drilled or to evaluate hole conditions while
drilling a well. The module can be used for analyzing drillstrings, casing
strings, liners, tieback strings, tubing strings, and coiled tubing.
The Torque Drag Analysis module includes both soft string and stiff
string models. The soft string model is based on Dawsons cable model.
In this model, the work string is treated as an extendible cable with zero
bending stiffness. Friction is assumed to act in the direction opposing
motion. The forces required to buckle the string are determined, and if
buckling occurs, the mode of buckling (sinusoidal, transitional, helical,
or lockup) is indicated. The stiff string model includes the increased side
forces from stiff tubulars in curved hole, as well as the reduced side
forces from pipe wall clearance. For more information, refer to
Supporting Information and Calculations on page 217 or
References on page 250.
Starting Torque Drag Analysis
There are two ways to begin the Torque Drag module:
z Select Torque Drag from the Modules menu, and then select the
appropriate analysis mode.
z Click the Torque Drag button and then select the appropriate
analysis mode from the drop-down list.
The contents of the Case and Parameter menus vary depending on the
analysis mode you select.
Available Analysis Modes
The Torque Drag Module has four available analysis modes. The
analysis modes are described in the following text.
Normal Analysis: Use the Normal Analysis mode to calculate
the forces, torques, and stresses acting on the work string while
the bit is at a particular depth in the wellbore for a number of
common drilling load conditions. This analysis calculates
surface loads based on bit forces you specify. Refer to Normal
Analysis on page 209 for more information.
Calibrate Friction: Use the Calibrate Friction analysis mode to
calculate the coefficient of friction for cased and open hole
sections using actual load data acquired while drilling. The
calculated coefficient of friction can be used the torque and drag
analysis. If you have access to actual load data, it is
recommended that you calibrate the coefficients of friction and
Select desired Torque Drag Analysis mode
from submenu or from Mode drop-down list.
Choose Torque Drag Analysis from the Module menu or by clicking
the Torque Drag Module button.
use the calibrated coefficients in your analysis. Refer to
Calibrate Friction Analysis on page 211 for more information.
Drag Chart: Use the Drag Chart analysis mode to plot the
surface torque and measured weight from drilling operations
while the bit traverses a range of depths in the wellbore. Refer to
Drag Chart Analysis on page 212 for more information.
Top-Down Analysis: Use Top-Down Analysis to calculate the
string forces based on loads and torque applied at the surface or
at the bottom of the string. (When loads are applied at the bottom
of the work string, this analysis is very similar to the Normal
Analysis but there is more flexibility over movement and end
conditions.) If the surface loads are input, the bit forces are
calculated and vice versa. You can specify if the string is
rotating, and reciprocating during tripping operations. Refer to
Top Down Analysis on page 214 for more information.
Defining the Case Data
Refer to Entering Case Data on page 162 for instructions on entering
data into the Case menu options.
Defining Operating Parameters
Specifying Weight Indicator Corrections, Analytical Models and
Reporting of Mechanical Limitations
Use Case > Torque Drag Setup to specify weight indicator corrections,
analytical models and to select reporting of mechanical limitations.
Enabling Sheave Friction Corrections
When the Enable Sheave Friction Correction model, it is applied to all
measured weight calculations. You must specify the lines strung and the
mechanical efficiency. Friction estimates from pick-up and slack-off
Check this box to include sheave friction
in all measured weight calculations. If
you want to enable this model, you must
also specify the Lines Strung and the
Mechanical Efficiency values.
Check boxes for limitations you are
interested in.
Specify the length that you want the contact forces
reported for.
Check box to select the viscous fluid torque and
drag model. The viscous fluid effects cause
differing torque and drag on the string depending
on the pipe rotation and trip speeds. The
magnitude depends strongly on the fluid rheology
model chosen in the fluid editor.
The Stiff String model computes the additional side force
from stiff tubulars bending in a curved hole as well as the
reduced side forces from pipe straightening due to
pipe/hole clearance.
Check box to use Bending Stress
Magnification corrections.
loads are underestimates because uneven distribution of dynamic loads
to drilling lines are caused by friction in the block sheaves.
Martin-Deckertype deadline weight indicators do not account for this
problem. Actual pick-up loads are therefore always greater than
indicated while slack-off loads are always less than indicated. When you
use pick-up or slack-off hook load measurements as the basis for friction
factor determinations, this error source results in pick-up friction factors
that are too low and slack-off friction factors that are too high. Errors in
hook-load determination can be of the order of 20 percent due to this
error source (depending on lines strung), and the effect on friction factor
determinations can therefore be significant and worth correcting. Refer
to Sheave Friction on page 234 for more information.
Why Use Bending Stress Magnification Factor?
In both tensile and compressive axial load cases, the average curvature
between the tool joints is not changed, but the local changes of curvature
due to straightening effects of tension or the buckling effects of
compression may be many times the average value. Therefore to
accurately calculate the bending stress in the pipe body requires the
determination of these local maximum curvatures.
The quantity bending stress magnification factor (BSMF) is defined as
the ratio of the maximum of the absolute value of the curvature in the
pipe body divided by the curvature of the hole axis. This factor can be
applied as a multiplier on the bending stress calculations to more
accurately calculate the bending stress in a work string that has tool
joints with outside diameters (OD) greater than the pipe body. This
modified bending stress is then used in the calculation of the von Mises
stress of the pipe. BSMF is useful because when a drill string with tool
joint OD greater than the body OD is subjected to either a tensile or
compressive axial load, the maximum curvature of the drillpipe will
exceed that of the hole axis curvature. The drillpipe sections conform to
the wellbore curvature primarily through contact at the tool joints.
BSMF is applied to the calculated bending stresses when you mark the
Use Bending Stress Magnification check box on the Case > Torque
Drag Setup dialog. Refer to Bending Stress Magnification Factor on
Why Use the Stiff String Model?
On the Case > Torque Drag Setup Data dialog, check the Use Stiff
String Model to use the stiff string model in the calculations. The stiff
string model computes the additional side force from stiff tubulars
bending in a curved hole as well as the reduced side forces from pipe
straightening due to pipe/hole clearance. This model is complex, and
therefore takes a significantly longer time to run than the Soft String
model. The Normal Analysis Position Graph plots and the Single
Position plot are only available with the Stiff String model because the
soft string model assumes that the pipe is always positioned at the center
of the hole. For more information, refer to Stiff String Model on
page 237.
Including Viscous Drag Calculations
On the Case > Torque Drag Setup Data dialog, check the Use Viscous
Torque and Drag to include viscous fluid effects in the calculations.
The viscous fluid effects cause differing torque and drag on the string
depending on the pipe rotation and trip speeds. The magnitude depends
strongly on the fluid rheology model chosen in the fluid editor. Refer to
Viscous Drag on page 247 for more information.
Specifying Multiple Fluids or Surface Pressure
The Parameter > Fluid Columns tabs are used to define the density of
the fluids in the annulus and the string. Data entered on these tabs
overrides data entered on the Case > Fluid Editor. You can also define
a surface pressure to apply to the annulus. If you are not applying
pressure at the surface, and you are using one fluid in the string and
annulus, enter the fluid information on the Case > Fluid Editor.
Use the Fluid Columns tabs if:
z There is more than one fluid in the annulus
z There is surface pressure applied to the annulus
z The fluid density in the annulus and string are different
How does Fluid Flow Change the Forces and Stresses on the Workstring?
Fluid flow changes the forces and stresses on the work string in three
ways.
z The calculated Pump Off Force is an additional compressive force
at the end of the string caused by the acceleration of fluid through
the bit jets. The calculations for bit impact force are used to
determine this force.
z Forces and stresses in the drill string are caused by the differential
between the pipe and annulus fluid pressures from the hydraulic
system, including bit and MWD / motor pressures losses.
z Fluid shear forces act on the work string as a result of shear stresses
caused by the frictional flow in the pipe and annulus.
Tabs for entry of fluid columns in string and
annulus.
Define a flow rate. This flow rate will be
applied to all analysis modes.
Define a surface pressure to
be applied to the annulus.
Use this tab is used to define the density
of the fluids in the annulus. You can also
define a surface pressure to be applied to
the annulus. If you do not enter data here,
the mud weight entered in the Fluid Editor
dialog becomes the default entry.
How Does Surface Pressure Change the Forces And Stresses On the
Workstring?
z Surface pressure in the string acts as an additional axial force.
z Surface pressure in the annulus acts as an additional compressive
force.
Using Standoff Devices
Use the Parameter > Standoff Devices dialog to describe standoff
devices. You must check the Use Standoff Devices box to use these
devices in the analysis. If the box is not checked, the devices will not be
used. WELLPLAN can model both rotating and non-rotating devices.
The model assumes that accurate placement of the devices has been
determined so that the drillstring does not contact the wellbore in the
interval where the devices are used. Each row of the table refers to a
single type of device placed on consecutive sections of pipe. If more
than one type of device is used, define each type on a separate row in the
table.
Note: Wellbore to string friction in sections where standoff devices
are used is relative...
For example, assume the wellbore friction (input using Case > Hole Section
Editor) is 0.2. If the standoff device friction is 0.5, then the friction factor used in
the calculations would be 0.2 X 0.5 = 0.1. This approach allows for accurate
friction determination when using drag charts and moving the string between
cased and open hole sections with different wellbore friction factors.
Note: Standoff Device Placement...
The model assumes the devices have been placed so that the string does not
contact the wellbore in the interval where the devices are used. The analysis does
not determine device placement.
Each row of the table
refers to a single type of
standoff device placed
on consecutive
sections of pipe. If more
than one type of device
is used, define each
type on a separate row
in the table.
Use Frequency columns to specify
the number of devices per joint.
(A unit is a joint.)
The unit weight is added to
the string weight for analysis
purposes.
Check box if you want
to use standoff
devices.
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction Using Field Data
Coefficients of friction along the wellbore can be calculated from actual
data collected while drilling. This provides a means of calibrating the
model against actual field results. In order to use this analysis mode, you
must collect a series of weights and torques at the wellsite. Some of this
data is obtained with the string inside the casing shoe, and other
information is obtained in the open hole section. When gathering actual
field data, it is best if friction reduction devices are not being used. Over
the sections where the devices are used, the effects of the friction
devices must included in the calibrated friction factors.
You must calculate the coefficient of friction in the cased hole section
first, then the open hole. This is required because data recorded in the
open hole section includes the combined effects of friction between the
string and the casing as well as the friction between the string and the
open hole. Therefore, the coefficient of friction for the cased hole must
be determined before that of the open hole.
The reliability of the data collected is important. Spurious values for any
weight may prevent calculating a solution or may result in an inaccurate
solution. It is important that the drillstring is completely inside the
casing shoe when you are recording weights for calculating the
coefficient of friction inside the casing. It is also important that the string
is not reciprocated while recording rotating weights, and vice versa. You
may not want to rely on one set of data, but make a decision based on a
number of weight readings taken at different depths inside the casing
and in the open hole section.
It is important to realize that hole conditions may also effect the
coefficient of friction calculated. If the actual weights recorded include
the effects of a build up of cuttings, the BHA hanging up downhole, or
other hole conditions. Because the recorded weights include these
effects, the calculated coefficient of friction will also.
Starting the Calibrate Friction Analysis Mode
Select Calibrate Friction
from Mode drop-down
list.
Recording Actual Load Data
Use the Parameter > Actual Loads dialog to record actual load data
encountered at certain depths. This information can be used to calculate
coefficients of friction using the Calibrate Friction analysis or it can be
displayed in the Drag Chart analysis graphs to compare actual values
with calculated values.
The actual load data consists of rows or information with one row per
measured depth. You can record data for any measured depth. It may be
useful to record this information just inside the casing shoe, or at total
depth just prior to setting casing. It is not necessary to specify all values
for each row. However, the measured depth must always be specified,
and must always increase. The trip in and trip out measured weights, and
rotating off bottom torque values are required to calibrate the coefficient
of friction. Other values are input for plotting actual load data on
applicable plots.
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction
Use the Parameter > Calibration Data dialog to specify the
parameters required to calibrate the coefficients of friction.
You may calculate the coefficient of friction using the following two
methods. The difference between the methods is that one method used
an actual load input on the Parameter > Actual Loads dialog and the
other method requires the input of the load directly onto the Parameter
> Calibration Data dialog.
z Be sure the use actual load check box is not checked and enter a bit
MD. You must also enter at least one of the following: tripping out
measured weight, tripping in measured weight, or rotating off
bottom torque. The calculated coefficient of friction is based on the
selected measured weights and/or torque values you entered for the
specified bit MD.
Required input for calibrating coefficient of friction
z Be sure the Use Actual Load check box is marked and select an
actual load. You can select, deselect, or alter any of the measured
weight or torque values recorded for this actual load. The calculated
coefficient of friction is based on the selected measured weights
and/or torque values.
The coefficient of friction can be calculated for the
cased hole section, the open hole section, or be
combined for both open and cased hole.
View the calculated average coefficient of friction
used in analysis. The average coefficient of
friction is calculated for the cased, open hole, or
combined hole section selected.
When selecting from actual loads
(entered on actual loads editor),
be sure box is checked and select
desired depth from drop-down list.
Predicting Maximum Measured Weight and Torque
The Drag Chart Analysis predicts the measured weights and torques that
will be experienced while operating the work string over a range of
depths. The calculations performed for this analysis are similar to those
used in the Normal Analysis except the calculations are performed over
a range of depths. (A Normal Analysis calculates results for a single bit
depth.) As in the Normal Analysis, you may select the operational
modes by checking appropriate boxes on the Run Parameters dialog.
Refer to Drag Chart Analysis on page 212 for more information.
You can use coefficients of friction that you calculated using Calibrate
Friction, the coefficients specified on the Hole Section Editor, or those
entered on the Run Parameters dialog.
Starting Drag Chart Analysis
Defining Operating Conditions and the Analysis Depth Interval
The Parameter > Run Parameters dialog is used to specify the
analysis parameters for a Drag Chart Analysis. On this dialog you
indicate the depth interval that you want to analyze. You also select the
operational modes you want to analyze, and the forces acting at the
bottom of the work string for each of the operational modes. You must
also indicate the coefficient of friction that you want to use.
Typically the depth range chosen would correspond to the expected run
of a given string, or to a complete hole section if the drill string
configuration was to remain unchanged throughout the hole section.
Keep in mind that the drag chart analysis assumes that only one string,
Select Drag Chart
from drop-down list.
and only one set of operating parameters (fluid, WOB, and so forth) are
used through the entire analysis depth range.
Advanced Options
Click the Advanced button to specify coefficients of friction associated
with different operation modes. You must specify both cased and open
hole friction factors for each operating mode. Only those operations
specified on the Parameter > Mode Data dialog (Normal Analysis
Be sure to enter
interval to analyze.
Use Torque/tension Point
Distance From Bit to specify the
depth along the drill string,
expressed as the distance from the
bit, for any point of interest in the
string. The torque or tension at this
point is displayed on the drag chart
torque and tension plots. If you do
not specify a depth, the torque or
tension will be calculated at the
surface. For example, if you are
interested in the torque in a
component that is 80 feet from the
bit, enter 80 into this field. In this
example, the torque generated in
this component will be displayed in
the graph.
Click Advanced to specify coefficients
of friction associated with different
operating modes.
mode), the Parameter > Run Parameters dialog (Drag Chart Analysis
mode) are accessible on the Advanced Options dialog.
Analyzing Drag Chart Results
There are no reports available for a drag chart analysis. All output is in
graphical form.
Tension Point Chart
The View > Plot > Tension Point chart shows tension at the point in the
string (as indicated by the Torque/Tension Point Distance from Bit
specified on the Parameters > Run Parameters dialog) or the surface
measured weight for all operating modes selected on the Parameter >
Run Parameters dialog. This analysis covers only the measured depth
interval specified on the Parameter > Run Parameters dialog.
Use this plot to determine how much overpull you can place on the
string before the string will fail. Similarly, you can determine how much
compressive force can be applied to the string before the string will yield
as a result of buckling. From the graph, you can determine the load that
will fail the work string, but you will not be able to determine where the
failure occurred.
Torque Point Chart
The View > Plot > Torque Point chart displays the maximum torque
found at the surface or at a user specified point in the work string for all
rotary operating modes selected on the Parameters > Run Parameters
dialog. The Torque Point chart covers only the measured depth interval
specified on the Run Parameters dialog. For reference, the makeup
torque limit is displayed on the graph. The torque limit is derated for
tension.
Buckling occurs in
sliding and rotating on
bottom operating
modes at the
corresponding bit
depths.
Minimum
measured weight
to avoid buckling
Overpull while tripping
out when the bit is at
4,000 ft MD.
Slackoff while
tripping in at
3500 ft MD.
Using the Sensitivity Plot
This plot displays the measured weights using different friction factors
for the operations selected on the Run Parameters dialog. One operation
is displayed on the plot at a time. The measured weights for all other
operations selected in the Run Parameters Dialog can be viewed through
the right-click mouse option. If the operation is not selected in the Run
Parameters dialog, the respective right-click option will be disabled
(greyed out). Only the measured depth interval specified on the Run
Parameters dialog is covered.
The plot displays the measured weights over the specified interval using
the friction factors specified on the Case > Hole Section Editor. In
addition, the measured weight is calculated using a friction factor that is
twenty percent greater and twenty percent less than the cased hole
Makeup torque as input on Case >
Hole Section Editor for each
component.
friction factor specified on the Hole Section Editor while the open hole
friction factor is varied between 0.1 and 0.4.
Note: In order to display this plot...
To display this plot, you must check the Enable Sensitivity Plot box on
Parameter > Run Parameters dialog. If this box is not checked, the View > Plot
> Sensitivity Plot Tension plot will not be available.
Analyzing Critical Measured Depths
Normal Analysis calculates the torque, drag, normal force, axial force,
buckling force, neutral point, stress and other forces and stressed for a
work string in a three-dimensional wellbore. With a Normal Analysis,
all calculations are performed with the bit at one position in the wellbore
(as indicated on Case > String Editor), and with one set of operational
parameters. You may choose to perform the analysis using either the
soft or stiff string model.
Normal Analysis mode calculates the forces acting along the string and
at the surface for several operating conditions, including:
z Tripping in (with and without rotating)
z Tripping out (with and without rotating)
z Rotating on bottom
z Rotating off bottom
z Backreaming
z Sliding drilling
Based on the API material specifications of pipe class, material, and
grade, the following special load cases are also calculated.
z Maximum weight on bit to avoid sinusoidal buckling
z Maximum weight on bit to avoid helical buckling
z Maximum overpull to not exceed yield with the utilization factor
while tripping out of hole
Start Normal Analysis
Select Normal
Analysis from drop-
down list.
Defining Operating Conditions
Use the Parameter > Mode Data dialog to specify many of the analysis
parameters required to perform a Normal Analysis. You may specify
which operating mode you want to analyze by checking the appropriate
box. The operating modes available include tripping in, tripping out,
rotating on bottom, rotating off bottom, sliding, and backreaming.
Depending on the operating modes selected, you will be required to
specify operating parameters related to that operating mode. The
operating parameters may include WOB or Overpull, torque at bit,
tripping speed, or rotational speed while tripping.
Analyzing Normal Analysis Results
Results for a Normal Analysis are presented in tables, plots, and reports.
All results are available using the View Menu. In many cases, the same
analysis results are presented in more than one form. For example, string
tension data can be found in reports, plots, and tables. In general, the
plots or tables present the data in a clearer, more concise format than the
reports do. Depending on the number of operating modes selected, the
reports can get very long and difficult to read unless you print them.
Trip speed is not used in the analysis unless a
non-zero RPM is entered.
Specify the coefficient of friction
you want to use.
Specify the operating mode you want to analyze by
checking the appropriate box or boxes.
Click Advanced to specify coefficients
of friction associated with different
operating modes. Refer to Advanced
Options on page 195 for more
information.
Because of time restraints, this course does not discuss every available
report, table and plot. If you have specific questions about a plot, table
or report, ask your instructor or refer to the online help for more detail.
Analyzing Normal Analysis Results Using Plots
There are several plots containing analysis results for a normal analysis.
These include:
Effective Tension
True Tension Graph
Torque Graph
Side Force Graph
Fatigue Graph
Stress Graphs (for all operating modes)
Position Graphs (only available if using stiff string model)
Using the Effective and True Tension Plots
The Effective Tension plot displays the
tension as calculated using the buoyancy
method. Use this plot to determine when
buckling may occur.
The True Tension plot displays the
tension as calculated using the
pressure area method. Use this data for
stress analysis.
Using the Effective Tension Plot
The View > Plot > Effective Tension graph displays the tension in all
sections of the work string for the operating modes specified on the
Normal Analysis Mode Data dialog as calculated using the buoyancy
method. (Refer to Buoyancy Method on page 219 for more
information.) The graph includes data for measured depths from the
surface to the string depth specified on the Case > String Editor. The
effective tension can be used to determine when buckling may occur. On
the plot are curves indicating the loads required to buckle (helical or
sinusoidal) the work string. When the effective tension load line for a
particular operation mode crosses a buckling load line, the string will
begin to buckle in the buckling mode corresponding to the buckling load
line.
The plot also indicates the tension limit for the work string component
at the corresponding measured depth. If the effective tension curve for a
particular operating mode exceeds the tension limit curve, the work
string is in danger of parting at that point.
Using the True Tension Plot
The View > Plot > True Tension graph displays the tension in all
sections of the work string for the operating modes specified on the
Normal Analysis Parameter > Mode Data dialog as calculated using
the pressure area method. The graph includes data for measured depths
from the surface to the string depth specified on the Case > String
Editor. This data should only be used for stress analysis. If you want to
determine when a worksting will fail due to tension, refer to the View >
Plot > Effective Tension Graph.
Using the Torque Graph
The View > Plot > Torque Graph displays the torque in all sections of
the workstring for the operating modes specified on the Parameter >
Mode Data dialog for Normal Analysis. Data is included for measured
depths from the surface to the string depth specified on the Case >
String Editor spreadsheet.
Make-up torque limit is also specified on this plot. The make-up torque
is derated for tension and will therefore change with string depth. If the
torque curve for a particular operating mode exceeds the torque limit at
the same measured depth, the tool joints for the workstring are liable to
over-torque or break.
Torque limits for workstring components are specified on the Case >
String Editor spreadsheet. Drilling fluid information is specified on the
Case > Fluid Editor dialog, unless fluid information was specified on
the Fluids Column dialog. The analysis also uses information specified
on the Case > Wellpath Editor and Case > Hole Section Editor, and
the Case > Torque Drag Setup Data and Parameter > Mode Data
dialogs.
Component torque is input on
the Case > String Editor.
Using the Fatigue Plot
The View > Plot > Fatigue Graph presents the bending or buckling
stress as a ratio of the fatigue limit.
High level of
bending or
buckling
stresses
Using Tables to Analyze Results
Tables are a very useful form of viewing analysis results. Tabular results
are organized in a way that makes it easy to quickly find the information
you are looking for.
Using the Summary Loads Table
The View > Table > Summary Loads table contains information
pertaining to all sections of the work string and is a good place to begin
your analysis. This table contains a load summary for the operating
modes specified on the Normal Analysis Mode Data dialog. The View
> Report > Summary Report contains similar information. For each
operating mode, the following information is provided: stress mode
indicator, buckling mode indicator, torque at rotary table, windup,
surface measured weight, total stretch, and neutral point.
What are the Loads For a Particular Operating Mode?
For information on an individual operating mode, use View > Table >
Load Data. The View > Report > Detail Report contains similar data.
Information presented on the table includes measured depth, component
type, distance from bit, internal pressure, external pressure, axial force
(pressure area and buoyancy method), drag, torque, twist, stretch,
Stress column. An S indicates
VonMises stress failure, a T indicates
exceeding make-up torque and an F
indicates fatigue.
Buckling Column. An H
indicates helical buckling and
an S indicates sinusoidal
buckling.
sinusoidal buckling force, helical buckling force, buckling mode flag,
and stress mode flag.
What are the Stresses For a Particular Operating Mode?
Use View > Table > Stress Data and select an operating mode.This
table contains information pertaining to all sections of the work string.
Data for each operating mode is specified on a separate table. This table
contains information similar to the View > Plot > Stress Graph,
including; measured depth, component type, distance from bit, hoop
stress, radial stress, torsional stress, shear stress, axial stress, buckling
The data in this table pertains to only one operating mode. In this
case, it is the Tripping In operating mode.
The data in this table represents calculations at various
depths.
stress, bending stress, BSMF, von Mises stress, von Mises stress ratio,
and fatigue ratio.
Analyzing Results Using Reports
Reports are another form of presenting normal analysis results.
However, if you will be analyzing more than one operating mode, using
plots or tables is an easier way to view the results.
Using the Detailed Report
Most of the information presented on the View > Report > Detail
Report is available on tables, or in graphical form on plots. However,
the Detail Report also includes the operating parameters and case data
(as specified on the report options dialog) used in the analysis. Plots and
tables do not include this information.
When you are generating a report for an analysis of several operating
modes, the information for each operating mode is separate from all
other operating modes. For example, all tripping in analysis is kept
separate from the tripping out analysis. Because there is a lot of data
presented on the Detailed Report, it is recommended that reports be
limited to analysis of one or two operating modes at a time. Otherwise
the reports can get very long and difficult to read.
The data in this table represents calculations at various
depths.
The data in this table pertains to only
one operating mode. In this case, it is
the Tripping In operating mode.
Analysis Mode Methodology
Each of the next four sections covers one of the analysis modes available
in the Torque Drag module. In each section, the major analysis steps for
the analysis mode are discussed. Within the analysis steps there may be
a reference to a calculation. The name of the calculations are presented
in italic for recognition. Many calculations apply to more than one
analysis mode. To avoid duplicating information, the calculations are
presented alphabetically in the section titled Supporting Information
and Calculations. If you require more information about a particular
calculation, please refer to Supporting Information and Calculations
on page 217.
Normal Analysis
In a Normal Analysis the calculations are performed for a work string,
in a three-dimensional wellbore, at one bit depth, and with one set of
operational parameters. If any of these items change (different bit depth,
different work string, different mud weight, and so forth) then the
Normal Analysis must be re-run.
A Normal Analysis can investigate six load cases or operating
conditions. These six load cases consist of tripping out, tripping in,
rotating on bottom, rotating off bottom, sliding, and backreaming.
During the analysis the following steps are performed.
1. The first step is to initialize all load cases with the loads at the bit,
including torques and axial force. These parameters are input on the
Normal Analysis Mode Data dialog. For a Normal Analysis, the
loads at the bit must be input, so the surface loads can be calculated.
2. For both soft and stiff string models, the work string is broken into
segments (elements) with a length equal to either a minimum of 30
feet or to the component length. This defines the segment to be
analyzed. After the analysis of a segment is complete, the segment
above is analyzed. This procedure is repeated until the entire string
has been analyzed.
For each segment, the following steps are performed:
a) Interpolate the survey data at start and end of segment using the
surveys entered in the Survey Editor (on the Case menu).
Calculate the build rate, turn rate and dogleg severity. The
minimum curvature method is used for all survey calculations. If
the surveys had tortuosity applied, the tortured surveys are
used.
b) Determine the wellbore at this depth, and modify the tubular
wall thickness based on the Pipe Wall Thickness Modification
Due to Pipe Class calculations (page 233).
c) Compute the weight per foot of the segment in fluid and at the
wellbore angle using the Buoyed Weight calculations (page 221).
Because the work string is lying in a wellbore surrounded by
fluids, there are resultant hydrostatic pressures acting on all
interior and exterior surfaces of the pipe. The Buoyed Weight
calculations determine the resultant weight of the segment
considering the hydrostatic pressures acting on it.
d) Determine the force required to buckle the segment in the
wellbore using the Critical Buckling Force calculations
(page 222). The critical buckling force is the axial force required
to be exerted on a work string to initiate buckling. Buckling first
occurs when compressive axial forces exceed a critical buckling
force. The axial force computed using the Buoyancy Method
(Axial Force calculations, page 218) is used to compare with the
critical buckling force to determine the onset of buckling. This is
because the critical buckling force calculations are based on the
same assumptions regarding hydrostatic pressure.
e) Calculate the normal (side) force using the Side Force
calculations for the Soft String Model (page 235), or for the Stiff
String Model (page 237). The side force or normal force is a
measurement of the force exerted by the wellbore onto the work
string.
f) Calculate the drag acting on the segment using the Drag Force
calculations (page 226). The magnitude of the drag force is
influenced by the selection of Friction Factor.
g) Determine the axial forces acting on the segment using the Axial
Force calculations (page 218). Axial forces act along the axis of
the work string.
h) If buckling occurs, determine the additional side force due to
buckling by using the Additional Side Force calculations
(page 217).
i) Calculate string torque using the Torque calculations (page 244).
Any input bit torque will be added to calculated torque.
j) Determine stresses using the Stress calculations (page 239).
k) Perform Fatigue calculations (page 228).
l) Perform Twist calculations (page 246) and Stretch calculations
(page 242).
3. Apply Sheave Friction Correction calculations (page 234) to
tension at the surface. This correction is only made if specified on
the Torque Drag Setup dialog.
4. Compute pick up and slack off for tripping load cases.
5. Calculate maximum weight on bit to buckle (sinusoidal and helical)
the work string, and maximum allowable overpull.
Calibrate Friction Analysis
Calibrate Friction Analysis calculates the coefficient of friction along
the wellbore using actual (field) data collected while drilling. This
provides a means of calibrating the program model against actual field
results. The following are an overview of the calculations performed.
1. The work string is broken into the minimum of 30 feet, or the
component length. This is the segment to be analyzed. After the
analysis of a segment is complete, the segment above it will be
analyzed. This procedure is repeated until the entire string has been
analyzed.
a) Interpolate survey at start and end of segment. Calculate build
rate, turn rates and dogleg severity. The minimum curvature
method is used for all survey calculations. If the surveys had
Tortuosity (page 244) applied, the tortured surveys are used.
b) Determine the wellbore at this depth, and apply Pipe Wall
Thickness Modification Due to Pipe Class calculations
(page 233).
d) Estimate the coefficient of friction for either the cased hole, or
the open hole, or both. For each of the load cases, the following
steps (1 through 5) are performed until the calculated torque and
hookloads match the input or field values. If the values dont
match, another coefficient of friction is estimated, and the
following steps are performed again.
1. Calculate the normal (side) force using the Side
Forcepage 235 calculations for the soft string model or for
the stiff string model. The side force or normal force is a
measurement of the force exerted by the wellbore onto the
work string.
2. Calculate the drag acting on the segment using the Drag
Force calculations (page 226). The magnitude of the drag
force is influenced by the selection of the Friction Factor.
3. Determine the axial forces acting on the segment using the
Axial Force calculations (page 218). Axial forces act along
the axis of the work string.
4. Calculate string torque using the Torque calculations
(page 244).
5. Apply Sheave Friction Correction calculations (page 234)
to tension at the surface. This correction is only made if
specified on the Torque Drag Setup dialog.
Drag Chart Analysis
Drag Chart Analysis performs essentially the same analysis steps as
performed in the Normal Analysis. However, in a Drag Chart analysis,
you can specify a range of bit depths. (A Normal Analysis is performed
at a single bit depth.) For each bit depth in the Drag Chart Analysis, the
largest torque or measured weight occurring anywhere in the work
string is recorded. This information is then available in graphical output.
The following is a brief overview of the calculations.
1. Begin with the first bit depth. The first step is to initialize all load
cases with the loads at the bit, including torques and axial force.
These parameters are input on the Run Parameters Data dialog.
2. Next, the work string is broken into the minimum of 30 feet, or the
component length. This is the segment that will be analyzed. After
the analysis of a segment is complete, the segment above it will be
analyzed.
a) Interpolate survey at start and end of segment. Calculate build,
turn rates, and dogleg severity. The minimum curvature method
is used for all survey calculations. If the surveys had tortuosity
applied, the tortured surveys are used.
(page 233).
force. The axial force computed using the Buoyancy Method is
used to compare with the critical buckling force to determine the
onset of buckling.
string.
governed by the selection of Friction Factor (page 232).
the work string.
(page 217).
4. Determine the measured weight at the surface, and the maximum
torque at any point in the work string with the bit at the specified
depth. Repeat the calculations with the next bit depth.
Top Down Analysis
Top Down Analysis allows the specification of string forces from the
surface. You can use this mode to determine downhole forces acting on
the work string when you know the surface forces. This analysis mode
is in many ways the opposite of the Normal Analysis. A Normal
Analysis calculates the forces at the surface based on known forces
acting at the bit.
You may want to use this analysis mode to analyze coiled tubing
operations. In the case of coiled tubing, you are driving tubing into the
hole with known injector forces at the surface. This analysis mode
provides a means of determining the tension or compression forces
acting on the tubing downhole. You can specify a tension (positive) or
compressive (negative) injector force at the surface.
You can also use this analysis mode to analyze stuck pipe situations.
When a pipe is stuck downhole, you know the forces at the surface, but
the downhole loads must be estimated. You may want to know the
required surface forces to achieve a specific force to trip a jar. You may
want to apply a tension or torque at the surface, and from the resulting
pipe stretch or twist, you can calculate the stuck point.
1. The first step is to initialize with the loads at the surface, including
torques and axial force. These parameter are input on the Top Down
Analysis Mode Data dialog.
2. Next, the work string is broken into the minimum of 30 feet, or the
component length. This is the segment that will be analyzed. After
the analysis of a segment is complete, the segment below it will be
analyzed (from the surface down the string).
a) Interpolate survey at start and end of segment. Calculate build
and turn rates, and the dogleg severity. The minimum curvature
method is used for all survey calculations. If the surveys had
tortuosity applied, the tortured surveys are used.
(page 233).
force. The axial force computed using the Buoyancy Method is
used to compare with the critical buckling force to determine the
onset of buckling.
string.
governed by the selection of Friction Factor (page 232).
the work string.
(page 217).
Any input bit torque will be added to the calculated torque.
j) Determine stresses using the Stress calculations (page 239).
k) Perform Fatigue calculations (page 228).
l) Perform Twist calculations (page 246) and Stretch calculations
(page 242).
4. Compute the pick up and slack off.
5. Calculate maximum weight on bit required to buckle (sinusoidal
and helical) the work string, and maximum allowable overpull.
Supporting Information and Calculations
The calculations and information in this section are presented in
alphabetical order using the calculation or topic name. The material
contained in this section is intended to provide you more detailed
information and calculations pertaining to many of the steps presented
during the descriptions of the analysis mode methodologies.
If the information in this section does not provide you the detail you
require, please refer to References on page 250 for additional sources
of information pertaining to the topic you are interested in.
Additional Side Force Due to Buckling
Once buckling has occurred, there is an additional side force due to
increased contact between the wellbore and the work string. For the soft
string model, the following calculations are used to compute the
additional side force. These calculations are not included in a stiff string
analysis because the stiff string model considers the additional force due
to buckling in the derivation of the side force.
Sinusoidal Buckling Mode
No additional side force due to buckling is added.
Helical Buckling Mode
EI
rF
F
axial
add
4
2
=
Where:
Axial Force
There are two calculation methods to determine the axial force: the
buoyancy method and the pressure area method. In checking for the
onset of buckling, the buoyancy method is used. This is because the
Critical Buckling Force calculations (page 222) are based on the same
assumptions regarding hydrostatic pressure. For stress calculations, the
pressure area method is used.
Both methods predict the same measured weight at the surface because
there is no hydrostatic force acting at the surface. Below the surface, the
axial force calculated using each method will be different.
Consider a work string hanging in air, or more specifically, in a
vacuum. Some of the string weight is supported at the bottom by a force
(specifically, the weight on bit). In this situation, the upper portion of the
string is in axial tension, and the lower portion of the string is in axial
compression. Somewhere along the string there is a point where the
axial force changes from tension to compression, and the axial stress is
zero. This is the neutral point.
In this simple case, the distance from the bottom of the string up to the
neutral point can be calculated by dividing the supporting force at the
bottom (specifically, the weight on bit) by the weight of the string per
unit length. In other words, the weight of the string below the neutral
point is equal to the supporting force.
In a normal drilling environment, the string is submerged in a fluid. The
fluid creates hydrostatic pressure acting on the string. Two different
neutral points can be calculated as a result of the handling of the
hydrostatic forces. The buoyancy method includes the effects of
buoyancy, while the pressure area method does not.

add
F = Additional side force
axial
F = Axial compression force calculated
using the buoyancy method
E = Youngs modulus of elasticity
I = Moment of Inertia
r
= Radial clearance between wellbore and work string
The pressure area method computes the axial forces in the work string
by calculating all the forces acting on the work string, and solving for
the neutral point using the principle of equilibrium. Using this method,
the axial force and axial stress is exactly zero at the neutral point.
Using the buoyancy method, the axial force at the neutral point is not
zero. The axial force and stress is equal to the hydrostatic pressure at the
depth of the neutral point. Because hydrostatic pressure alone will never
cause a pipe to buckle, the buoyancy method is used to determine if and
when buckling occurs.
Buoyancy Method
The buoyancy method is used to determine if buckling occurs.
Pressure Area Method
The pressure area method is used to calculated stress.
( ) [ ]
BS WOB bottom area drag air axial
F W F F F Inc Cos LW F + + + =

( ) [ ]
WOB bottom area drag air axial
W F F F Inc Cos LW F + + =

Bending Stress Magnification (BSM)
Bending stress magnification (BSM) will be applied to the calculated
bending stresses if you have checked the BSM box on the Torque Drag
Setup Data dialog. The magnitude of the BSM is reported in the stress
data table of the Normal Analysis Detail Report, and in the Top Down
Analysis Detail Report.
When a drill string is subjected to either tensile or compressive axial
loads, the maximum curvature of the drillpipe body exceeds that of the
hole axis curvature. The drillpipe sections conform to the wellbore
curvature primarily through contact at the tool joints. In both tensile and
compressive axial load cases the average curvature between the tool
joints is not changed, but the local changes of curvature due to
L
= Length of drillstring hanging below point (ft)
air
W
= Weight per foot of the drillstring in air (lb/ft)
Inc
= Inclination (deg)
bottom
F
= Bottom pressure force, a compression force due to
fluid pressure applied over the cross sectional
area of the bottom component
area
F
= Change in force due to a change in area at junction
between two components of different cross sectional
areas, such as the junction between drill pipe and
heavy weight or heavy weight and drill collars.
If the area of the bottom component is larger the
force is a tension, if the top component is larger
the force is compression.
WOB
W
= Weight on bit (lb) (0 for tripping in & out)
drag
F
= Drag force (lb)
BS
F
= Buckling Stability Force = PressExternal*AreaExternal
PressInternal*AreaInternal
Pipe: Area External =

/4*(0.95*BOD*BOD + 0.05*JOD*JOD)
AreaInternal =
/4*(0.95*BID*BID + 0.05*JID*JID)
Collar:
AreaExternal = /4*(BOD*BOD)
AreaInternal = /4*(BID*BID)
PressExternal = AnnulusSurfacePress +
(AnnulusPressGrad * TVD)
PressInternal = StringSurfacePress +
(StringPressGrad * TVD)
straightening effects of tension or the buckling effects of compression
may be many times the average value. Therefore, to accurately calculate
the bending stress in the pipe body requires the determination of these
local maximum curvatures.
The bending stress magnification factor (BSM) is defined as the ratio of
the maximum of the absolute value of the curvature in the drillpipe body
divided by the curvature of the hole axis. The BSM is applied as a
multiplier on the bending stress calculation. This modified bending
stress is then used in the calculation of the von Mises stress of the
drillpipe.
Buoyed Weight
The surface pressure and mud densities input on the Fluids Column tabs,
or the mud weight input on the Fluid Editor are used to determine the
pressure inside and outside of the work string. Using the equations listed
below, these pressures are used to determine the buoyed weight of the
work string. The buoyed weight is then used to determine the forces and
stresses acting on the work string in the analysis.
Fluid Air Buoy
W W W =
( ) ( )
Internal Internal External Annular Fluid
A MW A MW W =
For components with tool joints
Note: The constants 0.95 and 0.5 are used to assume that 95% of the
component length is pipe body, and 5% is tool joint.
For components without tool joints
Where:
Critical Buckling Forces
The critical buckling force is the axial force required to be exerted on a
work string to initiate buckling. Buckling first occurs when compressive
axial forces exceed a critical buckling force. The axial force computed
using the Buoyancy Method is used to compare with the critical
buckling force to determine the onset of buckling.
( ) ( ) ] 0.05 [0.95 4
2
int
2
Jo Body External
OD OD A + =
( ) ( ) ] 05 . 0 95 . 0 [
2
int
2
Jo Body Internal
ID ID A + = 4
( )
2
4
Body Internal
ID A =
( )
2
4
Body External
OD A =
body component of diameter Outside =
Body
OD
joint tool of diameter Outside
int
=
Jo
OD
body component of diameter Inside =
Body
ID
joint tool of diameter Inside
int
=
Jo
ID
component the of area External =
External
A
component the of area Internal =
Internal
A
fluid displaced of foot per Weight =
Fluid
W
component of foot per weight Buoyed =
Buoy
W
wellbore in the depth component at weight mud Annular =
Annular
MW

component the inside depth component at weight mud Internal =
Internal
MW
The critical buckling forces can be found listed by component type and
measured depth in the sinusoidal buckling and helical buckling columns
of the Normal Analysis Detail Report or the Top Down Analysis Detail
Report. The values in these two columns can be compared to the Drill
String Axial Force - Buoyancy column to determine if the component is
bucked at that depth. If the compressive force indicated in the Buoyancy
column exceeds that of either the sinusoidal buckling or helical buckling
column, the component is buckled. If buckling occurs, an S indicating
sinusoidal buckling, an H indicating helical buckling, or an L indicating
lockup will be listed in the B column.
Different critical buckling forces are required to initiate the sinusoidal
and helical buckling phases. Calculations for the critical buckling force
also vary depending on the analysis options selected on the Torque Drag
Setup Data dialog.
Straight Model Calculations
The Straight Model divides the work string into 30 foot sections. The
inclination and azimuth of these sections change along the well as
described by the wellpath data and the approximate 3D well shape.
However, each 30 foot section is assumed to be straight or of constant
inclination. By contrast, the curvilinear model takes into account the
inclination (build or drop) change within each 30 foot section.
Critical Inclination to Select Buckling Model
Curvilinear Model
For a torque drag analysis, the work string is divided into 30 foot
sections. The straight model assumes each section is of constant
inclination. The curvilinear model takes into account the inclination
(build or drop) change within each 30 foot section.
( ) ( ) [ ]
3 1 2 1
2 94 . 1 EI W r Sin
c
=
If ( )
C
Inc > , then:
( ) [ ]
2 1
/ 2 r EIW Inc Sin F
S
=
If ( )
C
Inc < , then:
( )
3 1
2
94 . 1 EIW F
S
=
In hole sections where there is an angle change, compression in the pipe
through the doglegs causes extra side force. The additional side force
acts to stabilize the pipe against buckling. An exception is when the
pipe is dropping angle.
Loading and Unloading Models
In SPE 36761, Mitchell derives the loading method. The idea presented
is that for compressive axial loads between 1.4 and 2.8 times the
sinusoidal buckling force, there is enough strain energy in the pipe to
sustain helical buckling, but not enough energy to spontaneously change
from sinusoidal buckling to helical buckling.
If you could reach in and lift the pipe up into a helix, it would stay in the
helix when you let go. In an ideal situation without external disturbances
the pipe would stay in a sinusoidal buckling mode until the axial force
reached 2.8 times the sinusoidal buckling force. At this point, the pipe
would transition to the helical buckling mode. This is the loading
scenario.
Once the pipe is in the helical buckling mode, the axial force can be
reduced to 1.4 times the sinusoidal buckling force, and the helical mode
will be maintained. If the axial force falls below 1.4 times the sinusoidal
buckling force, the pipe will fall out of the helix into a sinusoidal
buckling mode. This is the unloading scenario.
In a build section of the well:
( )
r
Inc Sin EIW
r
EI
r
EI
F
S

2
2
2
+ |
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
=

In a drop section of the well:
( )
EI
Inc Sin rW
test

=
if ( ) test then,
( )
r
Inc Sin EIW
r
EI
r
EI
F
S

2
2
2
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=

if ( ) test < then,
( )
r
Inc Sin EIW
r
EI
r
EI
F
S

2
2
2
+ |
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
=

In the figure above, in stage 1 the compressive load is increased from the
force required for sinusoidal buckling to the threshold force where the
pipe snaps into a helically buckled state. This is the loading force.
Stages 2 and 3 represent the reduction of the compressive load to
another threshold force to snap out from helically buckled into a
sinusoidal buckled state. This is the unloading force.
Taking friction into consideration, we can imagine buckling friction acts
a bit like glue. It gives resistance when the pipe is pushed into buckling
(loading) and it also provides resistance to release the pipe from
buckling (unloading). But when the pipe is rotating the glue bond is
broken, and gives no resistance. Where friction is effective, the
transitions from sinusoidal to helical and vice versa are more explosive
because the pipe picks up more spring energy because the friction
prevents free pipe movement until the stored energy is enough to break
the friction bond.
Loading Model
Unloading Model
S H
F F 828427 . 2 =
F
H
= 1.414F
S
Where:
Drag Force Calculations
The drag force acts opposite to the direction of motion. The direction of
the drag force is governed by the type of analysis being performed. The
drag force may be acting up the axis of the pipe, down the axis of the
pipe, or acting in a tangential direction resisting the rotation of the pipe.
The drag force is calculated using the following equation.
Where:

S
F = Com pr es s ion f or c e to induc e ons et of s inus oidal buc k ling

H
F = Com pr es s ion f or c e to induc e ons et of helic al buc k ling
I = Mom ent of iner tial f or c om ponent
E = Youngs m odulus of elas tic ity
W = T ubular weight in m ud
Inc = W ellbor e inc lination
= Cur vatur e in the ver tic al plane ( build or dr op)
r = Radial c lear anc e between wellbor e and wor k s tr ing, in

r
ID
C gInOpenHole asin
2
---------------------------------------------
OD
ToolJoint
2
---------------------------- =
V
T
F F
N D
=
T = Trip speed
A = Angular speed =
60
RPM
diameter
V = Resultant speed = ( )
2 2
A T +

N
F = Side or normal force
= Coefficient of friction (friction factor)

D
F = Drag force
The side force or normal force is a measurement of the force exerted by
the wellbore onto the work string. In the diagram below, the forces
acting on a small segment of work string lying in an inclined hole are
shown. In this simple diagram, the segment is not moving. From this
diagram we can see that the normal force acts in a direction
perpendicular to the inclined surface. The weight of the work string acts
downward in the direction of gravity. Another force, the drag force, is
also acting on the segment. The drag force always acts in the opposite
direction of motion. The segment does not slide down the inclined plane
because of the drag force. The magnitude of the drag force depends on
the normal force, and the coefficient of friction between the inclined
plane and the segment. The coefficient of friction is a means to define
the friction between the wellbore wall and the work string.
Where:
FN = Normal Force
FD = Drag Force
W = Weight of segment
Fatigue Calculations
WELLPLAN torque drag includes fatigue analysis because it is a
primary cause of drilling tubular failure. A fatigue failure is caused by
cyclic bending stresses when the pipe is run in holes with doglegs. The
source of fatigue failure is micro fractures between the crystal structures
of the material caused in the construction of the material. These cracks
are widened by successive stress reversals (tensile/compressive) in the
body of the cylinder. The following five steps are applied in the Torque
Drag analysis of fatigue loading and prediction.
Cyclic stresses are those components of stress that change and reverse
every time the pipe is rotated. In Torque Drag, only bending and
buckling stresses go through this reversal. In the stiff string model the
buckling stresses are integrated with the pipe curvature and hence
included in bending; the soft string model treats buckling stress
independent to bending stress and adds the two together for fatigue
analysis. Bending stresses are caused by pipe running through a curved
hole. On one side of the pipe is bent into tension and the other side of the
pipe is bent into compression (see diagram following). Bending stresses
are a maximum at the outside of the pipe body and undergo a simple
harmonic motion as the pipe rotates.
Apply Bending Stress Magnification Factor calculations (page 220).
Bending stress concentrates close to the tool joints in externally upset
pipe when the pipe is in tension. This magnifies the bending radius in
the section of pipe close to the tool joints.
Establish A Fatigue Endurance Limit For The Pipe
Fatigue endurance limit is not a constant value that is related to the yield
strength of the pipe. It cannot be associated with the material grade of
the pipe. There are also bending stress concentrations in the tubular due
to the design of tool-joints and the shape of upsets in the body of the pipe
apart from those considered in the bending stress magnification factor.
Non externally upset tubulars like collars and casing will have
maximum concentration of bending stress at the tool joint.
The fatigue endurance limit needs to be reduced if the steel is used in a
corrosive environment like saline (high chloride) or hydrogen sulfide
environment.
Derate The Fatigue Endurance Limit For Tension
The crack widening mechanism that causes fatigue is strongly
influenced by tension in the pipe. A simple empirical mechanism is used
to reduce the fatigue endurance limit for tensile stress as a ratio of the
tensile yield stress. This is known as the Goodman relation.
Drillpipe 25-35 Kpsi This is a general value for continuous
tubular steel.
Heavy Weight 18-25 Kpsi More stress concentration in tool joint
Drill Collars 12-15 Kpsi Includes drill collars and other non upset
BHA components, like jars, stabilizers,
MWD, and so forth.
Casings 5-20 Kpsi Depends on connectors:
5 for 8 round, 20 for premium
E MY AY
A F =
If 0 . 0 >
AB
F then,
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
AY
AB
FEL FL
F
F
1 (Tension)
Else,
FEL FL
= (Compression)
( )
FL BUCK BEND F
R + =
( )
2
4
B INTC
ID A
=
INT EXT E
A A A =
( )
2 2
05 . 0 95 . 0
4
J B EXTP
OD OD A + =
( )
2 2
05 . 0 95 . 0
4
J B INTP
ID ID A + =
( )
2
4
B EXTC
OD A
=
( )
2
4
B INTC
ID A
=
Where:

AY
F = Axial force required to generate the yield stress, (lb)
AB
F = Axial force (Buoyancy Method), (lb)
FL
= Fatigue limit, (psi)
MY
= Minimum yield stress specified by Grade , (psi)
FEL
= Fatigue endurance limit, (psi) (For pipe and heavy weight,
this is input. All other components assume = 35,000 psi
BEND
= Bending stress, (psi) (Corrected by BSMF)
BUCK
= Buckling stress, (psi) (only if buckling occurs)
F
R = Fatigue Ratio
E
A = Effective sectional area, ( )
2
in
EXT
A = External area of pipe, heavy weight or collar component, ( )
2
in
INT
A
= Internal area of pipe, heavy weight, or collar component,
( )
2
in
EXTP
A
= Pipe and heavy weight external area,
( )
2
in
INTP
A
= Pipe and heavy weight internal area,
( )
2
in
EXTC
A
= Collar external area,
( )
2
in
INTC
A
= Collar external area,
( )
2
in
B
OD
= Body outside diameter, (in)
J
OD
= Joint outside diameter, (in)
B
ID
= Body inside diameter, (in)
J
ID
= Joint inside diameter, (in)
Compare The Cyclic Stress Against The Derated Fatigue
Endurance Limit
The fatigue ratio is the combined bending and buckling stress divided by
the fatigue endurance limit.
Some judgment is required in using the fatigue endurance limit (FEL),
because the limit is normally determined for a number of cycles of pipe
rotation. The number of cycles for the fatigue endurance limits is
approximately taken at 107 rotations; this is the level of cyclic stress
beyond which the material is immune to fatigue failure. This is normally
equivalent to the pipe drilling for 100000' at 60ft/hr at 100 rpm. The
relationship between fatigue stress (S) and number of cycles to failure
(N) is known as the S-N curve. The following chart is an idealized S-N
curve for G105 pipe that has a yield of 105 Kpsi and a fatigue endurance
limit of 30 Kpsi.
Using the chart you can see that a pipe may yield at a lower number of
cycles at an intermediate stress between the fatigue endurance limit and
the tensile stress limit.
Friction Factors
A friction factor is sometimes referred to as the coefficient of friction.
The friction factor represents the prevailing friction between the
wellbore or casing and the work string. Higher coefficients of friction
result in greater resistance to the movement of the work string as it is run
in, pulled out, or rotated in the wellbore. A friction factor of zero implies
there is no friction in the well, which is an impossible situation. A
friction factor of one suggests all of the normal (contact) force has been
translated into drag force. Refer to the Drag Force calculations
(page 226) for related information.
Friction depends on the two surfaces in contact, as well as the
lubrication properties of the drilling fluid. In addition to friction, the
results of physical mechanisms acting on the work string are reflected in
the selection of the friction factor. There are a number of physical
mechanisms, including stabilizer gouging, key seats, and swelling
formations, that contribute to the torque and drag of the work string.
These mechanisms can cause the hook loads and torques to be higher or
lower than expected. The wellbore path (doglegs or tortuosity) can also
contribute to the loading forces on a work string. Refer to Tortuosity in
this section (page 244) for more information.
Models
The Torque Drag module offers you the choice of two methods to use to
model the string in the wellbore. The soft string model has been the basis
of the WELLPLAN Torque Drag analysis for years. This model is
commonly used throughout the industry for this type of analysis. The
stiff string model was added to the module with the latest release of the
software.
Both models analyze the string in 30-foot sections. The primary
difference between the models is the method of calculating the normal
force acting on the string as a result of the string placement in the
wellbore. Each of the models are described in the following sections.
Pipe Wall Thickness Modification Due to Pipe Class
Drill pipe wall thickness is modified according to the class specified for
the pipe on the String Editor. The class specified indicates the wall
thickness modification as a percentage of the drillpipe outside diameter.
Drill pipe classes can be entered or edited on the Class option of the
Tubular Properties submenu of the Tools Menu.
The outside diameter is modified as follows:
Where:
Sheave Friction
Sheave friction corrections are applied to all measured weight
calculations when you have indicated on the Torque Drag Setup Data
dialog that you want to apply this correction.
Where:
( ) c ID OD c OD
old old new
+ = 1

new
OD = Calculated outside diameter based on pipe class
c =
100
% ess WallThickn
and is based on pipe class specified
old
OD = Outside diameter as specified on the String Editor
old
ID = Inside diameter as specified on the String Editor
( )( )
|
.
|
\
|
+
=
n
tb r
r
e
e
W H e n
L
1
1
1
( )( )
( )
n
tb l
l
e
W H e n
L
+
=
1
1
Side Force for Soft String Model

r
L = Weight indicator reading while raising
l
L = Weight indicator reading while lowering
r
H = Hook load while raising, calculated in analysis
l
H = Hook load while lowering, calculated in analysis
tb
W = Weight of travelling block, user input
n = Number of lines between the blocks
e = Individual sheave efficiency
Where:
Where:
FN= Normal Force
FD = Drag Force
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
2 2
+ + = Sin WL F Sin F F
T T N

N
F = Normal or side force
T
F = Axial force at bottom of section calculated using
Buoyancy Method
= Change in azimuth over section length
= Average inclination over the section
= Change in inclination over section length
L = Section length
W = Buoyed weight of the section
Soft String Model
The soft string model is based on Dawsons

cable model, or soft string
model. As the name implies, in this model the work string (such as
drillstring or casing, and so forth) is considered to be a flexible cable or
string with no associated bending stiffness. Since there is no bending
stiffness, there is no standoff between the BHA and the wellbore wall
due to stabilizers or other upsets.
When determining contact forces, the work string is assumed to lie
against the side of the wellbore. However, within the soft string analysis
it is actually considered to follow the center line of the wellbore. When
determining the contact or normal force, the contact between the string
and the wellbore is assumed to occur at the midpoint of each string
segment.
Stiff String Model
The stiff string model uses the mathematical finite element analysis to
determine the forces acting on the string. This model considers the
tubular stiffness and the tubular joint-to-hole wall clearance. The model
modifies the stiffness for compressive forces. Like the soft string model,
it calculates single point weight concentrations so determining the
contact force per unit area is not possible.
Stiff String analysis should be used to complete the following tasks:
Evaluate a work string containing stiff tubulars run in a well with an
build rate of at least 15 deg/100 ft.
Analyze running stiff casing in a well.
Observe buckling using the Position Plot.
Analyze work string containing upsets found on stabilizers or
friction reduction devices.
The stiff string model analyzes the string by dividing it into sections
(elements) equal to the lesser of the component length or 30 feet. The
model computes the side force at the center point of each element. The
side force is used to compute the torque and drag change from one
element to the next element.
The analysis of each element involves analyzing the nodes defining the
end points of each element. The detailed analysis of each node involves
creating a local mesh of 10 to 20 elements around the node. Each
element is given the same dimensions and properties as the
corresponding full drill string portion.
If the node length exceeds the maximum column-buckling load for the
section, the node is further broken into fractional lengths to keep each
section below the buckling threshold. This is why the analysis may take
considerably longer when large compressive loads are applied.
This short section is solved by solving each individual junction node for
moments and forces, then displacing it to a point of zero force. If this
position is beyond the hole wall, a restorative force is applied to keep it
in the hole. This process is repeated for each node in the short beam until
they reach their relaxed state.
The stiff string produces slightly different results when run top down
or bottom up. The difference is explained because the direction of
analysis is reversed. The length of beam selected for each stiff analysis
has been selected to optimize speed while maintaining reliable
consistent results.
The following illustrations depict an inclined beam section with length
L. P is the axial force, and Fv, F1, and F2 are the calculated ends or
contact forces caused by weight W.
L
P
Fv = End Force
I
Fv
M = End Moment
L
M1 M2
F2
W
F1
Stress
In the analysis, many stress calculations are performed using the
following equations. These calculations include the effects of:
z Axial stress due to hydrostatic and mechanical loading
z Bending stress approximated from wellbore curvature
z Bending stress due to buckling
z Torsional stress from twist
z Transverse shear stress from contact
z Hoop stress due to internal and external pressure
z Radial stress due to internal and external pressure
Calculated stress data is available on the Stress Graph, Summary Report
or Stress Data table.
Von Mises Stress
Note: The von Mises stress is calculated on the inside and outside of the
pipe wall. The maximum stress calculated for these two locations is
presented in the reports, graphs, and tables.
ij
= stress i = stress type j = location
Stress types: Location:
r = Radial 1 = outside pipe wall
s = Transverse shear 2 = inside pipe wall
h = Hoop
t = Torsion
a = Axial
( ) ( ) ( )
2
6 6
2 2 2 2 2
tj sj aj hj rj aj hj rj
VM

+ + + +
=
Radial Stress
Transverse Shear Stress
Hoop Stress
Torsional Stress
Bending Stress
Buckling Stress
(only calculated if buckling occurs)
e r
P =
1
i r
P =
2
A
F
n
s s
2
2 1
= =
( ) [ ] ( )
2 2 2 2 2
1
2
i o e o i i i h
r r P r r P r + =
( ) ( ) [ ]
2 2 2 2 2
2
2
i o e o i o i h
r r P r P r r + =
J T r
o t
12
1
=
J T r
i t
12
2
=
9 . 68754
1
M E r
o bend
=
9 . 68754
2
M E r
i bend
=
Axial Stress
(tension + bending + buckling)
Where:
I F R r
a c o buck
2
1
=
I F R r
a c i buck
2
2
=
1 1 1 buck bend a a
A F + + =
2 2 2 buck bend a a
A F + + =

i
r = Inside pipe radius (in)
o
r = Outside pipe radius (in), as modified by the pipe class
n
F = Normal (side) force, (lb)
a
F = Axial force (lb) as calculated with pressure area method
T = Torque (ft-lb)
E = Modulus of elasticity (psi)
i
P = Pipe internal pressure (psi)
e
P = Pipe external pressure (psi)
= Wellbore curvature as dogleg severity (deg/100ft) for

soft string model. Stiff string model calculates local
string curvature.
J = Polar moment of inertia
Where:
( )
4 4
32
id od body
B B J =
( )
4 4
int
32
id od jo
J J J =
od
B = body outside diameter, in
id
B = body inside diameter, in
od
J = joint outside diameter, in
id
J = joint inside diameter, in
Stretch
Total stretch in the work string is computed as the sum of three
components. These three components consider the stretch due to axial
load, buckling, and ballooning. Ballooning is caused by differential
pressure inside and outside of the work string.
Stretch due to axial load
This term is based on Hookes Law. The first term reflects the constant
load in the string, while the second term reflects the linear change in the
load.
Where:
Stretch due to buckling
If buckling occurs, the additional stretch in the buckled section of the
work string is calculated using the following equation.
A = Cross sectional area of component
I = Moment of inertia
c
R = Maximum distance from workstring to wellbore wall (in)
M = Bending Stress Magnification Factor
Total Stretch =
Balloon Buck HL
L L L + +
E A
L F
E A
L F
L
HL

+
=
2
HL
L = Change in length due to the Hookes Law mechanism
F = Axial force as determined by the pressure area method
F = Change in pressure area axial force over component length
A = Cross sectional area of component
E = Youngs Modulus of component
Where:
Stretch due to ballooning
Stretch due to ballooning is caused by differential pressure inside and
outside of the work string, and is defined by the following equation.
Where:
I E
L F r
I E
L F r
L
Buck

+

=
8 4
2 2
Buck
L = Change in length due to buckling
F = Axial force as determined by the pressure area metho
F = Change in pressure area axial force over component l
I = Moment of Inertia
r = Clearance between the wellbore wall and the
work string component
( )
( ) ( ) [ ]
a s a s Balloon
P R P L R
R E
L v
L +

=
2 2
2
2
1

Balloon
L = Change in length due to ballooning mechanism
L = Length of work string component element
R = Ration of component outside diameter/inside diameter
= Poissons Ratio of component
s
= Mud density inside work string component
a
= Mud density in annulus at depth of work string component
s
P = Surface pressure, work string side
a
P = Surface pressure, annulus side
Tortuosity
Wellbore tortuosity is a measure of the random meandering that occur
in a well during drilling operations.
In designing a well, tortuosity or rippling is not normally modeled
during directional well path planning. Typically, a wellpath file is
generated based on ideal trajectories which follow smooth paths
governed by the wellpath calculation method. WELLPLAN uses the
minimum curvature method.
Similarly, during actual drilling operations, wiggle may occur
between consecutive stations, even though the actual well path appears
to match the ideal plan at the station measurement point. The
recording of the wells precise tortuosity can be captured only through
the use of closer and closer stations, although this may be impractical.
In both the design case and the operational case, the degree of tortuosity
is a factor on the overall loading (both torque and drag) on a particular
work string. The smoother the well, the less the frictional effects.
Modelling of wellbore tortuosity has been recognized as especially
significant at the planning stage, enabling more realistic load predictions
to be established.
Torque
Torque is calculated using the following equation.
Where:
V
A
r F
N
=
T = Trip speed
A = Angular speed =
60
RPM
diameter
V = Resultant speed = ( )
2 2
A T +
N
F = Side or normal force
= Coefficient of friction
r = Radius of component (for collars the OD of the collar
is used for drill pipe, heavy weight and casing, the
OD of the tool joint is used for stabilizers the OD
of the blade is used)
D
F = Drag force
= Torque
Where:
FN = Normal Force
FD = Drag Force
Twist
Twist in the work string is calculated along the string for each segment,
and is accumulated along the length of the work string. Twist is reported
as windup on the reports.
Where:
JG
TL
=
Viscous Drag
Viscous drag is additional drag force acting on the work string due to
hydraulic effects while tripping or rotating. The fluid forces are
determined for steady pipe movement, and not for fluid acceleration
effects. You can elect to include viscous drag on the Torque Drag Setup
Data dialog.
The additional force due to viscous drag is calculated as follows. Note
that this drag force is added to the drag force calculated in Drag Force
Calculations.
= Angle of twist (radians)
L = Length of component
T = Torque (ft-lb)
E = Modulus of elasticity (psi)
G = Modulus of rigidity =
2 2 +
E
= Poissons ratio
J = Polar moment of inertia
Where:
Pipe:
( )
4 4
32
id od body
B B J =
( )
4 4
int
32
id od jo
J J J =
od
B = Body outside diameter, in
id
B = Body inside diameter, in
od
J = Joint outside diameter, in
id
J = Joint inside diameter, in
( )
( )
body jo
jo body
J J
J J
J
05 . 95 .
int
int
+
=
Collar:
( )
4 4
32
ID OD
B B J =
). .( 4
). .( .
2 2
p h
p p h
D D
D D D P
Force

There are no direct computations of fluid drag due to pipe rotation. The
method shown here derives from the analysis of the Fann Viscometer
given in Applied Drilling Engineering.
Compute the Shear Rate in the Annulus due to pipe rotation.
Given the shear rate, the shear stress is computed directly from the
viscosity equations for the fluid type. The 479 in the equations below is
a conversion from Centipoise to equivalent lb/100 ft
2
.
Bingham Plastic

Power Law
Herschel Bulkley
No consideration is made to laminar or turbulent flow in this derivation.
Additionally the combined hydraulic effects of trip movement and
rotation are ignored, which would accelerate the onset of turbulent flow.
Given the shear stress at the pipe wall (in lb/100ft2), the torque on the
pipe is computed from the surface area of the pipe and the torsional
radius.
( )
2 2 2
/ 1 / 1 .
60 / . . 4
h p p
D D D
RPM
SR
479 / .SR PV YP
t
+ =
479 / .
n
t
SR K =
if K is Cp or 4.79 if K is dyn/cm
479 / .
n
t
SR K ZG+ =
if K is Cp or 4.79 if K is dyn/cm
In the case of rotational torque the forces are equal and opposite between
the pipe and the hole, although we are interested in the torque on the pipe
and not the reaction from the hole.
Where:
100 / ) 24 / .( . . 2 .
2
p t
D L Torque =

h
D = Hole Diameter (in)
h
D = Pipe Diameter (in)
P = Annular pressure loss calculated according to
rheological model selected
p
V = Linear Speed of Pipe (f t/min)
RPM = Rotational Speed of Pipe (rev olutions/min)
YP = Yield Point (lbs/100f t2)
PV = Plastic Viscosity (cp)
ZG = Zero Gel Yield (lbs/100f t2)
References
General
The Neutral Zones in Drill Pipe and Casing and Their Significance in
Relation to Buckling and Collapse, Klinkenberg, A., Royal Dutch
Shell Group, South Western Division of Production, Beaumont, Texas,
March 1951.
Drillstring Design for Directional Wells, Corbett, K.T., and Dawson,
R., IADC Drilling Technology Conference, Dallas, March 1984.
Uses and Limitations of Drillstring Tension and Torque Model to
Monitor Hole Conditions, Brett, J.F., Bechett, A.D., Holt, C.A., and
Smith, D.L., SPE 16664.
Developing a Platform Strategy and Predicting Torque Losses for
Modelled Directional Wells in the Amauligak Field of the Beaufort Sea,
Canada, Lesso Jr., W.G., Mullens, E., and Daudey, J., SPE 19550.
Bending Stress Magnification Factor
Bending Stress Magnification in Constant Curvature Doglegs With
Impact on Drillstring and Casing, Paslay, P.R., and Cernocky, E.P.,
SPE 22547.
Buckling
A Buckling Criterion for Constant Curvature Wellbores, Mitchell, R.,
Landmark Graphics, SPE 52901.
A Study of the Buckling of Rotary Drilling Strings, Lubinski, A., API
Drilling and Production Practice, 1950.
Drillpipe Buckling in Inclined Holes, Dawson,R., and Paslay, P.R.,
SPE 11167, September 1982.
Buckling Behavior of Well Tubing: The Packer Effect, by Mitchell,
R.F., SPE Journal, October 1982.
Frictional Forces in Helical Buckling of Tubing, Mitchell, R.F., SPE
13064.
New Design Considerations for Tubing and Casing Buckling in
Inclined Wells, Cheatham, J.B., and Chen, Y.C., OTC 5826, May
1988.
Tubing and Casing Buckling in Horizontal Wells, Chen, Y.C., Lin,
Y.H., and Cheatham, J.B., JPT, February 1989.
Buckling of Pipe and Tubing Constrained Inside Inclined Wells,
Chen, Y.C., Adnan, S., OTC 7323.
Effects of Well Deviation on Helical Buckling, Mitchell, R.F., SPE
Drilling & Completions, SPE 29462, March 1997.
Buckling Analysis in Deviated Wells: A Practical Method, SPE
Drilling & Completions, SPE 36761, March 1999.
Fatigue
Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, by
Richard W.Herzberg, 3rd Edition 1989, Wiley.
Sheave Friction
The Determination of True Hook and Line Tension Under Dynamic
Conditions, by Luke & Juvkam-Wold, IADC/SPE 23859.
Analysis Improves Accuracy of Weight Indicator Reading, by
Dangerfield, Oil and Gas Journal, August 10, 1987.
Side Force Calculations
Torque and Drag in Directional Wells Prediction and Measurement,
Johancsik, C.A., Friesen, D.B., and Dawson, Rapier, Journal of
Petroleum Technology, June 1984, pages 987-992.
Drilling and Completing Horizontal Wells With Coiled Tubing, Wu,
Jiang, and Juvkam-Wold, H.C., SPE 26336.
Stiff String Model
Background to Buckling, Brown & Poulson, University of Swansea,
Section 3.4 Analysis of Elastic Rigid Jointed Frameworks (with sway).
Engineering Formulas, Gieck, Kurt, Fourth Ed. McGraw Hill 1983,
Section P13, Deflection of Beams in Bending.
Chapter
Hydraulics Analysis
Overview
Hydraulics can be used to simulate the dynamic pressure losses in the
rigs circulating system, and to provide analytical tools to optimize
hydraulics. In this chapter, you will become familiar with using the
Hydraulics module and with interpreting analysis results. To reinforce
what you learn in the class lecture, you will complete several exercises
designed to prepare you for using the module outside of class. The
information in this chapter can be used not only as a study guide during
the course, but also be used as a reference for future analysis.
requirements and analysis results, as well as the theory used as the basis
for the analysis. Supporting calculations and references for additional
of using the Hydraulics module, including:
Optimizing Bit Hydraulics
Determining the Minimum Flow Rate
Determining the Maximum Flow Rate
Determining the Bit Nozzle Sizes to Achieve Flow Rate
7
Chapter 7: Hydraulics Analysis
Workflow
Open a Case using the Well Explorer.
Define the hole section geometry. (Case > Hole Section Editor)
workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth).
(Case > String)
Enter wellpath (survey) data. (Case > Wellpath > Editor)
Specify formation temperatures. (Case > Geothermal Gradient)
Optional Step: Specify the eccentricity ratio of the annuli at
different measured depths. Eccentricity reduces the pressure drop
for annular flow. This information is useful for evaluating the
effects of eccentricity on a vertical well. For a deviated well, the
pipe is automatically assumed to be fully eccentric in the deviated
sections. (Case > Eccentricity)
Specify the circulating system configuration. (Case > Circulating
System)
Define the pore pressure gradients. (Not required for all analysis
modes.) (Case > Pore Pressure)
Define the fracture gradients. (Not required for all analysis modes.)
(Case > Fracture Gradient)
Determine bit total flow area for optimized hydraulics.
Access the Graphical Analysis mode. (Select Graphical
Analysis from the Mode drop-down list.)
Optional: Specify placement and frequency of standoff devices.
(Parameter > Standoff Devices)
Specify the pump limits. (Parameter > Pump Limits)
Determine the optimal bit nozzle total flow area for the
optimization method of your choice. (View > Plot)
Determine the minimum flow rate required to clean the wellbore.
Access the operational hole cleaning model. (Select Hole
Cleaning - Operational from the Mode drop-down list.)
Enter operational and cuttings data. (Parameter > Transport
Analysis Data)
Determine the minimum flow rate that will clean the hole. (View
> Plot > Operational)
Determine the maximum flow rate.
Access the Annular Velocity Analysis mode. (Select Annular
Velocity Analysis from the Mode drop-down list.)
Enter operational data. (Parameter > Rates)
Determine the maximum flow rate that will not result in
turbulent annular flow. (View > Plot > Annular Pump Rate)
Determine the bit nozzle sizes.
Access the Pressure: Pump Rate Range analysis mode. (Select
Pressure: Pump Rate Range from the Mode drop-down list.)
Enter the minimum and maximum flow rates you determined in
the previous steps. (Parameter > Rates)
Optional: Specify up to five depths you want ECD calculated at.
(Parameter > ECD Depths)
Analyze bit hydraulics for the range of flow rates and specified
bit nozzle sizes. (View > Report > Pressure Loss) This step
may need to be repeated until the bit nozzle configuration is
optimized.
Determine the tripping schedule that will not exceed a specific
pressure change while tripping the work string. (Select
Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule from the Mode drop-down list.)
Calculate pressures and ECD occurring while tripping. (Select
Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD from the Mode drop-down list.)
Fine tune hydraulics. (Select Pressure: Pump Rate Fixed from the
Mode drop-down list.)
Introducing Hydraulic Analysis
When analyzing fluid hydraulics for a wellbore section, there are two
fundamental issues to investigate: hole cleaning and rate of penetration.
Hole cleaning is usually directly related to the flow rate and drilling
fluid properties. Rate of penetration is usually directly related to the bit
nozzle sizes. PDC bits are an exception where a specific flow rate is
required for acceptable rate of penetration, rather than hydraulic
horsepower. Because these drilling hydraulic parameters are inter-
related and affect each other, designing hydraulics can be very
complicated.
The WELLPLAN Hydraulics module is designed to assist the engineer
with the complicated issue of designing hydraulics. The module can be
used to optimize bit hydraulics, determine the minimum flow rate for
hole cleaning, determine the maximum flow rate to avoid turbulent
flow, analyze hydraulics for surge and/or swab pressures and to quickly
evaluate rig operational hydraulics.
The module provides several rheological models, including Bingham
Plastic, Power Law, Newtonian, and Herschel Bulkley. The chosen
rheological model provides the basis for the pressure loss calculations.
Refer to Herschel Bulkley Model on page 332, Power Law Model
on page 332, or Bingham Plastic Model on page 331 for more
information.
Starting Hydraulics Analysis
There are two ways to begin the Hydraulics Module:
z You can select Hydraulics from the Modules Menu, and then select
the desired analysis mode.
z You can also click the Hydraulics Button and then select the
appropriate desired mode from the drop down list.
z Pressure: Pump Rate Range: Calculate pressure losses for each
section in the workstring, annulus, the surface equipment and bit,
and ECDs for a specified range of flow rates. Refer to Pressure
Loss Analysis Calculations on page 324 for more information.
z Pressure: Pump Rate Fixed: Calculate pressure losses for each
section in the workstring, annulus, the surface equipment and bit
for one pump rate. Refer to Pressure Loss Analysis Calculations
Select desired Hydraulic Analysis mode
from submenu, or from Mode drop-down list.
Choose Hydraulics Analysis from Module menu, or by clicking the
Hydraulics Module button.
z Annular Velocity Analysis: Calculate annular velocities at
specified flow rates and the critical flow rates for each section in
the work string.
z Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule: Calculate a tripping schedule
that will not exceed a specified pressure change while moving the
work string in or out of the hole. Refer to Swab/Surge
Calculations on page 327 for more information.
z Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD: Calculate the actual pressure and
ECD that occurs when the work string is tripped in or out of the
hole. Refer to Swab/Surge Calculations on page 327 for more
information.
z Graphical Analysis: Examine the effects of changing flow rate
and TFA on a number of hydraulics parameters.
z Optimization Planning: Calculate the flow rate and nozzle
configuration to optimize bit hydraulics based on several common
criteria. Refer to Optimization Planning Calculations on
z Optimization Well Site: Determine nozzle configuration for
optimal hydraulics using recorded rig circulating pressures. These
calculations use Scotts method, and only data specified on the
input dialog are used in the calculations. Refer to Optimization
Well Site Calculations on page 316 for more information.
z Weight Up: Calculate the amount of weight up or dilution material
required to adjust mud weight to a specific value. Refer to Weight
Up Calculations on page 330 for more information.
z Hole Cleaning Operational: Determine the cutting concentration
percentage, bed height, and critical transport velocity flow rate in
the wellbore using the current string, hole section, fluid and survey.
Refer to Hole Cleaning Methodology and Calculations on
z Hole Cleaning Parametric: Determine the cuttings concentration
percentage, bed height, and critical transport velocity flow rate for a
range of pump rates for all inclinations from 0 to 90 degrees (in five
degree increments). This mode uses data specified on the input
dialog, and does not use the current string, hole section, or survey.
Refer to Hole Cleaning Methodology and Calculations on
Optimizing Bit Hydraulics
Using the Graphical Analysis mode, you can determine the optimum
flow rate and TFA resulting from specified criteria by examining a
series of available graphs. The range of flow rates over which to perform
the analysis begins at a very low flow rate and is limited on the high end
by the specified pump limits. Bit TFA (total flow area) is determined by
using a calculated pressure loss at the bit and the flow rate. The impact
force, nozzle velocity, and the hydraulic horsepower at the bit are
calculated once the TFA, pressure loss at the bit, and the flow rate are
determined. Refer to Optimization Planning Calculations on page 315
Using Graphical Analysis Mode
Entering Pump Specifications
Enter data in the Parameter > Pump Limits dialog box to specify the
pump constraints that is used as a basis for the Graphical Analysis.
The Maximum Pump Pressure is the total system pressure loss. This
pressure loss will be used to determine the flow rate based on the
pressure loss calculations that pertain to the rheological model you have
selected. Refer to Pressure Loss Analysis Calculations on page 324
The Maximum Pump Power establishes a boundary condition that will
be displayed as a line on the graphical output from this analysis.
Click the Default from Pump Data button to use the Maximum Pump
Pressure, and Maximum Pump Power calculated from the information
entered on the Circulating System, Mud Pumps tab. Refer to the Pump
Select Graphical Analysis
from drop down list.
Power Calculations on page 325 for more information. The Default
from Pump Data button is available when you have specified a surface
equipment configuration on the Circulating System > Surface
Equipment tab and indicated at least one active pump on the
Circulating System > Mud Pumps tab.
Analyzing Results
Analyzing Results Using Plots
All Graphical Analysis results are displayed in plots.
Using the Velocity @ Bit Plot
Use the View > Plot > Velocity @ Bit plot to determine the velocity of
the fluid through the bit for a range of flow rates and varied total flow
area (TFA). The following steps can be used to determine the TFA for a
specified flow rate or vice versa.
1. Look at the plot and determine the pump rate (x axis) and
corresponding TFA (right side Y axis). Keep in mind the pump rate
your pump(s) can produce.
2. Determine the velocity (left side Y axis) that corresponds to the
pump rate and TFA determined in Step 1.
The pump rate begins at zero and increases until the flow rate results in
parasitic pressure losses equal to 100% of the total system pressure loss.
(Essentially this case results in zero pressure loss at the bit.)
The bit velocity is calculated by first determining the pressure loss
through the bit. Pressure loss calculations are based on the rheological
model selected on the Case > Fluid Editor and assumes the total system
pressure loss is equal to the maximum pump pressure entered on the
Parameter > Pump Limits dialog. Based on the total system pressure
Click Default from Pump
Data button to default from
active pumps listed on Case >
Circulating System > Mud
Pumps.
loss, as well as the workstring, fluid, and hole section information
entered into the Case > String Editor, Case > Fluid Editor, and Case
> Hole Section Editor, we can determine the pressure loss at the bit.
Knowing the pressure loss at the bit, the flow rate and TFA can be
calculated. The velocity at the bit can be determined.
Using the Power Per Area Plot
Use the View > Plot > Power Per Area plot to determine the power per
area through the bit for a range of flow rates and varied total flow area
(TFA). The following steps can be used to determine the TFA, and
pump rate required to maximize bit power per area.
1. Look at the plot and determine the pump rate (x axis) corresponding
to the TFA in the legend.
2. Determine the Power/Area (right side Y axis) that corresponds to
the pump rate determined in Step 1. If the pumps you are using are
not capable of producing this pump rate, use the maximum pump
rate the pumps can produce.
The power per area is calculated by first determining the pressure loss
This plot is used to determine
the bit velocity and required
flow rate or TFA given a flow
rate or TFA.
model selected on the Case > Fluid Editor, and assume the total system
Pump Limits dialog. Based on the total system pressure loss, as well as
the workstring, fluid, and wellbore information entered into the Case >
String Editor, Case > Fluid Editor, and Case > Hole Section Editor,
we can determine the pressure loss at the bit. Knowing the pressure loss
at the bit and the flow rate, the TFA can be calculated. From this, the
power per area of the bit can be determined.
Using the Impact Force Plot
Use the View > Plot > Impact Force plot to determine the impact force
of the fluid through the bit for a range of flow rates and varied total flow
area (TFA). The following steps can be used to determine the TFA and
pump rate required to maximize the impact force at the bit.
Read maximum power per area and
corresponding pump rate from plot.
Read the TFA for the maximum power/area in the legend. Using this TFA,
read the pump rate. Use this pump rate to read the power/area.
to the TFA in the legend. (This TFA is the TFA to maximize impact
force.)
2. Determine the impact force (right side Y axis) that corresponds to
the pump rate determined in Step 1. If the pumps you are using are
not capable of producing this pump rate, use the maximum pump
rate the pumps can produce.
The impact force is calculated by first determining the pressure loss
model selected on the Case > Fluid Editor and assume the total system
the workstring, fluid, and wellbore information entered into the Case >
String Editor, Case > Fluid Editor, and Case > Hole Section Editor,
we can determine the pressure loss at the bit. Knowing the pressure loss
at the bit and the flow rate, the TFA can be calculated. From this, the
impact force at the bit can be determined.
Using the Power Plot
Use the View > Plot > Power plot to determine the power of the fluid
through the bit for a range of flow rates and varied total flow area (TFA).
The following steps can be used to determine the TFA and pump rate
required to maximize power at the bit.
to the TFA in the legend.
2. Determine the Power (right side Y axis) that corresponds to the
pump rate determined in Step 1. If the pumps you are using are not
capable of producing this pump rate, use the maximum pump rate
the pumps can produce.
Read maximum impact force and corresponding
pump rate from plot using the TFA in the legend.
Read the TFA for the maximum impact force in the legend. Using this TFA,
read the pump rate.
The power at the bit is calculated by first determining the pressure loss
model selected on the Case > Fluid Editor and assume the total system
Parameter > Pump Limits dialog. Based on the total system pressure
loss, as well as the workstring, fluid, and wellbore information entered
into the String Editor, Fluid Editor, and Hole Section Editor, we can
determine the pressure loss at the bit. Knowing the pressure loss at the
bit and the flow rate, the TFA can be calculated. Knowing the flow rate
and TFA, the power at the bit can be determined.
Using the Pressure Loss Plot
Use the View > Plot > Pressure Loss plot to determine the pressure loss
through the bit for a range of flow rates and varied total flow area (TFA).
The following steps can be used to determine the TFA as well as the
pump rate required to achieve a certain pressure loss at the bit.
to the desired pressure loss at the bit (left side Y axis).
2. Determine the TFA (right side Y axis) that corresponds to the pump
rate determined in Step 1.
For any given flow
rate, the parasitic
pressure loss plus the
bit pressure loss is
equal to total system
pressure loss.
Using the TFA in the legend, read the flow rate.
Use this flow rate to determine the maximum bit
power.
(Essentially this case results in zero pressure loss at the bit.) On this
particular plot, the combined pressure loss through the bit plus the
parasitic pressure loss should equal the total system pressure loss.
The first step in this analysis is determining the pressure loss through the
bit. Pressure loss calculations are based on the rheological model
selected on the Case > Fluid Editor, and assume the total system
Case > Pump Limits dialog. Based on the total system pressure loss, as
well as the workstring, fluid, and hole section information entered into
the Case > String Editor, Case > Fluid Editor, and Case > Hole
Section Editor, we can determine the pressure loss at the bit. Knowing
the pressure loss at the bit and the flow rate, the TFA can be calculated.
Using the Power vs. Impact Force Plot
Use the View > Plot > Power vs Impact Force plot to determine the
maximum impact force, or bit power per area for a range of flow rates.
1. Look at the plot and determine the pump rate (X axis) corresponding
to the maximum impact force, or bit power per area.
2. Read the corresponding impact force or bit power per area from the
other curve on the plot.
For any flow rate the
parasitic pressure loss
plus bit pressure
losses equal the total
system pressure loss.
Using the desired bit
pressure loss, read
the required flow rate
and TFA- or use the
TFA and read the
required flow rate and
pressure loss.
The first step in this analysis is determining the pressure loss through the
bit. Pressure loss calculations are based on the rheological model
selected on the Case > Fluid Editor and assume the total system
the workstring, fluid, and hole section information entered into the Case
> String Editor, Case > Fluid Editor, and Case > Hole Section
Editor, we can determine the pressure loss at the bit. Knowing the
pressure loss at the bit and the flow rate, the TFA can be calculated.
Knowing the flow rate and TFA, the impact force or bit power per are
can be calculated.
Numerical Optimization
This analysis mode is used for determining the flow rate and nozzle
configuration so you can achieve optimization with respect to one of the
following methods:
z Maximum hydraulic horsepower
Read maximum bit power/area and
corresponding impact force and
pump rate.
Read maximum impact force and
corresponding bit power/area and
pump rate.
z Maximum bit jet impact force
z Maximum nozzle velocity
z Percent system pressure loss at the bit
This method is one of three analysis modes used by the Hydraulics
module for optimizing hydraulics. Graphical Analysis and Optimization
Well Site are the other two methods.
The flow rate and nozzles are calculated to fully use the available pump
pressure. Pump pressure is considered to be the sum of parasitic losses
(losses in the workstring, annulus, and surface lines) and the pressure
drop over the bit, and it is equal to the maximum pump pressure. After
the true optimum flow rate is determined, it can be increased slightly to
use all available pump pressure.
You can specify a minimum annular velocity to serve as a lower
boundary for the flow rate. At no point in the annulus will the flow rate
be lower than the specified minimum flow rate. The minimum annular
velocity will occur in the widest annulus section. Imposing this rule on
the optimization may result in a flow rate that does not generate the
optimum bit hydraulics.
You can also specify that turbulence in the annulus is not allowed, which
will put a limit on the maximum flow rate. Specifying that turbulence is
not allowed always limits the calculated flow rate, even if the flow rate
is less than the true optimum or if it forces a velocity that is less than the
specified minimum annular velocity. Imposing this rule on the
optimization may result in a flow rate that does not generate the
optimum bit hydraulics.
The calculation determines the nozzle sizes based on the number of
nozzles specified that will as closely as possible provide the required
TFA. You can restrict the freedom in nozzle selection by specifying a
non-zero value for minimum nozzle size, or by specifying another
number of nozzles. The final TFA may not be the exact optimal TFA
after the nozzle configuration is determined.
As discussed earlier, the result of the calculations (flow rate and
nozzles) may not necessarily match the optimum solution, but may be
restricted by the imposed limitations. To remove all restrictions that you
can control, you can specify the following in the Solution Constraints
dialog.
z Mark the Allow Turbulence in the Annulus check box.
z Specify zero in the Minimum Annular Velocity field.
z Specify zero in the Minimum Nozzle Size field.
You can view a brief numerical summary of the optimization results for
each optimization method by looking in the Quick Look group box on
the Solution Constraints dialog (This is the same dialog that you entered
data pertinent to the analysis.). This information is presented in a tabular
format. For each optimization method, the optimal flow rate, nozzle
configuration, and TFA is presented.
Determining the Minimum Flow Rate
The minimum flow rate is the rate that will clean the wellbore for a
specified rate of penetration, rotary speed, pump rate, bed porosity,
cuttings diameter, and size.
The Hydraulics module offers two hole cleaning analysis modes. These
modes are Hole Cleaning-Parametric and Hole Cleaning-Operational.
Although both modes are based on the same theory, the results and
usage of the modes are different. You should use the Hole Cleaning-
Operational analysis first to analyze your current Case. After
performing the Operational analysis, you may want to study the effects
of varying parameters using the Hole Cleaning-Parametric analysis
mode.
The operational analysis determines the percentage of cuttings in the
annulus of the current active case. The cuttings concentration
percentage, bed height, and minimum flow rate to avoid bed formation
is determined from the current inclination, annular diameters, and other
Case data.
Information entered on the Case > Fluid Editor, Case > String Editor,
Case > Wellpath Editor, and Case > Hole Section Editor will be used
to calculate annular volumes and hole inclination.
Starting the Hole Cleaning Operational Analysis
Select Hole Cleaning
Operational from the drop
down list.
Entering Analysis Data
The Parameter > Transport Analysis Data dialog is used to specify
the analysis parameters that will be used in the Hole Cleaning-
Operational analysis.
Analyzing Results
Using the Operational Plot
The View > Plot > Operational plot presents the following for each
measured depth in the wellbore:
Inclination
Minimum flow rate to avoid cuttings formation
Suspended cuttings volume
Bed height
The bed height and cuttings volume portions of the plot are calculated
using the flow rate specified on the Parameter > Transport Analysis
Data dialog (Operational). The minimum flow rate, and inclinations
portions of the plot are independent of the specified flow rate.
If there is a bed height forming, the total cuttings volume will begin to
become greater than the suspended cuttings volume in that portion of the
A typical estimate
of the porosity of
the cuttings bed is
36%.
Normal range is
0.1 to .25 inches.
Enter the specific
gravity of the
formation being
drilled.
wellbore. Also, you will notice that the bed height begins to form when
the minimum flow rate to avoid bed formation for a section of the well
is greater than the flow rate specified on the Transport Analysis Data
dialog (Operational). In order to avoid the formation of a cuttings bed in
that portion of the well, you must increase the specified flow rate to a
rate greater than the minimum flow rate to avoid bed formation.
Use the Rate of Penetration slider control to specify the rate at which
the formation is being drilled. This value is used to determine the
amount of cuttings produced per time increment in effect a cuttings
flow rate. When you specify a value here it has the same effect as
specifying a value in the Rate of Penetration field in the Parameter >
Transport Analysis Data dialog. The new value you specify with the
slider will appear in the Rate of Penetration field the next time you open
the Transport Data dialog.
This analysis uses the data input on the Fluid Editor, String Editor,
Wellpath Editor, Hole Section Editor and the Transport Analysis
(Operational) Data dialog.
Rate of Penetration slider can be
used to change the ROP and
immediately view the results in the
plots. The ROP used in the plots is
specified here.
Read each plot
using the same
Y axis.
Pump Rate slider can be used to
change the pump rate and
immediately view the results in the
plots. The rate used in the plots is
specified here.
Analyzing Results Using the Operational Report
Configuring Report Options
The View > Report Options dialog is used to specify additional
information to include on the report. Using this dialog, you can include
or exclude much of the information defining the case you are analyzing.
Using the Operational Report
The View > Report > Operational report is a representation, in table
form, of the information available on the View > Plot > Operational
plot, as well as some additional information. From the report, you can
determine the minimum pump rate (flow rate when a cuttings bed will
begin to form). For the flow rate specified on the Parameter >
Transport Analysis Data dialog (Operational), you can also determine
the cuttings volume, bed height, and equivalent mud weight over the
entire wellbore using the MD Calculation Interval you specify on the
Transport Analysis Data dialog (Operational).
Check boxes to include
desired information on the
report.
Determining the Maximum Flow Rate
Annular Velocity can be used to determine the flow regime and critical
velocity for each section in the annulus for a range of flow rates. Critical
velocity is the velocity resulting from the critical flow rate.
For the Power Law and Bingham Plastic rheology models, the critical
flow rate is the flow rate required to produce a Reynolds number
greater than the critical Reynolds number for laminar flow. The
Reynolds number is dependent on mud properties, the velocity the mud
is traveling, and on the effective diameter of the work string or annulus
the mud is flowing through. Based on the calculated Reynolds number
and the rheological model you are using, it is possible to determine the
flow regime of the mud. For regimes where the Reynolds number lies
between the critical values for laminar and turbulent flow, a state of
transitional flow exists.
For the Herschel Bulkley rheology model the critical flow rate is the
flow rate required to exceed the Ga number corresponding to laminar
flow. The Ga number is dependent on mud properties, the velocity the
mud is traveling, and on the effective diameter of the work string, or
annulus the mud is flowing through. Based on the calculated Ga number
and the rheological model you are using, it is possible to determine the
flow regime of the mud. For regimes where the Ga number lies between
the critical values for laminar and turbulent flow, a state of transitional
flow exists.
Starting Annular Velocity Analysis Mode
Select Annular
Velocity from drop
down list.
Defining Pump Rates
Use the Parameter > Rates dialog to enter the range of flow rates to
analyze.
Analyzing Results
The analysis results are available using the View Menu.
Using the Annular Velocity Plot
Use the View > Plot > Annular Velocity plot to determine the velocity
of the fluid in the annulus for any measured depth in the wellbore for the
range of flow rates you specified on the Parameter > Rates dialog. This
graphical analysis calculates the annular velocity across each annulus
section and compares the profile with the critical velocity. Note that
when an annular velocity curve crosses the critical velocity curve, then
the flow regime for that annulus section moves from laminar to either
transitional or turbulent flow.
The fluid velocity is calculated based on the rheological model selected
on the Case > Fluid Editor. Cross-sectional flow areas are determined
from information input on the Case > String Editor and the Case >
Hole Section Editor.
When specifying the range
and increment, keep in mind
that up to 15 flow rates can be
analyzed at a time.
Using the Annular Pump Rate Plot
Use the View > Plot > Annular Pump Rate plot to determine the pump
rate that causes fluid flow outside of the laminar flow regime for any
depth in the wellbore. Pump rates greater than the critical flow rate curve
at any depth indicate that the flow regime moves out of laminar flow and
into transitional or turbulent flow. The plot does not distinguish
transitional from turbulent flow.
The calculations are based on the rheological model selected on the
Case > Fluid Editor. Cross-sectional flow areas are determined from
information input on the Case > String Editor and the Case > Hole
Section Editor.
Annular Velocity vs
Measured Depth for
each flow rate
analyzed
Annular velocity exceeding laminar flow
Analyzing Results Using Tables
Using the Annulus Information Table
Use the View > Table > Annulus Information table to view pressure
losses, and critical flow rates for a range of specified flow rates. You can
use this table to determine the flow regime, critical pump rate, annular
velocity, and pressure loss for all annular cross-sectional areas.
This table presents information calculated based on the range of flow
rates specified on the Parameter > Rates dialog, Case > Fluid Editor,
Case > String Editor, Case > Wellpath > Editor and the Case > Hole
Section Editor.
Pump rates (at a given measured
depth) greater than the Critical
Pump Rate will result in transitional
or turbulent flow.
Flow regimes can be
turbulent, laminar, or
transition.
Pressure Loss, Average Velocity and
Reynolds number are calculated using
the rheology model specified on Fluid
Editor.
Flow rates are specified
on the Rates dialog.
Determining the Bit Nozzle Sizes
You have determined the minimum and maximum flow rates as well as
an idea of the bit total flow area you would need to optimize bit
hydraulics. The next step is to determine the actual bit nozzle sizes to
achieve the most efficient bit hydraulics yet still maintain the flow rate
within the minimum and maximum rates you determined.
Starting the Pressure: Pump Rate Range Analysis Mode
Defining the Pump Rate Range
The Parameter > Rates dialog is used to specify pump information to
calculate system pressures losses for a range of pump rates. The range
of pump rates is determined by the Minimum, Maximum, and Increment
Pump Rate specified in the Pump Rate section of the dialog. The
Minimum Pump Rate specifies where the pressure loss analysis
calculations begins. This rate will be increased by the Increment Pump
Rate until the Maximum Pump Rate is reached or five rates (including
the Minimum and Maximum Rates) have been analyzed.
In the Pumping Constraints control group of the dialog, enter the
maximum pump discharge pressure of which the pump is capable. If you
are using more than one pump, enter the minimum of all active pumps
maximum pump pressures. You must also enter the Maximum Pump
Power the pump can produce. Refer to the Pump Power Calculations
Press the Default from Pump Data button to use the Maximum Pump
Pressure, and Maximum Pump Power calculated from the information
Select desired mode
from drop down list.
entered on the Circulating System > Mud Pumps tab. Refer to the
Pump Pressure Calculations on page 326 for more information. The
Default from Pump Data button is available when you have specified
a surface equipment configuration on the Circulating System >
Surface Equipment tab, and indicated at least one active pump on the
Circulating System > Mud Pumps tab.
Check the Include Tool Joint Pressure Losses box to include tool joint
pressure losses in the calculations. Tool joint pressure losses are
sometimes referred to as minor pressure losses. Pressure losses due to
tool joint upset in the annulus are accounted for in the calculations by
considering the cross-sectional area change in the annulus regardless of
whether or not this box is checked. However, in these calculations the
length of the tool joint is not considered. Refer to Tool Joint Pressure
Loss Calculations on page 329 for more information.
Check the Use String Editor box to use the nozzle configuration
entered for the bit component on the Case > String Editor. Click the
Nozzles button to gain access to the Nozzles dialog. On the Nozzles
dialog, you may view the nozzle configuration currently on the Case >
String Editor or you may enter a different nozzle configuration for use
in this analysis
Check box to include tool joint
pressure losses
Specify the range of pump
rates to analyze.
Enter pump data.
Roughness affects friction
pressure losses in
turbulent flow only. The
nominal value of surface
roughness for new steel
pipe is 0.0018 inches. Old
or corroded pipe can have
values up to .0072 inches.
This factor is more
important in deep wells
using old tubulars.
Check box to use String Editor
nozzles, or click the Nozzles
button to use other nozzles.
Mark this check box to
update the fluid rheology
using the formation
temperature defined in the
Geothermal Gradient
dialog.
Specifying the Nozzle Configuration
The Nozzles dialog is accessible via the Nozzles button. The Nozzles
dialog consists of two tabs. One tab displays the current nozzle
configuration specified on the Case > String Editor, and the other tab
allows specification of different nozzle configurations for analysis. If a
tested nozzle configuration results are favorable, you may copy this
configuration to the bit specified in the String Editor.
The Local tab can be used to specify any nozzle configuration you want
to analyze. If you determine this configuration is optimal, then you may
copy the nozzle configuration to the String Editor. The advantage to
changing the nozzles using this tab rather than the String Tab is that the
String Editor nozzles will not be altered unless you click the Copy to
String button.
Four nozzles sizes can be
specified and the Total Flow
Area will be calculated.
Specify the Total Flow Area if
you want to use a certain TFA
rather than nozzles sizes.
Specifying Depths to Calculated ECD
On the Parameter > ECD Depths dialog, enter up to five measured
depths you would like ECD (equivalent circulating density) calculated.
ECD may be calculated at any depth. Commonly ECD is calculated at
the last casing shoe. The ECD of the mud is the mud weight that would
exert the circulating pressures under static conditions at the specified
depth.
Analyzing Results
Results for the Pressure: Pump Rate Range analysis are presented in a
plot and a report. All results are available using the View Menu.
Four nozzles sizes can be
specified and the Total Flow
Area will be calculated.
Click Copy to String to copy
nozzles to String Editor.
Specify the Total Flow Area if
you want to use a certain TFA
rather than nozzles sizes.
Enter up to five depths to
calculated ECD.
Using the Pressure Loss Plot
The View > Plot > Pressure Loss plot displays the system pressure loss,
as well as bit, string and annulus pressure losses for the range of flow
rates specified on the Parameter > Rates dialog. Each curve on the
graph represents one type of pressure loss.
Pressure loss calculation are based on the rheological selected on the
Case > Fluid Editor. Annular volumes are calculated based on
information entered on the Case > String Editor and the Case > Hole
Section Editor.
Separate curves for bit,
string, annulus, and system
pressure losses
Maximum pump pressure is indicated on plot. The maximum pump pressure
is input on the Case > Circulating System > Mud Pumps tab.
Check these boxes to include the effects of tool joint
pressure losses and/or mud temperature effects. You can
also indicate if you want to include these effects and
pressure losses by checking the appropriate boxes on the
Parameter > Rates dialog.
Using the Pressure Loss Report
Configuring Report Options
The View > Report Options dialog is used to specify what additional
information to include on the report. Using this dialog, you can include
or exclude much of the information defining the case you are analyzing.
The View > Report > Pressure Loss report will sum the total pressure
loss and the hydraulic power across each work string section, both inside
the string and in the annulus. For example, inside the work string the
total pressure loss across the entire drill pipe section is calculated, then
across the HWDP section, then the drill collar section. Similarly, in the
annulus, it calculates the pressure drop across the entire drill pipe
section, the HWDP section and so forth. The pressure losses through the
surface equipment are shown along with the total system pressure loss
at the specified flow rate.
Finally, the report splits the annulus into separate sections based on a
change in either the wellbore effective diameter and/or a change in the
outside diameter of the work string. For each annular section, the report
displays the following information:
Hole OD
Pipe OD
Pressure loss
Average velocity
Reynolds number
Critical flow rate
Flow regime (laminar, transitional, or turbulent)
This information is presented for each of the flow rates you specify on
the Parameter > Rates dialog.
Check boxes to include
desired information on the
report.
Fine Tuning Hydraulics
The pressures in the circulating system will be calculated at the flow rate
specified on the Rate Dialog using the rheological model selected on the
Fluid Editor. You can analyze the pressure (dynamic and static pressures
combined) at any depth from surface to TD in the work string, annulus
or at the bit. The static pressure losses are those due to the hydrostatic
pressure of the mud. The dynamic pressure losses are the frictional
pressure losses that occur during circulation of the mud at a specified
flow rate. You can analyze these pressure losses in the Pressure Pump
Rate Range report also. You can also analyze the ECD (Equivalent
Circulating Density) at any depth.
Starting Pressure Pump Rate Fixed Analysis Mode
Defining the Pump Rate to Analyze
Pump Rate is the only input required and is the only flow rate used to
calculate the pressure losses. Pressure loss information can be used to
optimize hydraulics based on several optimization criteria.
A summary of the analysis results is displayed in the Quick Look section
of the Parameter > Rate dialog. For more information on the data
presented in the Quick Look section, refer to the online help.
Select Pump
Rate Fixed from
drop down list.
Analyzing Results
In addition to the information in the Quick Look section, there are two
plots available:
Pressure Loss vs. Measured Depth
ECD vs. Depth.
These plots are available via the View menu.
Using the Pressure vs. Depth Plot
You can use the View > Plot > Pressure vs Depth plot to display the
combined (hydrostatic and frictional) pressure losses through the
workstring, annulus, or through the bit at any depth in the wellbore.
Use this slider control to specify the pump rate
instead of entering a value in the Pump Rate
field located at the top of this dialog. You can
specify any value between 1 and 2,500 gpm.
The value you define with this control is
displayed in the Pump Rate field.
Enter flow rate to
analyze.
Use String Editor nozzles,
or specify your own using
the Nozzles Button.
The Quick Look section displays a
summary of the analysis.
Use this slider to specify the total flow area,
rather than use the total flow area of the bit
specified on the String Editor Spreadsheet. The
slider range is from 0 to 4 square inches of flow
area. If the Use String Editor Bit Nozzles box is
checked, using this slider will not impact the
calculations.
However, this graph does not show what portion of the pressure loss is
due to static versus dynamic losses.
The plot also indicates the casing shoe setting depth, as well as the pore
pressure and fracture gradients for all measured depths in the wellbore.
The information presented on the plot pertains to the flow rate you
specified on the Parameter > Rate dialog. The pressure losses are
calculated based on the rheological method specified on the Case >
Fluid Editor. The shoe setting depth is retrieved from the Case > Hole
Section Editor, and the pore pressure and fracture gradient information
is found on the Case > Pore Pressure and Case > Fracture Gradient
spreadsheets.
Changing the Display of Data on This Plot
Right-click anywhere on the plot, and select the alternate view from the
right-click menu. You can also display the ECD vs. Depth plot by using
View > Plot > ECD vs Depth.
Use the slider to change
flow rate if you want to
analyze another rate.
When you specify a
value here, it has the
same effect as
specifying a value in the
Pump Rate field in the
Rate dialog. The new
value you specify with
the slider will appear in
the Pump Rate field the
next time you open the
dialog.
Annular pressure is between the pore and
fracture pressures.
Casing shoe
Bit pressure loss
Using the ECD vs. Depth Plot
Use the View > Plot > ECD vs Depth plot to determine the equivalent
circulating density (ECD) in the annulus at any measured depth in the
wellbore. The plot displays the pore pressure and fracture gradient
expressed as a density for all measured depths. The shoe setting
measured depth is also be indicated.
The ECD is the density that will exert the circulating pressure under
static conditions. The pore pressure and fracture gradients are displayed
as densities to facilitate comparison.
The pressure losses are calculated based on the rheological method
specified on the Case > Fluid Editor. The shoe setting depth is retrieved
from the Case > Hole Section Editor and the pore pressure and fracture
gradient information is found on the Case > Pore Pressure and Case >
Fracture Gradient spreadsheets.
You can change the way the data is presented on this plot by selecting
another view from the right-click menu. Refer to Changing the Display
of Data on This Plot on page 290.
To display the
pressure loss plot
versus TVD, or if you
want to view the data
expressed as ECD
rather than pressure,
right-click anywhere
on the plot and select
the alternate view you
want to display from
the right-click menu.
Pore pressure
ECD in the annulus for the
current flow rate.
Casing shoe
Calculating a Tripping Schedule
The Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule analysis assists with determining
the rate to trip in or out of the hole without exceeding a pressure change
(Allowable Trip Margin) you specify. The surge or swab pressure
changes in the well can be calculated with or without flow through an
open-ended workstring or without flow through a closed-ended
workstring. You must specify the length of a stand of drill pipe or
casing, and the Allowable Trip Margin. The Allowable Trip Margin is
the maximum change in ECD at the bit or casing shoe that you are
willing to accept. Specifying a large value allows large tripping speeds,
whereas a low value only allows low tripping speeds.
Moving a work string is accompanied by a displacement of the mud in
the hole that can result in pressure changes. Depending on the direction
of the string movement, and the resulting mud displacement, these
changes may add to the pressure exerted by the mud. If the pipe
movement is downward, this may result in a surge pressure. If the pipe
movement is upward, this may result in a swab pressure. These pressure
changes may impair the stability of the hole through removal of the filter
cake or may result in a blowout by dropping below the pore pressure, or
may cause lost circulation by exceeding the fracture pressure and
fracturing the formation.
Starting Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule Analysis
Defining Analysis Constraints
Enter data in the Parameter > Operations Data dialog box to specify
the conditions you want to use to calculate a Surge/Swab Tripping
Schedule. For both swab and surge analysis, you can use a closed or
open ended string by checking the appropriate boxes. You may perform
Select Swab/Surge
Tripping Schedule from
drop down list.
an analysis with the end open and closed at the same time. If you are
using an open ended string, you may also specify a flow rate. The stand
length is used to used to calculate the tripping schedule as time per
stand.
entered for the bit component on the Case > String Editor. Press the
Nozzles button to gain access to the Nozzles dialog. On this dialog, you
may view the nozzle configuration currently on the Case > String
Editor, or you may enter a different nozzle configuration for use in this
analysis.
Analyzing Results
Using Reports to Analyze Results
Using the Swab/Surge Report
The View > Report > Swab/Surge report indicates the minimum
allowable trip time per stand of pipe based on an allowable trip margin
specified in ppg or psi. Depending on the situation, there could be one
value for all stands or there could be a number of values for different sets
of stands.
If you specify a high value for the allowable trip margin, it is possible
that the minimum time per stand (10 seconds) will not reach the
Enter the maximum pressure
change that you will allow during
tripping out of the hole.
Use String Editor nozzles, or
specify your own using the
Nozzles button.
Enter the length of a stand of
drillpipe.
allowable trip margin. In that case, the trip schedule produced will
indicate that all stands can be tripped at the minimum time per stand.
Conversely, if you specify a very small value for the allowable trip
margin, it is possible that even at the maximum time per stand (200
seconds), the allowable trip margin will still be exceeded. In that case,
the trip schedule will show that all stands should be tripped at the
maximum time per stand (200 seconds).
In order to maintain a .5 ppg trip margin, the
stands should be tripped at the time/stand
indicated.
Analyzing Pressures and ECDs While Tripping
The Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD analysis assists with determining
the pressures and ECD at the bit, casing shoe and bottom of the hole as
the pipe is tripped in or out of the hole at speeds ranging from 10 seconds
per stand to 200 seconds per stand. The pressure and ECD calculations
can be performed with or without flow through an open ended
workstring, or without flow through a closed ended workstring. You
must specify the length of a stand of drill pipe.
Moving a work string causes a displacement of the mud in the hole that
can result in pressure changes. Depending on the direction of the string
movement, and the resulting mud displacement, these changes may add
to the pressure exerted by the mud. If the pipe movement is downward,
this may result in a surge pressure. If the pipe movement is upward, this
may result in a swab effect. These pressure changes may impair the
stability of the hole through removal of the filter cake, or may even
result in a blowout by dropping below the pore pressure or may cause
lost circulation by exceeding the fracture pressure and fracturing the
formation.
Starting Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD Analysis Mode
Defining Operations Constraints
Enter data in the Parameter > Operations Data dialog box to specify
the conditions you want to use to analyze Surge/Swab Pressures and
ECDs. For both swab and surge analysis, you can use a closed or open
ended string by checking the appropriate boxes. You may perform an
analysis with the end open and closed at the same time. If you are using
an open ended string, you may also specify a flow rate. The stand length
is used to used to calculate the tripping schedule as time per stand.
Select Swab/Surge
Pressure and ECD from
mode data drop down
list.
entered for the bit component on the String Editor. Press the Nozzles
button to gain access to the Nozzles dialog. On this dialog, you may
view the nozzle configuration currently on the Case > String Editor or
you may enter a different nozzle configuration for use in this analysis.
Analyzing Results
Using Plots to Analyze Results
There are four available plots:
Swab Open End
Swab Closed End
Surge Open End
Surge Closed End
Use these plots to determine the pressures and ECD (equivalent
circulating density) to expect for trip speeds ranging from zero to 200
seconds per stand while tripping in or out. These plots pertain to
swabbing or surging with an open or closed ended workstring. If the
workstring is open ended, you may specify a flow rate through the string
on the Parameter > Operations Data dialog. If you specified a flow
rate greater than zero, the calculated pressure and ECD will include the
effects of this flow rate.
These plots will display the pressure and ECD at the bit, at the casing
shoe (as the bit passes the shoe) and at total depth (TD).
Check closed if you dont want fluid
flow through the pipe.
Use String Editor nozzles, or specify
your own using the Nozzles Button.
Enter the length of a stand of
drillpipe.
If the bit is at total depth (TD), the curves will overlay, and it may appear
that the curves are missing from the plot.
The bit depth is obtained from the Case > String Editor, and the stand
length is specified on the Operations Data Dialog. The casing shoe
depth is retrieved from the Case > Hole Section Editor.
You may want to review the Swab/Surge report for additional
information.
Using Reports to Analyze Results
Using the Swab/Surge Report
This report indicates the minimum allowable trip time per stand of pipe.
Depending on the situation, there could be one value for all stands or
there could be a number of values for different sets of stands.
If you specify a high value for the allowable trip margin, it is possible
that the minimum time per stand (10 seconds) will not reach the
allowable trip margin. In that case, the trip schedule produced will
indicate that all stands can be tripped at the minimum time per stand.
Conversely, if you specify a very small value for the allowable trip
margin, it is possible that even at the maximum time per stand (200
seconds), the allowable trip margin will still be exceeded. In that case,
ECD values read
on this scale.
Read pressure on this scale.
the trip schedule will show that all stands should be tripped at the
maximum time per stand (200 seconds).
The calculations and information contained in this section provide
details pertaining to many of the steps previously presented during the
descriptions of the analysis mode methodologies. These calculations
and information are presented in alphabetical order using the calculation
or topic name.
of information pertaining to the topic you are interested in.
Backreaming Rate (Maximum) Calculation
Where:
Bingham Plastic Rheology Model
Shear Stress Shear Rate Model
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
) | (
|
max max
Qmud DP Qcrit
DP Qcrit
ROP BR
max BR = Maximum backreaming rate (ft/hr)
max ROP = Maximum rate of penetration (ft/hr)
Qcrit = Critical flow rate (gpm)
Qmud = Mud flow rate (gpm)
DC = Drill collar ID (in)
DP = Drill pipe ID (in)
K
y
+ =
Average Velocity in Pipe
Average Velocity in Annulus
Apparent Viscosity for Annulus
Apparent Viscosity for Pipe
Modified Reynolds Number for Annulus
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2
4
D
Q
V
p
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2 2
4
P H
a
D D
Q
V
( )( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ =
Q
D D
D D YP PV PV
P H
P H aa
2 2
674773 . 62
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ =
Q
D
YP PV PV
ap
3
674773 . 62
( )( )
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2 2
2796 . 1895
P H aa
P H a
D D PV
Q
D D R
Modified Reynolds Number for Pipe
Pressure Loss in Annulus
If , then
If laminar flow, then
Pressure Loss in Pipe
If , then
If laminar flow, then
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
D PV
Q
R
ap
p
2796 . 1895
2000 >
a
R
( )( )( )
( ) ( )
75 . 1
2 2 25 . 1
75 . 1 25 . 75 .
0012084581 .
P H P H
a
D D D D
L Q PV
P

=
( )
( )
( ) ( )
L
D D D D
Q PV
D D
YP
P
P H P H
P H
a
(
(
|
|
.
|
\
|

+
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2 2 2
0008488263 .
053333333 .
2000 >
p
R
( )( )( )
75 . 4
75 . 1 25 . 75 .
0012084581 .
D
L Q PV
P
p
=
( )
( )
L
D
Q PV
D
YP
P
p (
|
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
=
4
0008488263 .
053333333 .
Critical Velocity and Flow in Annulus
Critical Velocity and Flow in Pipe
Where:
( ) ( )
( )
( )
c
P H
c
P H
c
x x c x
ca
g
D D
R
D D
g
YP PV R PV
V
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ + +
=
2
2
066 . 1 2000
2
2
( )
2
4
P H ca ca
D D V Q
|
.
|
\
|
=
( ) ( )
c
c c
x x c x
ca
g
D
R
D
g
YP PV R PV
V
2
2
066 . 1 2000
2
2
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ + +
=
2
4
D V Q
ca ca
|
.
|
\
|
=
D = Pipe inside diameter (ft)

P
D = Pipe outside diameter (ft)
H
D = Annulus diameter (ft)
K = Consistency factor ( )
n
ft lb sec
2
p
V = Average fluid velocity for pipe (ft/sec)
a
V = Average fluid velocity for annulus (ft/sec)
ca
V = Critical velocity in annulus (ft/sec)
cp
V = Critical velocity in pipe (ft/sec)
Bit Hydraulic Power
Bit Hydraulic Power is calculated using the flow rate entered in the input
section of the Rate dialog.
Bit Hydraulic Power can be used to select nozzle sizes for optimal
hydraulics. Bit Hydraulic Power is not necessarily maximized when
operating the pump at the maximum pump horsepower. Bit Hydraulic
Power is calculated using the following equation:
Where:
L = Section length of pipe or annulus (ft)
P = Pressure loss in pipe or annulus ( )
2
ft lb
Q = Fluid flow rate ( ) sec
3
ft
ca
Q = Critical flow rate in annulus ( ) sec
3
ft
cp
Q = Critical flow rate in pipe ( ) sec
3
ft
= Shear rate (1/sec)
= Shear stress ( )
2
ft lb
= Weight density of fluid ( )
3
ft lbm
p
R = Reynolds number for pipe
a
R = Reynolds number for annulus
aa
PV = Apparent viscosity for annulus
ap
PV = Apparent viscosity for pipe( ) cp
PV = Plastic viscosity ( ) cp
x
PV = Plastic viscosity ( )
2
sec ft lb = ( ) 26 . 47880 PV
YP = Yield point ( )
2
100 ft lb
x
YP = Yield point ( )
2
ft lb
Bit Hydraulic Power (hp) = .
1714
b
QP
Bit Pressure Loss Calculations
Bit Pressure Loss represents the pressure loss through the bit, and is
calculated as follows.
Where:
Derivations for PV, YP, 0-Sec Gel and Fann Data
Derive PV, YP, and 0-Sec Gel from Fann Data
Q = Circulation rate, gpm
b
P = Pressure loss across bit nozzles, psi
c d
bit
g C
V
P
2
2
2
=
= Fluid density, ( )
3
ft lb
V = Fluid velocity, (ft/sec)
d
C = Nozzle coefficient, .95
c
g = 32.17 ) sec / (
2
ft
P = Pressure ( )
2
ft lb
300 600
= PV
600 300
2 = YP
3
0 = SecGel
Derive Fann Data from PV, YP, and 0-Sec Gel
ECD Calculations
Where:
YP PV + =
300
YP PV + = 2
600
SecGel = 0
3
( )
tvd
f h
D
P P
ECD
052 .
+
=
( ) 052 .
tvd mud h
D W P =
( )
md f
D
L
P
P
=

ECD = Equivalent circulating density, (ppg)
mud
W = Fluid weight, (ppg)
h
P = Hydrostatic pressure change to ECD point. (psi)
f
P = Frictional pressure change to ECD point (psi)
L
P
= Change in pressure per length along the annulus section (psi/ft).

This is a function of the pressure loss model chosen.
tvd
D = True vertical depth of point of interest, (ft)
md
D = Annulus section length (ft)
0.052 = conversion constant from (ppg)(ft) to psi
Graphical Analysis Calculations
Although the Graphical Analysis and Optimization Planning analysis
modes both optimize bit hydraulics, the methods used are different.
Because the methods are different, the results may also be different.
The following steps outline the general procedure used to perform a
Graphical Analysis.
1. A total system pressures loss is specified on the Pump Limits dialog.
2. A maximum flow rate is determined that will cause the parasitic
pressure loss to equal the total system pressure loss. (This will
represent zero pressure loss through the bit, or infinite bit TFA.)
3. The increment flow rate is established as the maximum flow rate
divided by 100.
4. The initial analysis flow rate is set to 0.1 gpm.
5. At the analysis flow rate, the pressure loss through the drillstring,
annulus and surface equipment is calculated. These combined
pressure losses are the parasitic pressure losses at this flow rate.
6. The parasitic pressure loss is subtracted from the maximum pump
pressure to determine the pressure loss at the bit.
7. The pressure loss through the bit and the flow rate are used to
calculate the bit TFA (total flow area).
8. The Impact Force, Nozzle Velocity, and Bit Hydraulic Power are
calculated from the bit TFA, pressure loss at the bit, and the flow
rate.
9. The next analysis flow rate is determined by adding the increment
flow rate to the existing analysis flow rate and then steps five
through nine are repeated.
10. The results are presented in several graphical formats via the
Hydraulics Analysis View Menu.
Hole Cleaning Methodology and Calculations
The Hole Cleaning model is based on a mathematical model that
predicts the critical (minimum) annular velocities/flow rates required to
remove or prevent a formation of cuttings beds during a directional
drilling operation. This is based on the analysis of forces acting on the
cuttings and its associated dimensional groups. The model can be used
to predict the critical (minimum) flow rate required to remove or prevent
the formation of stationary cuttings. This model has been validated with
extensive experimental data and field data.
By using this model, the effects of all the major drilling variables on
hole cleaning have been evaluated and the results show excellent
agreement between the model predictions and all experimental and field
results.
The variables considered for hole cleaning analysis include
Cuttings density
Cuttings load (ROP)
Cuttings shape
Cuttings size
Wellpath
Drill pipe rotation rate
Drill pipe size
Flow regime
Hole size
Mud density
Mud rheology
Mud velocity (flow rate)
Pipe eccentricity
Calculations and equation coefficients to describe the interrelationship
of these variables were derived from extensive experimental testing.
Calculate and Reynolds Number , , ,
y
K n
( )( )( )
( ) PV YP
PV YP
n
+
+
=
2 10 log 32 . 3
( )
511
YP PV
K
+
=
( )
n
y
K 11 . 5 =
( )
( )
( )
n
fa
P H
n
a
A
K G
D D V
R
3 2
2

Concentration Based on ROP in Flow Channel
Fluid Velocity Based on Open Flow Channel
Coefficient of Drag around Sphere
If then,
else,
Mud carrying capacity
Settling Velocity in the Plug in a Mud with a Yield Stress
( )
( )
m B r
B r
o
Q D V
D V
C
+
=
1471
1471
2
2
2 2
5 . 24
P H
m
a
D D
Q
V
=
225 <
e
R
a
D
R
C
22
=
5 . 1 =
D
C
( )
D
c
c
M
C
D
g
C

3
12
4 |
.
|
\
|
=
) 2 ( 2
1
1
1
(
3
4
n b
b
c b
c
bn
c
sp
aK
gD
U

+
(

Where:
Angle of Inclination Correction Factor
Cuttings Size Correction Factor
Mud Weight Correction Factor
If then
else
Critical Wall Shear Stress
Where:
n a 9 . 23 9 . 42 =
n b 33 . 0 1 =
( ) ( )
66 . 0
33 . 1
5
33 . 1 sin
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
H
a
D
C
c s
D C 04 . 1 286 . 1 =
( ) 7 . 7 <
0 . 1 =
m
C
( ) 7 . 7 0333 . 0 0 . 1 =
m
C
bn b n
n
D ag wc
b
c c
b
+
=
+
2 2
2
] ) )( sin( [
2 / 1

a = 1.732
b = -0.744
Critical Pressure Gradient
Total Cross Sectional Area of the Annulus without Cuttings Bed
Dimensionless Flow Rate
Where:
Critical Flow Rate (CFR)
Correction Factor for Cuttings Concentration
] ) ( 1 [
2
2
h
h
r
ro
r
wc
Pgc
( )
144 4
2 2
P H
A
D D
A
] ) ( 1 )( ) ( 1 ( ]
1
) (
) 2 1 ( 2
8 [
) 2 ( 2 2 ) 2 ( 2
1
b n
b
h
p
h
p
b n
c
r
r
r
r
b
a
n
n
g

+
=
a = 16
b = 1
gc
n c
c
c
n c
h
c
h
crit
K
r gc
r Q =

+
) 2 ( 2
)
1
1
(
)
1
( / 1
2
] [
( )
a BED
C 00231 . 0 97 . 0 =
Cuttings Concentration for a Stationary Bed by Volume
Where:
( )( ) 100 0 . 1 0 . 1
B
crit
m
BED bonc
Q
Q
C C
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
B
D = Bit diameter
H
D = Annulus diameter
P
D = Pipe diameter
TJ
D = Tool joint diameter
C
D = Cuttings diameter
y
= Mud yield stress
fa
G = Power law geometry factor
A
R = Reynolds number
= Fluid density
c
= Cuttings density
a
V = Average fluid velocity for annulus
R
V = Rate of penetration, ROP
CTV
V = Cuttings travel velocity
so
V = Original slip velocity
SV
V = Slip velocity
CTFV
V = Critical transport fluid velocity
TC
V = Total cuttings velocity
K = Consistency factor
n = Flow behavior index
c b a , , = Coefficients
YP = Yield point
PV = Plastic viscosity
C
Q = Volumetric cuttings flow rate
m
Q = Volumetric mud flow rate
crit
Q = Critical flow rate for bed to develop
o
C = Cuttings feed concentration
D
C = Drag coefficient
m
C = Mud carrying capacity
Bit Impact Force
Impact force is calculated using the flow rate entered in the input section
of the Rate dialog.
Impact force is a parameter that can be used to select nozzle sizes for
optimal hydraulics. Impact force is calculated using the following
equation:
Where:
A
C = Angle of inclination correction factor
S
C = Cuttings size correction factor
mud
C = Mud weight correction factor
BED
C = Correction factor for cuttings concentration
bonc
C = Cuttings concentration for a stationary bed by volume
sp
U = Settling velocity
s
U = Average settling velocity in axial direction
mix
U = Average mixture velocity in the area open to flow
= Wellbore angle
B
= Bed porosity
a
= Apparent viscosity
p
= Plug diameter ratio
g = Gravitational coefficient
0
r = Radius of which shear stress is zero
p
r = Radius of drill pipe
h
r = Radius of wellbore or casing
gc
P = Critical frictional pressure gradient
wc
= Critical wall shear stress
Impact Force (lbf) = VQ
g
c
|
|
.
|
\
|
Nozzle Velocity
Velocity is calculated using the flow rate entered in the input section of
the Rate Dialog. This is not necessarily the maximum velocity that can
be achieved through the bits.
Nozzle velocity is a parameter that can be used to select nozzle sizes for
optimal hydraulics. Velocity is calculated using the following equation.
Where:
Optimization Planning Calculations
Although the Graphical Analysis and Optimization Planning analysis
modes both optimize bit hydraulics, the methods used are different.
Because the methods are different, the results may also be different.
The following steps outline the general procedure used to perform a
Optimization Planning.
1. Determine the optimum flow rate.
2. If the optimum flow rate is below the minimum annular velocity
specified on the Solution Constraints dialog, increase it until all
annulus sections have a velocity greater than, or equal to, the
minimum allowed.
= Density of fluid ( )
3
ft lb
Q = Circulation rate ) / (
3
s ft
c
g = Gravitational constant, 32.17
2
sec ft
V = Velocity through the bit (ft/sec)
Nozzle Velocity (ft/sec) =
A
Q
96 . 2
Q = Circulation rate, gpm
A = Total flow area of bit, in
2
3. If turbulent flow is not allowed (as specified on the Solution
Constraints dialog), and any annulus section is in turbulent flow,
decrease the optimum flow so that no annulus sections are in
turbulent flow. This may place the optimum flow rate below the
minimum annular velocity. If there is a conflict between the
minimum velocity and the flow regime, the controlling factor is the
flow regime.
4. Select the actual bit jets from the optimum TFA (total flow area),
and the number of nozzles and minimum nozzle diameter specified
on the Solution Constraints Dialog.This will almost always result in
a TFA greater than the optimum.
5. If the total system pressure drop is less than the maximum pump
pressure specified on the Solution Constraints Dialog, increase the
flow rate to use 100% of the allowed pump pressure. If the increase
will violate the annular flow regime, it is ruled that the increase is
not allowed. (The flow regime is controlling.)
Optimization Well Site Calculations
bitL sysL paraL
P P P =
bitH sysH paraH
P P P =
2 2
2
2 A C g
Q
P
c
H
bitH
=
2 2
2
2 A C g
Q
P
c
L
bitL
=
( )
( )
L H
paraL paraH
Q Q
P P
S
log
log
=
Calculate parasitic pressure loss for optimum power
Calculate parasitic pressure loss for impact force
Calculate pressure loss allowed for bit @ optimum flow rates
s
L
paraL
s
H
paraH
Q
P
Q
P
K
=
s
KQ P =
( )
S
HP
S K
P
Q
1
max
1
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
=
( )
S
IF
S K
P
Q
1
max
2
2
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
=
HP paraHP
Q P @
IF paraIF
Q P @
paraHP bitoptHP
P P P =
max
paraIF bitoptIF
P P P =
max
Calculate bit total flow area (TFA) for each bit pressure loss at
optimum flow rates
Using the maximum number of nozzles and the minimum Nozzle size,
determine the number and size of the nozzles to equal the two total flow
area values.
Where:
bitopHP c
HP
HP
P C g
Q
A
=
2
2
2
bitopIF c
IF
IF
P C g
Q
A
=
2
2
2
L
Q = Low flow rate, ( ) sec
3
ft
H
Q = High flow rate, ( ) sec
3
ft
HP
Q = Flow rate at optimum horsepower, ( ) sec
3
ft
IF
Q = Flow rate at optimum impact force, ( ) sec
3
ft
A = Bit TFA used for the pressure tests, ( )
2
ft
HP
A = Bit TFA for optimum power, ( )
2
ft
IF
A = Bit TFA for impact force, ( )
2
ft
= Fluid weight, ( )
3
ft lbm
C = Shape factor, .95 for bit
Power Law Rheology Model
Rheological Equation
Flow Behavior Index
c
g = Gravitational constant, ( )
2
sec ft
S = Power law exponent for parasitic pressure loss
K = Power law coefficient for parasitic pressure loss,
( )( )
S
ft ft lbf
3 2
sec
max
P = Maximum allowed total system pressure loss, ( )
2
ft lbf
para
P = Parasitic pressure loss at specific flow rate, ( )
2
ft lbf
sys
P = Total system pressure loss at specific flow rate, ( )
2
ft lbf
bitH
P = Bit pressure loss at pressure test high flow rate, ( )
2
ft lbf
bitL
P = Bit pressure loss at pressure test low flow rate, ( )
2
ft lbf
paraH
P = Parasitic pressure loss at pressure test high flow rate,
( )
2
ft lbf
paraL
P = Parasitic pressure loss at pressure test low flow rate,
( )
2
ft lbf
paraHP
P = Parasitic pressure loss at flow rate
HP
Q , ( )
2
ft lbf
paraIF
P = Parasitic pressure loss at flow rate
IF
Q , ( )
2
ft lbf
n
K =
|
.
|
\
|
+
+
=
PV YP
PV YP
n
2
log 32192809 . 3
Consistency Factor
Average Velocity in Pipe
Average Velocity in Annulus
Geometry Factor for Annulus
Geometry Factor for Pipe
Reynolds Number for Pipe
( )( )
n
PV YP
K
1022 100
2 +
=
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2
4
D
Q
V
p
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2 2
4
P H
a
D D
Q
V
( )
( )
1
8
2
1 2
|
.
|
\
| +
=
n
n
fa
n
n
G
( )
( )
1
8
4
1 3
|
.
|
\
| +
=
n
n
fp
n
n
G
( )
( )
K G g
D V
R
fp c
n n
p
p
=
2

Reynolds Number for the Annulus
Critical Reynolds Number for Pipe
Laminar Boundary = 3470 1370n
Turbulent Boundary = 4270 1370n
Critical Reynolds Number for Annulus
Laminar Boundary = 3470 1370n
Turbulent Boundary = 4270 1370n
Friction Factor for Pipe
Laminar
Transition
( )
( )
( )
n
fa c
P H
n
a
A
K G g
D D V
R
3 2
2
p
p
R
F
16
=
( )
50
93 . 3 log +
=
n
a
( )
7
log 75 . 1 n
b
=
n R
L
1370 3470 =
Turbulent
Friction Factor for Annulus
Laminar
Transition
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
L
b
T
L P
L
p
R
R
a R R
R
F
16
800
16
( )
50
93 . 3 log +
=
n
a
( )
7
log 75 . 1 n
b
=
b
P
p
R
a
F =
A
a
R
F
24
=
( )
50
93 . 3 log +
=
n
a
( )
7
log 75 . 1 n
b
=
Turbulent
Pressure Loss in Pipe
Pressure Loss in Annulus
Where:
n R
L
1370 3470 =
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
L
b
T
L A
L
a
R
R
a R R
R
F
24
800
24
( )
50
93 . 3 log +
=
n
a
( )
7
log 75 . 1 n
b
=
b
A
a
R
a
F =
|
.
|
\
|
=
D
L F V
g
P
p p
c
2
2
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
P H
a a
c
D D
L F V
g
P
2
2

Pressure Loss Analysis Calculations
The following general analysis steps are used to determine pressure
losses in the various segments of the circulating system. The annular
velocity or critical velocity calculations are performed within the
pressure loss calculations.
1. The first step is to Calculate PV, YP, 0-Gel and Fann Data as
required. The Bingham Plastic and Power Law pressure loss
D = Pipe inside diameter (ft)
P
D = Pipe outside diameter (ft)
H
D = Annulus diameter (ft)
p
V = Average fluid velocity for pipe (ft/sec)
a
V = Average fluid velocity for annulus (ft/sec)
L = Pipe or annulus section length (ft)
P = Pipe or annulus pressure loss ( )
2
ft lb
Q = Fluid flow rate ( ) sec
3
ft
= Shear stress on walls ( )
2
ft lb
n = Flow behavior index
K = Consistency factor
|
|
.
|
\
|
n
ft
lb
sec
2
= Fluid density ( )
3
ft lbm
P
R = Reynolds number for pipe
A
R = Reynolds number for annulus
L
R = Reynolds number at Laminar flow boundary
p
F = Friction factor for pipe
a
F = Friction factor for annulus
p
G = Geometry factor for pipe
a
G = Geometry factor for annulus
PV = Plastic viscosity
YP = Yield point
c
g = Acceleration due to gravity, 32.174 (ft/sec)
calculations require PV/YP data. If Fann data is input, PV/YP/0-Sec
Gel can be calculated. Herschel Bulkley requires Fann data. If Fann
data not is input on the Fluid Editor, it can be calculated from
PV/YP/0-Sec Gel data.
2. Calculate work string and annular pressure losses are based on the
rheological model selected using the Bingham Plastic rheology
model calculations, Power Law rheology model calculations or
Herschel-Bulkley rheology model calculations.
3. Calculate the bit pressure loss.
4. Calculate tool joint pressure losses, if required as specified on the
Rate Dialog or the Rates Dialog.
5. Determine mud motor, or MWD pressure losses as input on the
Mud Motor Catalog or the MWD Catalog.
6. Calculate the pressure losses in the surface equipment using the
pipe pressure loss equations for the selected rheological model.
7. Calculate the total pressure loss by adding all pressure losses
together.
8. Calculate ECD if required.
Pump Power Calculations
If you are using more than one pump, the maximum pump power should
be calculated as follows.
Where:
( )( )
=
max
min
P
P HP
HP
N
s
Pump Pressure Calculations
If you have more than one active pump specified on the Circulating
System, Mud Pumps tab, the Maximum Pump Pressure will be set equal
to the minimum value entered for Maximum Discharge Pressure for any
of the active pumps.
Shear Rate and Shear Stress Calculations
Shear Stress
Shear Rate
Where:
N = 1 to number of pumps
min
P = Minimum pump pressure of all maximum pump
discharge pressure ratings for pumps active in the
system and the surface equipment.
max
P = Maximum pump pressure rating for each pump, 1 thru n
s
HP = Maximum pump horse power for the system
( ) = 01065 . 0
..
( )RPM 70333 . 1 =
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2
ft
lbf
|
.
|
\
|
=
sec
1
= Fann dial reading, (deg)

RPM = Fann Speed, (rpm)
Swab/Surge Calculations
The WELLPLAN Swab/Surge model calculates the annulus pressures
caused by the annular drilling fluid flow induced due to the movement
of the string. During tripping operations, the pressures throughout the
well will increase or decrease depending on whether the work string is
being lowered or raised.
A pressure increase due to a downward pipe movement is called a surge
pressure, whereas the pressure increase due to an upward pipe
movement is called a swab pressure.
The swab/surge calculations do not model fluid wave propagation or
consider gel strength of the mud.
If the pipe closed, then
If the pipe is open and the pumps off, then
If there is a surge situation, then is negative (up the string).
If there is a swab situation, then is positive (down the string).
If the pipe is open, and the pumps are on then,
The flow rate induced by the pipe movement is:
trip
d s
trip
T
L
V
tan
=
0 . 0 =
pipe
Q
( )
ann open
open
ratio
A A
A
A
+
=
( )( )( )
ratio open closed trip pipe
A A A V Q =
pipe
Q
pipe
Q
rate pipe
Q Q =
If there is a surge situation, then is positive (up the annulus).
If there is a swab situation, then is negative (down the
annulus).
The annular flow rate, , is then used to perform frictional pressure
loss calculations to determine the annulus pressure profile.
If the first component is a bit then,
If the first component is not a bit then,
Where:
closed trip induce
A V Q =
induce
Q
induce
Q
pipe induce ann
Q Q Q + =
ann
Q
TFA open
A A =
2
4
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
bit closed
OD A
2
4
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
pipe open
ID A
2
4
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
pipe closed
OD A

Tool Joint Pressure Loss Calculations
Where:
trip
V = Trip velocity
d s
L
tan
= Stand length
trip
V = Trip time per stand
pipe
Q = Pipe flow rate
induce
Q = Flow rate induced by pipe movement
rate
Q = Pump flow rate
ann
Q = Annular flow rate
closed
A = Pipe closed area
open
A = Pipe open area
ratio
A = Ratio of pipe open area to combined pipe and annulus ope
TFA
A = Bit total flow area, TFA
2
2
KV
P
=
= Fluid density
V = Fluid velocity in the pipe
K = Tool-joint loss coefficient as a function of
the Reynolds number (R) in the pipe body
R = Reynolds number for the pipe
If R < 1000;
K = 0.0
If 1000 < R <= 3000;
( ) ( ) 64 . 5 log 91 . 1 = R K
Weight Up Calculations
Where:
If 3000 < R <= 13,000;
( ) ( ) R K log 05 . 1 66 . 4 =
If R > 13,000;
K = 0.33
f a
i f
i a
D D
D D
V V
=
a
V = Additive volume
i
V = Initial volume
i
D = Initial density
f
D = Final density
a
D = Additive density
References
General
Lubinski, A., et. al., Transient Pressure Surges Due to Pipe Movement
in an Oil Well, Revue de LInstitut Francais du Petrole, May June
1977.
White, F. M., Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill, Inc., 1979.
Wilkinson, W.L., Non-Newtonian Fluids, Pergamon Press, 1960.
Bingham Plastic Model
Bourgoyne, A. T., Chenevert, M. E., Millheim, K. K., Young Jr., F. S.
Applied Drilling Engineering, SPE Textbook Series: Volume 2.
Coiled Tubing
McCann, R. C., and Islas, C. G. Frictional Pressure Loss during
Turbulent Flow in Coiled Tubing. SPE 36345.
Hole Cleaning
Clark, R. K., Bickham, K. L. A Mechanistic Model for Cuttings
Transport. SPE paper 28306 presented at the SPE 69th Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition, New Orleans, September 2528.
Luo, Yuejin and P. A. Bern, BP Research Centre; and D. B.Chambers,
BP Exploration Co. Ltd. Flow-Rate Predictions for Cleaning Deviated
Wells. IADC/SPE 23884.
Luo, Yuejin, P. A. Bern, D. B.Chambers, BP Exploration. Simple
Charts to Determine Hole Cleaning Requirements in Deviated Wells.
IADC/SPE 27486.
Peden, J. M., Heriot-Watt U., Yuejin Luo. Settling Velocity of Various
Shaped Particles in Drilling and Fracturing Fluids. SPE/IADC 16243.
Rabia, H. Rig Hydraulics. Entrac Software: Newcastle, England (1989):
Chapter 5.
Herschel Bulkley Model
The YPL Rheology Model. BPA Research Note PRN9303,
93085ART0027.
Improved Hydraulic Models or Flow in Pipe and Annuli Using the
YPL Rheology Model. BPA Bluebook Report F93-P-12,
93026ART0243.
Optimization Well Site
Scott, K.F., "A New Approach to Drilling Hydraulics", Petroleum
Engineer, Sept. 1972.
Power Law Model
Milheim, Keith K., Amoco Production Co.; Said Sahin Tulga, DRD
Corp. Simulation of the Wellbore Hydraulics While Drilling, Including
the Effects of Fluid Influxes and Losses and Pipe Washouts. SPE
11057 (1982).
Schuh, F., Engineering Essentials of Modern Drilling, Energy
Publications Division of HBJ.
Rheology Thermal Effects
Annis, M. R. Journal of Petroleum Technology, August 1967.
Chapman, A. J., Heat Transfer. McMillan Press. 1967.
Combs, G. D. and Whitmire, L. D. Oil & Gas Journal, 30 September
1968.
Dropkin, E. and Omerscales, S. Heat transfer by Natural Convection by
Fluid Confined by Parallel Plates. ASME, February 1965.
Hiller, K. H. Journal of Petroleum Technology, July 1963.
Sorelle, J. Ardiolin, Bukley. Mathematical Field Model Predicts
Downhole Density Changes in Static Drilling Fluids. SPE 11118.
Wilhite G. P. Overall Heat Transfer Coefficients in Stem and Hot water
Injection Wells. Journal of Petroleum Technology, May 1967.
Surge Swab
Burkhardt, J. A. Wellbore Pressure Surges Produced in Pipe
Movement. Journal of Petroleum Technology, June 1961.
Clark, E. H. Jr. Bottom-Hole Pressure Surges While Running Pipe.
Petroleum Engineering, January 1955.
Fontenot, J. E., Clark R. K. An Improved Method for Calculating Swab
and Surge Pressures and Circulating Pressures in a Drilling Well. SPE
4521 (1974).
Schuh, F. J. Computer Makes Surge-Pressure Calculations Useful. Oil
& Gas Journal, 3 August 1964.
Tool Joint Pressure Loss
Denison, Pressure Losses Inside Tool Joints Can Alter Drilling
Hydraulics", E.B., Oil & Gas Journal, Sept. 26, 1977, pg. 66.
Milheim, Keith, Amoco Production Co., Tulga, Sahin, DRD
Corporation, Tulsa, OK., Simulation of the Wellbore Hydraulics While
Drilling, Including the Effects of Fluid Influxes and Losses and Pipe
Washouts, SPE 11057, 1982.
Chapter
Well Control Analysis
Overview
Well Control Analysis calculates the expected influx volume, assists
with casing design in terms of shoe settings depths and expected
conditions resulting from an influx, generates kill sheets, determines
maximum safe drilling depth, and determines the maximum allowable
influx volume.
Well Control Analysis analyzes three different influx types: oil, water,
and gas. The default influx type is gas. If the influx type is gas, the
analysis assumes the influx is a single, methane gas bubble. Dispersed
gas influxes are not modeled. The influx density is the density of
methane at the current temperature and pressure. The compressibility
factor, Z, is based on the critical temperature and pressure of methane.
Refer to General Assumptions and Terminology on page 364 for more
information.
of using the Well Control Analysis module, including:
Calculating the expected influx volume.
Simulating the circulation of a kick
Generating a kill sheet.
8
Chapter 8: Well Control Analysis
Workflow
The following is a suggested workflow. Many other workflows can be
used.
Define the hole section geometry. (Case > Hole Section Editor)
workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth)
(Case > String)
Define the geothermal gradient. (Case > Geothermal Gradient)
Specify the circulating system equipment. (Not required for all
modes.) (Case > Circulating System)
Specify the pore pressure gradient. (Not required for all modes.)
(Case > Pore Pressure)
Specify the fracture gradient. (Not required for all modes.) (Case >
Fracture Gradient)
Specify the choke and kill line usage, the kill method, and the slow
pump information. (Case > Well Control Setup - All of this
information is not required for each analysis mode. The Well
Control Setup dialog has three tabs and all tabs are not required for
all analysis modes.)
Specify the circulating temperature. (Parameter > Temperature
Distribution)
Determine the type of kick and bottom hole pressure at the time of
influx. (Parameter > Kick Class Determination)
Calculate the expected influx volume. (Parameter > Influx
Volume Estimation)
Simulate the circulation of a kick, including pressure analysis, safe
drilling depths, etc. (Parameter > Kick Tolerance) Then use the
plots or animation available on the View menu.
Generate a kill sheet. (Parameters > Kill Sheet) Then use the Kill
Sheet or Kill Graph available using the View menu.
Introducing Well Control Analysis
The Well Control Analysis Module can be used to calculate the expected
influx volume, assist with casing design in terms of shoe setting depths
to handle pressures associated with controlling an influx (kick),
expected conditions resulting from an influx, generate kill sheets,
determine maximum safe drilling depth, and maximum allowable influx
volume.
Well Control Analysis analyzes three different influx types: oil, water,
and gas. The default influx type is gas. If the influx type is gas, the
analysis assumes the influx is a single, methane gas bubble. Dispersed
gas influxes are not modeled. The influx density is the density of
methane at the current temperature and pressure. The compressibility
factor, Z, is based on the critical temperature and pressure of methane.
Starting Well Control Analysis
There are two ways to begin the Well Control module:
z You can select Well Control from the Modules Menu, and then
select the appropriate analysis mode.
z You can also click the Well Control button and then select the
appropriate analysis mode from the drop down list.
The Well Control Module has three available analysis modes. Each
analysis mode will be discussed in this course.
z Expected Influx Volume: Use this analysis mode to predict the
volume of an influx while drilling or after pump shut down.
z Kick Tolerance: Use this analysis mode to simulate the circulation
of a kick while drilling, a swab kick or after the pumps have shut
down.
z Kill Sheet: Use this analysis mode to quickly generate a standpipe
pressure schedule.
Select desired Well Control
Analysis mode from
submenu, or from Mode
drop-down list.
Choose Well Control Analysis from the Modules
Menu, or by clicking the Well Control Button.
Calculating the Expected Influx Volume
The Expected Influx Volume analysis mode predicts the volume of an
influx while drilling or after the pumps have been shut down. The
calculation is a function of bottom hole pressure, crew reaction times,
equipment performance (closing BOPs and so forth), drilling rate of
penetration, and reservoir properties. Refer to General Assumptions
and Terminology on page 364 for more information.
Starting Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode
Specify Choke and Kill Line Use
For the Expected Influx Volume analysis mode, the Case >
Well Control Setup dialog contains only the Choke/Kill tab. Use the
Choke/Kill tab to specify choke and kill line usage, and sizes. This tab
is not accessible unless the well is specified as offshore and as subsea on
the Well Properties dialog. Choke and kill line information is used to
calculate pressure loss in these areas. Only on subsea wells is the
pressure loss in the choke and kill lines significant. If the well is a land
well, you do not need to enter data into the Choke/Kill tab to use the
Expected Influx Volume analysis mode.
For other Well Control analysis modes, the Case > Well Control Setup
dialog contains additional tabs. These tabs are not applicable to the
Expected Influx Volume analysis, so these tabs are absent when using
this analysis mode.
Click the radio button to indicate to indicate the choke mode
configuration you are using. If you are not using a kill line, do not enter
the kill line ID. You only need to enter the ID of the lines in use.
The Choke/Kill Line Length defaults to the length of the riser (specified
on the Case > Hole Section Editor) plus the air gap specified on the
Select Expected
Influx Volume
from drop-down
list.
Design Properties > General tab. You many enter another value if you
wish.
Defining the Circulating Temperature Profile
Use the Parameter > Temperature Distribution dialog to select the
temperature model you want to use for the temperature calculations. The
calculated temperatures are used to calculate gas pressures and volumes,
but are not used to modify the density or rheology parameters of the
drilling mud.
The Steady State Circulation model performs a heat transfer calculation
between the fluids in the annulus and the fluids in the string to determine
their respective temperature profiles. This model is the most realistic
temperature model offered. Refer to Steady State Temperature on
The Geothermal Gradient model assumes the annulus and string
temperature profiles are identical to the formation temperature profile.
This selection uses the temperatures specified on the Case >
Geothermal Gradient
The Constant Temperature model assumes the mud is one temperature
through the entire wellbore and string. This model is the least accurate.
Choke/Kill line length defaults to riser length plus
elevation, but you can change it.
Click here to indicate choke
and/or kill line pressure loss.
Enter ID of lines in use.
Determining the Type of Kick
The information on the Parameter > Kick Class Determination dialog
is used to calculate the bottom hole pressures, influx volume, and kick
tolerance and kick type at the moment an influx occurs.
The initial mud gradient refers to the mud in the well when the kick
occurred. The circulation flow rate is the pump rate during drilling prior
to the influx and the kick interval gradient is the pore pressure gradient
for the area of the formation that produced the kick.
The Quick Look section displays the calculated kick type as determined
from the bottom hole pressures. The Quick Look section also displays
the circulating and static bottom hole pressures, and the calculated
pressure at the depth where the kick occurred.
Steady State Circulation model is
the most realistic model offered.
Geothermal Gradient uses
temperature data input on the
Case > Geothermal Gradient
dialog.
The three types of kicks are a kick while drilling, a kick after pump shut
down, and a swab kick.
Kick While Drilling
When a kick is taken while drilling, the pore pressure is higher than the
dynamic bottom hole pressure.
Kick After Pump Shut Down
When a kick is taken after the circulation pumps have been shut down,
the pore pressure is lower than the dynamic bottom hole pressure but
higher than the static bottom hole pressure.
Swab Kick
When a kick is taken while tripping out of the hole, the pore pressure is
lower than the static bottom hole pressure.
Estimating Influx Volume
The Parameter > Influx Volume Estimation tabs are used to specify
information required to determine the volume of the influx. The volume
of the influx depends on the kick detection method, reservoir properties,
crew reaction times, and the kick class determined using the Parameter
> Kick Class Determination dialog.
Kick Interval Gradient defines the pore
pressure where the kick occurred
Initial Mud Gradient
defaults from Case >
Fluid Editor.
Quick Look section displays the type of kick that
occurred. In this case, it is a Kick While Drilling.
Setup Tab
The information displayed on the Parameter > Influx Volume
Estimation > Setup tab is a summary of the results from the Kick Class
Determination dialog. You can not edit the information displayed on
this tab. This tab is not available when the kick is determined to be a
kick while swabbing.
Kick Detection Method Tab
Use the Parameter > Influx Volume Estimation > Kick Detection
Method tab to define the type of kick detection in use. You can choose
from flow rate or volume variation methods. This information is used to
help determine the influx size. This tab will not be available when the
kick is determined to be a kick while swabbing.
If you are using the Flowrate Variation method, you must enter the
minimum flow difference that can be detected between the flow rate in
and the flow rate out.
For the Volume Variation method, you must enter the minimum
increase in pit volume that can be practically detected. Because the
change in volume is not instantaneous, you must also specify a
Detection Time Delay. Detection time delay occurs primarily due to the
performance of the shale shakers being used. Detection time is a
function of flow rate, screen size, mud density, plastic viscosity, and
expected cuttings removal performance.
Flow rate detection methods have no detection time delay because the
change in flow rate is noticed immediately.
This tab displays a summary of the
results from the Parameter > Kick
Class Determination dialog.
You can not edit the information
displayed on this tab.
Reservoir Tab
The Parameter > Influx Volume Estimation > Reservoir tab defines
the reservoir properties used to determine the size of the influx. This tab
is not be available when the kick is determined to be a kick while
swabbing.
Reaction Times Tab
The Parameter > Influx Volume Estimation > Reaction Times tab is
used to specify crew reaction times during various events typical after
taking a kick. This tab will not be available if the kick is determined to
be a kick while swabbing. These reaction times will be used to
determine influx size. You may set some of these reaction times to zero
to model certain types of events. An example might be a hard shut-in.
Enter the minimum Flowrate or
Volume Variation that can be
detected.
Detection Time Delay
applies only to the Volume
Variation method.
Enter the total measured depth thickness of
the reservoir. This is used if the kick occurs
while drilling or after pump shutdown.
Enter the measured depth length of the
reservoir that has been drilled. This is only
used if the kick is determined to occur after
pump shutdown. Because this is a kick
while drilling, this field is not accessible.
Analyzing Results
The only results available for the Expected Influx Volume analysis
model are displayed on the Parameter > Influx Volume Estimation >
Results tab. There are no plots, reports, or tables that display analysis
results. However, there is a View > Temperature Distribution plot
available for viewing wellbore temperatures.
Influx Volume Estimation Results Tab
The Parameter > Influx Volume Estimation > Results tab displays
the results of the influx size estimation based on the information entered
on other Influx Volume Estimation tabs.
Enter the reaction times for the
various activities.
Total influx volume after detection and closing the
well in.
The Detection Time is the
calculated time to detect the influx.
Influx volume when first detected using
the specified Kick Detection Method.
Using Plots
Temperature Distribution Plot
The Temperature Distribution plot indicates the temperature profile as
calculated based on the temperature model specified on the Parameter
> Temperature Distribution dialog.
If you are using the steady state circulation model, this plot will display
separate curves indicating the geothermal gradient, as well as the
calculated string temperature and annular temperature.
The Title Bar indicates the
temperature model used.
Circulating the Kick
The Kick Tolerance analysis mode is used to simulate the circulation of
a kick while drilling, a swab induced kick, or a kick after the pumps have
shut down. This analysis provides several plots to analyze the results.
Using these plots, you can:
Determine wellbore pressures for depths of interests while
circulating a kick.
Determine the maximum pressure at each point in the wellbore.
Determine the allowable influx volume based on formation
breakdown pressure.
Calculate the maximum pressure for various influx sizes at
several wellbore depths.
Estimate shoe setting depth based on formation breakdown
gradients.
Calculate the wellbore pressures in the well assuming all mud in
the well has been displaced by gas.
You can select the Kick Tolerance analysis mode from the Modules
menu, or from the Mode drop-down list.
Specifying Kill Method, and Choke/Kill Line Data
For the Kick Tolerance analysis mode, the Case > Well Control Setup
dialog contains two tabs. Other Well Control analysis modes may
contain different tabs on this dialog.
Specify Choke and Kill Line Data
The information entered into the Case > Well Control Setup dialog for
the Expected Influx Volume analysis will continue to be used for the
Kick Tolerance analysis. Since both analysis modes use the information
entered into this tab, remember that if you change the information, it will
be changed for all analysis modes.
Choose Kick
Tolerance analysis
mode from Modules
Menu, or from Mode
drop-down list.
Select Kill Method and Enter Operational Data
The Case > Well Control Setup > Operational tab is used to specify
kill method, BOP and casing pressure rating, and leakoff test results.
You can choose to use either the Drillers Method, or the Wait and
Weight Method. If you choose to use the Drillers Method, a message is
added to the reports advising the pressure data is based on the
assumption it is only valid for the second circulation when the kill mud
is pumped down the string to the bit. For the Wait and Weight Method,
the pressure data is based on the assumption the kill mud is pumped
down the string while the kick is circulated out.
Specify Kill Rate and Kick Data
The information input on the Parameter > Kick Tolerance dialog is
used to simulate the circulation of an influx taken while drilling or after
pump shutdown.
For a swab kick, tripping the work string back to the bottom of the hole
is simulated. In this scenario, a worst case situation of passing the influx
bubble with the BHA is analyzed at every depth.
The information presented in the Setup section of the Kick Tolerance
dialog was determined based on information input on the Parameter >
Kick Class Determination dialog. The Kill Rate is the flow rate that
will be used to circulate out the influx.
The influx volume can be determined using the Estimated Influx
Volume analysis mode or you can input another volume. The Depth of
Interest is the depth in the well that you are interested in analyzing.
Usually this will be a casing shoe depth. The Depth Interval to Check
Select kill method.
pertains to the Safe Drilling Depth analysis. This is the depth interval
past the current measured depth that you want to analyze.
Analyzing Results
The Kick Tolerance analysis mode has several plots that can be used to
analyze the results. These plots can be used to analyze annular pressure
as the influx is circulated, allowable kick volumes, safe drilling depths,
as well as pressure resulting from fully evacuating the annulus and
filling it with gas.
The Kick Tolerance analysis also provides a schematic to view the
position and size of the kick as it is circulated out.
Using Plots
Pressure at Depth Plot
The View > Plot > Pressure at Depth plot displays how the pressure at
a specified depth of interest in the annulus varies as the kill mud is
pumped into the well. This plot assumes the bit is at the string depth
specified on the Case > String Editor. You may choose one Depth of
Interest on the Parameter > Kick Tolerance dialog. The plot also
Setup section is
based on Kick Class
Determination dialog
results.
Kill rate to circulate out the influx
Enter measured depth that you are
interested in analyzing.
Influx volume can be determined using the
Estimated Influx Volume analysis mode.
WELLPLAN uses corresponding
density and viscosity, depending on
the type of influx you select.
The Swab Analysis
Options are only
available for swab kicks.
assumes a constant influx volume, which is specified on the same
dialog.
The various peaks and valleys on the plot reflect the different annular
areas that result in changing lengths of annular fluids and the impact on
the pressure calculations.
Changing the Data Displayed on This Plot
To change the data displayed on the View > Plot > Pressure at Depth,
right-click anywhere on the plot (except on a curve), and select a
different plot from the right-click menu. Using the right-click menu, you
can display the pressure or EMW at the surface, mud line or ground
Fracture pressure at
depth of interest.
Depth of interest
Pore pressure at
depth of interest.
level, shoe, and at the depth of interest specified on the Parameter >
Kick Tolerance dialog.
Maximum Pressure Plot
The View > Plot > Maximum Pressure plot depicts the annular
pressures that will occurs at any measured depth with an influx of
constant volume in the well. Although you can determine from this plot
what the maximum pressure will be at all measured depths, you can not
determine when the high pressure was encountered as the influx was
circulated out of the well.
You may use this plot to determine casing burst service loads or shoe
setting depths.
Casing shoe depth
The maximum annular pressure is less than
fracture pressure.
To Display This Plot Using EMW
Right-click anywhere on the plot (except on a curve), and select EMW
from the right-click menu.
Allowable Kick Volume Plot
The View > Plot > Allowable Kick Volume plot displays the maximum
pressure encountered during kick circulation at a specified depth of
interest for a range of influx volumes. The pore pressure and fracture
pressure at the depth of interest are also displayed on the plot for
reference.
Safe Drilling Depth Plot
The View > Plot > Safe Drilling Depth plot shows the maximum
pressure at a depth of interest using a constant influx volume as the
wellbore depth is increased using the specified depth interval past the
current measured depth. You may want to use this plot to determine how
far ahead you can drill with the casing shoe depth specified as the depth
of interest. The plot includes pore pressure and fracture gradients to
assist with determining maximum allowable pressures.
This curve indicates
annular pressure at
specified depth as a
function of influx volume.
The maximum allowable kick
volume is displayed at the
bottom of the plot.
Formation Breakdown Gradient Plot
The View > Plot > Formation Breakdown Gradient plot displays the
maximum annular pressure, expressed as a gradient, that occurs as a
result of the specified influx size. You can use this plot to determine the
Depth of interest
Maximum annular pressure at depth of interest.
maximum pressure (expressed as a gradient) that you can encounter
without exceeding the formation fracture gradient.
Full Evacuation to Gas Plot
The View > Plot > Full Evacuation to Gas plot displays the pressure
that will occur at any measured depth in the well as a result of entirely
filling the annulus with methane. You can use this plot to determine if
Maximum pressure
Fracture gradient
the annular pressure resulting from fully evacuating the wellbore with
methane will fracture the open hole section.
Animation
Schematics
The View > Animation > Schematic is an animated simulation of the
process of circulating the influx to the surface. In this animation, you
can see the influx occurring, and then watch as the influx is circulated
out of the well.
Casing shoe
Notice the open hole annular pressure
exceeds the fracture pressure.
Grid Data
Use View > Animation > Grid Data to view several calculations as a
function of the volume pumped while circulating the influx.
Use these buttons to start or stop the
animation and to move between animation
points.
Kick in original position
This information displays the
data represented in the
animation.
Generating a Kill Sheet
The Kill Sheet analysis can help pre-plan a course of action in the event
of a kick. This can be very helpful, especially since taking a kick can be
a very serious and stressful time. It is recommended that as much of the
information required for the Kill Sheet analysis is entered prior to taking
a kick. This significantly reduces the information that will be required
to gather and input after a kick has occurred. The Kill Sheet analysis can
quickly generate a standpipe pressure schedule and a report of useful
information.
Specify Kill Method, Operational Data, Slow Pumps and Choke/Kill
Line Use
For the Kill Sheet analysis mode, the Case > Well Control Setup dialog
contains three tabs.
Specify Choke and Kill Line Data
The information entered into the Case > Well Control Setup >
Choke/Kill Line tab for the Expected Influx Volume and Kick
Tolerance analysis will continue to be used for the Kill Sheet analysis.
Because the analysis modes use the information entered into this tab,
remember that if you change the information, it will be changed for all
analysis modes.
Selecting Kill Method and Entering Operational Data
The Case > Well Control Setup > Operational tab is used to specify
kill method, BOP and casing pressure rating, and leakoff test results.
You can choose to use either the Drillers Method, or the Wait and
Weight Method. If you choose to use the Drillers Method, a message is
added to the reports advising the user that the pressure data is based on
the assumption it is only valid for the second circulation when the kill
mud is pumped down the string to the bit. For the Wait and Weight
Select Kill Sheet
from Mode drop-
down list.
Method, the pressure data is based on the assumption the kill mud is
pumped down the string while the kick is circulated out.
Specifying Slow Pump Data
Use the Case > Well Control Setup > Slow Pumps tab to specify the
slow pump information. Slow pump data can be entered only for those
pumps entered on the Case > Circulating System dialog.
Entering Kill Sheet Data
The Parameter > Kill Sheet tabs are used to collect information that
will be used to generate a kill sheet.
Specifying Kick Analysis Parameters
Use the Parameter > Kill Sheet dialog to specify analysis parameters
to use in the kill sheet calculations. On this dialog, specify:
z Kick Parameters: Including the measured depth of the kick, pit
gain, trip margin, and shut-in drillpipe and casing pressures. This
information will be used to generated the kill sheet, and pump
schedule.
z Mud Weight Up Data: Specify mud volumes (other than inside
the string or in the annulus), and information defining the weight
material and mixing capacities. This data will be used in the kill
sheet generation.
The pumps available in
the drop-down list were
defined using Case >
Circulating System.
z String and Annular Volumes: Specify the string and annular
volumes. You can enter the volumes on this tab, or you can click
the Default from Editors button to have this information
automatically calculated from data input on the Case > String
Editor and Case > Hole Section Editor.
z String Volumes: Specify the string volumes. You can specify these
directly, or you can copy them automatically from the Case > String
Editor.
z Pump Details: Identify the slow circulation data for the pump used
to kill the well. This section of the dialog displays, in read only
format, the information chosen from data entered on the Case >
Well Control Setup > Slow Pumps tab. If the pump information
you want to use is not available by clicking the button, then you
must enter pump information on the Slow Pumps tab first. After the
pump information is entered, you may view and select the
appropriate pump on this dialog.
Enter the shut-in drill
pipe and casing
pressure after the well
has been closed.
Enter the amount of
weighting material that
can be mixed per unit of
time.
Analyzing Results
Plots
The View > Plot > Kill Graph plot indicates the desired stand pipe
pressure as the kill mud is pumped down the string until it reaches the
annulus. This plot changes based on the kill method selected.
Reports
Kill Sheet Report
The View > Report > Kill Sheet report summarizes much of the input
information. It also reports many additional types of information
including:
z Summary of weak links
z Weight up requirement for kill mud and trip margin
z Pump stroke schedule
z Volumes and capacities
Initial circulating pressure
Final circulating pressure
The pump stroke schedule can be used in well control operations to use
drillpipe pressure schedules to maintain the bottomhole pressure at the
proper value. During well control operations, the bottomhole pressure
must be maintained at a value slightly higher than the formation pressure
during kill operations.
Analysis Mode Methodology
The first section in this chapter discusses general analysis assumptions,
and terminology used in the Well Control Module. The remaining
sections cover one of the analysis modes available in the Well Control
Analysis Module. In each section, the major analysis steps for the
analysis mode are discussed. Within the analysis steps there may be a
reference to a calculation. The title of the calculations is presented in
italics for recognition. Many calculations apply to more than one
analysis mode. To avoid duplicating information, the calculations are
presented in alphabetical order in the section titled Supporting
Information and Calculations on page 372. While reading through the
methodology for a particular analysis mode you will notice calculation
titles/names in italic. If you require more information about a particular
calculation, please refer to the Supporting Information and Calculations
section for additional information.
General Assumptions and Terminology
Initial Influx Volume
Initial influx volume refers to the influx volume taken from the time a
kick first develops through the time the kick has been brought under
control (that is, when the well has been shut in). In designing for the
worst case, the initial influx volume is the maximum expected influx
volume. Of course, the volume of the influx changes once well kill
procedures are instigated and the circulation of the influx up the annulus
begins.
Naturally, the size of the initial influx volume is dependent on how
quickly the kick is detected and controlled. Smaller kicks will result in
lower pressures exerted within the wellbore as the kick is circulated out
of the well. Designing the well to withstand the appropriate maximum
initial influx volume minimizes the risk to the well.
Influx Properties Assumptions
The type of influx can be oil, gas, or salt water. If this influx type is Gas
or unspecified, WELLPLAN Well Control assumes the influx is a single
bubble of pure methane gas. Assuming the influx to be composed of
entirely methane gas is a conservative or worst case assumption.
Methane is the lightest gas likely to be encountered in any great
quantities. Methane gas exhibits the fastest gas migration up the
wellbore annulus because of the large difference in its density compared
with the significantly heavier drilling mud.
In practice, a gas influx disperses into separate bubbles as it expands and
rises through the well. WELLPLAN Well Control assumes the influx
remains a single gas bubble in order to predict the worst possible
pressure conditions.
WELLPLAN does not model soluble gas kicks. In soluble gas kicks, the
gas initially goes into solution with the drilling fluid (mud), and remains
in solution until near the surface. These types of kick are difficult to
detect, and are not handled by the Well Control Module.
Influx Annular Volume and Height
Smaller annular capacities between the work string and the wellbore
have longer influx lengths for a given initial influx volume. This
reduces the overall effect of the hydrostatic column on the bottom of the
hole. In order to maintain a constant bottom hole pressure, higher choke
pressures are required at the surface.
The height of the influx equates to the overall length of the influx in the
annulus. It is affected by the annular volume and the gas compressibility
(expansion). The length and location of the influx in the wellbore
impacts the combined effect of the hydrostatic gas/mud column in the
annulus. An influx located high in the annulus, or a large (long) influx
has higher associated choke pressures.
Choke Pressure and Influx Position
The position of the top of the influx also affects the choke pressure
requirements. As the influx rises, the hydrostatic effect of the mud
column above the gas influx reduces. As the influx rises in the annulus,
higher choke (surface) pressures are required to maintain the bottom
hole pressure. This effect is combated by allowing the gas to expand by
opening the choke. A constant bottom hole pressure is required to
prevent further influxes into the wellbore.
Kill Methods
The initial mud weight and the bottom hole pressure affect the choice of
kill method. The common methods used are the Drillers Method and
the Wait and Weight Method. Both of these methods maintain
constant bottom hole pressure.
The safest method is the Wait and Weight method which can circulate
the influx out of the well and kill the well in one circulation. However,
concerns about gas migration can result if the wait period is too long.
In this situation, the Drillers Method may be used instead. The
Drillers Method kills the well in a minimum of two circulations. The
first circulation circulates out the influx, and the second circulation fills
the wellbore with kill mud. Higher choke pressures are required during
the first circulation of the Drillers Method to maintain a constant
bottom hole pressure.
Expected Influx Volume
During the drilling of a reservoir, a kick is taken when the pore
pressure of the formation being drilled exceeds the effective bottom hole
(circulating or hydrostatic) pressure exerted by the drilling mud. This
results in formation fluids entering the well. The Expected Influx
Volume analysis can be used to determine the volume of the influx. It is
important to point out that the influx is assumed to be a single, methane
gas bubble.
The maximum size of the influx depends on several factors, including:
The pressure difference between the reservoir formation
pressure and the effective bottom hole pressure. Based on this
pressure difference, the Kick Classification calculations are used
to determine the kick type.
The reservoir characteristics, including porosity, permeability,
and so forth
The rate of penetration through the reservoir which determines
how much of the reservoir is exposed
The type and accuracy of the equipment used to detect the influx
(flowrate or volume change detection)
How quickly the well is shut in based on crew reaction times
The following are general steps performed during the analysis to
determine the size of the influx. After you have determined the influx
size, you can determine the effects a kick this size will have by using the
Kick Tolerance analysis mode.
1. The first step is to determine the temperature profile in the well. You
can choose from three temperature profiles on the Temperature
Distribution > Temperature Model tab.
a) The Steady State Circulation model is the most realistic as the
effect of circulation is included in the model. Refer to Steady
State Circulation Temperature Model on page 397 for details.
b) The Geothermal Gradient model assumes the temperature
profile of the drilling fluid to be the same as the surrounding rock
formation. The profile is based on specified surface and total
depth temperatures, or on a surface temperature combined with
a geothermal gradient.
c) The Constant Temperature model is the least realistic and
assumes one temperature throughout the well.
2. The next step is to determine the type of kick that is occurring. The
type of kick is determined by the pressure difference between the
reservoir formation pressure specified on the Pore Pressure dialog
and the effective bottom hole pressure. The dynamic bottom hole
pressures are determined by the same algorithms used by Pressure
Loss Analysis calculations. The rheological model and fluid
parameters that impact the analysis are specified on the Fluid
Editor.
WELLPLAN Well Control analysis defines three Kick
Classifications including: Kick While Drilling, Kick After Pump
Shutdown, and Swab Kick. Estimated influx volumes can be
determined for a Kick While Drilling or for Kick After Pump
Shutdown. If the kick is determined to be a Swab Kick, an
estimated influx volume can not be determined. Refer to Kick
Classification for more information.
3. Based on the kick class, the volume of influx is calculated using
either the Kick While Drilling Influx Estimation calculations, or the
Kick After Pump Shut Down Influx Estimation calculations.
Kick Tolerance
Use this analysis mode to simulate the circulation of a kick while
drilling, a swab induce kick or after the pumps have shut down.
1. The first step is to determine the temperature profile in the well. You
can choose from three temperature profiles on the Temperature
Distribution > Temperature Model tab.
a) The Steady State Circulation model is the most realistic as the
effect of circulation is included in the model. Refer to Steady
State Circulation Temperature Model on page 397 for details.
b) The Geothermal Gradient model assumes the temperature
profile of the drilling fluid to be the same as the surrounding rock
formation. The profile is based on specified surface and total
depth temperatures, or on a surface temperature combined with
a geothermal gradient.
c) The Constant Temperature model is the least realistic and
assumes one temperature throughout the well.
The next step is to determine the type of kick that is occurring using
the Kick Classification calculations. WELLPLAN Well Control
analysis defines three kick classifications including: Kick While
Drilling, Kick After Pump Shutdown, and Swab Kick. The type of
kick is determined by the pressure difference between the reservoir
formation pressure specified on the Pore Pressure Dialog and the
effective bottom hole pressure. The dynamic bottom hole pressures
are determined by the same algorithms used by Pressure Loss
Analysis calculations. The rheological model and fluid parameters
that impact the analysis are specified on the Fluid Editor.
2. After the kick class is determined, you can choose from several
analysis related to wellbore pressures during a kick. For the kicks
while drilling or kicks after pump shutdown, the Pressure Loss
calculations are performed by the same method used in
WELLPLAN Hydraulics. Pressure loss calculations are required
for these kick types to determine the annular and choke frictional
pressure losses resulting from pumping kill mud through the
annulus. The following analyses are available.
Pressure at Depth: This analysis determines the pressure at a
specified depth as well as the volume of kill mud pumped. This
analysis is not available for Swab Kicks because this type of kick
is circulated without pumping kill mud. The results of this
analysis are available on the Pressure at Depth Plot. To
determine the volume of pumped, and the influx volume as the
influx is circulated, the Influx Circulation Model for Kick While
Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown calculations are
performed. After the volume of the influx (and therefore the
height of the influx in the annulus) is known, the Pressure at
Depth of Interest calculations can be performed. The analysis
uses several parameters input on the Kick Tolerance Dialog,
including Kill Rate, Total Influx Volume, Depth of Interest, and
Kill Mud Gradient. Total Influx Volume can be calculated using
the Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode. Fracture Gradient
and Pore Pressure data at the Depth of Interest when plotted if
available. This plot can be used to determine if the pressure at the
Depth of Interest will remain within the wellbore pore and
fracture pressures.
Maximum Pressure: This analysis determines the maximum
pressure at points along the wellbore along with the associated
measured depth (from surface to maximum measured depth).
The results of this analysis are available on the Maximum
Pressure Plot. To determine the pressures in the well as a
function of volume pumped, and the influx volume as the influx
is circulated, the Influx Circulation Model for Kick While
Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown or Influx Circulation
Model for Swab Kicks calculations are performed. The analysis
use several parameters input on the Kick Tolerance Dialog,
including: Kill Rate, Total Influx Volume, and Kill Mud
Gradient. Total Influx Volume can be calculated using the
Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode. Fracture Gradient and
Pore Pressure data at the Depth of Interest are plotted when
available, and the measured depth location of the last casing
shoe.This plot can be used to determine if the pressure at any
wellbore depth below the last casing shoe will remain within the
wellbore pore and fracture pressures.
Allowable Kick Volume: This analysis determines the pressure
for several influx volumes. The influx volume increment is
calculated as the annulus volume from the kick measured depth
to the measured depth of the shoe, divided by eight. The first
influx volume used in the calculations is equal to the influx
volume increment. Each succeeding influx volume is the last
influx volume plus the influx volume increment. The analysis
continues until the last influx volume fills the annulus from the
kick measured depth to the measured depth of the last casing
shoe. The results of this analysis are available on the Allowable
Kick Volume Plot. To determine the pressures resulting from the
various influx volumes, the Influx Circulation Model for Kick
While Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown or the Influx
Circulation Model for Swab Kicks calculations are performed.
The analysis used several parameters input on the Kick
Tolerance dialog, including: Kill Rate, Depth of Interest, and
Kill Mud Gradient. Fracture Gradient and Pore Pressure data at
the Depth of Interest are plotted when available. The Allowable
Kick Volume plot can be used to determine the maximum influx
volume taken at the current bit measured depth that will not
exceed the wellbore fracture gradient at the depth of interest.
Safe Drilling Depth: This analysis determines the pressure
resulting from an influx taken at several measured depths as the
well is drilled past the current measured depth. The results of this
analysis are available on the Safe Drilling Depth Plot. This
analysis is performed by moving the bit location ahead, taking a
kick and performing an Influx Circulation Model for Kick While
Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown or Influx Circulation
Model for Swab Kicks. The analysis uses several parameters
input on the Kick Tolerance dialog, including Kill Rate, Total
Influx Volume, Depth Interval to Check, and Kill Mud Gradient.
Total Influx Volume can be calculated using the Expected Influx
Volume Analysis Mode. Fracture Gradient and Pore Pressure
data at the Depth of Interest are plotted when available. This plot
can be used to determine the maximum depth where pressures
related to the Total Influx Volume will remain within the
wellbore pore and fracture pressures.
Formation Breakdown Gradient: This analysis determines the
pressure gradient in the wellbore at depths in the wellbore
between the casing shoe measured depth and the kick measured
depth. Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks or Influx
Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or Kick After Pump
Shutdown calculations are performed to determine the pressures.
The results of this analysis are available on the Formation
Breakdown Gradient Plot. This plot can be used to determine if
the pressure gradient at any location in the wellbore below the
casing shoe will be outside the safety zone between the wellbore
pore and fracture pressure gradients. For this analysis the Kill
Rate, Total Influx Volume, and Kill Mud Gradient parameters
input on the Kick Tolerance dialog. Total Influx Volume can be
calculated using the Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode. In
addition to the measured depth location of the last casing shoe,
Fracture Gradient and Pore Pressure data will be plotted if
available. This plot can be used to determine if the pressure
gradient at any location in the wellbore below the casing shoe
will be outside the safety zone between the wellbore pore and
fracture pressure gradients.
Full Evacuation to Gas: This analysis determines the pressure
in the wellbore assuming the entire wellbore annulus is filled
with methane gas. The pressure in the wellbore is due to the
hydrostatic pressure of the gas as determined by the gas density
resulting from the wellbore temperature at that depth. The results
of this analysis are available on the Full Evacuation to Gas plot.
The analysis does not any parameters input on the Kick
Tolerance dialog. Fracture gradient and pore pressure data are
plotted when available.
Kill Sheet
Refer to the Kill Sheet on page 392.
Allowable Kick Volume Calculations
This analysis determines the pressure for several influx volumes. The
influx volume increment is calculated as the annulus volume from the
kick measured depth to the measured depth of the shoe, divided by eight.
The first influx volume used in the calculations is equal to the influx
volume increment. Each succeeding influx volume is the last influx
volume plus the influx volume increment. The analysis continues until
the last influx volume fills the annulus from the kick measured depth to
the measured depth of the last casing shoe. The results of this analysis
are available on the allowable kick volume plot.
To determine the pressures resulting from the various influx volumes,
the Influx Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or Kick After Pump
Shutdown or the Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks calculations
are performed. The analysis uses several parameters input on the Kick
Tolerance Dialog, including Kill Rate, Depth of Interest, and Kill Mud
Gradient.
Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate Calculations
The influx model is:
else
2
w
D
cR
kt
t
=
If ( ) 10 >
D
t then,
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
P hk
t
t
V
D
D
4
ln
( )
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
P hk
t
t
Q
D
D
4
ln
1
ln
1
2
Refer to the Viscosity And Compressibility Of Methane calculations.
Where:
Gas Compressibility
( ) c h R
t
t
t
t V
w
D
D
D
D

2
2
5 . 1
5 . 0
5 . 0
2
16 6
1
2
2
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ |
.
|
\
|
=
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
=

P hk t t
t
Q
D D
D
2
8
5 . 0
4
1
5 . 0
5 . 0
5 . 0 5 . 0
V = Influx volume, ( )
3
m
Q = Flow rate, ( ) s m
3
D
t = Dimensionless time factor
k = Permeability, ( )
2
m
t = Time, one time step is 5 seconds, (sec)
= Porosity
= Gas viscosity, ( )
2
Nsm
P = Pressure difference between annulus fluid and formation
h
= Height of penetration into formation, (m)
c
= Gas compressibility,
|
|
.
|
\
|
N
m
2
w
R
= Annulus radius (m)
c
r
T
T
T =
c
r
P
P
P =
5 . 2
..
r
r
a
T
P
A =
r
r
b
T
P
B =
AB C =
1
( ) B B A C =
2
2
( ) 333333 . 0
2
= C q
|
.
|
\
|
+ = 0740740 . 0
3
2
1
C
C r
( )
3 2
0 . 4 0 . 27 q r t =
Where:
If (t>0)
If (q>0)
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2
3
cosh
5 . 1
r
q
a
( ) 333333 . 0
3
cosh
3
2
+ |
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
= q Z
If (q<0)
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2
3
sinh
5 . 1
r
q
a
( ) 333333 . 0
3
sinh
3
2
+ |
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
= q Z
If (q=0)
333333 . 0 .
333333 . 0
+ = r Z
If (t<=0)
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
2
3
cos
5 . 1
r
q
a
( ) 333333 . 0
3
cos
3
2
+ |
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
= q Z
Acosh = Inverse hyperbolic cosine
Asinh = Inverse hyperbolic sine
Cosh = Hyperbolic cosing
Sinh = Hyperbolic sine
a
= 0.427480233548
b
= 0.0866403499633
T = Gas temperature
P = Gas pressure
c
T = 207.98
K
, critical temperature of methane
c
P = 4601000 Pa, critical pressure of methane
Z = Gas compressibility factor (Z factor)
Influx Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or After Pump
Shutdown
In the Influx Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or After Pump
Shutdown circulation model, the analysis is performed in a number of
discrete steps with each representing a volume of mud pumped. The
basic algorithm is to pump one volume increment of mud, and then
determine the location of the influx and influx properties such as height,
volume, and density. The mass remains constant until the influx begins
to exit the annulus. By comparing the change in influx volume from one
step to the next, an influx expansion factor is determined. This
expansion factor is used to calculate the acceleration (beyond the pump
rate) of the mud flowing above the influx in the annulus.
The following equations and descriptions are a simplification of the
actual algorithms employed in the software. Additional complexity
arises due to the arbitrary complexity of the wellbore. Over the length of
an influx bubble, the annulus cross sectional area and curvature may
change multiple times. The influx circulation algorithm divides each
influx solution into multiple problems distributed over constant annulus
cross sections. The curvature over these sections dictates the
complexity of relating measured depth to true vertical depth, which is a
controlling factor in the determination of influx height. The solution is
further divided into sections or reasonably constant temperature and
compressibility factor (Z).
Determine influx volume
The initial influx volume (V) is input as Total Influx Volume on the
Kick Tolerance Dialog. This volume is calculated in the case of the
Allowable Kick Volume analysis.
Determine initial height of the influx
The true vertical depth length (h) of the influx is determined from the
wellpath data based on the measured depth length in the annulus
occupied by the initial influx volume.
Determine initial pressure
The initial pressure P
k
of the influx is the Kick Interval Pressure
specified on the Kick Class Determination Dialog.
Determine the influx mass
Determine the initial density
Determine initial influx gradient
Determine initial surface pressure
Determine the mud pumped increment
k bot
P P =
( )
e
g
P
h
V
M
c
bot
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= 1
ZRT
h g
c
=
ZRT
P
bot
=
c
g G =
( ) ( )
fchoke dm c dm c bot s
P h g h g P P =
( ) E V V V
s a inc
] 80 [ + =
Circulate the influx out of the annulus
The following calculations are repeated until the influx has been
circulated out of the annulus.
Pump one increment of mud and determine the new location of the
bottom of the influx. The bottom of the influx will move up the annulus
by the measured depth required to hold one mud increment of volume in
that annulus section.
Determine the hydrostatic pressure of the drilling mud column below
the influx. For Wait and Weight method, the kill mud will not enter
the annulus until the total volume of mud pumped is greater than, or
equal to the string volume. For the Drillers method, kill mud will
never enters the annulus until the influx is circulated out.
Determine the new pressure at the bottom of the influx
Once the bottom of the influx is moved to its new position, determine if
the last volume will place the top of the influx outside of the annulus.
If the top of the influx is inside the annulus
To determine the new volume and height of the influx, a new influx
height is assumed. Iteration is performed until the following sets of
dependent simultaneous equations converge to a solution. The mass is
a constant until the influx starts to exit the annulus.
A
V
MD
inc
inc
=
inc prev bot bot
MD MD MD =
c dm dm hdm
g h P =
c km km hkm
g h P =
fchoke hkm hdm K bot
P P P P P =
If the top of the influx is outside the annulus
In this case, the volume and height are known.
Determine the new influx gradient
Determine the new surface pressure
Refer to the Gas Compressibility and Z Factor calculations.
( )
e
g
P
h
V
M
c
bot
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= 1
ZRT
P
bot
=
M
V =
( )
e
g
P
h
V
M
c
bot
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= 1
ZRT
P
bot
=
c
g G =
( ) ( ) ( )
fchoke km c km m c m c bot s
P h g h g h g P P =
Where:
Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks
In this circulation model, mud circulation is not performed. The influx
is removed in a number of discrete steps. The influx is moved to the top
and exits the annulus as the string is moved up the annulus. As the bit
is moved up, the bottom of the influx is always kept at the same depth
as the bit. Each step is represented by a new bit location. At each depth,
the influx properties, such as height, volume, and density are
determined. The mass remains constant until the influx begins to exit
the annulus. By comparing the change in influx volume from one step
bot
P = Pr essur e at bottom of i nfl ux
K
P = Ini ti al ki ck pr essur e
hdm
P = Hydr ostati c pressure of the mud fr om the wel l bottom
to the i nfl ux bottom
hkm
P = Hydr ostati c pressure of the ki l l mud fr om the wel l
bottom to the i nfl ux bottom
fchoke
P = Fri cti onal pressure l oss through the choke and ki l l l i nes.
Thi s i s cal cul ated usi ng the pi pe pr essur e l oss equati ons
for the mud rheol ogy model
G = Infl ux pr essur e gr adi ent
M = Mass of i nfl ux
V = Vol ume of i nfl ux
a
V = Annul us vol ume
s
V
= Stri ng vol ume
inc
V
= Mud pumped vol ume i ncr ement
h = TVD hei ght of i nfl ux
dm
h
= TVD hei ght of the dr i l l i ng mud i n the annul us
km
h
= TVD hei ght of the ki l l mud i n the annul us
c
g
= Gravi tati onal constant
Z = Compressi bi l i ty factor
R = Gas constant
T = Infl ux temperature, determi ned from annul ar temperature profi l e
= Infl ux densi ty
dm
= Dri l l i ng mud densi ty

km
= Ki l l mud densi ty
A = Annul us cr oss secti onal ar ea
inc
MD
= Measured depth i ncrement
bot
MD
= Measur ed depth l ocati on of the i nfl ux bottom
i
MD
= Ini ti al measured depth of bi t
prev bot
MD
= Pr essur e measured depth of i nfl ux bottom

E = Pump Effi ci ency
to the next, an influx expansion factor is determined. This expansion
factor is used to calculate the acceleration of the mud being pushed
above the influx.
The following equations and descriptions are a simplification of the
actual algorithms employed in the software. Additional complexity
arises due to the arbitrary complexity of the wellbore. Over the length
of an influx bubble, the annulus cross sectional area and curvature may
change multiple times. The influx circulation algorithm divides each
influx solution into multiple problems distributed over constant annulus
cross sections. The curvature over these sections dictates the
complexity of relating measured depth to true vertical depth, which is a
controlling factor in the determination of influx height. The solution is
further divided into sections or reasonably constant temperature and
compressibility factor (Z).
Determine influx volume
The initial influx volume (V) is input as Total Influx Volume on the
Kick Tolerance dialog. This volume is calculated in the case of the
Allowable Kick Volume analysis.
Determine initial height of the influx
The true vertical depth length (h) of the influx is determined from the
wellpath data based on the measured depth length in the annulus
occupied by the initial influx volume.
Determine initial pressure
The initial pressure P
k
of the influx is the Kick Interval Pressure
specified on the Kick Class Determination Dialog.
Determine influx mass
k bot
P P =
( )
e
g
P
h
V
M
c
bot
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= 1
Determine initial density
Determine initial influx gradient
Determine initial surface pressure
Determine the measured depth increment
Circulate the influx out of the annulus
The following calculations are repeated until the influx has been
circulated out of the annulus.
Move the bit and bottom of the influx up one measured depth increment.
ZRT
h g
c
=
ZRT
P
bot
=
c
g G =
( ) ( )
dm c dm c bot s
h g h g P P =
80
i inc
MD MD =
inc prev bot bot
MD MD MD =

Determine the hydrostatic pressure of the drilling mud column below
the influx. Kill mud will not enter the annulus because kill mud is not
pumped for Swab Kicks.
Determine the new pressure at the bottom of the influx. There is no
choke frictional loss because mud is not being pumped.
Once the bottom of the influx is moved to its new position, determine if
the last volume will place the top of the influx outside of the annulus.
If the top of the influx is inside the annulus:
To determine the new volume and height of the influx, a new influx
height is assumed. Iteration is performed until the following sets of
dependent simultaneous equations converge to a solution. The mass is
a constant until the influx starts to exit the annulus.
If the top of the influx is outside the annulus:
In this case, the volume and height are known.
c dm dm hdm
g h P =
hdm K bot
P P P =
( )
e
g
P
h
V
M
c
bot
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= 1
ZRT
P
bot
=
M
V =
Determine the new influx gradient
Determine the new surface pressure
Refer to the Gas Compressibility (Z Factor) Model Calculations on
page 403.
Where:
( )
e
g
P
h
V
M
c
bot
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= 1
ZRT
P
bot
=
c
g G =
( ) ( )
dm c dm c bot s
h g h g P P =
Kick Classification
WELLPLAN Well Control analysis defines three kick classifications
including Kick While Drilling, Kick After Pump Shutdown, and Swab
Kick. Estimated influx volumes can be determined for a Kick While
Drilling or for Kick After Pump Shutdown. If the kick is determined
to be a Swab Kick, an estimated influx volume can not be determined.
Kick While Drilling
Pore Pressure > Dynamic BHP > Static BHP
A Kick While Drilling will occur if the formation pore pressure exceeds
the dynamic circulating pressure exerted by the drilling fluid.
In this case, the kick is circulated out by pumping kill mud for Weight
& Wait Method, or by pumping drilling mud during the first circulation
of the Drillers Method.

bot
P = Pressure at bottom of influx
K
P = Initial kick pressure
hdm
P = Hydrostatic pressure of the drilling mud from well bottom to influx bottom
G = Influx pressure gradient
M = Mass of influx
V = Volume of influx
h = TVD height of influx
dm
h = TVD height of the drilling mud in the annulus
c
g = Gravitational constant
Z = Compressibility factor
R = Gas constant
T = Influx temperature, determined from annular temperature profile
= Influx density
dm
= Drilling mud density
inc
MD
= Measured depth increment
bot
MD
= Measured depth location of the influx bottom
i
MD
= Initial measured depth of bit
prev bot
MD
= Pressure measured depth of influx bottom

Kick After Pump Shutdown
Dynamic BHP > Pore Pressure > Static BHP
A Kick After Pump Shutdown occurs if the formation pore pressure is
lower than the circulating pressure of the drilling mud, and sufficient
over balance exists. However, when the pumps are shut down and the
circulation stops, the hydrostatic pressure of the mud alone is
insufficient to counteract the pore pressure exerted.
In this case, the kick is circulated out by pumping kill mud for Weight
& Wait Method, or by pumping drilling mud during the first circulation
of the Drillers Method.
Swab Kick
Dynamic BHP > Static BHP > Pore Pressure
With the formation pore pressure lower than the hydrostatic pressure of
the mud, a kick can occur through swabbing of the formation. Swabbing
can occur while pulling the work string out of the hole.
In this case, the annulus pressure profile is modeled by moving the string
with the influx, and mud is not pumped to move the influx. The bottom
of the influx is kept even with the bottom of the bit. Expected Influx
calculations are not allowed.
Kick After Pump Shut Down Influx Estimation
The sequence of events during the inflow period is divided into three
time periods.
Time Period A
During Time Period A, indications of the kick are apparent by use of the
rigs kick detection equipment on surface. The sensitivity of this
equipment is a factor in how much influx is taken during this period.
The Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate Calculations are used to
determine the volume of the influx and the flow rate of the mud above
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period A. These calculations
are performed for a series of five-second time steps until either the
calculated volume or flow rate is detectable. For these calculations, the
following conditions apply.
a) The rate of penetration, ROP, is zero because there is no rotation.
b) The flow rate is zero because the pumps are shut down.
c) The pressure difference, , between the formation and the
drilling fluid column is between the pore pressure and the
calculated dynamic bottom hole pressure. The pressure
difference is due to hydrostatic pressure of the mud column.
Frictional pressure loss is not generated because the mud pumps
are off.
d) The height of penetrated reservoir, h, is constant based on the
Exposed Height specified on the Influx Volume Estimation
Reservoir tab.
The values for volume of influx, V, and flowrate, Q, are calculated for
each five-second time step until the end of Period A is determined based
on the following conditions related to kick detection equipment.
For kicks detected by Flowrate Variation
Perform the calculations until the calculated flowrate, Q, is greater than
or equal to the magnitude of the detectable flowrate variation.
For kicks detected by Volume Variation
Perform the calculations until the calculated influx volume, V, minus
the flowrate, Q, times the specified Detection Time Delay is greater
than or equal to the magnitude of the detectable volume variation.
P
Time Period B
Time Period B does not apply to Kicks After Pump Shut Down
because there is no circulation.
Time Period C
During Time Period C, the well is secured. The BOP and choke valves
are made ready before the well is finally closed in. How quickly this can
be achieved depends on the crew reaction times specified on the Influx
Volume Estimation Reaction Times Tab. Only at this stage are further
formation fluids prevented from entering the well. The initial influx
volume is at a maximum.
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period C. These calculations
are performed for a series of five-second time steps until the
accumulated time steps exceed the time span of Period C. For these
calculations, the following conditions apply.
a) The rate of penetration, ROP, is zero because rotation has
stopped.
b) The mud flow rate is zero because the pumps are stopped.
Frictional pressure loss is not generated because the pumps are
off.
d) The height of penetrated reservoir, h, is now a constant value
equal to Exposed Height specified on the Influx Volume
Estimation Reservoir tab.
Results
The total influx volume is the sum of the influx volumes calculated for
Time Period A and Time Period C. The influx volume at the time of
detection is equal to the influx volume at the end of Time Period A. The
kick detection time is equal to the length Time Period A.
P
Kick While Drilling Influx Estimation
The sequence of events during the inflow period is divided into three
time periods.
Time Period A
During Time Period A, indications of the kick are apparent by use of the
rigs kick detection equipment on surface. The sensitivity of this
equipment is a factor in how much influx is taken during this period.
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period A. These calculations
are performed for a series of five-second time steps until either the
calculated volume or flow rate is detectable. For these calculations, the
following conditions apply.
a) The rate of penetration, ROP, is set to the ROP specified on the
Influx Volume Estimation - Reservoir Tab.
b) The flow rate is set to the drilling flow rate.
difference is due to hydrostatic pressure of the mud column, and
the frictional pressure loss in the annulus.
P
d) The height of penetrated reservoir, h, begins at zero, and
increases based on ROP and elapsed time until the time has
exceeded the length of Time Period A. For each five-second-
time step, h will increase by a factor of .
The values for volume of influx, V, and flowrate, Q, are calculated for
each five-second time step until the end of Period A is determined based
on the following conditions related to kick detection equipment.
For kicks detected by Flowrate Variation
Perform the calculations until the calculated flowrate, Q, is greater than
or equal to the magnitude of the detectable flowrate variation.
For kicks detected by Volume Variation
Perform the calculations until the calculated influx volume, V, minus
the flowrate, Q, times the specified Detection Time Delay is greater
than or equal to the magnitude of the detectable volume variation.
Time Period B
During Time Period B, the drilling is stopped, the bit is pulled off-
bottom and the pumps are shut down. How quickly this can be achieved
depends on the crew reaction times specified on the Influx Volume
Estimation > Reaction Times tab.
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period B. These calculations
accumulated time steps exceed the time span of Period B. For these
stopped.
b) The flow rate is set to the drilling flow rate.
difference is due to hydrostatic pressure of the mud column and
the frictional pressure loss in the annulus.
) 5 ( ROP
P
equal to the time spent in Period A multiplied by the ROP
specified on the Influx Volume Estimation Reservoir tab.
Time Period C
During Time Period C, the well is secured. The BOP and choke valves
are made ready before the well is finally closed in. This time calculation
depends on the crew reaction times specified on the Influx Volume
Estimation > Reaction Times tab. Only at this stage are further
formation fluids prevented from entering the well. The initial influx
volume is at a maximum.
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period C. These calculations
accumulated time steps exceed the time span of Period C. For these
stopped.
b) The mud flow rate is zero because the pumps are stopped.
Frictional pressure loss is not generated because the pumps are
off.
equal to the time spent in Period A multiplied by the ROP
specified on the Influx Volume Estimation Reservoir tab.
Results
The total influx volume is the sum of the influx volumes calculated for
the three time periods. The influx volume at the time of detection is
equal to the influx volume at the end of Time Period A. The kick
detection time is equal to the length of Time Period A.
P
Kill Sheet
Initial Circulating Pressure
Final Circulating Pressure
Kill Mud Weight
Final Mud Weight
Kill Mud Weight Increase
O P SIDP ICP
P P P P + + =
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
DM
KM
P FCP
P P
DM
KTVD
SIDP
KM
D
P
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
052 . 0
TM KM FM
+ =
DM KM KM
=
( )
KTVD
SIDP
KM
D
P
052 . 0
=
Final Mud Weight Increase
Kill Mud Weighting Material Required
Final Mud Weighting Material Required
Formation Pressure
Formation Equivalent Mud Weight
Leak Off Equivalent Mud Weight
KM FM FM
=
TM FM
=
( )
( )
KM W
DM KM
W T TW
V W

=
( )
( )
FM W
KM FM
W T FW
V W

=
HDM SIDP F
P P P + =
KTVD
F
FEQM
D
P
052 . 0
=
LM
STVD
LO
LEQM
D
P
+ =
052 . 0
Casing Maximum Allowed Pressure
Drill Pipe Pressure
Total Delta Frictional Pressure
Delta Hydrostatic Pressure
Delta Frictional Pressure
Overkill Pressure Correction
( ) ( ) 052 . 0
STVD DM LEQM CM
D P =
OC FR HDM ICP DP
P P P P P + =
1
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
DM
KM
P TFR
P P
( )( )( )
KMTVD DM KM HD
D P 052 . 0 =
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
KM
KMMD
TFR FR
D
D
P P
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
KTVD
KMTVD
O OC
D
D
P P
Where:
ICP
P = Initial circulating pressure
SIDP
P = Shut in drill pipe pressure
P
P = Pump pressure
O
P = Overkill pressure
FCP
P = Final circulating pressure
F
P = Formation pressure
HDM
P = Hydrostatic drill mud pressure at total depth
FEQM
P = Formation equivalent mud weight
LO
P = Leak off pressure
CM
P = Maximum casing pressure allowed
DP
P = Drill pipe pressure
FR
P = Frictional pressure
OC
P = Overkill pressure correction
TW
W = Total weight of weighting material
W
W = Weight of weighting material
FW
W = Final weight of weighting material
KM
= Kill mud density

DM
= Drill mud density

FM
= Final mud density

TM
= Trip margin density

LEQM
= Leak off equivalent mud density

LM
= Leak off mud density

W
= Weighting material density
KTVD
D = True vertical depth of kick
STVD
D
= True vertical depth of shoe
KM
D
= Kill mud depth
KMTVD
D = True vertical depth of kill mud
KMMD
D
= Measured depth of kill mud
T
V
= Total mud volume
Pressure at Depth of Interest
Where:
Pressure Loss Analysis
The following general analysis steps are used to determine pressure
losses in the various segments of the circulating system. For more
information concerning the pressure loss calculations, refer to the
Hydraulics Analysis section in this book.
1. The first step is to Calculate PV, YP, 0-Gel and Fann data as
required. The Bingham Plastic and Power Law pressure loss
calculations require PV/YP data. If Fann data is input, PV/YP/0-Sec
Gel can be calculated. Herschel-Bulkley requires Fann data. If Fann
data not is input on the Case > Fluid Editor, it can be calculated
from PV/YP/0-Sec Gel data.
2. Calculate work string and annular pressure losses based on the
rheological model selected using the Bingham Plastic rheology
model calculations, Power Law rheology model calculations or
Herschel-Bulkley rheology model calculations.
3. Calculate the bit pressure loss.
mh g mf P d
P P P P P + =
d
P = Pressure at t he dept h of i nt erest
P
P = Form at i on pore pressure as speci f i ed by t he Ki ck
I nt erv al Pressure on t he Ki ck Cl ass Det erm i nat i on di al og
mf
P = Fri ct i onal pressure l oss due t o t he m ud f l ow f rom t he
dept h of i nt erest t o t he surf ace. The f ri ct i onal pressure
l osses i ncl ude t he choke and ki l l l i ne pressure l oss.
The sam e al gori t hm s as used by W ELLPLAN Hydraul i cs
perf orm t he f ri ct i onal pressure l oss cal cul at i ons. These
al gori t hm s are based on t he rheol ogy m odel speci f i ed
on t he f l ui d edi t or as wel l as m ud param et ers such as
PV/ YP/ 0-Sec Gel or Fann dat a.
g
P = Hydrost at i c pressure of t he gas col um n f rom t he bot t om
hol e l ocat i on t o t he dept h of i nt erest .
mh
P
= Hydrost at i c pressure of t he m ud col um n f rom t he bot t om
hol e l ocat i on t o t he dept h of i nt erest . These i ncl ude al l
dri l l i ng m ud and ki l l m ud.
4. Calculate tool joint pressure losses, if required as specified on the
Parameter > Rate dialog or the Parameter > Rates dialog.
5. Determine mud motor or MWD pressure losses as input on the Mud
Motor Catalog or the MWD Catalog.
6. Calculate the pressure losses in the surface equipment using the
pipe pressure loss equations for the selected rheological model.
7. Calculate the total pressure loss by adding all pressure losses
together.
8. Calculate ECD if required.
Steady State Circulation Temperature Model
To determine the temperatures along the entire wellbore length, the
wellbore is divided into several sections. The following calculations are
performed for each section, beginning at the annulus surface.
Set initial parameter values for first section
1 = a
0 = b
0
T T
ag
=
Calculate constants for this section
Calculate K parameters for this section
Estimate annulus temperature for next section
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ + =
B A
B
C
4
1 1
2
1
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ =
B A
B
C
4
1 1
2
2
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ + + =
B
B
C
4
1 1
2
1
3
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ + =
B
B
C
4
1 1
2
1
4
p p
p
U r
mc
A
2
=
p p
a a
U r
U r
B =
( )
( )
( )
( )
3
4
1
1
1
2
aC e
aC e
L C
L C
=
( ) ( )
( )
( ) L C
e aC
b T a GA a GL
1
3
0
1
1 1
+ + +
=
4 3
3 0
2
C C
C T T
K
ag
+

=
+ =
2 1
K K
( ) ( )
0 4 2 3 1
2 1
T GL e C K e C K T
L C L C
ag
+ + + =
Calculate parameters for next section
Repeat calculations for C constant parameters for this section. Repeat
cycle for all sections.
Calculate workstring and annulus temperatures
When all depth section parameters (all K and all C) have been
determined, calculate the following annulus and workstring
temperatures for all depth sections.
Workstring Temperature
Annulus Temperature
4 3
1
C C
a
+
+
=
( )( ) ( )( )
( )
4 3
0 3 4 3 0
1
C C
T C C C GA T
b
+
+ + + +
=

GA GL T e K e K T
o
L C L C
P
+ + + =
2 1
2 1
o
L C L C
a
T GL e C K e C K T + + + =
2 1
4 2 3 1
Where:
Viscosity and Compressibility of Methane
Calculate the viscosity of methane at temperature and
pressure
p
T = Workstring temperature at depth L, (K)
a
T = Annulus temperature at depth L, (K)
ag
T = Estimate annulus temperature at depth L, (K)
o
T = Flow line mud temperature, (K)
G = Geothermal gradient based on temperature data input on Undisturbed
Temperature tabs ,or is interpolated using the data from the Undisturbed
Temperature Additional tab ( )
1
.
Km
m = Massflux, ( )
1
.
kgs
p
c = Heat capacity of mud, ( )
1 1
. .

K Jkg
p
U = Overall heat transfer coefficient through workstring, ( )
1 1
2
1680

K m Js
a
U = Overall heat transfer coefficient through annulus, ( )
1 1
2
3 . 170

K m Js
p
r
= Workstring radius, (m)
a
r = Annulus radius, (m)
L
= Measured depth section length, (m)
c
r
P
P
P =
c
r
T
T
T =
( )
( )
( )
( )
3
15
2
14 13 12
3
3
11
2
10 9 8
2
3
7
2
6 5 4
3
3
2
2 1 0
r r r r
r r r r
r r r r
r r r
P A P A P A A T
P A P A P A A T
P A P A P A A T
P A P A P A A f
+ + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + =
r
base f
T
e
= This value is used in the Estimated Influx Calculation

Calculate the compressibility of methane at temperature
and pressure
Use the Gas Compressibility (Z Factor) Model Calculations on
page 403.
5 . 3
1
07408 . 0
r
r
T
P
f =
08664 . 0 01501 . 0
4275 . 0
5 . 1
2
=
r
r
r
T
P
T
f
r
T
Z
f f N
2 1
=
08664 . 0 007506 . 0
4275 . 0
5 . 1
1
=
r
r
r
T
P
T
r
r
r
T
r
P Z Z D
1 2
2 3 + =
DZ
N
P
r
r
=
1
2
c
P
r
c
2
= This value is used in the Estimated Influx Calculation
Where:
= Gas Viscosity at T and P, ( )
2
Nsm
c = Gas compressibility at T and P, ( ) N m
2
T = Kick temperature (deg Kelvin)
P = Kick Pressure , (Pa)
c
T = Critical temperature of methane at 207.98 deg Kelvin
c
P = Critical pressure of methane at 4,602,000 Pa
r
T = Reduced temperature
r
P = Reduced pressure
base
= Base viscosity for methane, cp
3
10 016 . 0
Z = Gas compressibility factor

Constants:
00
0
10 46211820 . 2
= A
00
1
10 97054714 . 2
= A
01
2
10 86264054 . 2
= A
03
3
10 05420522 . 8
= A
00
4
10 80860949 .. 2
= A
00
5
10 49803305 . 3
= A
01
6
10 60373020 . 3
= A
02
7
10 04432413 . 1
= A
01
8
10 93385684 . 7
= A
00
9
10 39643306 . 1
= A
01
10
10 49144925 . 1
= A
03
11
10 41015512 . 4
= A
02
12
10 39387178 . 8
= A
01
13
10 86408848 . 1
= A
02
14
10 03367881 . 2
= A
04
15
10 09579263 . 6
= A
References
General
Hage, J.I., Shell Research Rijswijk, Surewaard, J.H.G., Shell Research
Rijswijk, Vullinghs, P.J.J., Application of Research in Kick Detection
and Well Control, SIPM Paper presented at the IADC European Well
Control Conference, Noordwijkerhout, June 2-4, 1992.
Rabia, H., Fundamentals of Casing Design, Graham and Trotman,
1987.
Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate
Van Everdingen, A.F. and Hurst, W., The Application of the Laplace
Transformation to Flow Problems in Reservoirs, Trans. AIDE 186,
305-324, 1949.
Gas Compressibility (Z Factor) Model Calculations
Redlich, O. and Kwong, J.N.S., Chem. Rev., 44,233,(1949).
Steady State Temperature
Swift, S.C. and Holmes, C.S., Calculation of Circulating Mud
Temperatures, JPT, June 1970.
Chapter
Surge Analysis
Overview
The Surge module can be used for finding surge and swab pressures
throughout the wellbore caused by pipe movement. This analysis can be
useful for well planning operations when surge pressures need to be
controlled and when well problems occurred that were related to
pressure surges. It can also be useful for critical well designs when other
surge pressure-calculation methods are not sufficiently accurate.
Some specific operations when Surge is useful include:
z Tripping drill strings in deep hot holes, especially while drilling
below liners
z Running long casing strings, especially those with low clearance
z Running liners, especially for larger sizes run in holes with minimal
clearance
z Analyzing pressure surges due to pipe movement during cementing
of long strings and liners, especially where high pressure gas zones
could be effected by surge pressures
z Optimizing the selection of drilling fluid densities and pipe motions
for wells with narrow margins between pore pressure and fracture
gradients
z Evaluating differential fill equipment
z Evaluating pressure surges induced by vessel motions while drilling
or running casing from a floating rig
9
Chapter 9: Surge Analysis
of using the Surge module, including:
Defining surge operations
Analyzing results
Workflow
Open the Case using the Well Explorer.
Define the wellbore. (Case > Hole Section Editor)
workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth) (Case >
String)
Define the fluids used. The fluids can be either mud or cement. You
must define the fluid rheological properties, select a rheology
model, and specify the temperature. You can define as many fluids
as you want. (Case > Fluid Editor) If you are using more than one
fluid, or you are pumping while tripping, you must specify the
fluids in use on the Parameter > Job Data dialog.
Define the pore pressure gradients. (Case > Pore Pressure)
Define the fracture gradients. (Case > Fracture Gradient)
Specify formation temperatures. (Case > Geothermal Gradient)
Optional Step: Specify the formation properties if you know the
elastic properties of the wellbore formations. This information will
result in a more accurate analysis. (Case > Formation Properties)
Optional Step: Enter the properties of the set cement. The default
value for elastic modulus is 3 X 10
6
psi. The default value for
Poissons ratio is 0.35. (Case > Cement Properties)
Optional Step: Specify the eccentricity ratio of the annuli at
different measured depths. Eccentricity reduces the pressure drop
for annular flow. This information is useful for evaluating the
effects of eccentricity on a vertical well. For a deviated well, the
pipe is automatically assumed to be fully eccentric in the deviated
sections. (Case > Eccentricity)
If you are cementing or pumping while tripping: specify the fluids
in the wellbore and the flowrate. (Parameter > Job Data)
Otherwise, the fluid specified on the Case > Fluid Editor will be
used. A fluid must be defined using Case > Fluid Editor before it
can be used on the Parameter > Job Data dialog.
Optional: Specify the use of standoff devices. (Parameter >
Standoff Devices)
Analyze Surge operations.
a) Select the Surge/Swab analysis mode from the Mode drop-
down list.
b) Using Parameter > Operations Data:
Click the Surge radio button to indicate you want to analyze for
surge pressures.
Specify analysis details, including: additional depth of interest
for analysis, length of stand pipe, pipe acceleration and
deceleration. You must also specify the pipe depths you want to
analyze, as well as the speed the pipe is moving.
Indicate whether you want to optimize the trip speeds, or if you
want to use the low clearance calculations.
Specify the circulating fluid and flow rate, and whether or not
you want to include mud temperature effects.
c) Analyze results. You will want to review the Surge Limit, and
Transient Response plots. Use the Surge and Swab Limit plots
to determine if the maximum surge pressures exceed the pore or
fracture pressure gradients. Use the Transient Response plot to
determine if the fluctuating pressures exceed the pore or fracture
pressures. Sometimes a surge operation may experience
pressures below pore pressure, or a swab operation will
experience pressures above the fracture pressure. You will need
to review the Transient Response plots to notice this.
Analyze Swab operations
a) Select the Surge/Swab analysis mode from the Mode drop-
down list.
Click the Swab radio button to indicate you want to analyze for
surge pressures.
deceleration. You must also specify the pipe depths you want to
analyze, as well as the speed the pipe is moving.
Indicate whether you want to optimize the trip speeds, or if you
want to use the low clearance calculations.
c) Analyze results. You will want to review the Swab Limit, and
Transient Response plots. Use the Swab Limit plots to
determine if the maximum swab pressures exceed the pore or
fracture pressure gradients. Use the Transient Response plot to
determine if the fluctuating pressures exceed the pore or fracture
pressures. Sometimes a surge operation may experience
pressures below pore pressure, or a swab operation will
experience pressures above the fracture pressure. You will need
to review the Transient Response plots to notice this.
Analyze Reciprocation operations.
a) Select the Reciprocation analysis mode from the Mode drop-
down list.
deceleration, and the reciprocation length and rate. You must
also specify the pipe depths you want to analyze, as well as the
speed the pipe is moving.
Indicate whether you want to use the low clearance
calculations.
c) Analyze results. You will want to review the Surge Limit, Swab
Limit, and Transient Response plots. Use the Surge and Swab
Limit plots to determine if the maximum surge or swab pressures
exceed the pore or fracture pressure gradients. Use the Transient
Response plot to determine if the fluctuating pressures exceed
the pore or fracture pressures. Sometimes a surge operation may
experience pressures below pore pressure, or a swab operation
will experience pressures above the fracture pressure. You will
need to review the Transient Response plots to notice this.
Introducing Surge Analysis
What is the Surge Module?
The Surge module is a transient pressure model that can be used for
finding surge and swab pressures throughout the wellbore caused by
pipe movement. This analysis can be useful for well planning operations
when surge pressures need to be controlled and when well problems
occurred that were related to pressure surges. It can also be useful for
critical well designs when other surge pressure calculation methods are
not sufficiently accurate.
Surge is based on a fully dynamic analysis of fluid flow and pipe
motion. (Refer to Supporting Information and Calculations on
page 439, and the References on page 453sections of this chapter for
more information.) This analysis solves the full balance of mass and
balance of momentum for pipe flow and annulus flow.
Surge solutions consider the compressibility of the fluids, the elasticity
of the system, and the dynamic motions of pipes and fluids. Also
considered are surge pressures related to fluid column length below the
moving pipe, compressibility of the formation, and axial elasticity of the
moving string. In-hole fluid properties are adjusted to reflect the effects
of pressure and temperature on the fluids.
Surge uses the wellbore, fluid, wellpath, workstring, and other
parameters specified in the Case menu options. Operational, depths of
interest, and moving pipe depth parameters are specified in the
Parameter menu options. The analysis results (output) can be displayed
on several plots, tables, and reports, which are accessed through the
View menu.
What is the Difference Between a Transient and Steady-State Model?
The calculation of steady-state surge pressures is much easier and faster
than the calculation of transient surge pressures. The transient pressure
model included in the Surge module has several features that a steady-
state model does not have. These features include:
z Compressibility: A transient model accounts for the
compressibility and expansion of the wellbore and fluids.
z Storage: Fluids entering the well do not necessarily mean that
fluids are exiting the well. For example, when viscous forces are
extremely high, the surge pressure will be more related to the water
compression and wellbore expansion than the steady state frictional
pressure drop would indicate.
z Elasticity: Because the drillstring can deform, the bit speed is not
necessarily the draw works speed. For high yield points, pipe
elasticity reduces swab pressures to an important degree.
z Inertia: Fluid movement may be started or stopped. Therefore,
positive and negative pressures may be developed in the same pipe
movement. For high mud weights, fluid inertia results in higher
swab pressures.
When Should I use the Transient Surge Model?
Under what circumstances are the more complex transient pressure
calculations justified? Generally, more accurate estimates for surge
pressures are required when there is a small margin for error.
Some specific operations when Surge is useful include:
z Tripping drill strings in deep hot holes, especially while drilling
below liners
z Running long casing strings, especially those with low clearance
z Running liners, especially for larger sizes run in holes with minimal
clearance
z Analyzing pressure surges due to pipe movement during cementing
of long strings and liners, especially where high pressure gas zones
could be effected by surge pressures
z Optimizing the selection of drilling fluid densities and pipe motions
for wells with narrow margins between pore pressure and fracture
gradients
The following examples illustrate the advantage a transient surge model
can offer.
z Example 1: Assume that the wellbore pressure is close to the
fracture pressure at one point in the open hole section. In other
sections of the well there is a healthy margin relative to the pore
pressure. Using a steady state model, surge pressures would clearly
need to be controlled to prevent fracture, but the swab pressures
would not be a consideration. Transient analysis of swab pressures
would show that rebound pressures at the end of the swab could
exceed the fracture pressure and cause unexpected lost returns.
z Example 2: If the bit is nearing the casing setting depth, the
wellbore pressure will be close to both the fracture pressure (top of
the open hole) and the pore pressure (bottom of the open hole).
surge pressures when tripping in should be maintained below the
fracture pressure and above the pore pressures. In this case, there is
little margin for error, so the most accurate calculation is needed.
z Example 3: Running low clearance liners has the potential to
generate large surge pressures because of the high pressure drop in
the narrow annulus between the liner and wellbore. In this case, the
transient model helps by including an effect not considered in a
steady-state calculations: the elasticity of the work string. Steady-
state models usually assume that the liner moves at the same speed
as the draw works. In this case, the resistance to movement may be
so high that the liner doesnt move at all, at least not initially. As the
fluid flow develops transiently, the liner will slowly descend,
almost independent of the draw works speed.
Starting Surge Analysis
There are two ways to begin the Surge module:
z Select Surge from the Modules menu.
z Click the Surge button .
Choose Surge from Module menu or by clicking the Surge Module
button.
data into the Case menu options that are not discussed in this chapter.
Defining Formation Properties
Use Case > Formation Properties to specify the properties of the
formation if you have this information available. These data are used to
calculate the compressibility of the formation. If you dont specify data
in this spreadsheet, default values of 1.45 X 10
6
psi for Elastic Modulus,
and 0.3 for Poissons Ratio will be used.
Most of the time you will not have this information available, and the
default values are sufficient. In those situations where you have
information regarding the elastic properties of the wellbore material,
you can use this dialog to obtain a more accurate analysis.
For most formations, the Elastic Modulus ranges between 1 X 10
6
and
2 X 10
6
psi. Poissons Ratio ranges between 0.2 and 0.3 for most
formations.
Defining the Properties of the Set Cement
Use the Case > Cement Properties dialog to specify the elastic
properties of the set cement behind the casing, if you have this
information available. These data help provide more accurate calculated
results of the analysis. If you dont specify the Cement Properties using
this dialog, the analysis will use the formation properties input on the
Case > Formation Properties dialog.
Specify the top and
bottom of the formation
layer, the Elastic Modulus,
and Poissons Ratio.
Use this dialog to specify the properties
of the set cement (behind the casing).
Specifying Analysis Parameters Common to Surge,
Swab, and Reciprocation Analysis
Defining the Wellbore Fluids and Specifying Pump Rates
Use the Parameter > Job Data dialog to define the fluids in the
wellbore. Fluids must be defined using the Case > Fluid Editor before
the fluid is accessible on this dialog. Refer to the online help for
additional information about this dialog.
Using Standoff Devices
Specifying standoff devices is an optional part of the analysis. If you are
using these devices, refer to Using Standoff Devices on page 189 for
more information.
Select the wellbore fluid from the drop-down list. The
fluid must be defined on the Case > Fluid Editor
before you can select in on this dialog.
It is not necessary to enter a Rate. If you
are pumping and want to include this in the
analysis, you must specify the flow rate on
the Parameter > Job Data dialog.
Analyzing Surge and Swab Operations
The data required for surge and swab operations is identical. The
analysis plots for surge and swab are also identical. Therefore,
description of both surge and swab analysis will be combined within this
manual. Reciprocation analysis requires different input data, and the
analysis plots are also slightly different. Because of these slight
differences, reciprocation analysis will be discussed separately.
Selecting the Surge/Swab Analysis Mode
Use the Mode drop-down list box to select the Surge/Swab analysis
mode. By default, the Mode drop-down list is located with the menu
bars. You can move the Mode drop-down list to another location if
desired.
Defining Analysis Parameters
Check the Optimize Trip Time box to calculate the maximum speed
the pipe can be tripped by increasing the calculation time. Trip time is
optimized by calculating the fastest times where surge and swab
pressures do not exceed the input constraints for fracture pressures and
pore pressures (as specified in their respective spreadsheets). When the
formation limits are exceeded, the speed is reduced until the limits are
satisfied.
Note: Low Clearance Analysis Option...
The low clearance analysis is an improved analysis model that tightly couples the
fluid forces with the axial forces. The low clearance analysis can take a
considerable amount of time to calculate. Therefore, when you use this analysis
option, it is recommended that you analyze one operation at a time, and that you
limit the analysis to two moving pipe depths.
Specify one additional
depth you are interested
in analyzing.
Specify the depths where the bottom of the
moving pipe is located. Calculations are
performed at the depths specified in these
columns assuming that the bottom of the moving
pipe is at these depths. Specify the speed the
pipe is moving when it is at these depths.
Select the Operation Type by
clicking the appropriate radio
button.
If you want to include a flow rate in the
analysis, specify the fluid and the flow
rate on this dialog.
Analyzing Surge and Swab Analysis Results
Results for the Surge analysis are presented in plots, tables and a report.
All results are available using the View menu.
The Surge module has several plots that will assist you while analyzing
results.
The plot data can be displayed as a table. Right-click inside the plot to
display its context menu, and then click Graph/Grid.
Each plot represents results for tripping one stand of pipe. The stand
length is specified on the Parameter > Operations dialog.
Using Operation Plots
Trip Speed vs Moving Pipe Depth (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Trip Speed vs Moving Pipe Depth
plot to display the trip speed at a moving pipe depth for either the surge
or swab operation you are analyzing as defined on the Parameter >
Operations dialog.
Limit Plot (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Limit plot to view the maximum
pressures at a depth of interest for either the surge or swab operation you
are analyzing as defined on the Parameter > Operations dialog.
Due to dynamic sloshing and backflow effects, maximum pressures
during a swab may exceed the fracture pressure, and minimum pressures
during a surge may drop below the pore pressure. To help you obtain a
Trip speeds are specified on the Parameter > Operations > Data dialog. The
line will be horizontal if all trip speeds are the same.
complete evaluation of the operation, you should review both the surge
and swab limit plots.
If you prefer to display this plot as Moving Pipe Depth vs Pressure, you
can use the right-click menu and select the alternate view. To access the
right-click menu, right-click anywhere on the plot except on a data curve
or legend.
Transient Response Plot (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Transient Response plot to display
the transient pressure responses at one depth of interest for all moving
pipe depths versus the time to trip one stand of pipe.
Note: Determining if the pressure is likely to exceed the fracture
gradient, or fall below the pore pressure...
You must observe the pressures on the Limit plot and compare the maximum or
minimum pressure to the fracture gradient or pore pressure at the corresponding
depth. Pore pressure and fracture gradient curves are not displayed on this plot.
Refer to the Case > Pore Pressure or Case > Fracture Gradient spreadsheets.
If the calculated pressure is greater than the fracture gradient, you should be
concerned about fracturing the formation. If the calculated pressure is less than
the pore pressure, you should be concerned about taking a kick.
This is an example of a limit
plot for a surge analysis. The
plot for swab analysis is
similar.
Why use transient pressure analysis instead of steady-state?
Pressures on this plot can be compared to the specified formation pore
and fracture pressure limits displayed as red areas on the plot. This plot
can easily display a significant advantage of using a transient pressure
analysis rather than a steady-state model. The relatively constant
pressure displayed on the plot is the steady-state pressure. Notice the
pressures above and below this steady-state pressure. These pressure
changes can be significant, and are calculated using the transient
pressure model.
What is this plot telling me?
The pressure fluctuations at the left side of this plot display the sloshing
and damping effects on the pressure behavior. This behavior is caused
by the acceleration and deceleration of the pipe as the pipe motion
begins and ends. As an example, during a tripping in (surge) operation,
the fluid will begin to compress. As a result, the pressure will increase.
Eventually the fluid will begin to flow from the annulus, and the
pressure will decrease. This cycle will continue until the pressure
fluctuations dampen as a result of the friction in the fluid. As this occurs,
the curve flattens to a relative constant, or steady-state pressure as
displayed on the plot. The relatively constant pressure continues until
the pipe motion begins to stop. As the motion stops, the fluid continues
to flow from the annulus, and therefore the pressure will decrease. Some
pressure fluctuations will occur as the pipe and fluid motion ceases. The
reverse of this explanation holds for a tripping out (swab) operation.
Curves flatten as the initial fluid movement is taking time to
reflect back. This is the steady-state pressure.
Initial movement of pipe.
Hook Load vs. Trip Time Plot (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Hook Load vs. Trip Time plot to
display the hook load for a moving pipe versus trip time using the
operation data specified on the Parameter > Operations Data dialog.
Limit Plot @ Moving Pipe Depth (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the Limit Plot @ Moving Pipe Depth plot to view the maximum
pressures at a moving pipe depth for surge or swab operations compared
to the fracture pressure. Moving pipe depth and other analysis data is
defined in the Parameter > Operations Data dialog.
This is a surge
operation. Tripping
in has a negative
change in hook load.
The rate of change in hook load decreases
as you near the end of a stand.
Transient Response @ Moving Pipe Depth Plot (Surge or Swab
Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Transient Response @ Moving
Pipe Depth plot to view the transient pressure response over the time
interval required to move the string the length of one stand. This plot
assumes the moving pipe depth is the depth of interest. Operational
parameter, including stand length, are specified on Parameter >
Operations Data.
Notice that the
pressure during the
surge operation
comes very close to
the fracture gradient.
2.5 minutes is the time required to move one stand of
pipe. Time begins when the pipe is at the indicated
moving pipe depth. The depth increases the pipe
stand length.
The sloped portions of each curve correspond to
accelerating or decelerating the pipe.
Using the Miscellaneous Plots
Geothermal Gradient (Surge or Swab Analysis)
The View > Miscellaneous Plots > Geothermal Gradient plot displays
the geothermal gradient based on basic formation temperature data
specified in the Case > Geothermal Gradient > Standard tab and
additional temperature data specified in the Case > Geothermal
Gradient > Additional tab.
Surface Results Plot (Surge or Swab Analysis)
The View > Miscellaneous Plots > Surface Results plot displays the
standpipe pressure, and block speed vs the time to move the string the
length of one stand. Operating parameters are defined using Parameter
> Operations Data.
The standpipe pressure
will be zero unless you are
circulating.
On the block speed
curves, the slope of the
curve at the beginning
and ending of the time
interval is due to pipe
acceleration and
deceleration.
Annulus Return Flowrate (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the View > Miscellaneous Plots > Annulus Return Flowrate plot
to view the return flowrate over the time interval required to move the
string the length of one stand of pipe. Operating parameters, including
stand length, are defined using Parameter > Operations Data.
Transient Results (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the View > Miscellaneous Plots > Transient Results plot to view
the velocity of the bit, or the bottom of the casing or liner, over the time
interval required to move the string one stand length. Operating
parameters, including stand length, are defined using Parameter >
Operations Data.
Analyzing Results Using the Report
Report Options
information will be included on the report. Using this dialog, you can
include or exclude much of the information defining the case you are
analyzing.
Surge/Swab Report
The Reports > Surge/Swab report describes drill string and wellbore
input data, mud properties, and booster pump properties.
Analyzing Reciprocating Operations
Reciprocation analysis requires different input data than surge or swab
analysis, and the analysis plots are also slightly different. Because of
these slight differences, reciprocation analysis will be discussed
separately in this section of the manual.
Selecting the Reciprocation Analysis Mode
Use the Mode drop-down list box to select the Reciprocation analysis
mode. By default, the Mode drop-down list is located with the menu
bars. You can move the Mode drop-down list to another location if
desired.
The criteria you specify here include acceleration rates, and deceleration
rates. Keep in mind when you define the velocity profile data (stroke
length and rate), that if the moving pipe approaches within 20 feet of the
current measured depth of the well, the analysis depth is backed off from
the well bottom by 20 feet plus the length of one stroke before the
reciprocation analysis begins. Also, 60 seconds of circulation is
simulated before the reciprocation analysis begins to ensure that steady-
state circulation is achieved.
Analyzing Results
Results for the Surge analysis are presented in plots, tables and a report.
All results are available using the View menu.
Note: Low Clearance Analysis Option...
The low clearance analysis is an improved analysis model that tightly couples the
fluid forces with the axial forces. The low clearance analysis can take a
considerable amount of time to calculate. Therefore, when you use this analysis
option, it is recommended that you analyze one operation at a time, and that you
limit the analysis to two moving pipe depths.
Specify one additional
depth you are interested
in analyzing.
Specify the depths where the bottom of the
moving pipe is located. Calculations are
performed at the depths specified.
Specify the circulation or displacement fluid
to use in the analysis. The drop-down list
contains the fluids defined in the Fluid Editor
dialog.
Specify the length the
pipe is moved up and
down for each stroke.
Specify the number of strokes rates
per minute. One stroke consists of
an up-and-down cycle.
The Surge module has several plots that will assist you while analyzing
results.
The plot data can be displayed as a table. Right-click inside the plot to
display its context menu, and then click Switch.
Each plot represents results for reciprocating pipe the reciprocation
length specified on the Parameter > Operations dialog.
Using Operation Plots
Trip Speed vs Reciprocation Depth (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Trip Speed vs Reciprocation Depth
plot to display the reciprocation speed at a moving pipe depth for the
reciprocation operation you are analyzing as defined on the Parameter
> Operations dialog.
Surge Limit Plot (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Surge Limit Plot (Reciprocation)
plot to view the maximum pressures at a depth of interest for the surge
portion of the reciprocation operation you are analyzing as defined on
the Parameter > Operations dialog.
Trip speeds are specified on the
Parameter > Operations > Data
dialog. The line will be horizontal if all
trip speeds are the same.
If you prefer to display this plot as Moving Pipe Depth vs EMW, you
can use the right-click menu and select the alternate view. To access the
right-click menu, right-click anywhere on the plot except on a data curve
or legend.
Note: Determining if the pressure is likely to exceed the fracture
gradient, or fall below the pore pressure...
You must observe the pressures on the Limit plot and compare the maximum or
minimum pressure to the fracture gradient or pore pressure at the corresponding
depth. Pore pressure and fracture gradient curves are not displayed on this plot.
Refer to the Case > Pore Pressure or Case > Fracture Gradient spreadsheets.
If the calculated pressure is greater than the fracture gradient, you should be
concerned about fracturing the formation. If the calculated pressure is less than
the pore pressure, you should be concerned about taking a kick.
plot for the surge portion of
the reciprocation analysis.
The plot for swab analysis is
similar.
Swab Limit Plot (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Swab Limit Plot (Reciprocation)
plot to view the maximum pressures at a depth of interest for the swab
portion of the reciprocation operation you are analyzing as defined on
the Parameter > Operations dialog.
Transient Response Plot (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Transient Response plot to display
the transient pressure responses at one depth of interest for all moving
pipe depths versus the time to reciprocate the string the reciprocation
length specified on the Parameter > Operations Data dialog.
Why use transient pressure analysis instead of steady-state?
Pressures on this plot can be compared to the specified formation pore
and fracture pressure limits displayed as red areas on the plot. This plot
can easily display a significant advantage of using a transient pressure
analysis rather than a steady-state model. The relatively constant
pressure displayed on the plot is the steady-state pressure. Notice the
pressures above and below this steady-state pressure. These pressure
changes can be significant, and are calculated using the transient
pressure model.
plot for the swab portion of
the reciprocation analysis.
The plot for surge analysis is
similar.
What is this plot telling me?
For reciprocation operations, refer to the portion of the plot displaying
the peaks and valleys, or sine wave shape. The overall shape of the curve
displays the pressure fluctuations resulting from each stroke. (Note that
if you are optimizing trip time, the strokes per minute could be
adjusted.) Imposed on the overall curve shape are some wiggles or
smaller fluctuations in pressure as the curve follows the general sine
wave pattern. These wiggles are caused by the transient pressure
changes as the fluid is opposing the motion of the string.
For a reciprocation operation, this plot is modified two ways.
z Most of the initial circulation used to reach a steady-state prior to
reciprocation is deleted from the plot. Therefore, the time scale
should be viewed as incremental time, and not absolute time.
z The reciprocation event is cut off from the plot so that only the
rise/fall pressure is drawn. In other words, for slow-stroke speeds,
the flat constant pressure portions of the curves are extracted from
the plots. Therefore, the accelerations and decelerations along with
maximums and minimums are presented for consecutive strokes,
and the full transient response is cut off to allow the key
information to be presented as a single plot.
Spikes in the reciprocation curve indicate the pressure
changes resulting from the strokes.
Hook Load vs. Trip Time Plot (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Hook Load vs. Reciprocation Time
plot to display the hook load for all moving pipe depths versus the time
required to move the string the reciprocation length for the specified
strokes per minute using the operation data specified on the Parameter
> Operations Data dialog.
Surge Limit Plot @ Reciprocation Depth (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Surge Limit Plot @ Reciprocation
Depth plot to view the maximum pressures at a moving pipe depth for
surge operations compared to pore and fracture pressure. Moving pipe
depth and other analysis data is defined in the Parameter > Operations
Data dialog.
Peaks correspond to strokes. The upward string motion
results in positive hookload and the downward string
motion is represented by negative hookload.
Swab Limit Plot @ Reciprocation Depth (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Swab Limit Plot @ Reciprocation
Depth plot to view the maximum pressures at a moving pipe depth for
swab operations compared to pore and fracture pressure. Moving pipe
depth and other analysis data is defined in the Parameter > Operations
Data dialog.
Notice that the
pressure during the
surge operation
exceeds the fracture
gradient.
Transient Response @ Moving Pipe Depth Plot (Reciprocation
Analysis)
Use the View > Operation Plot > Transient Response @
Reciprocation Depth plot to view the transient pressure response over
the time interval required to reciprocate the string the length specified.
This plot assumes the moving pipe depth is the depth of interest.
Operational parameter, including reciprocation length, are specified on
Parameter > Operations Data.
Notice that the
pressure during the
swab operation falls
below the pore
pressure.
The peaks correspond to a stroke.
Using the Miscellaneous Plots
Geothermal Gradient (Reciprocation Analysis)
The View > Miscellaneous Plots > Geothermal Gradient plot displays
the geothermal gradient based on basic formation temperature data
specified in the Case > Geothermal Gradient > Standard tab and
additional temperature data specified in the Case > Geothermal
Gradient > Additional tab.
Surface Results Plot (Reciprocation Analysis)
The View > Miscellaneous Plots > Surface Results plot displays the
standpipe pressure, and block speed vs the time to move the string the
length of one stand. Operating parameters are defined using Parameter
> Operations Data.
The standpipe pressure
will be zero unless you are
circulating.
Annulus Return Flowrate (Reciprocation Analysis)
Use the View > Miscellaneous Plots > Annulus Return Flowrate plot
to view the return flowrate over the time interval required to reciprocate.
Operating parameters, including reciprocation length, are defined using
Parameter > Operations Data.
Transient Results (Surge or Swab Analysis)
Use the View > Miscellaneous Plots > Transient Results plot to view
the velocity of the bit, or the bottom of the casing or liner, over the time
interval required to reciprocate the string. Operating parameters,
including reciprocation length, are defined using Parameter >
Operations Data.
Analyzing Results Using the Report
Report Options
analyzing.
Reciprocation Report
The View > Report > Reciprocation report describes drill string and
wellbore input data, mud properties, and booster pump properties.
The material contained in this section is intended to provide you more
detailed information and calculations pertaining to many of the steps
presented during the descriptions of the analysis mode methodologies.
of information pertaining to the your topic of interest.
Methodology
The surge calculations are divided into two regions: the interval from the
surface to the end of the pipe and the interval from the end of the pipe to
bottomhole. In the upper region, pipe pressures are coupled to annulus
pressures through the radial elasticity of the pipe. The interpolated
method of characteristics is used to solve the fluid flow and pipe
dynamics for these Coupled Pipe-Annulus and Pipe-To-
Bottomhole regions. The fluid flow and pipe velocity equations are
solved subject to the boundary conditions given below.
The maximum time step allowed is the minimum grid spacing divided
by the sonic velocity. For a drill string near bottomhole, the minimum
gird spacing will be the distance off bottom. In order to avoid very small
time-step sizes for surges near bottomhole, a near bottomhole element
has been defined for this special case that neglects inertia.
Many of the mass equations have terms that relate the flow cross-
sectional area to the fluid pressures. For instance, in the Coupled Pipe-
Annulus region, increasing tubing pressure increases the tubing cross-
sectional area and decreases the annulus cross-sectional area.
Expansion of the pipe cross-sectional area is governed by thick-wall
pipe elastic solutions.
Pressure and Temperature Behavior of Water Based Muds
Temperature and pressure behavior of water-based muds is very
complex and dependent on mud composition and chemistry. There are
two water-based mud models in Surge. The simplest water-based mud
model used by Surge is the results from Annis combined with a
comprehensive water viscosity correlation.
The more generalized water-based mud model uses Alderman,
Gavignet, Guillot, and Maitland to provide a pressure-temperature
correlation for user-supplied viscometer data as well as an improved
model for low shear-rate flow. The fluid model is based on the Casson
equation for non-Newtonian fluids.
Viscosity Correlations of Oil Based Muds
Temperature and pressure behavior of oil-based muds is equally
complex and dependent on mud composition and chemistry. As for
water-based muds, there are two oil-based mud models in Surge. For the
simplest model, viscosity correlations for oil-based muds are based on
the work of Combs and Whitmire.
The more generalized oil-based mud model uses Houwen and Geehan
for improved pressure-temperature correlation to viscometer data, as
well as an improved model for low shear-rate flow. The fluid model is
based on the Casson equation for non-Newtonian fluids.
Surge Analysis
Two Analysis Regions
The dynamic surge analysis considers two distinct regions:
z Coupled-pipe/annulus region
z Pipe-to-bottomhole region
These two regions are visible in the following picture.
The Coupled-Pipe/Annulus Region Features:
z The full balance of mass and balance of momentum for pipe and
annulus flow are solved.
z Pipe and annulus pressures are coupled through the pipe elasticity.
Annulus pressures caused by pipe pressures may be significant.
z Longitudinal pipe elasticity and fluid viscous forces determine pipe
displacement. Referring to the following picture, we can see that
the velocity of the pipe end is not necessarily equal to the velocity
imposed at the surface. Therefore, the block speed does not
necessarily equal the speed of the bit.
z Frictional pressure drop is solved for laminar flow in an annulus
with a moving pipe for power-law fluids. Turbulent-flow frictional
pressure drop uses the Dodge and Metzner friction factor for
power-law fluids.
z Fluid properties vary as a function of pressure and temperature.
Plastic viscosity and yield point can vary significantly with
temperature.
z Formation elasticity, pipe elasticity and cement elasticity are all
considered in determining the composite elastic response of the
wellbore. For the case of a pipe cemented to the formation, use of
only the pipe elasticity will not give conservative surge pressures.
The Pipe-To-Bottomhole Region Features:
z Balance of mass and balance of momentum for the pipe-to-
bottomhole flow are solved.
z Frictional pressure drop is solved for laminar flow in the pipe-to-
bottomhole region for power-law fluids. Turbulent flow frictional
pressure drop uses the Dodge and Metzner friction factor for
power-law fluids.
z Fluid properties vary as a function of pressure and temperature.
z Formation elasticity, pipe elasticity and cement elasticity are all
considered in determining the composite elastic response of the
wellbore.
Connecting the Coupled-Pipe/Annulus and the Pipe-to-Bottomhole Regions
The two regions are connected through a comprehensive set of force and
displacement compatibility relations.
z The elastic force in the moving pipe is equal to the pressure below
the pipe times the pipe-end area. This means that a sufficiently high
pressure below the pipe could retard the pipe motion.
z Mass-flow balances are calculated for flow through the pipe nozzle,
the annulus return area and into the pipe bottomhole region. The
surge force and displacement and compatibility relations are
illustrated in the following diagram.
z Pressure drops are calculated through the pipe nozzle and annulus
return area on the basis of cross-sectional area changes with
appropriate discharge coefficients.
z Boundary conditions for floats were chosen to allow one-way flow
through the float. Fluid is allowed to flow out of the float, otherwise
the float is treated as a closed pipe.
z Surface boundary conditions set the fluid pressures in the tube and
the annulus to atmospheric pressure. The bottomhole boundary
condition assumes a rigid floor, which requires a zero fluid
velocity.
Open Annulus Calculations
Mass Balance
The Mass Balance consists of three parts:
z Expansion of the hole caused by internal fluid pressure (dA/dP).
z Compression of the fluid resulting from the changes in fluid
pressure.
z Influx (or outflux) of the fluid.
Hole expansion is a impacted by the elastic response of the formation
and any casing cemented between the fluid and the formation. The fluid
volume change is given by the bulk modulus, K. For drilling muds, K is
a function of the composition, pressure, and temperature of the mud. K
is the reciprocal of the compressibility.
Momentum Balance
This equation consists of four parts. The left side of the equation
represents acceleration of the fluid. The acceleration of the fluid equals
the sum of the forces on the fluid. The forces on the fluid are represented
by the three terms on the right side of the equation. The first fluid force
term represents the pressure or viscous force. The middle term on the
right side is the drag and is a function of the fluid velocity. The final term
is the gravitational force.
0
1 1 1
=
+
|
.
|
\
|
+ q
z A dt
dP
K dP
dA
A
+ +
= cos ) ( g q h
z
P
q
dt
d
A

Where:
Coupled Pipe Annulus Calculations
Four partial differential equations define this region. These balance
equations are similar to the equations for the Open Annulus. However,
there are two important differences.
z In the balance of mass equations, an extra term is added to account
for the pressures both inside and outside of the pipe. For example,
increased annulus pressure can decrease the cross-sectional area
inside the pipe and increased pipe pressure can increase the cross-
sectional area because of pipe elastic deformation.
z The second major difference is the effect of pipe speed on the
frictional pressure drop in the annulus as given by the frictional
pressure drop term.
Pipe Flow
Mass Balance
Momentum Balance
A = Cross-sectional area
P = Pressure
K = Fluid bulk modulus
q = Fluid volume flow rate
= Fluid density
h = Frictional pressure drop
= Angle of inclination of annulus from vertical
0
1 1 1 1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
=
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ q
z A dt
dP
dP
dA
A dt
dP
K dP
dA
A
+ +
= cos ) (
1 3 1 1
1
1
1
1
g v A q h
z
P
q
dt
d
A

Annulus Flow
Mass Balance
Momentum Balance
Pipe Motion
The following equation is the balance of momentum for the pipe. The
pipe inertia is represented by the left side of the equation. The first term
of the right side is the longitudinal elasticity of the pipe (using Youngs
modulus, E). The second and third items provide the hoop-stress effect
(increased inside pressure shortens the pipe and increased outside
pressure lengthens the pipe). The final three terms define the effect of
viscous drag on the pipe. Variations in fluid velocity, relative to the pipe
velocity, inside the pipe and in the annulus affect the shear stress at the
pipe.
Momentum Balance
0
1 1 1
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
=
+
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
q
z A dt
dP
K dP
dA
A dt
dP
dP
dA
A
+ +
= cos ) , (
2 3 2 2
2
2
2
2
g v q h
z
P
q
dt
d
A
3 5 2 4 1 3
2
2
1
1
2
3
2
3
2
2
3
v
dt
d
f q
dt
d
f q
dt
d
f
dt
dP
z
f
dt
dP
f
z
v
E v
dt
d
z
+ + +
=
Where:
Closed Tolerance
The dynamic surge fluid pressures and velocities are determined by
solving two coupled partial differential equations, the balance of mass
and the balance of momentum
Balance of Mass
The balance of mass consists of three effects: the expansion of the hole
due to internal fluid pressure, the compression of the fluid due to
changes in fluid pressure, and the influx or outflux of the fluid. The
1
A = Pipe flow area
1
K = Pipe fluid bulk modulus
1
P = Pipe fluid pressure
1
q = Pipe fluid volume flow rate
h = Pipe frictional pressure drop
1
= Pipe fluid density
2
A = Annulus flow area
2
K = Annulus fluid bulk modulus
2
P = Annulus fluid pressure
2
q = Annulus fluid volume flow rate
2
h = Annulus frictional pressure drop
2
= Annulus fluid density
E = Pipe elastic modulus
3
v = Pipe velocity
3
= Pipe density
1
f ,
2
f = Hoop strain coefficients
3
f ,
4
f ,
5
f = Fluid shear stress coefficients
= Angle of inclination from vertical
0
z
v
dt
dp
K
1
dp
dA
A
1
=
+
(
+
A-1
expansion of the hole is governed by the elastic response of the
formation and any casing cemented between the fluid and the formation.
The fluid volume change is given by the bulk modulus K. For drilling
muds, K varies as a function of composition, pressure, and temperature.
The reciprocal of the bulk modulus is called the compressibility.
Balance of Momentum
The balance of momentum equation consists of three terms. The first
term in equation (A-2) represents the inertia of the fluid, i.e. the
acceleration of the fluid (left side of equation A-2) equals the sum of the
forces on the fluid (right side of equation A-2). The last two terms are
the forces on the fluid. The first of these terms is the pressure gradient.
The second is the drag on the fluid due to frictional or viscous forces.
The drag is a function of the type of fluid and the velocity of the fluid
and is given by the function F. Gravity terms have been left out for
simplicity. The hydrostatic pressure due to gravity can be added directly
to the dynamic solution to get the total pressure.
For the open hole below the moving pipe, the fluid motion is governed
by:
where the first two equations are (A-1) and (A-2) from above with C
equal to the wellbore-fluid compressibility, and the last two equations
describe the variation of p and v along the characteristic curve = x at,
where a is the acoustic velocity. The capital D derivatives indicate
differentiation along the characteristic curve. Subscripts here denote
partial derivatives, e.g. v
z
= v/z. This system of equations is over
determined, which requires:
) v ( F
z
p
dt
dv
+
= A-2
Dt / Dp
Dt / Dv
F
0
p
p
v
v
1 a 0 0
0 0 1 a
0 1 0
C 0 0 1
t
z
t
z
=
A-3
Evaluating the determinant (A-4) defines the acoustic velocity:
The condition that (A-3) has a solution requires:
The resulting differential equations along the characteristic curve are:
Equation (A-7) can be solved by integrating along the characteristic:
The difficulty in evaluating equation (A-8) is that the integral is along
the characteristic and we do not know the values of the fluid velocity
along the characteristic. To better explain what this means, we will solve
equation (A-8) without the frictional pressure drop term F. There are a
series of grid points, x
k
, separated by distance at. We have a wave
0
1 a 0 0
0 0 1 a
0 1 0
C 0 0 1
det =
A-4
C
1
a
=
A-5
A-6
0
Dt / Dp a 0 0
Dt / Dv 0 1 a
F 1 0
0 0 0 1
det =
aF
Dt
Dv
a
Dt
Dp
=
A-7
A-8
dt F a v a p =
moving in the positive x direction form point x
k-1
and a wave moving in
the negative x direction from point x
k+1
.
On the positive characteristic:
while along the negative characteristic:
where the superscripts indicate the time of the pressures and velocities,
and the subscripts indicate the grid positions. If we solve equations A-9
and A-10 simultaneously:
While we have the value of the function pav along the characteristic
from t to t+t, we do not know the value of either p or v until we solve
at the intersection of two characteristic curves.
One solution has been to assume that the frictional pressure drop does
not vary much along the characteristic curve, so we can hold it constant.
Equation (A-8) takes this form, using this assumption:
This method works well as long as the frictional pressure drop term is
small relative to the dynamic force terms, in other words, if the system
is under-damped. This means that the right hand side of equation (A-12)
is small relative to the right hand side of equation (A-11). If the
frictional pressure drop term is large relative to the right hand side term
of equation (A-11), then we say that the system is over-damped. The
solution proposed in equation (A-12) is disastrous for an over-damped
0 ) v v ( a ) p p ( v a p
t
1 k
t t
k
t
1 k
t t
k
= + = +
+

A-9
0 ) v v ( a ) p p ( v a p
t
1 k
t t
k
t
1 k
t t
k
= =
+
+
+
+

A-10
] a / ) p p ( v v [ v
)] v v ( a p p [ p
t
1 k
t
1 k
t
1 k
t
1 k 2
1
t t
k
t
1 k
t
1 k
t
1 k
t
1 k 2
1
t t
k
+ + =
+ + =
+ +
+
+ +
+
A-11
t ) v ( aF v a p
t ) v ( aF v a p
t
1 k k k
t
1 k k k

+
=
= +
A-12
system. For instance, if the velocity changes direction along the
characteristic curve, then the friction term is both too large and of the
wrong sign in equation (A-12). This sort of error propagates throughout
the solution system, causing dramatic instabilities. The water hammer
literature recognizes this problem, called line-packing. Solution, is to
make the friction term depend on the velocity at the point of calculation:
Typically, they choose a friction factor form for F:
This results in a quadratic equation solution for equation (A-13),
assuming f stays relatively constant.
If we want to include both the initial and final values of the friction term,
we need to assume something about the variation of F along the
characteristic curve. If we assume that F varies roughly linearly along
the curve, then equation (A-8) takes the form:
If we assume that the velocity varies linearly along the curve, we need a
more complex formulation, since F is assumed to be non-linear in
velocity (e.g.: non-Newtonian fluid and turbulent flow). On possibility
is a three-point integration formula:
t ) v ( aF v a p
t ) v ( aF v a p
t t
k k k
t t
k k k

+
+
=
= +
A-13
v v
D
f
) v ( F
h
2
1
=
A-14
t )] v ( F ) v ( F [ a v a p
t )] v ( F ) v ( F [ a v a p
t
1 k
t t
k 2
1
k k
t
1 k
t t
k 2
1
k k

+
+
+
+ =
+ = +
A-15
) v v ( v
t )] v ( F ) v ( F 2 ) v ( F [ a v a p
) v v ( v
~
t )] v ( F ) v
~
( F 2 ) v ( F [ a v a p
t
1 k
t t
k 2
1
t
1 k
t t
k 4
1
k k
t
1 k
t t
k 2
1
t
1 k
t t
k 4
1
k k
+
+
+
+
+
+ =
+ + =
+ =
+ + = +

A-16
in practice, equation (A-15) works well enough, especially with some
attention paid to meshing the problem. Most errors in (A-15) can be
resolved by using a finer mesh. Notice, also, that equations (A-15) or
(A-16) all must be solved numerically for any realistic function F.
References
Transient Pressure Surge
Mitchell, R. F. Dynamic Surge/Swab Pressure Predictions., SPE
Drilling Engineering, September 1988, (pages 325-333).
Lal, Manohar. Surge and Swab Modeling for Dynamic Pressures and
Safe Trip Velocities. Proceedings, 1983 IADC/SPE Drilling
Conference, New Orleans (427-433).
Lubinski, A., Hsu, F. H., and Nolte, K. G. Transient Pressure Surges
Due to Pipe Movement in an Oil Well. Fevue de lInst. Franc. Du Pet.,
May June 1977 (307-347).
Wylie, E. Benjamin, and Streeter, Victor L. Fluid Transients, Corrected
Edition (1983). FEB Press, Ann Arbor, Mich., (1982).
Validation
Rudolf, R.L., Suryanarayana, P.V.R., Mobil E&P Technical Center,
Field Validation of Swab Effects While Tripping-In the Hole on Deep,
High Temperature Wells , SPE 39395.
Samuel, G.R., Sunthankar, A., McColpin, G., Landmark Graphics,
Bern, P., BPAmoco, Flynn,T., Sperry Sun, Field Validation of
Transient Swab/Surge Response with PWD Data, SPE 67717.
Pipe and Borehole Expansion
Timoshenko, S. P., and Goodier, J. N., Theory of Elasticity, McGraw-
Hill Book Company, New York, 1951.
Frictional Pressure Drop
Savins, F. J. Generalized Newton (Pseudo-plastic) Flow in Stationary
Pipes and Annuli. Pet. Trans. AIME (1958).
Dodge, D.W., and Metzner, A. B. Turbulent Flow of Non-Newtonian
Systems, AIChEJ (June 1959).
Fontenot, J. E., and Clark, R. E.: An Improved Method for Calculating
Swab and Surge Pressures and Calculating Pressures in a Drilling Well,
Society of Petroleum Engineering, October 1974 (451-462).
Schuh, F. J. Computer Makes Surge-Pressure Calculations Useful. Oil
and Gas Journal, August 1964 (96).
Pressure and Temperature Fluid Property Dependence
Annis, Max R. High Temperature Flow Properties of Water-Base
Drilling Fluids. J. Pet. Tech., August 1967.
Alderman, N. J., Gavignet, A., Guillot, D., and Maitland, G. C.: High
Temperature, High Pressure Rheology of Water-Based Muds, SPE
18035, 63rd Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition of the SPE.,
Houston, (1988 (187-196).
Combs, G. D., and Whitmire, L. D. Capillary Viscometer Simulates
Bottom Hole Conditions. Oil and Gas Journal, September 30, 1968
(108-113).
Houwen, O. H. and Geehan, T.:Rheology of Oil-Based Muds.
SPE15416, 61st Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition of the
SPE, New Orleans (1986).
Uner, D., Ozgen, C., and Tosun, I. Flow of a Power-Law Fluid in an
Eccentric Annulus SPEDE, September 1989 (269-272).
Johancsik, C. A., Friesen, D. B., and Dawson, R. Torque and Drag in
Directional Wells Prediction and Measurement. J. Pet. Tech., June
1984 (987-992).
Chapter
Cementing-OptiCem Analysis
Overview
Cementing can be used to optimize cementing operations and minimize
the possibility of costly cementing errors.
of using the Cementing-OptiCem module, including:
Defining cement fluids
Calculating centralizer placement
Defining the cement job
Defining analysis parameters
Analyzing results
10
Chapter 10: Cementing-OptiCem Analysis
Workflow
Activate Cementing by clicking the button.
Open the Case using the Well Explorer.
workstrings (drillstrings, casings, liners, etc.) (Case > String)
Enter wellpath data. (Case > Wellpath > Editor)
Define the fluids used. You can define as many fluids as you want.
(Case > Fluid Editor)
Define the pore pressure gradients. (Case > Pore Pressure)
Define the fracture gradients. (Case > Fracture Gradient)
Define the geothermal gradient. (Case > Geothermal Gradient)
Define the cement circulating system. (Case > Cement
Circulating System)
Specify centralizer information. (Parameter > Centralizer
Placement)
Specify cement job data including volumes, fluids used, back
pressure and whether or not this is a foam job. (Parameter > Job
Data)
If this is a foam job, specify the foam job data. (Parameter > Foam
Data)
Specify wellbore temperatures, depths of interest and whether or
not returns are taken at the sea floor. (Parameter > Additional
Data)
Specify additional pressure that may be required to seat the plug
and the eccentricity (standoff) to be used in the calculations.
(Parameter > Analysis Data)
Analyze the results.
Introducing Cementing Analysis
What is Cementing?
The Cementing module can be used to predict what occurs in the well
during cementing operations. Cementing can be used to evaluate the
effects of various conditions on the simulated cementing operation. You
can use Cementing to calculate:
Safe pump rates
Surface pressure
Downhole pressures
Nitrogen concentration
Foam volume
Downhole rheology
Temperature thinning of fluids
Starting Cementing Analysis
There are two ways to start the Cementing Module.
z Select Cementing from the Modules menu.
z Click the Cementing button.
Select desired Cementing-OptiCem Analysis mode
from submenu, or from Mode drop-down list.
Choose Cementing-OptiCem Analysis from Modules menu, or by
clicking the Cementing-OptiCem Module button.
data into the Case menu options. Case data specific to cementing will be
covered in this chapter.
Specify the Volume Excess %
The Case > Hole Section Editor is used to define the wellbore as the
current workstring sees it. You can also use the Case > Hole Section
Editor dialog to specify the extra percentage of annular cement volume
required for an enlarged wellbore. This volume will be based on the
Effective Hole Diameter field. For open hole sections, the Effective
Hole Diameter is used to represent the actual size of the hole. If you
specify the Effective Hole Diameter, the Volume Excess % is calculated
based on Effective Hole Diameter. Similarly, if you specify the Volume
Excess %, the Effective Hole Diameter will be calculated.
For example, if you are drilling an 8.5 inch hole that is 10% overgauge,
enter 8.5 for Hole Diameter and 10 for Volume Excess %. The extra
volume will be calculated. Do not use the Volume Excess % field to
raise the cement top. Use Parameter > Job Data to raise the cement
top.
Note: Specifying Volume Excess...
Be careful that you dont enlarge the wellbore in the Hole Diameter field and then
again using the Volume Excess % field.
Enter the Volume Excess % and the Effective Hole
Diameter is calculated.
Defining the Cement Job
Defining the Cement Job Fluids
Defining Spacers
Use Case > Fluid Editor to define cement spacers by specifying the
basic characteristics of the fluid.
You dont need to activate the
spacer. Spacer use is specified
using Parameter > Job Data.
To define a spacer, select Spacer
from the Type drop-down list.
Defining Cement Slurries
Use Case > Fluid Editor to define cement slurries by specifying the
basic characteristics of the fluid.
Specify the Standoff or Calculate the Centralizer Placement
Use the Parameter > Centralizer Placement dialog to calculate the
spacing between multiple centralizers and/or the variable standoff
between the casing and wellbore. Alternately, you can enter a manual
standoff value that applies to the entire well. Before using this dialog,
you should use the Centralizer catalog to specify all centralizers if you
plan on using centralizers not already in the catalog. Access the
Centralizer catalog using the Well Explorer. Refer to Working With
Catalogs on page 110 for more information.
Centralizer placement calculations are typically performed before
wellbore simulation. These calculations can also be performed
You dont need to activate the
cement. Cement use is specified
using Parameter > Job Data.
To define a cement, check the
Cement box.
independently using the Centralizer Placement mode. Refer to the
online help for more details concerning this dialog.
Defining the Cement Job
Use the Parameter > Job Data dialog to define crucial job information
such as tracer fluid types, rate, volume, and placement for each fluid in
the cementing job. Refer to the online help for more information about
this dialog.
Enter the maximum and
minimum distance that can be
used when calculating centralizer
spacing.
You can specify a
measured depth and
standoff above the top of
the centralized interval.
The Wellbore Fluid defaults from
the active fluid indicated on the
Case > Fluid Editor.
Defining Temperatures, Depths of Interest and Offshore Returns
Information
The Parameter > Additional Data dialog is used to enter data for the
Wellbore Simulator mode in the Cementing module (OptiCem). This
dialog allows you to enter and manage offshore, zone depth, and
temperature information.
Note: Mud Erodibility
Mud Erodibility as used in cementing and WELLPLANs Cementing-OptiCem
refers to the ability of the wellbore fluid to be eroded away by a different fluid
passing by it in the annulus of the well. The Mud Erodibility option is available
only to Halliburton users. If you need this calculation performed, please contact
your local Halliburton Zonal Isolation Group.
Specifying Additional Analysis Parameters
The Parameter > Analysis Data dialog provides supplemental control
of several values before performing the Wellbore Simulator
calculations.
Do not check this box because
we are not taking returns at
the sea floor.
Reservoir Zone and Fracture
Zone are the same in this
case.
Define the temperature
profile to be used or import
a temperature profile.
Temperature can be defined in several ways.
If the Bottom Hole Circulating Temperature is
known, you can specify it.
You can calculate the API BHCT based on mud
outlet temperature and BHST.
You can specify a profile based on depth.
You can import a temperature profile from
WellCat.
To ensure proper plug
seating, additional pressure
may be applied to the
casing immediately after
the plug is landed.
If Eccentricity is turned off, then the wellbore simulator
performs its calculations assuming 100% standoff. If you want
the eccentricity calculations at a particular standoff, select the
Entered Standoff option on the Centralizer Placement Dialog.
Otherwise, it will run with an actual standoff profile.
Check Calculate Automatically for automatic
calculation of step size. Usually you will want to check
this box.
Erodibility is only available to Halliburton personnel. If
you need this option, contact your local Zonal Isolation
Group.
Analyzing Results
Results for the Cementing analysis are presented in plots, tables and a
report. All results are available using the View menu.
What is the Circulating Pressure Throughout the Cement Job?
Use the View > Plot > Circ Pres and Den - Frac Zone plot to
determine the circulating pressure fluid volume pumped at the fracture
zone specified on Parameter > Additional Data.
The formation breakdown pressure at this depth is indicated by one of
the curves on this plot. If the Automatic Rate Adjustment option was
selected (on Parameter > Job Data), then a second curve indicates the
safety factor. If the circulating pressure exceeds the fracture zone
pressure, the fluid can fracture the formation and result in lost
circulation from the wellbore.
If the circulating pressure exceeds the fracture zone pressure, reduce the
pump rates or turn on the Automatic Rate Adjustment option. If
reducing the pump rates does not completely solve the problem,
decrease the density of one or more fluids (with foamed fluids, or by
These lines indicate when the
various stages occur.
The circulating pressure during the displacement
stage exceeds the fracture pressure.
Fracture
pressure
increasing the nitrogen concentration), or decrease the volume of the
heaviest stages.
If you prefer, you can view this information as ECD versus volume
pumped.
Click the right mouse button anywhere on the plot to
open the plot selection box. Highlight the plot you
want displayed and click the left mouse button.
Observe the circulating
density as a function of
volume pumped.
Is There Free Fall?
The View > Plot > Comparison of Rates In and Out plot displays the
total annular return rate and corresponding pump rate versus the fluid
pumped into the well. This data may be correlated with information in
the Volume and Rates Calculations table in the Cementing Report.
(View > Report)
Differences between the two rate curves indicates free fall without
nitrogen injection. If free fall occurs and the well goes on vacuum, the
rate out will initially exceed, and then fall below, the planned pumped
rate.
What is the Surface Pressure?
Use the View > Plot > Calculated Wellhead/Surface Pressure plot to
view the pressure changes as varying density fluids are pumped at
varying rates through the well. If the Surface Iron option was selected
(on the Case > Cement Circulating System dialog) this graph is titled
Calculated Surface Pressure. This data may be correlated with
information in the Volume and Rates Calculations table on the
cementing report.
The calculated wellhead pressure is lower than pump pressure because
of the hydrostatic head and friction in the lines between the pump and
cementing head.
Notice the rate out initially
exceeds the rate in.
After initial high, rate out then
falls below rate in.
Notice that cement
free fall does occur
because rate out
initially exceeds the
rate in, but then
falls below the
pump rate in.
A horizontal graph line along the x-axis indicates free fall. Often, as the
majority of the cement moves from the casing to the annulus, the slope
of this curve beings to increase. Usually, it continues to increase as the
heavier cementing fluids are forced up the annular gap.
Automatically Adjusting the Flowrate
Because the circulating pressure exceeds the fracture pressure using the
rates specified on the Parameter > Job Data dialog, you can allow the
Free Fall indicated when pressure is constant.
software to automatically adjust the pump rates. Click the Automatic
Rate Adjustment box on the Parameter > Job Data dialog.
Click Automatic Rate Adjustment to have the rate
adjusted to avoid exceeding the fracture pressure.
These rates will be adjusted.
If you allow automatic rate adjustment, you must specify a
Safety Factor.
What Are the Adjusted Rates?
The View > Plot > Comparison of Rates In and Out plot displays the
total annular return rate and corresponding pump rate versus the fluid
pumped into the well. This data may be correlated with information in
Using automatic rate
adjustment, the
maximum circulating
pressure is less than
the fracture pressure.
Notice the safe
pressure (based on
safety factor) is
indicated on the plot.
the Volume and Rates Calculations table in the Cementing Report.
(View > Report)
Using Foamed Cement
Using foamed cement is another means to reduce the circulating
pressures.
The Parameter > Foam Data dialog is available only if you check the
Use Foam Schedule box on the Parameter > Job Data dialog while
using the Wellbore Simulator analysis mode. This dialog lets you
You can view the adjusted rates
using this plot. Rates have been
decreased to reduce the circulating
pressure as a result of checking the
Automatic Rate Adjustment box on
the Parameter > Job Data dialog.
Refer to the Job Data dialog to view
the rates specified prior to the rate
adjustment.
describe calculation methods and stages when simulating foam in a
cement job.
Using the Foam Schedule
Use View > Foam Schedule dialog to calculate and view the Foam
Pumping Schedule. This dialog lists liquid volume and gas rates of the
fluids left in the annulus at the end of the simulation. The calculated
hydrostatic pressure for the frac zone and reservoir zones are displayed
at the bottom of the table. The frac zone and reservoir zones are
specified using the Parameter > Additional Data dialog.
Select Constant or Staged Gas Flow to keep the
nitrogen constant for a segment.The foam
density will follow the pressure gradient, and
thus decreases from the bottom to the top of the
segment. The longer the segment, the greater
the density variance.
Select this option if the
nitrogen ratio will be adjusted
to offset pressure changes
and thus hold density more
constant. Use this option
only with automated nitrogen
pumping equipment.
Type concentrations for
Surfactant, Stabilizer.
Click the stage you
want to define using
the bottom portion of
this dialog.
This information is read-only.
It is defaulted from the Job
Data dialog.
In order to foam a segment,
you must check the Foam
box.
The Gas Rate Stage
Number is used to tell
how many different gas
rates are to be used
under the Stage Gas
option and where each
of the rates are used.
Enter Quality (the volume percentage of gas
in the foam) and Foam Density is calculated.
Enter Foam Density and Quality (the volume
percentage of gas in the foam) is calculated.
or
Notice that some of these fluids may not be foamed. Some fluids may
not appear in this report if they were pumped completely out of the
annulus.
If an error occurs during the calculation process, an error dialog appears
displaying a description of the error. When you finish reading it, click
OK. The Error dialog and the Calculate dialog close so you can begin
working on solving the source of the error.
To check results of the foam schedule calculation:
1) Check the Fluid Animations Schematic to see whether the
desired top of cement was achieved, check the Final Positions of
Stages table in the reports, or downhole density plot.
2) Check the circulation Pressure and Density-Fracture Zone graph
and the Circulation Pressure and Density-Reservoir Zone graphs
to see if the density is acceptable.
3) Adjust, rerun, and recheck the job as follows:
Click Calculate to ensure
you are looking at accurate
results.
Adjusted Liquid Volume and Adjusted Gas Rate
sliders adjust the cement tops or placement.
These are design depths (as specified on the Job Data dialog) and may not be the actual
depths. Review the View > Final Density and Hydrostatic plot for accurate cement
locations.
These are the calculated hydrostatic pressure
gradients for the depths of interest specified on
the Additional Data dialog.
Final Gas Rate and Adjusted
Final Gas Rate do not apply
when you are using constant or
stage gas flow.
Checking Results
If TOC is.... and ECD is.... then do this:
Low Light
1. Increase density or decrease
quality.
2. Rerun the Foam Schedule.
3. Use the slider bar (top of
Foam Data dialog) to increase
the Adjusted Liquid Volume.
4. Click the Calculate button.
5. Check the Fluid Animation
Schematic and the Circ Pres
and Den plots.
Low Acceptable
the Adjusted Liquid Volume.
2. Repeat steps 4 and 5 above.
Low Heavy
the Adjusted Gas Rate.
Low Light
1. Increase the density or
decrease quality.
Acceptable Acceptable Do nothing.
Acceptable Heavy
1. Decrease density or increase
quality.
Acceptable Heavy
quality.
2. Rerun the Foam Simulator.
* To estimate the percentage by which to change the volume, use the
percentage by which the simulated foamed length differs from the
desired length. (If the foamed length 1,500 feet and the desired length is
2,000 feet, increase by 33%.)
** This scenario is unlikely because the Fluid Placement calculations
should prevent excessive top of cement.
Repeat these steps until you are satisfied with the results. Round the
slurry and gas rate quantities before running the Wellbore Simulator.
High** Light
1. Manually decrease N2 in the
Adjusted Start Gas Rate
column.
2. If calculation method is
constant density, also
manually decrease N2 in the
Adj. Final Gas Rate column.
High** Acceptable
1. Manually decrease liquid
volume in the Adj. Liq. Vol.
column.*
High** Heavy
quality.
2. Rerun the Foam Simulator.
Checking Results (Continued)
References
Ravi, K.M., and Sutton, D.L., New Rheological Correlation for
Cement Slurries as a Function of Temperature, SPE 20449.
Shah, Subhash, N., and Sutton, David, L., New Friction Correlation for
Cements from Pipe And Rotational-Viscometer Data, SPE 19539.
Chapter
Critical Speed
Critical Speed Course Overview
The Critical Speed Analysis module assists with the determination and
prediction of critical rotation speeds that may results in damaging
downhole vibrations. The analysis begins with a static structural
analysis to determine where the drillstring is in contact with the wellbore
and to determine what forces are acting on the drillstring. The next step
is the vibrational analysis. The program predicts the relative stresses the
drillstring will be subjected to based upon a range of rotational speeds
(RPMs) input by the user.
During the Critical Speed segment of your WELLPLAN training you
will learn the basic functionality of the Critical Speed Analysis module.
The class exercises are designed to mimic a typical Critical Speed
Analysis workflow. In the future, you can refer to these workflows to
assist you with using WELLPLAN.
By the end of the Critical Speed course you will know how to complete
the following tasks:
Input required data for the analysis.
Create analysis plots.
Predict critical rotational speeds that may cause damaging
vibrations.
Investigate the effect of changing input parameters on the
vibrational response of the string.
Recognize drilling parameters that are likely to cause vibration.
11
Chapter 11: Critical Speed
Workflow
The following steps are designed to be a general guide to the steps
involved in using the Critical Speed Analysis module. This workflow is
not intended to suggest that you must follow these steps when using the
module. There are certainly other workflows that may meet your
analysis requirements.
Select the Critical Speed Analysis module by clicking .
Define the wellbore. (Case > Hole Section)
workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth) (Case >
String Editor)
Define the fluids used. You can define as many fluids as you want.
Only one fluid can be used at a time. (Case > Fluid Editor)
Define the analysis parameters. (Parameter > Analysis
Parameters)
Optional: You may want to change the boundary conditions. This is
not normally recommended. (Parameter > Boundary Conditions)
Optional: You may want to change the mesh zone. This is not
normally recommended. (Parameter > Mesh Zone)
Analyze the results. First, determine the critical rotational speeds.
(View > Rotational Speed Plots > Resultant Stresses) Next,
determine where in the string the greatest relative stress is
occurring at the critical rotational speeds. (View > Position Plots >
Resultant Stresses) You may also want to determine what type of
stress is causing the large relative stresses. (View > Position Plots
> Stress Components)
Introducing Critical Speed Analysis
What is the Critical Speed Module?
The Critical Speed Analysis module is used to identify critical rotary
speeds and areas of high stress concentration in the drillstring. The
analysis uses an engineering analysis technique called Forced
Frequency Response (FFR) to solve for resonant rotational speeds
(RPMs). The Critical Speed Analysis module is based on a nonlinear
finite element solution written to include intermittent contact/friction,
finite displacement, buoyancy and other effects that occur while drilling.
Refer to Vibrational Analysis on page 491 for more information.
The Critical Speed Analysis module is designed to analyze the 3D
lateral bending vibrational responses of a bottom hole assembly. The
analysis can model axial vibrations (vibrations parallel to the drillstring
axis), lateral vibrations (perpendicular to the drillstring axis) and
torsional (twist) vibrations. The Critical Speed Analysis module
includes damping and mass effects in order to more accurately represent
the downhole environment. Refer to Mass Matrix on page 494 and
Damping Matrix on page 494 for more information.
Why Use the Critical Speed Module?
All drillstrings have natural axial, lateral, and torsional modes of
vibration. This vibration is at a natural frequency that depends on many
drillstring parameters, including geometry, material properties, weight,
and length. In the downhole environment, a drillstring is subjected to
forced vibrations or excitations.
Excitations can be in the form of displacements or contact forces at the
bit, stabilizers, or along the string. The Critical Speed Analysis module
models excitations using displacements instead of contact forces. A well
known and documented excitation is due to the tricone drill bit rolling
over high and low spots in the formation. This type of excitation
produces primarily axial bit displacements having frequencies of three
cycles per revolution.
Another source of excitation can result from stabilizers rubbing against
the wellbore. When stabilizers contact the wellbore, frictional forces
develop as a result of the contact and rotation and can produce
vibrations. Refer to Excitation Factors on page 495 for more
information.
Resonance can occur when a drillstrings natural vibration is subjected
to a forced vibration. Resonance is an increase in amplitude that results
when a drillstring is exposed to a periodic force or displacement
(excitation) whose frequency is equal to, or very close to the natural
frequency of the system. Resonance is nearly always accompanied with
severe high dynamic stresses that can cause drillstring damage or
failure. The Critical Speed Analysis module indicates resonant
frequencies for a drillstring rotating in a wellbore, as well as non-
rotating steerable assemblies. The effects of hole angle, curvature, collar
size, contact locations, and BHA displacement due to rotational friction
effects can be modeled. Drill string rotation will affect the results of this
analysis, to some degree, due to additional torque at the contact points
that are generated due to friction forces.
Critical Speed Limitations
A rotating drillstring is subject to intermittent contact, impact, and
friction effects as well as many other highly nonlinear and transient
phenomena. Since the Critical Speed Analysis module assumes cyclic
behavior, transient effects typical for drillstring dynamics cannot be
modeled. The analysis assumes all drillstring components are free of
stress fractures. Ideally, this type of analysis is run along with downhole
sensors, or at the least with careful surface observations.
Isolating and identifying the principal excitation mechanism responsible
for drillstring vibrations has proven to be challenging. The literature
contains many studies undertaken to acquire and analyze experimental
and field-derived data to determine the dynamic characteristics of
drillstring systems. Many excitation mechanisms have been identified,
including bit forces, stabilizer forces, mass imbalances, and walk and
whirl mechanisms.
It is important to realize that the Critical Speed Analysis module does
not provide an exact solution for critical frequencies. The results from
the Critical Speed Analysis are relative stresses, indicating those
frequencies that are likely to cause damaging vibrations. The Critical
Speed Analysis module can be used prior to drilling, or can be use in
conjunction with downhole sensors. Vibration control is a multi-step
process. It involves planning and analysis, monitoring during drilling,
and interpreting control through observations.
Using Critical Speed
A typical critical speed analysis consists of an initial frequency sweep,
in which the drillstring is analyzed over a user-specified range of
operating speeds. The program repeatedly analyzes the drillstring by
incrementally stepping though the given range. At each step the program
computes the excitation frequency for that step from the current
rotational speed (RPM) and the excitation factor. It then applies the
excitation to the drillstring at the computed frequency and solves for the
response in the entire model. For this analysis, response means any
component of displacement, force, or stress. The maximum response at
each step is saved. After the entire range has been analyzed, the
maximums can be plotted against the operating speed range. These plots
are then used to determine the critical operating speeds for the drillstring
or assembly.
Once the critical speeds are determined, the analysis can be repeated at
each critical speed and the response of the total drillstring model can be
examined. This type of analysis is used to determine the exact nature of
the resonant behavior at a particular critical speed.
Starting the Critical Speed Module
There are two ways to begin the Critical Speed Analysis module:
z Select Critical Speed from the Modules menu.
z Click the button.
Choose Critical Speed Analysis from Module menu, or by clicking the
Critical Speed Module button.
Determining Critical Rotational Speeds
Use the Parameter > Analysis Parameters dialog to input parameters
needed to perform the critical speed calculations.
Normally, you will type values of 0.0 (zero) and
99999.9 for the Mesh Begins At Depth From Bit
and Max Total Length of Mesh, respectively, in
order to analyze the entire string starting at the
bit (or as much as can be meshed by the
number of nodes available). If you want to
study an limited portion of the string, type a
smaller range. Use measured depth to
estimate the distance in feet.If you get an error
message indicating an Non Converged
Solution, this means the critical speed analysis
was unable to solve the structural solution,
usually because the of a complex drillstring
(many small components) and hole geometry.
If this happens, shorten the mesh length, and
run the analysis again.
Type the rate you want the forcing function to be
applied (number of excitation per revolution). A
general rule of thumb is to use 3.0 for tricone bits
and 6.0 to 9.0 for PDC bits. The nature of forcing
functions is still an area of study in the industry.
Refer to Excitation Factors on page 495 for more
information.
Type the actual torque at the
bit. Obtain typical bit torque
values from the bit
manufacturer, or provide an
estimate based on your own
experience.
Check this box to turn on the
calculation of the nodal torque due to
friction. The nodal torque affects the
initial static solution of the displaced
shape of the BHA. If you dont check
this box, the only torque that will be
used is the torque you entered for
Torque at Bit.
Specifying the Boundary Conditions
Use the Parameter > Boundary Condition dialog to determine the
physical constraints on the top and bottom nodes of the mesh.
Specifying the Mesh Zone
Use the Parameter > Mesh Zone dialog to alter the default values for
the mesh zones in special situations. You may consider changing the
mesh if you are particularly interested in what is happening at a
particular section of the workstring. Otherwise, the defaults provide
adequate analysis of most situations. Refer to Defining the Finite
Element Mesh on page 525 for more information.
Note: Using Default Boundary Conditions is Advised...
Use the default values as presented here, unless you are familiar with Finite
Element Analysis methods.
Fix Axial prevents sliding movement along the longitudinal
axis of the string, but allows all other types of movement.
Fix w/Axial Slider prevents all movement except for sliding
movement along the longitudinal axis of the string.
Analyzing the Results
All critical speed analysis results are presented as graphs, and can be
selected from the View menu.
Calculations will be performed automatically when you select a plot
from the View menu.
What are the Critical Rotational Speeds?
You can determine the critical rotational speeds by reviewing the
Equivalent Resultant Stress curve on the View > Rotational Speed
Plots > Resultant Stresses plot.
What are Relative Stresses....
It is important to remember that the stress values are relative stresses and not
actual stresses. The stresses are relative in magnitude to each other also. You
cannot determine from the plot what the actual stress is. You can only compare
relative magnitudes.
The peaks indicate a critical rotational frequency at certain rotational speeds.
You should avoid the rotational speeds associated with a large relative stress.
This frequency should be analyzed further. Note that you cannot determine the
actual resultant stress by reviewing this plot. You can only determine that the
stresses at the peaks are greater than the stresses at other rpms.
For example:
If two stresses are calculated to be 5,000 and 10,000 psi, the stresses may
not be exactly equal to the calculated value. Because the stresses are
relative in magnitude, the stresses may really be 4,000 and 8,000 psi.
All peaks represent stresses above and beyond steady state stresses
caused by vibrations. They are relative to the magnitude of the forcing
function used and should be used only to assist with the location of
critical rotating speeds. The forcing function is a periodic displacement
or force (the Critical Speed Analysis module uses displacement) at a
point on the drillstring that is assumed to occur a regular number of
times per revolution. The forcing function (displacement) can be lateral,
axial, or torsional.
Non-Converged Solutions
Notice there is not data to display in the following plot. The Status
Message indicates there is a Non-Converged Solution. A non-
converged solution sometimes occurs when the length of the mesh is
too long and a solution cant be calculated.
What To Do When The Solution Doesnt Converge
z Change the length of the mesh: Refer to Defining Analysis
Parameters on page 483 for more information on using this dialog.
Refer to Supporting Information and Calculations on page 491 in
this chapter, and Supporting Information and Calculations on
Status Message indicates a problem calculating the solution.
page 525 in the Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis chapter in this
manual for more information on finite element analysis and the
implementation in WELLPLAN.
z Simplify the string: Because the finite element analysis places
nodes at the points in the string where the components change, you
may consider simplifying the string by removing smaller
components or by combining components in order to reduce the
number of nodes. Exercise caution when simplifying the string in
this manner to ensure you do not change the string design
significantly or the analysis may not reflect a true analysis of your
string.
z Change the mesh zone: If you are knowledgeable about finite
element analysis, you may consider changing the mesh zone as
described on page 484.
Where in the BHA are the Large Relative Stresses Occurring?
Now that you know what rotational speeds are causing large relative
stresses, you may want to know where in the bottom hole assembly
(BHA) these stresses are occurring. Use the View > Position Plots >
The defaults values of 0 for Mesh Begins at
Dist From Bit and 99999 for Max Total
Length of Mesh will mesh the entire length of
the drillstring from the bit because the 0 entered
for Mesh Begins at Dist From Bit indicates
the mesh begins at the bit and the 99999
entered for Max total Length of Mesh.
Because no drillstring is longer than 99999, the
interval beginning at 0 and ending at 99999
includes the entire string.
Assume your string is 15,000ft long. To mesh
(analyze) the entire length of the drillstring, you
could specify that the Max total Length of
Mesh is 15,000 (rather than the default 99999)
because 15,000 is the length of the string. If the
solution does not converge, you must shorten
the length of the mesh by typing a smaller value
into the Max total Length of Mesh field. You
may consider reducing the value in this field in
1,000 ft intervals until the results converge. i.e.
specify 14,000ft for Max total Length of Mesh.
If the solution doesn't converge, try 13,000ft
and so on.
Resultant Stresses plot to determine where in the BHA the large
stresses are occurring.
What Kind of Stress is Causing the Large Relative Stress?
You may want to know what type of stress (axial, bending, torsional,
shear) is causing the large relative resultant stresses to occur in a certain
At 110 rpm, the maximum equivalent stress is acting on the bottom hole assembly 31 feet from the
bit. Refer to Case > String Editor to determine what component is at the specified distance from the bit.
Use the slider bar to change the rotational speed
you want to analyze.
part of the BHA. Use the View > Position Plots > Stress Components
plot.
How Do I View the Large Relative Stress at Any Position on One Plot?
We used one plot to tell us what rotational speeds have a large relative
stress and then referred to a position plot to tell us where in the bottom
hole assembly these stresses were occurring. You can use the View > 3D
Bending stress is the most
significant stress acting on the
bottom hole assembly 31 feet from
the bit while rotating at 110 rpm.
Plots > Resultant Stresses > Equivalent plot to view this information
on one plot if you prefer.
Read the Equivalent
Stress on this axis.
Read Distance from
Bit on this axis.
Read Rotational
Speed on this axis.
Click and hold down
the left mouse
button anywhere on
the plot and then
move the mouse to
rotate the plot.
The peaks correspond to the
critical rotational speeds.
Structural Solution
The Critical Speed Analysis module begins by performing a structural
solution to determine the displaced shape of the drillstring and the forces
acting on it. The structural solution is accomplished through the use of
the mathematical Finite Element Analysis method.
The static structural solution is completed to determine where the
drillstring is in contact with the wellbore. This information is passed on
to the vibrational analysis segment of the analysis. Any contact points
found during the structural solution are assumed to remain in contact
during the vibrational analysis.
Other points of contact between the string and the wellbore may occur
due to vibration. These contact points may lead to displacements outside
of the wellbore. In reality, displacements outside of the wellbore do not
occur. This is a limitation in the analysis. As a result of this limitation,
the analysis predicts a relative critical frequency (RPM), and does not
model or predict the actual magnitude of a critical frequency.
The steps performed in the structural solution analysis step are the same
as those performed in the WELLPLAN Bottom Hole Assembly analysis
module. The only exception is that the Critical Speed Analysis module
meshes the drillstring into 150 nodes. (The Bottom Hole Assembly
Analysis module will mesh the BHA into 40 nodes.) Refer to the Bottom
Hole Assembly module chapter in this manual for more details
concerning the structural solution.
Vibrational Analysis
Following the completion of the structural solution, the vibrational
portion of the analysis is begun. After the shape of the drillstring is
determined and the structural solution has been performed, the Critical
Speed Analysis module calculates the critical frequencies, or RPMs.
The critical frequencies are determined from the response of the BHA to
some user specified harmonic excitation usually, but not limited, to the
bit. The Critical Speed Analysis module assumes that at a critical
rotational speed, or RPM, excitations at the bit, stabilizer, or other
contact points cause large displacements and stresses elsewhere in the
drillstring. Because the Critical Speed Analysis module is a harmonic
vibration analysis, it does not model the reaction of the drillstring if it is
rotating about an axis that is not centered on the drillstring axis (bit
whirl).
The Critical Speed Analysis module solves for a range of frequencies to
determine the sensitivity of the BHA to the excitation frequency.
Because the analysis applies the boundary conditions only during the
static structural solution, it may yield displacements outside of the
wellbore during the vibrational analysis. The Critical Speed Analysis
module is not a transient analysis, and does not solve the analysis related
to time. As a result, any contact points occurring as a result of the
vibrational analysis are allowed to penetrate the wellbore.
The full transient dynamic response analysis of any non-linear finite
element model involves the finite integration of the equations of motion
found in Equation 1.
In Equation 1, P(t) is a vector quantity indicating the periodic
displacement at a point on the drillstring that occurs at a regular number
of times per revolution. This displacement (or force) can be lateral,
axial, or torsional.
{P(t)} = {I(u,t)} + [C]{(t)} + [M]{(t)} (equation 1)
where:
{P(t)} = Applied Load Vector (or forcing function) at time t
{u(t)} = Displacement Vector at time t
{I(u,t)}= Internal Force Vector at time t and Displacement State {u}
[C] = Damping Matrix
[M] = Mass Matrix
{} indicates a vector quantity
[] indicates a matrix quantity
() indicates differentiation with respect to time t
To utilize this equation for solving drilling mechanics problems, it must
be formulated to include the following factors common to drilling.
The need for large displacement and finite rotation beam theories in
modeling drillstring and BHA components
Dealing with intermittent contact and the friction effects involved
The need to model a tortuous 3D curved wellbore surface
Representing the structural behavior of certain drillstring
components (motors and so forth)
The approach utilized in the analysis solves a linearized form of the
above equation for the case of vibration in which all displacements and
forces are varying harmonically in time at the same frequency. In order
to develop the harmonic formula, two assumptions are made:
First, it is assumed that the response is at the same frequency as the
excitation, but not necessarily the same phase.
Second, it is assumed that the excitation is a function and response
of the sin and cosine terms at the same phase. Since the analysis
assumes cyclic behavior, transient effects, such as impact forces
that may have a significant impact on the service life of a
component, can not be modeled with the Critical Speed module.
The solution is based upon an imposed load or force vector excitation
{P}, and it is assumed the BHA is subjected to a harmonically varying
form of the excitation {P} given by:
{P(t)} = {P
s
}sin t + {P
c
}cos t (equation 2)
which yields a resulting steady state displacement response of:
{u(t)} = {u
s
} sin t + {u
c
} cos t (equation 3)
The angular frequency () of the excitation is directly related to the
rotary speed through the use of an excitation factor. The excitation
factor designates how many times per revolution a given excitation
occurs.
Combining the three previous equations and implementing concepts
from complex vector algebra, it is apparent that the steady state
displacement field arising from the applied harmonic loading can be
determined by solving for the solution of the linearized system of
complex force-displacement relation given by:
{P
c
} + i{P
s
} = ([J] -
2
[M] + i[C])({u
c
} + i{u
s
}) (equation 4)
where:
i =
[J] = Jacobian matrix (contains the effects of contact, stress
stiffening and friction)
[M] = Mass matrix
[C] = Damping matrix
1
During the vibration portion of the analysis, the previous equation is
solved for a range of operating (RPM) speeds. At a critical rotary speed,
small forced excitations at the point of application will cause large
displacements and stresses elsewhere in the drillstring. Therefore,
cr
is
said to locate a point of structural instability of the BHA. The Critical
Speed Analysis module generates many graphics to illustrate this
phenomena.
Mass Matrix
The mass matrix implemented in the Critical Speed Analysis module is
a lumped mass matrix. From the composition of the matrices, it is
evident that the material component descriptions (ID, OD, weight,
material), and fluid descriptions are important data for correctly
determining vibrational response.
In the previous equation, the mass matrix is denoted by [M], and
contains terms based on the following four classes of effects:
z Structural - This is the primary mass matrix, and is based on the
dimensions and material of the drillstring.
z Fluid - Additional term included to account for the weight of the
fluid inside the drillstring.
z Inertial - Includes the effects of acceleration of mud outside the
drillstring.
z Nonstructural mass - Includes miscellaneous masses that may be
attached to the drillstring and are not accounted for in any other
way.
Damping Matrix
The Critical Speed Analysis module includes damping in predicting the
response of the drillstring to the specified excitations. Damping
primarily limits the magnitude of the response to the excitation. An
important implication of including damping in the model is that while
the response of the BHA will be at the same frequency as the excitation,
it may not be in phase with it. Damping includes the effects of
interaction with the formation, drilling fluid effects, inertial effects of
acceleration of mud outside the drillstring and mass damping produced
by the BHA structure.
To account for the damping, or energy losses that drillstring vibration is
subjected to, the Critical Speed includes the following three damping
mechanisms.
z Structural Damping - Accounts for energy losses due to
mechanical means.
z Fluid Damping - Accounts for energy losses due to fluid
movement on the drillstring. This damping does not use fluid
viscosity, and applies to the axial and torsional directions only.
z Lateral Fluid Damping - Accounts for energy losses due to
viscous fluid damping, and is applied to lateral direction only. This
type of damping is based on the work done by Chen (refer to the
Reference section) and uses flow equations for fluid moving around
a cylinder in a confined space.
The damping matrix terms are a function of beam element length, outer
diameter, and constant fluid damping coefficients. Discrete fluid
damping coefficients are also assigned for lateral, axial, and torsional
DOF. All damping coefficients are defaulted and are not user input
items.
Including damping is an important part of the vibrational analysis.
Referring to Equation 4, if the damping matrix is removed, the equation
is simplified. However, if damping is not included, the plots of
amplitude vs. frequency cause the critical states to appear as extremely
steep and relatively narrow spikes of infinite amplitude. A steep, narrow
spike could mislead a user into concluding that the analysis calculates
an exact value for the critical frequency (RPM). In reality, the analysis
can only predict a range of critical frequencies, but can not provide an
exact critical frequency.
Excitation Factors
The frequency of the excitation mechanism is designated by the use of
the excitation factor. This factor is simply the number of times the
excitation is applied for each revolution of the drillstring.
Although excitations are usually at the bit, this analysis can model
excitations at other locations. The Critical Speed Analysis module can
also model multiple excitations at multiple locations. These excitations
can be out of phase with one another, but they will all be assumed to be
excited at the same number of excitations per revolution. This can be a
problem if a tricone bit (normally 3 excitations/revolution) is combined
with a four blade stabilizer (perhaps 4 excitations/revolution).
Experience has shown the following excitation factors:
z Tricone Bits: EF = 3, as expected from the three lobed geometry
z PDC Bits: EF for PDC Bits vary depending on the bit design.
There is no specific rule for selecting the EF for PDC bits.
However a general rule obtained from laboratory experience is:
EF= (n)(#Blades) + 1; where n = 1 or 2
The following table presents several primary and secondary excitation
factors that may occur during drilling. For more information concerning
this information, refer to the references presented at the end of this
chapter.
Physical
Mechanism
Primary
Excitation(s)
Secondary
Excitation(s)
Mass Imbalance
or Bent Pipe
1 X RPM Lateral 2 X RPM Axial or
2 X RPM Torsional or
2 X RPM Lateral
Misalignment
1 X RPM Lateral or
2 X RPM Lateral
2 X RPM Axial or
2 X RPM Axial
Tricone Bit
3 X RPM Axial 3 X RPM Torsional or
3/2 X RPM Lateral
Very Soft
Formation, Low
WOB, Causing a
Loose Drillstring
1,2,3,4,5, X RPM Axial,
Torsional, Lateral
Rotational Walk
(precessional)
d
h
/(d
h
- d
d
) X RPM Lateral 2(d
h
(d
h
-d
d
)) RPM Axial or
2(d
h
(d
h
-d
d
)) RPM Torsional
Rotational Walk
(backward whirl)
d
d
/(d
h
- d
d
) X RPM Lateral 2(d
d
(d
h
-d
d
)) RPM Axial or
2(d
d
(d
h
-d
d
)) RPM Torsional
Non synchronous
Walk or Whirl
(0.8 to 1.0)(d
h
(d
h
- d
d
)) X RPM
Lateral (0.6 to 2.0)(d
h
(d
h
- d
d
))
X RPM
(0.6 to 2.0)(d
h
(d
h
- d
d
)) X
RPM Axial or
(0.6 to 2.0)(d
h
(d
h
- d
d
)) X
RPM Torsional
Drillstring Whip
RPM Harmonics (1X, 2X, 3X)
Lateral
RPM Harmonics Axial,
Torsional
References
Field, D.J., DRD Corp., Swarbrick, A.J., Halliburton MWD, and
Haduch, G.A., DRD Corp., Techniques for Successful Application of
Dynamic Analysis in the Prevention of Field-Induced Vibration
Damage in MWD Tools, SPE #25773, 1993.
Apostal, M.C., Haduch, G.A., and Williams, J.B., DRD Corp., A Study
to Determine the Effect of Damping on Finite-Element-Based, Forced-
Frequency-Response Models for Bottomhole Assemble Vibration
Analysis, SPE #20458, 1990.
Besaisow, A.A. and Payne, M.L., ARCO Oil and Gas Co., A Study of
Excitation Mechanisms and Resonances Inducing BHA Vibrations,
SPE #15560, 1986.
Nicholson, J.W., Shell Research B.V., An Integrated Approach to
Drilling Dynamics Planning, Identification, and Control, IADC/SPE
#27537, 1994.
Defourny, P., Security DBS, and Abbassian, F., BP Exploration,
Flexible Bit: A New Anti-Vibration PDC Bit Concept, SPE #30475,
1995.
Gallagher, J., Baker Hughes INTEQ, Waller, M., Shell (U.K.) E&P, and
Ruszka, J., Baker Hughes INTEQ, Performance Drilling: A Practical
Solution to Drillstring Vibration, IADC/SPE 27538, 1994.
Behr, S.M., Warren, T.M., Sinor, L.A., Brett, J.F., Amoco Production
Co., Three-Dimensional Modeling of PDC Bits, SPE #21928, 1991.
Behr, S.M., Warren, T.M., Brett, J.F., Amoco Production Co., Bit
Whirl: A New Theory of PDC Bit Failure, SPE 19571, 1989.
Dykstra, M.W.; Chen, D. C-K.; Warren, T.M.; Azar, J.J., Drillstring
Component Mass Imbalance: A Major Source of Downhole
Vibrations, SPE #29350, 1996.
Chapter
Bottom Hole Assembly
Overview
The Bottom Hole Assembly module predicts the directional drilling
performance of a bottom hole assembly. The module provides an
accurate representation of the forces acting on the assembly as it lies in
the wellbore. This analysis can be useful for explaining unexpected
performance or for determining the causes of tool failures. In addition,
the module can solve a drillahead scenario representing the expected
behavior of the bottom hole assembly as it drills new hole.
During the Bottom Hole Assembly segment of your WELLPLAN
training you will learn the basic functionality of the Bottom Hole
Assembly module. The exercises are designed to follow a typical
workflow using the module. In the future, you can refer to these
workflows to assist you with using WELLPLAN.
First we are going to analyze the current position of the bottom hole
assembly. We will investigate the position of the bottom hole assembly
in the wellbore and we will determine the side forces acting on the
bottom hole assembly where it is in contact with the wellbore. Later we
will analyze the bottom hole assembly as it drills ahead.
By the end of the Bottom Hole Assembly course you will know how to:
Input required data.
Create analysis plots and report.
Analyze plots to predict string behavior over a range of operating
parameters.
Analyze a static bottom hole assembly.
Predict how an assembly will drill ahead.
12
Chapter 12: Bottom Hole Assembly
Workflow
The following steps are designed to be a general guide for using the
Bottom Hole Assembly module. This workflow is not intended to
suggest that you must follow these steps when using the module. There
are other workflows that may meet your analysis requirements.
Select the Bottom Hole Assembly module by clicking .
Define the wellbore. (Case > Hole Section)
Define the workstring. (Case > String Editor)
Define the fluids used. (Case > Fluid Editor)
Define the analysis parameters. (Parameter > Analysis), and
specify the temperature. You can define as many fluids as you
want. Only one fluid can be used at a time. (Case > Fluid Editor)
Optional: You may want to change the mesh zone. This is not
normally recommended. (Parameter > Mesh Zone)
Analyze the results using the Quick Look section of the Parameter
> Analysis dialog or by using the more detailed View > Report >
BHA. You can analyze the expected build/drop and walk rates for
the bottom hole assembly. You can also analyze the contact forces
acting on the BHA, which may assist you with determining why the
bottom hole assembly is performing as it is.
Introducing Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis
What is the Bottom Hole Assembly Module?
The Bottom Hole Assembly module analyzes a bottom hole assembly
(BHA) in a static in-place condition or in a drillahead mode. Many
different factors influence the behavior of a bottom hole assembly.
These factors include more controllable parameters such as WOB, and
drillstring component size and placement, as well as less controllable
items such as formation type. Because the performance of a bottom hole
assembly is impacted by such a wide and varied range of parameters,
predicting the behavior of a bottom hole assembly can be very complex.
Engineers in other fields have often relied on the Finite Element
Analysis Method to solve complex problems. The Finite Element
Analysis (FEA) method solves a complex problem by breaking it into
smaller problems. Each of the smaller problems can then be solved
much easier. The individual solutions to the smaller problems can be
combined to solve the complex problem. Depending on the number of
elements (smaller problems) that the complex structure (overall
problem) is comprised of, the solution can become very laborious.
Fortunately, the combination of the increasing speed of computing
power and creative mathematics have significantly simplified FEA
analysis. Refer to Three Fundamental Requirements of Structural
Analysis on page 525 for more information.
Because a bottom hole assembly is composed of many different
elements of varying dimensions, it lends itself quite well to the FEA
method. The following sections describe the major steps performed by
the Bottom Hole Assembly module while solving for an in-place
solution, as well as a drillahead prediction. For more technical
information, refer to Supporting Information and Calculations on
page 525.
Why Should I Use the Bottom Hole Assembly Module?
There are many times where the Bottom Hole Assembly module can be
useful. Among these are:
z Analyze the contact forces and displaced shape of a bottom hole
assembly including the bit tilt, side forces, and wellbore contact
points.
z Study previous directional failures through analysis of contact
forces on tools.
z Predict the directional behavior (including build, walk, and drop) of
a bottom hole assembly as it drills ahead through a specified
interval.
z Predict the transient effect when new assembly is run in hole.
z Adjust operating parameters to affect bottom hole assembly
performance.
z Study effects of bent assemblies, collar size, stabilizer placement,
eccentric stabilizers, stabilizer wear, hole enlargement, operating
parameters for optimal performance.
z Select proper bent sub to achieve desired build or drop rate.
z Estimate the additional torque drawn from a motor due to lateral
forces at bit.
z Determine the downhole mechanism controlling the bottom hole
assembly.
z Determine the orientation of a bottomhole assembly (0 - 180
degrees left or right of high side) for achieving optimum
performance in a well deflection scenario.
z Compare a rotary versus steerable assembly performance for a
given well trajectory analysis.
z Optimize the design of a steerable system through modeling of
number of bends and eccentric contact points in the bottom hole
assembly.
Bottom Hole Assembly Module Limitations
The Bottom Hole Assembly module does not model formation dip.
Starting Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis
There are two ways to begin the Bottom Hole Assembly module:
z Select Bottom Hole Assembly from the Modules menu.
z Click the Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis button .
Choose Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis from Module menu, or by
clicking the Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis Module button.
Select analysis mode from submenu, or from Mode
drop-down list.
Analyzing a Static Bottom Hole Assembly
Static in-place analysis of the bottom hole assembly is used to determine
the contact forces and displaced shape of a bottom hole assembly,
including bit tilt, side forces, and wellbore contact points.
Defining Analysis Parameters for Static Analysis
Use Parameter > Analysis to input parameters needed to perform the
calculations.
Drillahead Solution
Check the Enable Drillahead box to solve a drillahead scenario
to represent the expected behavior of the bottom hole assembly as it
drills new hole. The drillahead solution advances the bit depth, in
5-foot intervals, through the drill interval specified below. At each
7
For more
information
regarding data
required for this
dialog, refer to the
online help.
An analysis summary is presented in the
Quick Look section. Other results are
available using the View menu.
Check this box to solve a drillahead
scenario to represent the expected behavior
of the bottom hole assembly as it drills new
hole.
Check to turn on the calculation of the nodal torque due to friction. The
nodal torque affects the initial static solution of the displaced shape of
the bottom hole assembly. If you do not check this box, the only torque
that will be applied to the string is the specified torque at bit.
of the 5-foot intervals, a static solution is performed. The drillahead
solution assumes the following:
The bit will drill in the direction it is pointed.
The bit will cut sideways due to the presence of side forces
generated in the inclination and direction axes.
The formation has isotropic rock properties.
Specifying the Mesh Zone
Use the Parameter > Mesh Zone dialog to alter the default values for
the mesh zones in special situations. You may consider changing the
mesh if you are particularly interested in what is happening at a
particular section of the workstring. Otherwise, the defaults provide
adequate analysis of most situations. Refer to Defining the Finite
Element Mesh on page 525 for more information.
Analyzing Results for the Static (in-place) Position
Using the Quick Look Section of the BHA Analysis Data Dialog
Information in the Quick Look section describe what is happening at the
bit in the inclination and direction planes as well as build and walk rates.
The inclination plane is the vertical plane. The direction plane is rotated
90 degrees to the vertical plane. A positive (+) value indicates the force
is acting in a up or right direction while a negative (-) value indicates the
force is acting in a down or left direction.
Inclination
Refer to Bit Tilt and Resultant Side Force on page 535 for an
illustration and more description of the inclination angles and forces.
Wellbore
This angle indicates the inclination of the wellbore relative to the
vertical plane.
String
This angle indicates the inclination of the string or the bit face
relative to the vertical plane.
Tilt
This angle indicates the bit tilt.
Force
This indicates the magnitude of the force in the inclination plane
acting perpendicular to the bit.
Direction
Refer to Bit Tilt and Resultant Side Force on page 535 for an
illustration and more description of the direction angles and forces.
Wellbore
This angle indicates the direction of the wellbore relative to the
direction plane.
String
This angle indicates the direction of the string or the bit face
relative to the direction plane.
Tilt
This angle indicates the bit tilt (in the direction plane).
Force
This indicates the magnitude of the force in the direction plane
acting perpendicular to the bit. This force is FD in the above figure.
Rates
Build Rate
The build rate is the average expected build rate over the entire
drillahead interval.
Walk Rate
The walk rate is the average expected walk rate over the entire
Weight on Bit Slider
Use the slider bar to vary the weight on bit. The results in the Quick
Look section will be updated automatically as the weight on bit
changes.
Using Plots
Two plots are available for analysis. The View > Plot > Displacement
plot allows you to determine how the bottom hole assembly is lying in
the wellbore. The View > Plot > Side Force plot tells you the side force
acting on the bottom hole assembly as it lies in the wellbore.
Displacement Plot
The View > Plot > Displacement plot displays the displacement from
the centerline versus measured depth. Three measures of displacement
are used. In all measurements, positive results are to the right or high-
side of the wellbore. Negative results are to the left or low-side of the
wellbore.
Inclination - the displacement of the BHA in the inclination plane
(up and down from high side)
Directional - the displacement of the BHA in the directional plane
(side to side)
Clearance - the displacement of the BHA from the closest point on
the wellbore wall
A negative value for Inclination indicates the string
displacement from the wellbore centerline is towards
the low side of the wellbore.
A positive value for Direction indicates the string
displacement from the wellbore centerline is towards
the right side of the wellbore.
The string is in contact
with the wellbore wall
when the clearance is
zero.
Side Force Plot
The View > Plot > Side Force plot displays the calculated side force (at
each node analyzed) versus distance from bit. This information is also
displayed in table form in the BHA Forces section of the report.
Using Predicted Plots
The View > Predicted Plot plots include a number of plots that provide
information about the current wellbore, as well as the drill ahead
interval where you are analyzing how the BHA will drill in the future.
Dogleg Plot
Use View > Predicted Plot > Dogleg Severity to determine the dogleg
at any depth in the wellbore, including the drill ahead interval. If you
do not have the Enable Drillahead box checked on the Parameter >
Analysis dialog, this plot is not available. To check the dogleg for the
In this example, the
maximum side
force is in the BHA.
existing wellbore (not including the drillahead interval) use the View
> Wellpath Plots > Dogleg Severity plot.
Inclination Plot
Use View > Predicted Plot > Inclination to determine the inclination
at any depth in the wellbore, including the drill ahead interval. If you
do not have the Enable Drillahead box checked on the Parameter >
Analysis dialog, this plot is not available. To check the inclination for
All depths below the
indicated wellbore depth
are predicted values in the
the existing wellbore (not including the drillahead interval) use the
View > Wellpath Plots > Inclination plot.
Azimuth Plot
Use View > Predicted Plot > Azimuth to determine the azimuth at any
depth in the wellbore, including the drill ahead interval. If you do not
have the Enable Drillahead box checked on the Parameter > Analysis
dialog, this plot is not available. To check the azimuth for the existing
wellbore (not including the drillahead interval) use the View >
Wellpath Plots > Azimuth plot.
Build Plane Curvature
Use View > Predicted Plot > Build-Plane Curvature to determine the
build rate at any depth in the wellbore, including the drill ahead
interval. If you do not have the Enable Drillahead box checked on the
Parameter > Analysis dialog, this plot is not available. To check the
build-plane curvature for the existing wellbore (not including the
drillahead interval) use the View > Wellpath Plots > Build-Plane
Curvature plot.
Walk Plane Curvature
Use View > Predicted Plot > Walk-Plane Curvature to determine the
walk rate at any depth in the wellbore, including the drill ahead
interval. A positive value indicates a walk to the right, and a negative
means a walk to the left. If you do not have the Enable Drillahead box
checked on the Parameter > Analysis dialog, this plot is not available.
To check the walk-plane curvature for the existing wellbore (not
including the drillahead interval) use the View > Wellpath Plots >
Walk-Plane Curvature plot.
Using the BHA Report
Report Options
The Report Options dialog is used to specify what additional
analyzing.
Using the Report
The BHA report (View > Report > BHA) contains information
regarding the forces acting on the bottom hole assembly and the
resulting displacements. The BHA report provides information
concerning the forces acting on each element and node as well.
Using the report, you can:
Determine what is happening at the bit.
Determine the forces acting on the bottom hole assembly.
Determine where the assembly lies in the wellbore.
Determine the forces and moments acting at each node.
Determine the stresses acting at each node.
Determine the principal stresses acting at each node.
Determine the inclination and azimuth of the drill sting.
What is Happening at the Bit?
The BHA report includes a section indicating bit tilt in both inclination
and direction planes. This information pertains to the bit only. It is
possible to have a negative bit tilt, yet build angle. If this should occur,
it is probable that the bit is momentarily tilted downward, and that the
assembly is influenced by a positive side force. Always consider all the
information presented when analyzing a bottom hole assembly
performance.
What are the Forces Acting on the Bottom Hole Assembly?
The BHA Forces section of the report displays the contact force and
torque acting on components of the bottom hole assembly. This section
indicates where the bottom hole assembly is in contact with the wellbore
along with the corresponding side force at the contact point. This
information can assist with determining why the assembly is not
building or dropping as expected. Perhaps there is no contact between
stabilizers for a build assembly, or the contact point is not in the proper
location. The BHA Forces information may also be useful in
determining areas where casing wear may become a problem -
commonly in areas where the string contacts the casing in the cased hole
section. The Bottom Hole Assembly module will not determine if casing
wear is a problem, only that the bottom hole assembly is in contact with
the inside of the casing.
Where is the Bottom Hole Assembly Located in the
Wellbore?
The BHA Displacements section of the report displays how the bottom
hole assembly is lying in the wellbore. This information is also
displayed in the View > Plots > Displacement plot.
You can determine the contact
forces acting on any portion of
the string that was analyzed.
If you do not check the
Dynamics box on the Analysis
Parameters dialog the torque
is always equal to the value
for torque at bit that you
specified.
Clearance is the minimum
distance between the
drillstring and the wellbore.
This information is
also available in the
Displacement plot
you viewed earlier.
What Force and Moment is Acting at Each Node?
The Element Forces Table contains information regarding the
magnitudes of the forces and moments (associated with each degree of
freedom) acting on each node. Refer to Analysis Methodology on
A summary of this information is displayed in the Element Forces Table
Summary of the BHA Report. This table displays the minimum and
maximum magnitudes of each force and moment along with the
corresponding nodes at which these forces or moments occur.
What are the Stresses at Each Node?
The Component Stress Table displays the magnitudes of each stress type
(axial, bending, torsion, shear and equivalent) along with the
corresponding nodes at which they occur.
You can determine the forces and moments acting on each element and node.
Notice the
assembly is
divided into 39
elements using
40 nodes. The
force and
moment at each
node is
displayed.
What are the Principal Stress Acting at Each Node?
The Principal Stress Table displays the magnitudes of the maximum
principal, minimum principal, maximum shear and equivalent stress at
each node analyzed.
Stress information is reported based on stress type. Notice that
several stress types are reported at each node.
You can determine the principal stress acting at each node.
What is the Inclination and Azimuth of the Drillstring or
Wellbore?
The final section of the BHA Reportthe Hole Section vs. Drillstring
Angle Tablecontains information related to the inclination and
azimuth directions of each node for the string and the wellbore.
You can determine the inclination and azimuth of the string and wellbore at any node.
Predicting How a Bottom Hole Assembly Will Drill
Ahead
Drillahead analysis predicts the directional behavior of a bottom hole
assembly during the planning stages. Drillahead analysis makes it
possible to study the effects of various components, including bent
assemblies, collar sizes, stabilizer placement, hole enlargement, and
component wear. During well operations, drillahead analysis can be
used to adjust operating parameters to optimize performance.
The drillahead analysis first performs the same analysis as in the static
analysis. The program then drills ahead in 5-foot increments to predict
the bottom hole assembly behavior over the user specified drillahead
interval. Data is presented on the reports in increments specified by the
user.
The report generated for the drillahead analysis is similar to the static
analysis except that information for the user specified drillahead interval
is included.
Defining Analysis Parameters for Drillahead Analysis
Use Parameter > Analysis to input parameters needed to perform the
calculations.
Check Enable Drillahead
to analyze how a bottom
hole assembly will perform
as it makes new hole.
Analyzing Drillahead Results
The reports and plots available for a drillahead analysis are the same as
those available for the static analysis discusses previously.
Using the BHA Analysis Data Quick Look Results
The Parameter > Analysis dialog presents a summary of the results in
the Quick Look section.
How Will the BHA Drill Ahead?
Refer to the Weight on Bit Study Report section of the BHA Report
(View > Report > BHA) to determine how the BHA performs over the
specified drillahead interval.
Predicted wellpath data is appended to the existing wellpath based on
the drillahead parameters specified.
Why is the BHA Building or Dropping?
To determine why the BHA is performing as it is, use the BHA Forces
table on the BHA Report (View > Report > BHA).
Predicted wellpath
data is appended
to the existing
wellpath over the
drillahead interval
specified.
You can determine where the
BHA is in contact with the
wellbore and the amount of
contact force.
require, please refer to the section titled References on page 541 for
additional sources of information pertaining to the topic you are
interested in.
Analysis Methodology
Three Fundamental Requirements of Structural Analysis
The Finite Element Analysis (FEA) method used in the Bottom Hole
Assembly module adheres to three basic conditions of structural
analysis:
First, the internal forces must balance the external forces.
Second, the solutions for each separate element must be compatible
with the next element. This is necessary so that the deformed
structure fits together.
Third, the laws of material behavior must be followed.
Defining the Finite Element Mesh
The first step of the analysis divides the drillstring into a 40 element
mesh. This 40 element mesh is divided into three sections or zones.
The Bottom Hole Assembly module has preset defaults for the total
length of the mesh, the lengths of the individual zones, and for the
elements within the zones.
The defaults for lengths of zones 1 and 2 are 500 and 2500 feet,
respectively. The length of zone 3 varies depending on the remaining
length of drillstring and the remaining number of available nodes. The
Aspect Ratios for zones 1, 2 and 3 default to 20, 100, and 500
respectively. The following example explains how Aspect Ratios
determine element lengths. Assume there is an 8" collar in zone 1. The
maximum element length in zone 1 for an 8" collar would be:
8" X 20 (default for Aspect Ratio 1) = 160" or 13.3 ft.
An exception to this is in the bottom 12 feet of zone 1 where there is a
3-foot limit for element length. The 3-foot limit is included because the
drillstring closest to the bit has a significant impact on the bottom hole
assembly behavior.
Compute the Local Stiffness Matrix and the Global Stiffness Matrix
After the drillstring has been divided into elements, each element is
closely examined in terms of geometrical and physical properties. The
correct representation of geometrical and physical properties
including component weight, dimensions, moment of inertia and
modulus of elasticityis very important in order to accurately represent
the component for the remaining analysis. The Bottom Hole Assembly
module has a catalog containing much of the information, but it is
important that the user carefully selects each component to model the
drillstring as closely as possible. The user should verify that all selected
component properties accurately reflect the component.
The local stiffness matrix [K] is an important piece of the analysis as it
represents how rigid or bendable a component is. The relationship
between the stiffness matrix [K], and the nodal forces, displacements,
rotations, and moments is defined in Equation 1.
(Equation 1)
{F} = [K] {}
where:
{F} = vector of nodal loads, and moments
[K] = stiffness matrix
{} = vector of nodal displacements, and rotations
The stiffness matrix [K] is composed of the following:
E = Youngs Modulus (lb/in
2
)
I = Moment of Inertia (in
4
)
L = Length between nodes (in)
G = Modulus of Rigidity = E/2 (1+v)
J = Polar Moment of Inertia = 2I
v = Poissons Ratio
Youngs Modulus (E) varies with material type. Youngs Moduli for a
few common materials are listed below.
The Moment of Inertia (I) varies based on the cross-section of the
element in question. The Moment of Inertia for a tubular element is
given in Equation 2.
(Equation 2)
I= /64 (OD
4
- ID
4
)
where:
OD = Outside diameter (in)
ID = Inside diameter (in)
Equations 1 (page 526) and 2 (above) clearly present the importance of
accurately representing the bottom hole assembly components. An
incorrect material type or tubular dimension can make a significant
difference.
Figure 1 (on the following page) is the expanded form of Equation 1
(above), and contains more complete descriptions of the vectors and
matrix. The forces and moments acting on the single element in Figure
4 (page 531) are calculated using the matrix algebra illustrated in Figure
1 (page 528). The data in this matrix is for the element between node n
and node n+1. Note that each element is defined by two nodes. There
are similar matrices for the element between node n+1 and node
n+2.
Material Youngs Modulus
Steel 29 X 10
6
psi
Aluminum 10.3 X 10
6
psi
Monel 26 X 10
6
psi
Tungsten 87 X 10
6
psi
Beryllium-copper alloy 19.5 X 10
6
psi
C
h
a
p
t
e
r

1
2
:

B
o
t
t
o
m

H
o
l
e

A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
5
2
8
W
E
L
L
P
L
A
N
L
a
n
d
m
a
r
k
Figure 1: Expanded Stiffness Matrix Equation
F
x(n) (12EI)/L
3
(6EI)/L
2
(-12EI)/L
3
(6EI)/L
2
X
(n)
F
y(n) (12EI)/L
3
(-6EI)/2
(-12EI)/L
2
(-6EI)/L
2
Y
(n)
F
z(n)
AE/L -AE/L Z
(n)
M
x(n) (-6EI)/L
2
4EI/L
(6EI)/L
2
(2EI)/L
x(n)
M
y(n)
=
(6EI)/L
2
4EI/L
(-6EI)/L
2
(2EI)/L X
y(n)
M
z(n)
GJ/L GJ/L
z(n)
F
x(n+1) (-12EI)/L
3
(-6EI)/L
2
(12EI)/L
3
(-6EI)/L
2
X
(n+1)
F
y(n+1) (-12EI)/L
2
(6EI)/L
2
(12EI)/L
3
(6EI)/L
2
Y
(n+1)
F
z(n+1)
-AE/L AE/L Z
(n+1)
M
x(n+1) (-6EI)/L
2
2EI/L
(6EI)/L
2
4EI/L
x(n+1)
M
y(n+1) (6EI)/L
2
2EI/L
(-6EI)/L
2
4EI/L
y(n+1)
M
z(n+1)
GJ/L GJ/L
z(n+1)
The individual matrices for all the element are combined to form one
matrix for the entire bottom hole assembly. The expanded matrix [K]
containing data for all 40 nodes included in the analysis is structured as
in the Figure 2 (below).
Matrix Structure
Stiffness matrix [K] for element between nodes 1 and 2
Nodes 2 and 3
Nodes 3 and 4
Nodes 39 and 40
Nodes 38 and 39
Nodes 37 and 38
Stiffness matrix [K] for element between nodes 1 and 2
Nodes 2 and 3
Nodes 3 and 4
Nodes 39 and 40
Nodes 38 and 39
Nodes 37 and 38
Nodes 39 and 40
Nodes 38 and 39
Nodes 37 and 38
Simplified Beam Element
Figure 3 (above) is a simplified beam element to illustrate the angle as
it is used in Figure 4 (page 531). The angle is used to measure the
deflection of the element from the reference axis.
The individual element stiffness matrices are computed and combined
to form the global stiffness matrix. This is a necessary step towards
ensuring a complete solution for the entire bottom hole assembly, rather
than a number of individual solutions for several elements. The global
matrix is a necessary step towards satisfying the fundamental
requirements of structural analysis mentioned earlier.
Length L
Y(n+1)
Y(n)
Length L
Y(n+1)
Y(n)
Deflected Position
Length L
Y(n+1)
Y(n)
Length L
Y(n+1)
Y(n)
Deflected Position Deflected Position
Degrees of Freedom
Single Beam Element
Refer to Figure 4 (above) for an illustration of a single beam element.
This particular illustration shows one element with six degrees of
freedom (DOF). A DOF is an unknown displacement that can occur at a
point, or node. As shown in Figure 4, each node can move along the X,
Y and Z axes, constituting three DOFone DOF along each axis. In
addition, there can also be a rotation around each axis. This is an
additional three DOF, for a total of six at each node. Notice the forces
and moments acting on the beam at each node. During the mesh
generation step, the entire bottom hole assembly is divided into 39
similar single beam elements and analyzed.
Boundary Conditions
Boundary conditions are the physical constraints acting on the bottom
hole assembly. Boundary conditions are important to the analysis to set
how the structure is supported and constrained. Boundary conditions
X
Z
Y
Node n
Node n + 1
F
x(n)
M
z(n)
F
z(n)
M
z(n)
M
y(n)
F
y(n)
M
y(n+1)
F
y(n+1)
F
z(n+1)
M
z(n+1)
M
x(n+1)
F
x(n+1)
X
Z
Y
Node n
Node n + 1
F
x(n)
F
x(n)
M
z(n)
M
z(n)
F
z(n)
F
z(n)
M
z(n)
M
z(n)
M
y(n)
M
y(n)
F
y(n)
F
y(n)
M
y(n+1)
M
y(n+1)
F
y(n+1)
F
y(n+1)
F
z(n+1)
F
z(n+1)
M
z(n+1)
M
z(n+1)
M
x(n+1)
M
x(n+1)
F
x(n+1)
F
x(n+1)
make it possible to solve the finite element analysis. The Bottom Hole
Assembly module provides six default boundary conditions that can be
selected for the top and bottom nodes. The Bottom Hole Assembly
modules system defaults do not apply boundary conditions to nodes
between the top and bottom nodes. An experienced user familiar with
FEA (and with assistance from Landmark) can define additional
boundary conditions and can enforce boundary conditions at additional
nodes. It is recommended that the defaults be used unless the user is
familiar with finite element analysis methods.
The following list defines the seven default boundary conditions
selections available for the top and bottom nodes.
z Full pin: All three translations are specified and rotations are free.
z Full Fix: All three translations and rotations are specified.
z Pin with Axial Slider: Two lateral translations (X, Y) are
specified. Z translation is free, and all three rotations are specified.
z Fix with Axial Slider: Two lateral translation (X, Y) are specified.
Z translation is free, and all three rotations are specified.
z Fix Axial: Two lateral translations (X, Y) are free. Z is specified,
and X,Y, and Z rotations are free.
z Fix Torsion: All three translations (X, Y, Z) are free, two rotations
(X, Y) are free, and Z rotation is specified.
z Fix Rotations: All three translations are free (X, Y, Z) and two
lateral rotations (X, Y) are specified, and Z rotation is specified.
Displacements Rotations
Description X Y Z X Y Z
Full Pin Set Set Set Free Free Free
Full Fix Set Set Set Set Set Set
Pin with Axial Slider Set Set Free Free Free Free
Fix with Axial Slider Set Set Free Set Set Set
Fix Axial Free Free Set Free Free Free
Fix Torsion Free Free Free Free Free Set
Fix Rotation Free Free Free Set Set Free
For each of the seven previous types, it is possible to modify the radius,
angle, axial displacement, and twist for each type.
z Radius: Determines the string position from the center of the
wellbore. A large value places it against the wellbore.
z Angle: Locates the string relative to the high side of the hole. A
radius of 1.0 unit and an angle of 90 degrees places the string one
unit (inch, mm, or so forth) to the right of the center of the hole.
z Axial Displacement: Used to initially displace the string.
z Twist: The rotation from the high side of the hole. This is used to
impart an initial twist to the string.
Constructing the Wellbore and Bottom Hole Assembly Reference Axis
Wellpath data and wellbore diameters are important pieces of
information supplied by the user. The Bottom Hole Assembly module
uses this information to construct the wellbore. Each wellpath data point
supplied by the user is used to calculate location reference coordinates
for each wellpath point of the wellbore using the wellpath calculation
method supplied by the user (that is, Radius of Curvature and so forth).
Next, the coordinates of the bottom hole assembly nodes are determined
as if the bottom hole assembly is lying along the centerline of the
wellbore, with the bit at the depth specified by the user.
A bottom hole assembly reference axis (Z) is established by using the
inclination and direction as interpolated at the bit location. The Z
reference axis is tangent to the wellbore and points toward the surface.
The X and Y reference axes are also established. The X axis points
toward the surface (vertical) and theY-axis is parallel to the surface
(lateral).
Hole diameters are assumed to be constant over the interval specified by
the user in the WELLPLAN Wellbore Editor.
Calculating the Solution
Using the information from the previous steps of the analysis, the
force/contact solution can be calculated. This is a complex, iterative
procedure. First, the drillstring finite element model is laid out along the
z-axis described above. Unless the wellbore is straight, the drillstring
finite element model penetrates the wellbore described by the wellpath.
At this point, the program begins to determine the force acting between
the wellbore and the drillstring.
The boundary conditions are enforced on the nodes specified. All other
nodes have no boundary conditions applied. The program determines
where the drillstring has (theoretically) penetrated the wellbore and
calculates the restoring force necessary to move the node back into the
wellbore. If the node is already inside the wellbore, no force or
displacements are applied to the node.
These steps are repeated until the changes in displacements at all nodes
fall below a set tolerance. The objective is to determine the forces
necessary to move the nodes along the reference axis to the
corresponding nodal position lying along the wellbore centerline. When
this is accomplished, the solution is considered complete. At this point,
the axial forces, torque, stresses and coordinates (X, Y, and Z) of each
node are known.
Bit Tilt and Resultant Side Force
The following two figures are inclination and directional views of the
forces acting on a bit. In these figures, the following nomenclature is
used.
Inclination Forces
F
I
F
A
F
R
R
TAN

Direction Forces
F
I
= Inclination Force
F
D
= Direction Force
F
RI
= Resultant Inclination Force
F
R
= Resultant Direction Force
I
= Wellbore Inclination
A
= Bit Inclination Angle
R
= Resultant Force Inclination Angle
D
= Wellbore Direction Angle
A
= Bit Direction Angle
R
= Resultant Force Direction Angle
These figures can be somewhat misleading because the inclinational (F
I
)
and directional (F
D
) side forces compared to the axial force (F
A
) in the
diagrams are represented approximately equal in magnitude. In normal
operating conditions, the axial force (F
A
) is usually 10 to 100 times the
magnitude of the side forces.
F
D
F
R
F
A
TAN N
A
The bit tilt is defined as the angle between the centerline of the wellbore
and the centerline of the bit. As shown, there is a bit tilt in both the
inclination and azimuth directions. Bit tilt is a result of the bending
characteristics of the bottom hole assembly and the resulting force
acting on the bit.
The resultant force is a vector solution of all the forces acting on an
individual node, and it is this force that determines the magnitude of the
displacement from the center line. The bit trajectory is determined by
the resultant force acting on the bit and by the bit tilt.
Drillahead Solutions
The Bottom Hole Assembly module is capable of two analysis modes:
z The static or in-place solution has been explained in the previous
discussion. A static solution assumes the bit is stationary at the user
specified depth.
z The drillahead solution advances the bit depth, in 5 foot intervals,
through the interval specified by the user. At each of the 5 foot
intervals, a static solution is performed.
The drillahead solution assumes:
The bit will drill in the direction it is pointed.
The bit will cut sideways due to the presence of side forces
generated in the inclination and direction axes.
The formation has isotropic rock properties.
Although side cutting is affected by penetration rate, it is not entirely a
function of the same parameters that affect penetration rate. Lateral
penetration rates do not always vary with penetration rate. One reason
for this can be attributed to the variety of bits available. Different bits
have different side cutting abilities. To calculate the lateral penetration
rate, the Bottom Hole Assembly module uses the Warren Penetration
Rate Model.
Where:
R
i
= Lateral penetration rate (ft/hr)
C
S
= Side cutting coefficient = bit coefficient /10.0
S = Rock strength = formation hardness / 10.0
D = Bit diameter (in)
R
s
= Rotary speed (rpm)
F
i
= Lateral side force at the bit (kips)
A = Bit constant = 0.03
B = Bit constant = 0.60
C = Bit constant = 2.80
Bit Coefficient
Bit coefficients indicate how efficient a bit will cut sideways. Values for
bit coefficient range from 1 - 100. Note that a value of 0 indicates the bit
does not cut sideways, and the wellbore trajectory will be based solely
on bit tilt.
The following table includes suggested bit coefficients for roller cone
bits. Typically range for this type of bit is 20 - 80, with 20 used for soft
formations, and 80 used for hard formations.
IADC Series Bit Coefficient
8 20-30
3,7 30-40
2,6 40-60
1,4,5 60-80
R
i
=
C
S
A (S
2
)(D
3
)
(R
S
B
)(F
i
2
)
+
C
(R
S
) (D)
Warren Penetration Rate Model
(Equation 3)
The values for fixed cutter bit coefficients are more difficult to
determine from the IADC classification system. Cutter size, density, and
placement impact the determination of bit coefficient.
Formation Hardness
Formation hardness is used in Equation 3 (page 539) to model the
formations resistance to the bit side cutting capability. Formation
hardness is a number between 0 and 60, with the larger numbers
indicating the relative hardness of the formation. The table below
correlates formation hardness to rate of penetration and formation
description.
Fixed Cutter Bits Bit Coefficient
Flat Faced Diamond 0-5
Step Profile/Small Cutters 10-20
Bladed/Small Cutters 20-40
Step Profile/Large Cutters 40-60
Bladed/Large Cutters 60-80
Formation
Description
Formation
Hardness
ROP
(ft/hr)
ROP
(m/hr)
Soft 10 100+ 30+
Medium Soft
(Shallow Gulf Coast)
20 75 23
Medium
(Above 10,000 feet)
30 50 15
Medium Hard
(Below 10,000 feet)
40 30 9
Hard
(Granite)
50 20 6
Rigid
(Igneous Rock)
60 10 3
References
Millheim, K.K., Jordan, S., and Ritter, C.J., Bottom Hole Assembly
Analysis Using the Finite Element Method, Journal of Petroleum
Technology, February, 1978, 265-74.
Warren, T.M., Factors Affecting Torque for a Roller Cone Bit,
Journal of Petroleum Technology, September 1984, 1500-08.
Rockey, K.C., Evans, H.R., Griffiths, D.W., and Nethercot, D.A., The
Finite Element Method, Granada Publishing Limited, 1975.
Williams, J.B., Apostal, M.C., Haduch, G.A., An Analysis of Predicted
Wellbore Trajectory Using a Three-dimensional Model of a Bottomhole
Assembly with Bent Sub, Bent Housing, and Eccentric Contact
Capabilities, SPE 19545, 1989.
Millheim, K., Jordan, S., Ritter, C.J., Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis
Using the Finite Element Method, SPE 6057, 1978.
Millheim, K., Directional Drilling (an 8 part series), Oil and Gas
Journal, 1979.
Chapter
Stuck Pipe Analysis
Overview
During the Stuck Pipe Analysis segment of your WELLPLAN training
you will learn the basic functionality of the Stuck Pipe module. The
class exercise and workflow are designed to follow a typical workflow
using the module. In the future, you can refer to these workflows to
assist you with using WELLPLAN.
By the end of the Stuck Pipe course you become familiar with the
following tasks:
Input required data for the analysis.
Determine the stuck point.
Determine the measured weights required to activate the jar.
Determine if the required surface loads with yield the pipe.
Determine surface actions to backoff a connection.
13
Chapter 13: Stuck Pipe Analysis
Workflow
The following steps are designed to be a general guide to the steps
involved in using the Stuck Pipe module. This workflow is not intended
to suggest that you must follow these steps when using the module.
There are certainly other workflows that may meet your analysis
requirements.
Select the Stuck Pipe module by clicking .
Define the workstring. Use the String Editor to define all
workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth). (Case >
String Editor)
Define the fluids used. You must define the fluid rheological
properties, select a rheology model, and specify the temperature.
You can define as many fluids as you want. Only one fluid can be
used at a time. (Case > Fluid Editor)
Specify operational parameters for the analysis. (Case > Stuck
Pipe Setup)
Optional: Specify standoff device parameters. (Parameter >
Standoff Devices)
Determine the stuck point if it is not know. Select Stuck Point
Analysis from the Mode drop-down list. Use Parameter >
Analysis to input stretch test information and calculated stuck
point.
Determine the loads that can be applied without yielding the string.
Select Yield Analysis from the Mode drop-down list. Use
Parameter > Analysis to input a range of measured weights and to
determine it the string will fail.
Determine the surface actions required to set, trip and reset the jar.
Select Jar Analysis from the Mode drop-down list. Use
Parameter > Analysis to input required jar functions and to review
the analysis results.
Determine the surface actions required to backoff a joint in the
string. Select Backoff Analysis from the Mode drop-down list. Use
Parameter > Analysis to input the depth to backoff at and the
required forces to backoff the joint. Review the analysis results on
this dialog.
Introducing Stuck Pipe Analysis
What is the Stuck Pipe Module?
Stuck Pipe analysis calculates the forces acting on the drillstring at the
stuck point. It can be used to determine the location of the stuck point,
the overpull possible without yielding the pipe, the measured weight
required to set the jars and the surface action required to achieve the
desired conditions at the backoff point.
The Stuck Point Module assumes that the pipe is in good condition, has
not suffered fatigue damage and that the stresses due to bending are not
significant. In the Yield Analysis mode, the drill pipe and heavy weight
outside diameters are de-rated according to the pipe class and all
principal stresses are calculated. Refer to Pipe Wall Thickness
Modification Due to Pipe Class on page 233 for more information.
Fatigue damage is not considered in the yield analysis.
The Stuck Pipe Module includes the following analysis modes:
z Stuck Point Calculations Mode
z Yield Load Analysis Mode
z Jar Analysis Mode
z Backoff Analysis Mode
Why Should I Use the Stuck Pipe Module?
Using the Stuck Point Module is superior to hand calculations because
hand calculations assume the wellbore is vertical, frictionless and that
the drill string is all drill pipe. The Stuck Pipe Module includes the
frictional effects of the drill string in a three-dimensional wellbore and
adjusts for stretch when the string is buckled. Stuck Pipe uses the
WELLPLAN Torque Drag Analysis calculations, including:
equilibrium equations and stress, stretch and buckling calculations.
Yield load limits are based on the calculated effective yield stress.
Starting Stuck Pipe
There are two ways to begin the Stuck Pipe module:
z Select Stuck Pipe from the Modules menu and then select the
appropriate analysis mode.
z Click the Stuck Pipe Analysis button and then select the
appropriate analysis mode from the drop-down list.
Choose Stuck Pipe from Module menu, or by clicking the Stuck Pipe
Module button.
Select analysis mode from submenu, or from Mode drop-
down list.
Adding a Jar to the Workstring
Workstring are defined using the Case > String Editor. The current
string does not have a jar, so it must be added to the string in order to
perform Stuck Pipe analysis.
Double-click on a non-
editable field associated with
the jar to access the String
Data dialog.
Use the String Data dialog to
specify jar setting and
tripping forces.
Determining the Location of the Stuck Point
The Stuck Point calculations are similar to those that are provided in a
number of drilling engineering text books, hand books, and stretch
charts. The difference is that the simple equations used in text books and
handbooks assume that the wellbore is vertical and frictionless and the
the drill string is all drill pipe. WELLPLAN Stuck Pipe includes the
frictional effects of the work string being in the actual three-dimensional
wellbore and adjusts the stretch when the pipe is buckled.
The Stuck Point Algorithm assumes that the pipe is in good condition,
has not suffered fatigue damage, and that stresses due to bending are not
significant. In the yield analysis calculations, however, the drill pipe and
heavy weight OD is de-rated according to the pipe class and all principal
stresses are calculated. Fatigue damage is not considered in the yield
analysis.
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Stuck Point
Analysis
Use Parameter > Analysis to input parameters required to determine
the location of the stuck point.
7
Calculated measured
depth of stuck point.
Determining the Surface Measured Weight Required
to Activate the Jar
After the stuck point has been determined, the next step is to calculate
the surface measured weight required to trip and reset the jar. Use the
Jar Analysis mode to determine the surface force required to set and
trip the jar.
Describing the Jar Analysis Mode
One of the major reasons jars are reported as having "failed" is not
because they have actually failed, but because of their incorrect use.
Often proper consideration is not given to the friction forces that need to
be overcome to apply a given force to fire or set a jar. Or the time
dependant nature of hydraulic jars is not being taken into account.
The same friction affects that create drag and torque losses while drilling
deviated wells also affect the loads required to trip a jar. Probably the
major reason that a jar does not trip is that the force that is required to be
applied to the jar, either compressional or tensional force, is not
transmitted to the jar. Due to friction losses the force that is actually
applied to the jar can be a fraction of the force that is applied at the
surface.
The Jar Analysis mode in Stuck Pipe is designed to determine the force
that is transmitted to the jar for a given force that is applied at the
surface. It is important to remember that this analysis only calculates the
forces that are applied to the jar by the application of a given measured
weight. It does not calculate the forces generated by the jarring action.
The Jar Analysis performs the following calculations:
z Measured weight to set the jar for the first firing, relative to the
current measured weight and drag imposed on the drill string.
z Measured weight to then trip the jar.
z Measured weight to reset the jar for a subsequent firing in the same
direction.
The force that is transmitted from the surface to the jar and the load that
causes the jar to trip is dependant on several factors. The factors that are
specific to the jar being used and the wellbore are entered on the Case >
String Editor and the Case > Hole Section Editor, respectively. Other
operating parameters are entered on the Parameter > Stuck Pipe Setup
Data dialog.
Selecting the Jar Analysis Mode
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Jar Analysis
Use the Parameter > Analysis dialog to input the data required to
determine the surface measured weight required to supply the jar with
enough force to trip or reset. The results are displayed on this dialog
also.
Select the Jar Analysis
mode from the drop-down
list.
Input the
measured weight
when stuck.
The surface measured weights to set, trip
and reset the jar are presented here.
The jar operating forces are
specified on the String Data dialog.
Select Pumps Off to indicate
there is no circulation, or click
Pumps On to indicate there is
circulation.
Indicate the
direction the jars
fire.
Analyzing the Output Section
Jar Operating Force
Jar Set Force
For mechanical jars, this indicates the force that must be applied to
reset the springs into a position to be re-tripped. For hydraulic jars,
this is the Jar Seal Friction Force. The Jar Seal Friction force is the
force required to move a hydraulic jar from the tripped position to
the reset position so it can be tripped again. It represents the force
needed to overcome any internal friction forces that exist within
hydraulic jars. Exact values should be obtained from the jar
manufacturer.
There is no set force required for hydraulic jars. When calculating
the pick up or set down required to reset a hydraulic jar, the reset
measured weight is that measured weight which will place the jar in
a neutral position, i.e., set the axial force in the jar equal to zero,
whereby a load can be reapplied to re-trip the jar. So, in practice,
for hydraulics jars, the jar seal force replaces the jar set force that
you enter for mechanical jars. For example, when resetting a jar to
trip down, if it is required to put the jar in tension by 100 lbs, enter
100 lbs for the Jar Seal Force (String Editor). The reset measured
weight will be calculated which places the jar in 100 lbs
tension.The Jar Seal Friction is not required for analyzing
mechanical jars.
Jar Trip Force
For mechanical jars, this is the force required to trip the jar
upwards. Hydraulic jars do not have a specified load at which they
trip. A hydraulic jar will trip a finite time after the Jar Set Force is
applied. The magnitude of the jar force achieved by the jar is
proportional to the rate the Jar Set Force is applied. Time and load
cycles are available from the jar manufacturer.
Jar Operating Measured Weight
Set (Initial) Measured Weight
This is the measured weight required to achieve the Jar Set Force in
the center of the jar (compressive force). This value is calculated if
the input Initial Hookload is not sufficient to set the jar.
Set (Initial) - Change
This is the Set (Initial) Measured Weight minus the Measured
Weight When Stuck.
Set (Initial) - Buckling
This indicates if buckling is occurring at the Set (Initial) Measured
Weight and if so, what type of buckling. Buckling is not occurring
unless an S (Sinusoidal buckling), a T (Transition buckling), an H
(Helical buckling) or an L (Lockup) is displayed. A ~ indicates
there is no buckling.
Trip Measured Weight
This is the measured weight required to achieve the Jar Trip Force
in the center of the jar (tensile force).
Trip - Change
This is the measured weight equal to the Trip Measured Weight
minus the Set Measured Weight.
Trip - Buckling
This indicates if buckling is occurring at the Trip Measured Weight
and if so, what type of buckling. Buckling is not occurring unless
an S (Sinusoidal buckling), a T (Transition buckling), an H (Helical
buckling) or an L (Lockup) is displayed. A ~ indicates there is no
buckling.
Reset Measured Weight
This is the measured weight to reset the jar to the Set (Initial)
Measured Weight after tripping the jar. This is the force required to
set the center of the jar in compression.
Reset - Change
This is the measured weight equal to the Reset Measured Weight
minus the Trip Measured Weight.
Reset - Buckling
This indicates if buckling is occurring at the Reset Measured
Weight and if so, what type of buckling. Buckling is not occurring
unless an S (Sinusoidal buckling), a T (Transition buckling), an H
(Helical buckling) or an L (Lockup) is displayed. A ~ indicates
there is no buckling.
Determining if the Required Measured Weight
Yields the String
After the stuck point has been determined and the surface measured
weight required to trip and reset the jar has been determined, the next
step is to determine if the required measured weights will yield the
string. Use the Yield Analysis mode to determine if the pipe will yield
under the required measured weights.
Describing the Yield Analysis Mode
Yield Load Analysis determines the forces acting on the pipe and the
formation at the stuck point. The program will apply the specified
minimum measured weight and then determine the force in the pipe at
the stuck point, the torque required to yield the pipe, and the force that
the pipe is applying to the formation at the stuck point. The applied
measured weight will be increased by the specified amount and another
analysis done. This process repeats until the maximum measured weight
specified is analyzed or until it is determined that the pipe has yielded,
whichever comes first.
As with the stuck pipe calculations, Yield Load Analysis determines
when the pipe is buckled and, when it is, applies additional contact
forces that affect the axial forces and stretch. In addition, the outside
diameters of the drill pipe and heavy weight is de-rated according to the
pipe class.
Selecting the Yield Analysis Mode
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Yield Analysis
determine if the surface measured weight required to supply the jar with
Select the Yield Analysis
mode from the drop-down list.
enough force to trip or reset will yield the string. The results are
displayed on this dialog also.
Analyzing the Output
Initial Status at Surface
Rotary Table Torque
The rotary table torque is calculated using the Torque Drag Normal
Analysis General Analysis Steps. This analysis assumes the axial
force at the bottom of the string is known and calculates the forces
up the string to the surface.
The string does not yield in this analysis. If it
did, the component and depth would be
displayed here. (DP at 0 MD is the default for
indicating yield did not occur.)
These data refer to the stuck point.
Specify the minimum
measured weight to use
in the yield analysis.
The analysis will apply
this measured weight
and then determine the
force in the pipe at the
stuck point, the torque
required to yield the
pipe, and the force that
the pipe is applying to
the formation at the
stuck point. The
minimum measured
weight will be increased
by the increment and
calculated the forces at
the stuck point. This
process repeats until
the maximum weight is
analyzed or until it is
determined that the pipe
has yielded, whichever
comes first.
Initial Status at Stuck Point
Force in Drill String (PA)
This is the axial force in the drillstring at the stuck point calculated
using the pressure area method. Refer to Axial Force Calculations
Force in Drill String (BUOY)
This is the axial force in the drillstring at the stuck point calculated
using the buoyancy method. Refer to Axial Force Calculations for
more information.
Torque in Drill String
This value is always zero.
Force at the Stuck Point
This is the calculated force at the stuck point.
Torque at the Stuck Point
This is the calculated torque in the drillstring at the stuck point.
Minimum Overpull to Load Stuck Point
Measured Weight
This is the calculated overpull measured weight. During the
analysis, if the operating measured weight is greater than the
overpull measured weight calculated during the reference solution,
the corrected solution will be performed and the overpull measured
weight will be set equal to the operating condition measured
weight.
Overpull
This is the final calculated overpull measured weight minus the
measured weight when stuck.
Minimum Slackoff to Load Stuck Point
Measured Weight
This is the calculated slackoff measured weight. During the
analysis, if the operating condition measured weight is less than the
overpull measured weight calculated during the reference solution,
the corrected solution will be performed and the slackoff measured
weight will be set equal to the operating condition measured
weight.
Slackoff
The final calculated slackoff measured weight minus the measured
weight when stuck.
Output Applied Weights
Applied Measured Weight
The applied measured weight is the measured weight used in the
analysis. The applied measured weight range used in the analysis is
determined by the Minimum, the Maximum, and the Increment.
Maximum Rotary Torque
This value is the calculated maximum torque required to increase
the von Mises stress to the failure limit using the corresponding
Applied Measured Weight and assuming all other stresses are
constant. If the Applied Measured Weight is between the calculated
values of minimum overpull and maximum slackoff, it is unknown
which direction the drag forces are acting. The directions of the
drag forces are necessary to calculate the forces along the string.
The maximum torque to fail the drillstring cannot be calculated
without calculating the forces along the string first.
Overpull/Slackoff
This value is the Applied Measured Weight minus the Measured
Weight When Stuck.
Yield Point - Section
This is the workstring component where the induced yield occurred
as a result of the calculated Maximum Rotary Torque.
Yield Point Measured Depth
This is the measured depth of the workstring component that
yielded as a result of the calculated Maximum Rotary Torque.
Force in Drill String Pressure Area
This is the calculated axial force in the drill string using the
pressure area method.
Force in Drill String Buoyancy
This is the calculated axial force in the drill string using the
buoyancy method.
Stuck Point - Force
This is the force required to hold the string in place at the stuck
point.
Stuck Point - Buckling
This indicates the type of buckling occurring. The buckling modes
are: ~ - No buckling, S Sinusoidal, H Helical, L Lockup.
Torque
This is the calculated torque at the stuck point. This torque is equal
to the Maximum Rotary Torque minus the accumulated string
torque from the surface to the stuck point.
Determining if the Required Force at Backoff
Connection Can be Achieved
Describing the Backoff Analysis Mode
The optimum conditions for performing a back off is to ensure the joint
in question are in a neutral position, zero axial force, or slightly in
tension. It is also beneficial to place a small amount of left hand torque
at the connection to be backed off.
The Backoff Analysis mode determines the amount of pick up or slack
off force and torque required at the surface to achieve the specified axial
force and torque at the connection to be backed off.
Selecting the Backoff Analysis Mode
Select the Backoff Analysis
mode from the drop-down list.
Defining Analysis Parameters and Viewing Results of Backoff
Analysis
determine if the surface actions required to backoff at a specified depth.
The results are displayed on this dialog also.
Analyzing the Output
Condition Prior to Backoff
This section analyzes the forces at the backoff point and the surface
condition just prior to becoming stuck (Before Stuck) and just
before the backoff operation (Current). The assumption is that the
driller will have worked the pipe after becoming stuck and both
states need to be analyzed.
The section calculates the Before Stuck measured weight, rotary
table torque, force and torque at the backoff point based on the
Operating Mode When Stuck. Then the Current Measured Weight
is calculated if it was not input as the Measured Weight When
Stuck. The rotary table torque and the force and torque at the
backoff point just prior to starting the backoff operation are also
calculated.
Measured Weight Before Stuck
This is the measured weight before becoming stuck and is based on
the Operating Mode Before Stuck.
Measured Weight After Stuck
This is the measured weight after becoming stuck and is calculated
based on the Operating Mode Before Stuck.
Rotary Table Torque Before Stuck
This is the rotary table torque before becoming stuck and is based
on the Operating Mode Before Stuck. For tripping cases, the rotary
table torque will be zero.
Rotary Table Torque After Stuck
This is the rotary table torque after becoming stuck and is
calculated based on the Operating Mode Before Stuck. For tripping
cases, the rotary table torque will be zero.
Force At Backoff MD (PA) Before Stuck
This force is equal to the calculated Measured Weight Before Stuck
minus the hoisting equipment weight and the tripping out axial
force at the backoff point. This force is calculated using the
pressure area method. Refer to Axial Force Calculations for more
information.
Force At Backoff MD (PA) After Stuck
This force is equal to the calculated Measured Weight Current
pressure area method. Refer to Axial Force Calculations for more
information.
Force At Backoff MD (BUOY) Before Stuck
This force is equal to the calculated Measured Weight Before Stuck
buoyancy method. Refer to Axial Force Calculations for more
information.
Force At Backoff MD (BUOY) After Stuck
This force is equal to the calculated Measured Weight Current
buoyancy method. Refer to Axial Force Calculations for more
information.
Torque At Backoff MD Before Stuck
The torque is calculated based on the side force of the component
acting on the wellbore, the coefficient of friction entered for the
corresponding hole section, and the length of the string section.
Torque At Backoff MD After Stuck
The torque is calculated based on the side force of the component
acting on the wellbore, the coefficient of friction entered for the
corresponding hole section, and the length of the string section.
Initial Surface Action for Set Up
This section displays the surface action required to leave the pipe
above the backoff point in tension after the backoff force has been
reached. When the pipe became stuck, if the force at the backoff
point is less than the desired backoff force, the string will have to be
picked up to reached the desired backoff force. In this case, no
other surface is necessary and the Initial Surface Action for Setup
section will not be displayed. However, when the pipe became
stuck, if the force at the backoff point is greater than the desired
backoff force, the string will have to be slacked off to reach the
desired backoff force, thus leaving at least part of the string above
the backoff point in compression. In this case, in order to leave the
string above the backoff point in tension, the driller will have to
slack off enough to overcome the drag forces above the stuck point,
then pick up until the desired backoff force is reached.
Measured Weight
This is the measured weight required to place the pipe above the
backoff point in tension prior to performing the backoff. This action
is necessary if the force at the backoff point when the pipe became
stuck is greater than the desired backoff force. If this is the case, the
string must be slacked off to reach the desired backoff force. It is
necessary to slack off enough to overcome the drag forces above
the stuck point, and then pick up until the desired backoff force is
reached. This information will not be reported if the force at the
backoff point when the pipe became stuck is less than the desired
backoff force. In this case, the only action required will be to pick
up until the desired backoff force is achieved.
Minimum Initial Overpull (+ve) / Slackoff (-ve)
This is the Initial Surface Action for Set Up minus the Measured
Weight When Stuck. If this is a positive number, it is overpull. If it
is a negative number, it is slackoff.
Final Surface Action for Backoff
This section lists the surface action that will need to be taken in
order to achieve the desired backoff force and torque.
Measured Weight
This is the trip out force to the backoff measured weight plus the
backoff force and the hoisting equipment weight.
Rotary Table Torque
This is the calculated rotary table torque necessary to achieve the
required backoff torque.
Overpull (+ve) / Slackoff (-ve) from Set Up Measured Weight
This is the Final Surface Action for Set Up minus the Initial Surface
Action for Set Up. If this is a positive number, it is overpull. If it is
a negative number, it is slackoff.
require, please refer to the section titled References on page 567 for
additional sources of information.
Stuck Point Algorithm
The stuck point measured depth is defined as the measured depth where
the total string change in length (during the stretch test) is equal to the
observed change in length at the surface. The change in length is
induced during the stretch test.
The calculations consider the three-dimensional wellbore and the forces
acting on the string in the wellbore, including drag, buckling and
ballooning.
The calculations begin at the surface by applying an axial force equal to
the measured weight minus the hoisting equipment weight. The analysis
proceeds down the string by calculating the change in length due to
Hookes Law, buckling and ballooning. When the difference in string
length change matches the input value of stretch (on the Stuck Pipe -
Stuck Point Analysis Dialog, the measured depth of the stuck point is
determined as the depth having the same stretch as input stretch.
Stuck Pipe Yield Analysis Algorithm
The following is a general outline of the calculations performed during
a Stuck Pipe Yield Analysis.
1. If the measured depth of the stuck point is not specified, it is
determined by using the Stuck Point Algorithm.
2. The next step in the analysis is to determine the forces acting at the
stuck point and to determine the rotary table torque. To accomplish
this, the analysis begins by assuming that the forces at the bottom of
the string are known. A Torque Drag Normal Analysis is performed
using the analysis outlined in Normal Analysis General Analysis
Steps on page page 209. During this analysis, the setup data
specified on the Stuck Pipe Setup Data dialog is used, rather than
those specified on the Mode Data dialog (Normal Analysis).
3. The analysis assumes the forces at the stuck point are known (as
calculated in the previous step) and calculates an overpull measured
weight. This is the measured weight when all of the drag forces
between the stuck point and the surface are directed downward and
the string is being pulled out of the hole and generating overpull.
This information is reported in the Minimum Overpull To Load
Stuck Point section on the Stuck Pipe - Yield Analysis dialog.
4. Again the analysis assumes the forces at the stuck point are known
(as calculated in the previous step and calculates an slackoff
measured weight. This is the measured weight when all of the drag
forces between the stuck point and the surface are directed upward,
and therefore the string is being lowered into the wellbore and
generating slackoff. This information is reported in the Minimum
Slackoff To Load Stuck Point section on the Stuck Pipe - Yield
Analysis dialog.
5. This step is omitted unless the measured weight at the stuck point
(calculated in step two) does not fall between the measured weights
calculated in steps three and four, then a Torque Drag Top Down
Analysis is performed assuming the forces at the surface are
known. Refer to Top-Down Analysis General Analysis Steps on
page 214 for more information about the Top Down Analysis.
6. Using the measure weight range and increment specified in the
Applied Load Measured Weights section of the Stuck Pipe - Yield
Analysis Dialog, various measured weights are analyzed. For each
measured weight, points along the string from the stuck point to the
surface are analyzed. The analysis considers the forces acting at
each point along the string, the wellbore geometry, drillstring
configuration, and wellbore curvature. At each point analyzed, the
radial, shear, hoop, bending, buckling and axial stresses are
determined. Using the appropriate material yield stress for the
component located at the point in the string being analyzed, the
failure stress is calculated. The torsional stress required to increase
the von Mises stress to the failure limit is calculated. This
procedure is repeated at various points up the string until failure
occurs. Results are displayed in the Output Applied Weights
section of the Stuck Pipe - Yield Analysis Dialog.
Stuck Pipe Jar Analysis Calculations
The Stuck Pipe Jar Analysis mode determines the change in measured
weight (from the current weight) to set, trip and reset a jar. This module
uses the Torque Drag Normal Analysis General Analysis Steps on
page 209 to determine the axial forces acting on the string from the jar
up to the surface. The analysis considers the wellbore three-dimensional
geometry, annular cross sectional area, and drillstring configuration
when determining the axial force.
After the measured weight required to set or trip a jar is determined, the
Jar Analysis mode can help determine if the force can actually be
applied to the jar. The analysis calculates the buckling tendency and
determines if buckling will occur. Based on this analysis, the correct
positioning and selection of a jar can be made.
Up Jar Operation
Mechanical Jar:
Effective Up Jar Set Force = Up Jar Set Force
Hydraulic Jar:
Effective Up Jar Set Force = Jar Seal Friction Force
Hydro-Mechanical Jar:
Effective Up Jar Set Force = Jar Seal Friction Force
Set:
Trip:
Reset:
Down Jar Operation
Mechanical Jar:
Effective Up Jar Set Force = Down Jar Set Force
Hydraulic Jar:
Effective Down Jar Set Force = Jar Seal Friction Force
Hydro-Mechanical Jar:
Effective Down Jar Set Force = Down Jar Set Force
Set:
Trip:
Reset:
Where:
H P SU TI S
W F F F F + =
H P TU TO T
W F F F F + + =
S R
F F =
H P SD TO S
W F F F F + + =
H P TD TI T
W F F F F + =
S R
F F =
F
TI
= Trip In Axial Force
F
TO
= Trip Out Axial Force
D
M
= Measured Depth
F
W
= Weight Force Gradient
F
D
= Drag Force Gradient
F
S
= Set Measured Weight
F
SU
= Effective Up Jar Set Force
F
P
= Pump Open Force
W
H
= Hoisting Equipment Weight
F
T
= Trip Measured Weight
F
TO
= Up Jar Trip Force
F
R
= Reset Measured Weight
F
SD
= Down Jar Set Force
F
TD
= Down Jar Trip Force
Stuck Pipe Backoff Analysis Calculations
The Stuck Point Backoff Analysis mode uses the calculations outlined
in the Torque Drag Normal Analysis General Analysis Steps. Refer to
Normal Analysis on page 209 for more information on the Torque
Drag Normal Analysis.
References
G.A. Haduch, R.L. Procter, and D.A. Samuels, "Solution of Common
Stuck Pipe Problems Through the Adaptation of Torque/Drag
Calculations", SPE 27490.
Marcus R. Skeem, Morton B. Friedman, and Bruce H. Walker,
"Drillstring Dynamics During Jar Operation", SPE 7521.
W.E. Askew, "Computerized Drilling Jar Placement", SPE 14746
M.S. Kaisi and J.K. Wang, "Transient Dynamic Analysis of the
Drillstring Under Jarring Operation Using Finite Element Method", SPE
13446.
T.V. Aarrestad, Statoil, Stavanger, "Drag Calculations Improve
Efficiency of Hydraulic Jars", OIL AND GAS JOURNAL, Mar 29,
1993.
Chapter
Notebook
Overview
Notebook provides a wide range of simple operational calculations. The
calculations in Notebook are divided into three categories, including:
Miscellaneous, Fluids, Analysis, and Hydraulics
of using the Notebook module. To reinforce what you learn in the class
lecture, you will have the opportunity to complete several exercises
designed to prepare you for using the program outside of class. The
information presented in this chapter can be used as a study guide during
the course, and can also be used as a reference for future torque and drag
analysis.
Starting Notebook
You must have a Case open to use the Notebook module even though
case data will not be used in any analysis within the Notebook module.
There are two ways to launch the Notebook module.
z Select Notebook from the Modules Menu
z Click the Notebook button on the Modules Toolbar.
14
Chapter 14: Notebook
Notebook Analysis Modes
Notebook offers four analysis modes. The analysis mode are essentially
a grouping of similar operational calculations. The analysis modes or
groups are:
z Miscellaneous - This group of calculations include: determining the
linear weight (in air and buoyed) of a component or a section of
pipe, calculating the block line cut off length and analyzing leak off
test data.
z Fluids - This group of calculations can be used to achieve the
desired fluid weight by mixing fluids, diluting, or weight up. You
can also determine the compressibility of a water or oil based mud.
Choose Notebook from Module menu, or by clicking the Notebook
button.
Select desired analysis mode from submenu
or from Mode drop down list.
z Hydraulics - This group of calculations can be used to determine
the pump output, annular and pipe volumes, nozzle TFA or sizes,
and buoyancy factors.
z Analysis - This group of calculations can be used to determine
workstring length, elongation, and weight. It is also used to
determine string volumes and fluid heights, as well as spotting pills,
block line work, and rig capacity.
Miscellaneous Mode
To access the Miscellaneous mode, select Miscellaneous from the Mode
drop down list.
The Miscellaneous mode calculates:
z Linear Weight
z Blockline Cut Off Length
z Leak Off Test
Linear Weight
Use the Parameter > Linear Weight dialog to quickly calculate the
weight-in-air and buoyed-weight of a component based on a specified
OD, ID, and mud weight.
To calculate the linear weight, specify the components ID and OD, its
length, the density of the mud, and whether it is a steel or aluminum
component.
Specify component
material.
Click in output
section to
calculate and view
results
Blockline Cut Off Length
Use the Parameter > Blockline Cut Off dialog to quickly calculate the
recommended cut-off length for rotary drilling lines. These calculation
values are based on API RP 9B.
Leak Off Test
Use the Parameter > Leak Off Test dialog to quickly calculate the
formation breakdown pressure and equivalent mud gradient from a leak
off test (LOT).
Click a radio button to
select Drum Type.
Select a Mast Height
from the list.
View results
Select a Drum Diameter
from the list of drum
diameters suitable for
the respective mast
height.
The air gap and sea depth can be set
to zero for a land rig.
Fluids Mode
To access the Fluids analysis mode, select Fluids from the Mode drop
down list.
The Fluids Mode calculates:
z Mix Fluids
z Dilute / Weight Up
z Fluid Compressibility
Mix Fluids
Use the Parameter > Mix Fluids dialog to quickly calculate the density
and volume of a fluid when two fluids with different densities and
volumes are mixed.
Dilute /Weight Up
Use the Parameter > Dilute/Weight Up dialog to calculate the
resulting volume when the density of a fluid is increased or decreased to
a different density. You can opt to keep the volume constant. In this
case, the required dump volume is determined.
To calculate a volume, specify the volume and density of the initial
fluid, the density of the final fluid mixture, and the density of the heavier
fluid you want added. If you mark the Maintain total volume check box,
Specify initial volume and
density of one fluid.
Specify the density and
volume of the second fluid.
Click in output to view
results.
the total volume of the final mixture will not be allowed to exceed the
volume specified in the Initial Volume field. You must specify volumes
in all fields in order for a resulting volume to be calculated.
Fluid Compressibility
Use the Parameter > Fluid Compressibility dialog to quickly calculate
the volume of mud that must be pumped to overcome the
compressibility of the fluid.
Specify the density of the fluid
you are using to dilute or weight
up the original fluid with.
Required
operation
achieve
required density
will be
indicated.
Enter the
volume and
density of your
original fluid.
Check box to keep volume
constant. If this box is
checked, the Initial Dump
Volume will be calculated.
Click in output section to
view results.
Hydraulics Mode
To access the Hydraulics Mode, select Hydraulics from the Mode drop
down list. The Hydraulics mode calculates:
z Pump Output
z Annular capacity, volume and velocity
z Pipe capacity, volume and velocity
z Nozzle TFA or sizes based on TFA
z Buoyancy factors
Pump Output
Use the Parameter > Pump Output dialog to quickly calculate the flow
rate and volume-per-stroke for a user-defined pump configuration.
Annular
Use the Parameter > Annular dialog to calculate the capacity, volume,
and velocity for two annular sections.
Rod diameter is not required for
a triplex pump.
Pipe
Use the Parameter > Pipe dialog to calculate the linear capacity,
volume, linear displacement, total displacement and velocity for two
pipe sections.
Total annular
volume
Enter data for first
annular section.
Enter data for
second annular
section.
Calculated
data for
sections.
Enter data for one
pipe section.
Enter data for
second pipe
section.
Total pipe capacity
Calculated results
for each section.
Total fluid
displacement
Nozzles
Use the Parameter > Nozzles dialog to calculate the nozzle sizes
required to produce a desired total flow area (TFA) or to calculate the
TFA based on a specified number and sizes of nozzles.
Buoyancy
Use the Parameter > Buoyancy dialog to quickly calculate the
buoyancy factor based on the specified mud density.
Click Nozzles to
calculate nozzle
sizes base on
specified TFA.
Click Total Flow
Area to calculate
TFA based on
specified nozzle
sizes
Input size and number of
nozzles to calculate
TFA.
Specify mud weight
Click in output section to
calculate the buoyancy
factor
Analysis Mode
To access the Analysis Mode, select Analysis from the Mode drop down
list. The Analysis mode calculates:
z Workstring length, elongation, and weight
z String volumes and fluid heights
z Spotting pills
z Block line work
z Rig capacity
WorkString
Maximum String Length
Use this analysis to determine the maximum length of drill pipe that can
be used before it fails under its own weight. The wellbore is assumed to
be vertical.
To determine the Maximum String Length
z Define the active Drillstring/BHA in the Case > String Editor
spreadsheet.
z Define the fluid in the Case > Fluid Editor.
z Specify either the Margin of Overpull (MOP) or the Safety Factor
to be applied.
String Weight
The String Weight Analysis allows the calculation of the Weight in Air
and the Buoyed Weight of the current active Drillstring (as defined in
the Case > String Editor spreadsheet.). The Wellbore is assumed to be
a vertical.
To Determine the String Weight:
z Define an active workstring using the String Editor Spreadsheet.
z Specify the bit depth of the active work string. (The bit depth can be
specified in the String Weight Analysis window of Notebook.)
z Enter the mud weight. (The mud weight can be specified in the
String Weight Analysis window of Notebook.)
Elongation
Use this analysis to calculate the elongation of the BHA described in the
Case > String Editor spreadsheet. The BHA is assumed to be in a
vertical wellbore.
Note: Component grade...
The grade of the component defined in the active Drill String is considered by the
calculations. If the active component defined in the Case > String Editor
Spreadsheet is a grade other than E, X, G, or S grade, then the system will
automatically assume the grade to be G grade for the purpose of the calculations.
Volumes and Heights
The volumes and heights dialog allows the calculation of:
z End position of a certain volume, given the start position, in either
the annulus or the string
z Start position of a certain volume, given the end position, in either
the annulus or the string
z Volume of fluid required fill between two depths in either the
annulus or the string
Each of these three options is calculated by selecting the appropriate
radio button. The option that is selected by the radio button is the one
that will be calculated. The remaining two fields that are not selected by
the radio buttons require data to be input.
The String and Annulus radio buttons determine whether the results
apply to the string or the annulus sections respectively.
The valid values for Start and End Position are limited by:
z Maximum string depth if the String option has been selected
z Maximum wellbore depth if the Annulus option has been selected
Lag Times
The Lag Time calculator determines the number of strokes (based on a
user defined pump configuration) to circulate a sample from a specified
depth.
The calculations are performed using the workstring defined in the Case
> String Editor Spreadsheet and the wellbore defined in the Case >
Hole Section Editor.
To specify the depth range, enter the start depth, end depth and interval
that the calculations will be performed over.
Define the pump configuration in the Lag Strokes input window by
clicking the Pump Equipment button. This will display the Pump Output
window where the type and configuration of the pump must be defined.
To calculate the lag strokes, click the Close button after the pump data
and the depth range and interval have been defined. The results will be
displayed in the output window. For each depth the number of strokes to
return the sample/fluid from that depth to the surface is reported.
Note: Volumes...
It is possible that a volume is specified that can not fit in the available space (Start
Position > 0, End Position < String Depth or Well bore depth). If this occurs, the
volume will be automatically adapted to the maximum value that can be
contained.
Spot a Pill
This analysis calculates the volume of fluid that needs to be pumped to
Spot a Pill so that the bottom of the pill is at the depth specified.
The calculations are performed based on the workstring defined in the
String Editor Spreadsheet and Wellbore defined in the Hole Section
Editor.
Simply enter the depth at which the bottom of the pill is to be placed.
The volume of fluid to be pumped is reported in the output section.
Note: Assumes bit is on bottom...
In each case it is assumed that the bit is on bottom for each calculation depth. For
example if you specify a range 5000 ft- 6000 ft in 100 ft increments, the results
will report the number of strokes to circulate the sample from 5000ft to surface
whilst the bit is on bottom at 5000 ft. The next calculation assumes the bit is now
on bottom at 5100 ft and the calculations now compute the number of strokes to
circulate from 5100 ft to surface. This is repeated for each depth increment.
Block Line Work
These calculations use the active data as defined in the Workstring and
Wellbore Editor. The well is assumed to be vertical
To calculate the Block Line Work for drilling, tripping or coring, first
specify the Hoisting Equipment details then enter the input data on the
Drilling Block Line Work Window.
Rig Capacity
Determines the loads applied to the rig based on the Active Workstring
and Active Wellbore. The calculations assumes a vertical wellbore.
Note: Dialog behavior...
This dialog behaves differently depending on whether the active drillstring
defined is a BHA or casing string.
Before any calculations are performed it is necessary to define the
Hoisting Equipment configuration.
Note: Dialog behavior...
This dialog behaves differently depending on whether the active drillstring
defined is a BHA or casing string.
Calculations
Block Line Cut Off Length
Dilute/Wt Up Fluid
Fluid Buoyancy
12
= Diameter Drum Laps Length

3 3 2 2 1 1
D V D V D V = +

Where:
1
V = Volume of one material to be mixed
1
D = Density of
1
V material
2
V = Volume of second material to be mixed
2
D = Density of
2
V material
3
V = Total volume
3
D = Density of total volume
Density Steel
Weight Mud
Buoyancy =1
Fluid Compressibility
Leak Off Test
Mix Fluids
t Cons
bbl Volume Hole psi essure Test
bbl Pump to Vol
tan
] [ ] [ Pr
] [
=
where:
Constant for oil-based mud = 2.2e5
Constant for water-based mud = 3.16e5
Formation Breakdown Pressure = Density essure Test Density Mud TVD Pr 052 . 0 +
Equivalent Mud Gradient =
TVD
essure Breakdown Formation Pr

Formation Breakdown Gradient =
Depth Sea AirGap TVD
Gradient Seawater Depth Sea essure Brekdown Formation

Pr

3 3 2 2 1 1
D V D V D V = +

Where:
1
V = Volume of one material to be mixed
1
D = Density of
1
V material
2
V = Volume of second material to be mixed
2
D = Density of
2
V material
3
V = Total volume
3
D = Density of total volume
Pump Output
Nozzle Area
For a duplex pump
=
N d d L e Q
y r
) 2 ( 568 . 1
2 2 6

Where:
L = stroke length
l
d = liner diameter
r
d = rod diameter
N = stroke rate
= volumetric efficiency

For a triplex pump:
=
N d L e Q
2 6
3555 . 2
l

2
1
)
32
(
4
|
.
|
\
|
=

=
i
n
i
i
d
n TFA
Where:
i
d = Size of the nozzle
i
n = Number of nozzles in each group
i = Number of groups

Manual Well Plan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Well Plan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Using WELLPLAN

= Wellbore curvature as dogleg severity (deg/100ft) for

Chapter 6: Torque Drag Analysis

D = Pipe inside diameter (ft)

= Change in pressure per length along the annulus section (psi/ft).

Landmark WELLPLAN 309

Landmark WELLPLAN 321

Chapter 7: Hydraulics Analysis

= Fann dial reading, (deg)

Landmark WELLPLAN 329

= Dri l l i ng mud densi ty

Landmark WELLPLAN 383

= Pressure measured depth of influx bottom

= Kill mud density

= Drill mud density

= Final mud density

= Trip margin density

= Leak off equivalent mud density

= Leak off mud density

= This value is used in the Estimated Influx Calculation

Z = Gas compressibility factor

Landmark WELLPLAN 445

Chapter 9: Surge Analysis

= Diameter Drum Laps Length

You might also like